Mouton Grammar Library
A Grammar of Qiang
≥
Mouton Grammar Library 31
Editors Georg Bossong Bernard Comrie Matthew Dryer
Mouton de Gruyter Berlin · New York
A Grammar of Qiang with annotated texts and glossary
by Randy J. LaPolla with Chenglong Huang
Mouton de Gruyter Berlin · New York
Mouton de Gruyter (formerly Mouton, The Hague) is a Division of Walter de Gruyter GmbH & Co. KG, Berlin.
앝 Printed on acid-free paper which falls within the guidelines of the 앪 ANSI to ensure permanence and durability.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data LaPolla, Randy J, A grammar of Qiang / by Randy J. LaPolla. p. cm. ⫺ (Mouton grammar library ; 31) ISBN 3-11-017829-X (alk. paper) 1. Khyang language ⫺ Grammar. I. Title. II. Series. PL4001.K6L36 2003 4951.4⫺dc22 2003023822
ISBN 3 11 017829 X Bibliographic information published by Die Deutsche Bibliothek Die Deutsche Bibliothek lists this publication in the Deutsche Nationalbibliografie; detailed bibliographic data is available in the Internet at ⬍http://dnb.ddb.de⬎. ” Copyright 2003 by Walter de Gruyter GmbH & Co. KG, D-10785 Berlin. All rights reserved, including those of translation into foreign languages. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publisher. Printed in Germany.
Acknowledgments
This project was funded by the National Science Council of the Republic of China (Grants No. NSC 85-2418-H-001-002 P2 and NSC 85-2418-H-001-005), by the Chiang Ching-kuo Foundation (Grant No. RG005-D-’93), and by the “Project for Research on Endangered Languages of the Pacific Rim” of the Japanese Ministry of Education, Science, Sports, Culture and Technology. Revision of the manuscript was supported by a grant from the Research Committee, City University of Hong Kong (Grant No. 9030548). I would like to thank these organizations for their generous support. I would also like to thank Matthew Chen, Dean of the Facutly of Humanities and Social Sciences at City University, and C. C. Cheng, Head of the Department of Chinese Translation, and Linguistics, for approving a generous publication grant for this book. Of course this book would not have been possible without the help and hospitality of Huang Chenglong and his family, as well as other residents of Ronghong Village. For this I am extremely grateful. The initial project that led to this grammar being written was initiated and organized by Ho Dah-an, now of the Institute of Linguistics, Academia Sinica. I would like to express my deep appreciation to him for taking that initiative. I would also like to thank Alexandra Y. Aikhenvald, Bernard Comrie, R. M. W. Dixon, Jonathan Evans, Peter Lester, Ying-chin Lin, James A. Matisoff, and Yoshio Nishi for taking the time to give me extensive and very helpful comments on an earlier draft of this book. Bernard Comrie in particular went carefully through three different drafts and each time sat down with me to go page by page through the draft to explain his comments. For this I am extremely grateful. All of these people helped improve the final output considerably, but of course bear no responsibility for the remaining imperfections.
Table of Contents Acknowledgements List of tables, figures, and plates Abbreviations 1.
Introduction 1.1. The land 1.2. The language 1.3. The people and their culture 1.3.1. The people 1.3.2. Architecture 1.3.3. Food 1.3.4. Clothing 1.3.4.1. Men’s clothing 1.3.4.2. Women’s clothing 1.3.5. Family and kinship relations 1.3.6. Religion 1.3.7. Mobility 1.3.8. Livelihood 1.4. Previous work on Qiang 1.5. The data and their presentation 1.6. Typological profile
2.
The phonological system 2.1. Consonants 2.2. Vowels 2.2.1. The basic inventory 2.2.2. Diphthongs and triphthongs 2.2.3. R-coloring 2.3. The syllable canon 2.4. Phonological processes 2.4.1. Initial weakening 2.4.2. Stress and its effects 2.4.3. Vowel harmony 2.4.4. Epenthetic vowels
v xii xiii 1 1 2 5 5 6 7 9 9 10 11 14 15 16 16 17 19 21 21 25 25 26 28 30 31 31 33 35 36
viii
Contents
2.4.5. 2.4.6. 3.
Assimilation Free variation
The noun phrase 3.1. Structure 3.1.1. The noun 3.1.1.1. Gender marking 3.1.1.2. Diminutive marking 3.1.1.3. The kinship prefix 3.1.2. Pronouns 3.1.3. Locational nouns 3.1.4. Definite, indefinite marking 3.1.5. Numerals and quantifiers 3.1.6. Classifiers and measure words 3.1.7. Number marking 3.2. Nominal relational morphology 3.2.1. Topic 3.2.2. Single direct argument of an intransitive verb 3.2.3. Actor of a transitive verb 3.2.4. Topic of a copula clause 3.2.5. Undergoer of a transitive verb 3.2.6. Goal or recipient of a ditransitive verb 3.2.7. Standard of a comparative construction 3.2.8. Standard of an equative comparative construction 3.2.9. Predicate noun phrases 3.2.10. Benefactive 3.2.11. Source 3.2.12. Instrument 3.2.13. Comitative, conjunction 3.2.14. Possessor in a possessive clause 3.2.15. Genitive 3.2.16. Whole-part relations 3.2.17. Price, value 3.2.18. Extent, distance 3.2.19. Inclusion, exclusion, addition 3.2.20. Locative, directional phrases 3.2.21. Temporal phrases 3.2.22. Form-function summary of relational marking
36 37 39 39 42 48 49 49 50 58 59 62 65 69 70 71 74 76 81 81 85 88 89 90 91 92 94 95 97 99 101 102 103 103 106 110 114
Contents
4.
The verb complex 4.1. Structure 4.2. Verb types 4.2.1. Intransitive, transitive, reciprocal 4.2.2. Causatives 4.2.3. Intransitive state predicate verbs (adjectives) 4.2.4. Existential/locative verbs 4.2.5. ‘Come’ and ‘go’ 4.2.6. Auxiliary verbs 4.2.7. The copula 4.3. Verbal morphology 4.3.2. Person marking 4.3.3. Direction marking 4.3.4. Aspect 4.3.4.1. Prospective aspect 4.3.4.2. Perfective and imperfective aspect 4.3.4.3. Change of state aspect 4.3.4.4. Experiential aspect 4.3.4.5. Repetition 4.3.4.6. Continuative aspect 4.3.4.8. Habitual aspect 4.3.4.9. Resulting state 4.3.4.10. Simultaneous actions 4.3.5. Illocutionary force 4.3.5.1. Declarative 4.3.5.2. Imperative and prohibitive 4.3.5.3. Interrogatives 4.3.6. Mood 4.3.6.1. Optative 4.3.6.2. Intentional 4.3.6.3. Debitive (Obligation) 4.3.6.4. Potential 4.3.7. Evidentials, degree of certainty/authority 4.3.7.1. Direct evidential 4.3.7.2. Inferential/mirative marking 4.3.7.3. Hearsay marking 4.3.7.4. Evidential strategies 4.3.7.5. Correlations with other grammatical categories
ix
119 119 121 121 124 128 133 136 136 138 139 141 154 161 161 164 165 167 168 169 171 171 172 172 172 173 179 186 189 189 190 195 197 198 200 204 206 207
Contents
x
4.4. 4.4.1. 4.4.2. 4.4.3. 5.
Adverbials Degree marking adverbs Negation Adverbial phrases
211 211 214 215
The clause and complex structures 5.1. Structure 5.2. Nominalization and relativization 5.3. Complementation 5.4. Coordination and disjunction 5.5. Other complex structures 5.6. The structure of narratives
221 221 223 229 237 239 246
Texts The Creation of the World (Qiang, with gloss) The Creation of the World (English free translation) The Legend of the Origin of All Things (Qiang, with gloss) The Legend of the Origin of All Things (English free translation) An Orphan (Qiang, with gloss) An Orphan (English free translation) Uncle Snake (Qiang, with gloss) Uncle Snake (English free translation) The Story of a Lazy Man (Qiang, with gloss) The Story of a Lazy Man (English free translation) The Old Man of the Chen Family (Qiang, with gloss) The Old Man of the Chen Family (English free translation)
249 251 252 253 255 256 266 269 273 275 296 300 325
English-Qiang glossary arranged by semantic field Natural phenomena Animals (wild) Birds Animals (domestic) Insects Fish, frogs, and turtles Plants Farming Food
329 331 334 335 336 337 338 339 341 341
Contents
Food preparation Eating and storage utensils Cloth and clothing Buildings and structures Furniture Tools Trade and business Town and road Travel Language and communication Religion Festivals Games and play Bodyparts Actions involving bodyparts Grooming Life, death, and illness Warfare Kinship Types of people Verbs of interaction between people Stative verbs (adjectives) Time phrases Location phrases Movement Quantifiers Pronouns Adverbs and particles
xi
343 344 345 347 349 349 351 352 353 354 355 355 356 357 360 363 364 366 366 368 370 374 379 380 382 383 384 385
Index to the English glosses in the glossary
389
Notes
421
References
433
Index to the grammar
443
List of tables, figures, and plates
Plate 1: Plate 2: Plate 3: Table 1: Table 2: Table 3: Figure 1: Figure 2: Table 4: Table 5: Table 6: Table 7: Figure 3: Table 8:
Map of Sichuan Province Photo of Ronghong Village Watchtowers of Heihu Village The Qiang orthography The Qiang consonants The Qiang vowel inventory The Qiang syllable canon The structure of the Qiang noun phrase The Qiang personal pronouns The Qiang demonstrative pronouns The Qiang reflexive pronouns Locational nouns for ‘above’ and ‘below’ The structure of the Qiang verb complex The Qiang person marking suffixes for intransitive verbs Table 9: The Qiang non-actor person marking suffixes Table 10: The Qiang person marking suffixes for transitive verbs Figure 4: The structure of the Qiang clause
xv xvi xvii 4 22 25 30 39 50 52 56 58 120 141 143 144 221
Abbreviations
1 2 3 ADJ ADV AGT ASP AUX
BEN CAUS Ch. CL COM COMP CON COP CSM DAT DEF DEM DIR dl DTV EMPH EXC EXP GEN
first person second person third person adjective (stative verb) adverbial marker agentive marker aspect marker auxiliary particle for monosyllabic Chinese loan words benefactive marker causative suffix Chinese classifier comitative marker comparative marker continuative aspect marker copula change of state marker dative marker definite marker demonstrative pronoun directional prefix dual directive particle emphatic sentencefinal particle exclusion particle experiential particle genitive marker
HABIT HORT HS imp. IMP INDEF INDTV INF INT INST lit. LOC
LNK n. NAR
NEG NEG.IMP NOM NUM
habitual action marker hortative marker hearsay marker imperative verb form imperative suffix indefinite marker indirect directive marker inferential/mirative evidential marker interjection, intensifier 1 instrumental marker literally locative marker (includes the use of the locative markers to mark temporal or other relations) clause linker noun narrative (hearsay) form made up of the inferential and hearsay particles (this abbreviation is used in the stories to save space) negative prefix negative imperative (prohibitive) prefix nominalizer numeral
xiv
Abbreviations
PART perf. PERF pl POST PRS PTB Q RCA RECIP REFL REP REQU RESULT
sg Tib. TOP U
singular V v. vi. VIS evidential vt.
clause/sentence final particle perfective form of a verb perfective marker plural postposition prospective aspect suffix Proto-TibetoBurman question marker relevant condition achieved marker reciprocal form reflexive form repetition (‘again’) marker request marker this form marks a transition in the Texts, and was often translated by the Chinese word ji|egu«o ‘result’ singular Tibetan topic marker bound non-actor marker (e.g. ‘2sgU’ means ‘second person non-actor marker’) verb ambitransitive verb intransitive verb direct (usually visual) marker transitive verb
WH †(...)
&
/ vs. ±
interrogative pronoun a gloss that appears in parentheses with a dagger in front of the parentheses glosses a Chinese code-mixed stretch of text (possibly very short). Only clear examples of code mixing rather than loan words are marked this way. Items that have a dagger but no parentheses are items that may be either code mixing or loans. allofam marker (marks two reconstructed forms as being related variants in the protolanguage) In the glossary, a slash (stroke) between forms means the two forms are assumed to be different words, whereas a tilde between forms means they are assumed to be different pronunciations for the same form.
Plates
Plate 1: Sichuan Province, showing Aba Tibetan and Qiang Autonomous Prefecture, the Min River and Yadu Township
xvi
Plates
Plate 2: Ronghong Village
Plates
Plate 3: Watchtowers of Heihu Village
xvii
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1. The land The speakers of the Qiang language live in Aba Tibetan and Qiang Autonomous Prefecture, on the eastern edge of the Tibetan plateau in the northwest part of Sichuan Province, China (roughly 103 to 104 degrees longitude east and 31 to 32 degrees north). The entire prefecture covers 4046.35 square kilometers. The Qiang people mainly live along the Min River and in tributaries in the counties of Mao, Wenchuan, Heishui, Songpan and Beichuan, all contiguous areas in the southeast of Aba Prefecture (see Plate 1). A small number of Qiang people live in Danba County of Ganzi Tibetan Autonomous Prefecture, to the west of Aba Prefecture, and in Shiqian and Jiangkou of the Tongren area in Guizhou province, to the east of Aba Prefecture. The entire area is very mountainous, with many mountains 4,000 meters (13,000 feet) high. The Qiang build their villages on the top or side of the mountains, with generally one village (often thirty-odd families or less) per mountain side. In many cases there are no roads to the village, and as the villages are often 2,500-3,500 meters up the mountain, the only way to get to the village is to climb a steep path. The weather is generally cold in the winter and cool in the summer. It is usually dry and windy and the temperature varies greatly between day and night. Weather conditions also vary greatly between the mountains and the valleys; in the springtime, there is still snow up in the mountains, but flowers are already blooming down in the valley. The weather in different valleys also varies. In those below 2,500 meters the weather is relatively warm, with very little rain. In those valleys above 2,500, the weather is cold all year round, with an average temperature of five degrees Celsius. Above 4000 meters it is very cold all year, often with snow ten months of the year. The typography and varied weather conditions contribute to the stunning beauty of the landscape.
2
Introduction
The geographic features, weather conditions and soil composition also contribute to the abundance and peculiarities of the natural flora and fauna of the area. The mountains are heavily wooded. Gingko, camphor, Chinese hemlock, and Chinese little leaf box trees grow wild in the valleys, as do 189 types of grasses and bushes, including some rare medical herbs such as Cordyceps sinensisia, Fritillaria thunbergii (unibract fritilary bulb; “chuan bei”, a popular sore throat remedy), and gastrodia elata. The Qiang will pick these for their own use and to sell. Forty-one types of wild animal, among them endangered species such as the giant panda, the small panda, the golden monkey, the wild donkey, and the musk deer, can be found in the area.
1.2. The language The Qiang language belongs to the Qiangic branch of the TibetoBurman family of the Sino-Tibetan stock. Some of the characteristics of the Qiangic branch include having a cognate set of direction marking prefixes; quite degenerate, though clearly cognate person marking paradigms; and radical loss of syllable final consonants, but preservation of complex initials and clusters.2 Sun (1981a:177-78) divides the Qiang language into two major dialects, Northern Qiang and Southern Qiang (see Wen 1941 for an earlier classification into eight dialects). Qiang speakers living in Heishui County and the Chibusu district of Mao County, including those designated by the Chinese government as Tibetans, are said to be speakers of the Northern dialect. Sun further subdivides the Northern dialect into the Luhua, Mawo, Cimulin, Weigu, and Yadu subdialects. Qiang speakers living in Li County, Wenchuan County, parts of Mao County other than Chibusu, and Songpan County are said to be Southern dialect speakers. The Southern dialect is also subdivided by Sun into the Daqishan, Taoping, Longxi, Mianchi, and Heihu subdialects. Liu (1998b:17) adds Sanlong and Jiaochang to the list of Southern subdialects. Recent fieldwork as part of the Qiang Dialect Map Project (funded by City University of Hong Kong and the Research Grants Council of Hong Kong) has called into question some aspects of this classification. In particular, dialects in Songpan County and the Sanlong area of Mao County are now considered to be within
The language
3
the Northern dialect area. The dialect situation should become clearer with the completion of the Qiang Dialect Atlas Project. Until recently there was no writing system for the language. The Qiang carved marks on wood to remember events or communicate. In the late 1980’s a team of Qiang specialists from several different organizations developed a writing system for the Qiang language, based on the Qugu variety of the Yadu subdialect of the Northern dialect. In 1993 the government officially acknowledged the writing system. The writing system uses 26 Roman letters to represent the 42 consonants and eight vowels in that variety of Qiang. Twenty of the consonants are represented by single Roman letters while the remaining 22 consonants are represented by double Roman letters (the letter r is not used as a single consonant). Five of the vowels are represented by single letters while the other three are represented by double letters. (See Table 1, overleaf). The promulgation of the writing system has not been successful, and one of the main reasons is the complexity of the Qiang sound system and the concomitant complexity of the writing system. It is quite difficult for adult villagers, especially the illiterate peasants, to remember all of the letters and combinations representing different types of consonants and vowels. Another factor is the diversity of Qiang dialects. As the writing system is based on the Qugu variety of the Yadu subdialect of the Northern dialect, those who are not Northern dialect speakers resent learning another variety of the Qiang language in order to read and write (ideally they would eventually be able to write their own dialect, but would learn the script using the Qugu dialect). A third and very important factor is the fact that even if somebody masters the sound system and is able to read and write using the writing system, there are no reading materials available to make what they have learned useful. Education in the Qiang areas is all in Chinese, though in recent years there has been a movement to implement bilingual education. Many of the children now can go to school, but the children often have to travel great distances to get to school. They will often live at the school, either for one week at a time, if the school is relatively close, or for months at a time, if it is farther away. Local educators have noticed that even with the opportunity for free education offered by the central government, there has been a continuously high drop-out rate among children from
4
Introduction
remote villages. One reason, they believe, is that most of the children from the remote villages cannot cope with the school education because teaching in the schools is all in Chinese and they cannot speak Chinese. The call for a bilingual approach in education mainly refers to the use of spoken Qiang as a medium of instruction in the lower grades alongside Mandarin in order to facilitate the learning of Chinese. Another reason for the high drop-out rate is the fact that while schooling is technically free, the schools charge various fees and the cost of room and board, so it can be prohibitively expensive for the villagers. Table 1: The Qiang orthography Qiang
IPA
Qiang
IPA
Aa AE ae Bb BB bb Cc CH ch Dd DD dd DH dh Ee EA ea Ff Gg GG gg GV gv Hh HH hh HV hv Ii IU iu Jj JJ jj Kk KV kv
å á p b tsh t®h t d d ˙ e f k g q x © h i y t˚ d kh qh
Ll LH lh Mm Nn NG ng NY ny Oo Pp Qq RR rr Ss SH sh SS ss Tt Uu Vv VH vh VV vv Ww Xx XX xx Yy Zz ZH zh ZZ zz
l ¬ m n ≥ ≤ o ph t˚h  s ® z th u ≈ ¿ Ù w ˚ j ts t® dz
The people and their culture
5
In general, Chinese has been the main language of education and communication with non-Qiang people. The spoken form of Chinese used is the Western Sichuan subdialect of Southwest Mandarin, while the written form used is that of Standard Modern Chinese. The Qiang have been in contact with the Han Chinese for centuries (see Sun 1998). However, in the past, only the men who left the Qiang area to trade or work or had to deal with Han Chinese on a regular basis would learn Chinese. Children below the age of fifteen rarely spoke Chinese, but now with more universal access to Chinese schooling and to TV (which is all in Standard Modern Chinese), even small children in remote villages can speak some Chinese. Now very few Qiang people cannot speak Chinese, but there are many Qiang who cannot speak the Qiang language. In many villages by the main roads, and in some whole counties in the east of Aba Prefecture (where contact with the Han Chinese has historically been most intense), the entire population is monolingual in Chinese. The tendency toward becoming monolingual in Chinese is becoming more prevalent now than ever before due to strong economic and social pressure to assimilate, and to the popularization of free primary and secondary education in Chinese. The number of fluent Qiang speakers becomes smaller day by day. Qiang is therefore very much an endangered language. The culture of the Qiang people is also in jeopardy of disappearing. This loss of the Qiang language and culture was noted as early as the 1940’s (Graham 1958; see also Sun 1988), and accelerated greatly after 1949. It is hoped that the linguistic and cultural information presented in the present volume will serve as a record of some part of this vanishing language and culture.
1.3. The people and their culture 1.3.1. The people In most studies of the Qiang, especially those written in China, there is an assumption that the people classified by the present Chinese government as the Qiang living in northern Sichuan can be equated with the Qiang mentioned in Chinese texts dating back to the oracle bone inscriptions written 3,000 years ago. A more careful view would be that the ancient “Qiang” were the ancestors of all or almost all of the modern Tibeto-Burman speakers, and the modern “Qiang” (who call themselves
6
Introduction
/Âme/ in their own language, written RRmea in the Qiang orthography), are but one small branch of the ancient “Qiang”. They in fact did not think of themselves as "Qiang" (a Chinese exonym) until the early 20th century. It is clear that the culture of the stone watchtowers (see Plate 3), which can be identified with the modern Qiang people, has been in northern Sichuan since at least the beginning of the present era. Being in this area, the Qiang people are between the Han Chinese to the east and south and the Tibetans to the west and north. In the past fighting between these two larger groups often took place in the Qiang area, and the Qiang would come under the domination of one group or the other. At times there was also fighting between different Qiang villages. The construction of the watchtowers and the traditional design of their houses (with thick stone walls and small windows and doors; see Plate 2) give testimony to the constant threat of attack.3 The majority of Qiang speakers, roughly eighty thousand people, are members of the Qiang ethnicity, and the rest, approximately fifty thousand people, are a subgroup of the Tibetan ethnicity.4 These ethnic designations are what they call themselves in Chinese. In Qiang they all call themselves /Âme/ or a dialect variant of this word. Not all members of the Qiang ethnicity speak Qiang, and as just mentioned, not all of those who speak Qiang are considered members of the Qiang ethnicity.
1.3.2. Architecture The traditional Qiang house is a permanent one built of piled stones and has three stories. Generally one nuclear family will live in one house. The lowest floor houses the family’s animals, and straw is used as a ground covering. When the straw becomes somewhat rotted and full of manure and urine, it is used for fertilizer.5 A steep wooden ladder leads to the second floor from the back of the first floor. On the second floor is the fireplace and sleeping quarters. Beds are wooden platforms with mats made of straw as mattresses. The third floor has more rooms for sleeping and/or is used for storage. A ladder also leads from there to the roof, which is used for drying fungi, corn or other items, and also for some religious practices, as a white stone (flint) is placed on the roof and invested with a spirit. The fireplace, which is the central point of the main room on the second floor, originally had three stones set in a circle
The people and their culture
7
for resting pots on, but now most homes have large circular three or four-legged iron potholders. In some areas, particularly to the north, enclosed stoves are replacing the old open fires. On the side of the fireplace across from the ladder leading to the second floor there is an altar to the house gods. This is also the side of the fireplace where the elders and honored guests sit. Nowadays one often finds pictures of Mao Zedong and/or Deng Xiaoping in the altar, as the Qiang are thankful for the improved life they have since the founding of the People’s Republic and particularly since the reforms instituted by Deng in the late 1970’s and after.6 Traditionally the Qiang relied on spring water, and had to go out to the spring to get it. In recent years pipes have been run into many of the houses, so there is a more convenient supply of water, though it is not like the concept of “running water” in the West. There are no bathrooms inside the house, though in some villages (e.g. Weicheng) a small enclosed balcony that has a hole in the floor has been added to the house to function as a second story outhouse. Many villages now have electricity, at least a few hours every night, and so a TV (relying on a large but inexpensive satellite dish) and in some cases a VCD player can be found in the house. All TV and VCD programs are in Chinese, and so the spread of electricity has facilitated the spread of bilingualism. In the past each village had one or more watchtowers, six or seven story-high six- or eight-sided structures made of piled stones. The outside walls were smooth and the inside had ladders going up to the upper levels. These allowed early warning in the case of attack, and were a fallback position for fighting. In some villages underground passages were also dug between structures for use when they were attacked. In most villages the towers have been taken down and the stones used to build new houses.
1.3.3. Food The main staple foods are corn, potatoes, wheat, and highland barley, supplemented with buckwheat, naked oats, and rice. Wheat, barley and buckwheat are made into noodles. Noodles are handmade. Among the favorite delicacies of the Qiang are buckwheat noodles cooked with pickled vegetables. Because potatoes are abundant in the area, the
8
Introduction
Qiang have developed many ways of cooking potatoes. The easiest ways to cook them is by boiling or baking (that is, placing the potatoes into the ashes around the fire). The more complicated and more special ways of preparing them involve pounding boiled potatoes in a stone mortal and then shaping the mashed potatoes and frying them to become potato fritters or boiling them with pickled vegetables. The latter is eaten like noodle soup, the same way as noodles made of buckwheat flour are eaten. Since corn is also quite abundant in the area, the Qiang have also developed different ways of eating corn. Corn flour is cooked with vegetables to become a delicious corn porridge. Corn flour mixed with water without yeast and then left in the fire to bake is the Qiang style of corn bread. This bread is often eaten with honey. Honey is a delicacy in the Qiang area. It is not easy to come by as they have to raise the bees in order to collect honey. Another important item is salt. Because the Qiang live in the highlands, salt was traditionally difficult to come by, so when you are invited to eat in a Qiang family, the host will always try to offer you more salt or will see to it that the dishes get enough salt. The Qiang also grow walnuts, red and green chili peppers, bunge prickly ash peel (pericarpium zanthoxyli), several varieties of hyacinth bean, apples, pears, scallions, turnips, cabbage, and some rape. Crops are rotated to preserve the quality of the fields, some of which are on the mountain sides and some of which may be on the side of the stream found at the bottom of many of the gorges between the mountains. Qiang fields are of the dry type and generally do not have any sort of irrigation system. Aside from what they grow, they are also able to collect many varieties of wild vegetables, fruit, and fungi, as well as pine nuts. They now eat rice, but as they do not grow rice themselves, they exchange other crops for rice. Many types of pickled vegetables are made as a way of preserving the vegetables, and these are often cooked with buckwheat noodles or potato noodles in a type of soup. Vegetables are also salted or dried in order to preserve them. While grain is the main subsistence food, the Qiang eat meat when they can, especially cured pork. In the past they generally ate meat only on special occasions and when entertaining guests. Now their economic circumstances allow them to eat meat more frequently. They raise pigs, two kinds of sheep, cows, horses, and dogs, though they do not eat the horses or dogs. Generally there is only one time per year when the
The people and their culture
9
animals are slaughtered (in mid-winter), and then the meat is preserved and hung from the rafters in the house. The amount of meat hanging in one’s house is a sign of one’s wealth. As there are no large fish in the streams and rivers, the Qiang generally do not eat fish. In the past they would hunt wild oxen, wild boars, several types of mountain goat, bears, wolves (for the skin), marmots, badgers, sparrows, rabbits, and musk deer (and sell the musk). They used small cross-bows, bows and arrows, pit traps, wire traps, and more recently flint-lock rifles to hunt. Now there are not many animals left in the mountains, and many that are there are endangered species, and so can no longer be hunted. The low-alcohol liquor made out of highland barley (similar to Tibetan “chang”) or occasionally corn or other grains, called /˚i/ in Qiang, is one of the favorite beverages of the Qiang. It plays a very important role in the daily activities of the Qiang. It is an indispensable drink for use on all occasions. It is generally drunk from large casks placed on the ground using long bamboo straws. For this reason it is called z—aji«u ‘sucked liquor’ in Chinese. Opening a cask of /˚i/ is an important part of hosting an honored guest.
1.3.4. Clothing 1.3.4.1. Men’s clothing At present only a few of the older Qiang men still wear the traditional Qiang clothing except on particular ceremonial occasions. One item of traditional clothing still popularly worn by men and women is the handmade embroidered shoes. These are made of cloth, shaped like a boat, with the shoe face intricately embroidered. The sole is made of thickly woven hemp. It is very durable and quite practical for climbing in the mountains. In the summer men often wear a sandal version of these shoes with a large pomp on the toe. These shoes are an obligatory item of a Qiang woman’s dowry when she gets married. In many villages, embroidered shoe soles or shoe pads are still a popular engagement gift of a woman to her lover. Recently some women have taken to selling them as tourist souvenirs as well. Another item still popular among the Qiang men and women as well is the goat-skin vest. The vest is reversible; in the winter it is normally worn with the fur inside for warmth, and when worn with the fur out, it
10
Introduction
serves as a raincoat. It also acts as padding when carrying things on the back. Qiang men often carry a lighter (traditionally it would be flint and steel) and knives on a belt around their waist. The belt has a triangular pouch in front. There are two types of these triangular pouches: one is made of cloth and intricately embroidered, another is made of leather (the skin of a musk deer). Men sometimes will also wear a piece of apron-like cloth (also embroidered with a floral pattern) over their buttocks, to be used as seat pad.
1.3.4.2. Women’s clothing The majority of Qiang women in the villages still wear traditional clothing. Qiang women’s clothing is very colorful, and also varies from village to village. The differences are mainly manifested in the color and styles of their robes and headdresses. Headdresses are worn from about the age of twelve. Women in the Sanlong area wear a square headdress embroidered with various floral patterns in wintertime. In the spring, they wear a headband embroidered with colorful floral patterns, and wear a long robe (traditionally made of hemp fiber) with fancily embroidered borders, and tie a black sheep-leather belt around the waist. Women of the Heihu area wear a white headdress, and are fond of wearing blue or light green robes (the borders are also embroidered with floral patterns). Women from the Weimen area wear a black headdress and a long robe. The border of the robe is embroidered with colorful floral patterns. They also often wear an embroidered apron (full front or from the waist down) and an embroidered cloth belt. The headdress worn by women of Mao county and the Muka area of Li county is a block-like rectangle of folded cloth, with embroidered patterns on the part that faces backwards when worn. Women in Puxi village of Li county wear plain black headdresses, oblong in shape with the two sides wider than the front. In the Chibusu district of Mao counry women wear brick-shaped headdresses wrapped in braided hair. They braid their hair, and at the tip of their braid sometimes add a piece of blue fake hair braid in order to make the braid longer (if necessary), and then coil the braid around the headdress to hold it in place.
The people and their culture
11
Clothing of those living near the Tibetan areas bear the influence of the Tibetan ways of clothing. Other than the headdresses and the robes, Qiang women are also fond of wearing big earrings, ornamental hairpins, bracelets, and other silver jewelry. Jewelry pieces of those who are wealthier are inlaid with precious stones like jade, agate, and coral. They often hang a needle and thread box and sometimes a mouth harp from their belt. Babies wear special embroidered hats with silver ornaments and bronze and silver bells, and a small fragrance bag.
1.3.5. Family and kinship relations Although in the Qiang language traditionally there are no surnames, for several hundred years the Qiang have been using Han Chinese surnames. The clans or surname groups form the lowest level of organization within the village above the nuclear family. In one village there may be only a few different surnames. The village will have a village leader, and this is now an official political post with a small salary. Many of the traditional “natural” villages have now been organized into “administrative” villages comprised of several “natural” villages. Before 1949 (as early as the Yuan dynasty—13-14th century), above the village level there was a local leader (called t«us—î in Chinese) who was enfiefed by the central government to control the Qiang and collect taxes. This leader could also write his own laws and demand his own taxes and servitude from the Qiang people. The Qiang had to work for this local leader for free, and also give a part of their food to him. His position was hereditary, and many of these leaders were terrible tyrants and exploiters of the people. Some of the Qiang traditional stories are of overthrowing such tyrants. Kinship relations are quite complex, and while generally patrilineal, the women have a rather high status, supposedly a remnant of a matriarchal past. Only men can inherit the wealth of the parents, but women are given a large dowry. Marriages are monogamous, and can be with someone of the same surname, but not within the same family for at least three generations. The general practice is to marry someone of the same village but it can also be with someone outside the village. Increasingly Qiang women are marrying out of the villages to Chinese
12
Introduction
or Qiang living in the plains to have an easier life, and many of the young men who go out to study or work marry Han Chinese women. In the past marriages were decided by the parents of the bride and groom, although now the young people generally have free choice. The traditional form of marriage in the village is characterized by a series of rituals focused around drinking and eating. It is consists of three main stages: engagement, preparation for the wedding, and the wedding ceremony. The rituals start when the parents of a boy have a girl in mind for their son. The parents will start the “courtship” by asking a relative or someone who knows the girl’s family to find out whether she is available or not. If the girl is available, they will move on to the next step, that is, to ask a matchmaker to carry a package of gifts (containing sugar, wine, noodles, and cured meat) to the girl’s family. This is only to convey their intention to propose a marriage. If the girl’s parents accepted the gift, the boy’s parents will proceed to the next step, asking the matchmaker to bring some more gifts to the girl’s parents and “officially” propose. If the girl’s parents agree, then a date will be set to bring the “engagement wine” to the girl’s family. On that day, the girl’s parents and all the siblings will join in to drink and sing the “engagement song”. Once this is done, the couples are considered to be engaged, and there should be no backing out. After being engaged, the girl should avoid having any contact with members of the groom’s family. Before the wedding, a member from the groom’s family will be accompanied by the matchmaker to the bride’s family, carrying with them some wine which they will offer to the bride’s family members and relatives of the same surname, to have a drink and decide on the date of the wedding. Once the wedding date has been set, the groom, accompanied by the matchmaker and carrying some more wine, personally goes to the bride’s family to have a drink with the bride’s uncles, aunts and other family members. The wedding ceremony itself takes three days, and is traditionally hosted by the oldest brothers of the mothers of the bride and groom. On the first day, the groom’s family sends an entire entourage to the bride’s place to fetch the bride. The entourage usually consists of relatives of the groom and some boys and girls from the village whose parents are both still living, with two people playing the trumpet. They carry with them a sedan chair, horses (in some cases), clothing and jewelry for the
The people and their culture
13
bride. The entourage has to arrive in the bride’s village before sunset. They stay there overnight. The next day, the bride has to leave with the group to go to the groom’s family. Before stepping out of her family door, she has to cry to show how sad she is leaving her parents and family members. One of her brothers will carry her on his back to the sedan chair. Once the bride steps out of her parents’ house she should not turn her head to look back. She is accompanied by her aunts (wife of her uncle from her mother’s side, and wife of her uncle from her father’s side), sisters and other relatives. Before the bride enters the groom’s house she has to step over a small fire or a red cloth (this part of the ceremony varies among areas). The bride enters the house and the actual wedding ceremony starts. The couple will be led to the front of the family altar, and, just like the wedding practice of the Chinese, the couple will first make vows to heaven and earth, the family ancestors, the groom’s parents, the other relatives, and finally vows to each other. There is a speech by the hosting uncles, and the opening of a cask of highland barley wine. There will then be dancing and drinking. As the cask is drunk, hot water is added to the top with a water scoop, and each drinker is expected to drink one scoop’s equivalent of liquor. If the drinker fails to drink the required amount, he or she may be tossed up into the air by the others in the party. Before the couple enter the room where they are to live, two small children (whose parents are both still living) will be sent in to run around and play on the couple’s bed, as a way of blessing the couple to soon have children. On the third day the bride returns to her parents’ home. When she leaves her newlywed husband’s village, relatives of the husband wait at their doorways or at the main entrance to the village to offer her wine. The bride’s family will also prepare wine and food to welcome the newlywed couple. The groom has to visit and pay respects to all of the bride’s relatives. The bride then stays at her parents’ house for a year or so, until the birth of the first child or at least until around the time of the Qiang New Year (see below). The groom will visit her there and may live in the woman’s house. She returns to her husband’s family to celebrate the birth or the New Year, and stays there permanently. In recent years there has been movement away from traditional style marriage ceremonies towards more Han Chinese style or ChineseWestern-Qiang mixed style marriage ceremonies.
14
Introduction
1.3.6. Religion The Qiang native religion is a type of pantheism, with gods or spirits of many types. To this day when a cask of /˚i/ (barley wine) is opened, a ritual is performed to honor the door god, the fireplace god, and the house god. Flint stone (called “white stone” in Qiang and Chinese) is highly valued, and when a house is built a piece of flint is placed on the roof of the house and a ceremony is held to invest the stone with a spirit.7 The fireplace at the center of the house is considered to be the place where the fireplace spirit lives. Before each meal, the Qiang will place some food near the iron potholder for the fireplace spirit. The iron potholder is treated by the Qiang people with great respect, and cannot be moved at random. One cannot rest one's feet on it, or hang food there to grill. Most important is that one cannot spit in front of the potholder. When the Qiang drink barley wine or tea, or eat meals, an elderly person who is present has to perform the ritual of honoring the god of the fireplace, that is by dipping his finger or the drinking straw into the barley wine and splashing the wine into the fireplace. Every household has an altar in the corner of the main floor of the house facing the door. It is usually ornately carved, and its size reflects the financial status of the family. The altar and the area around the altar is considered to be sacred. One cannot hang clothes, nor spit, burp, expel flatuence, or say inauspicious words around the altar area. Pointing one’s foot toward the altar is strictly prohibited. Other than believing in the spirits of the house and of the fireplace, the Qiang also believe in the spirits of all natural phenomena, such as heaven, earth, sun, moon, stars, rivers, hills and mountains. Two of the biggest festivals in the Qiang area are related to their worship of these spirits: the Qiang New Year, which falls on the 24th day of the sixth month of the lunar calendar (now the festival date is fixed on October 1st), and the Mountain Sacrifice Festival, held between the second and sixth months of the lunar calendar. The former is focused on sacrifices to the god of Heaven, while the latter is to give sacrifice to the god of the mountain. Religious ceremonies and healing rituals are performed by shamans known as /˚pi/ in Qiang and Du—an G—ong in Chinese. To become such a shaman takes many years of training with a teacher. The Du—an G—ong also performs the initiation ceremony that young men go through when
The people and their culture
15
they are about eighteen years old. This ceremony, called “sitting on top of the mountain” in Qiang, involves the whole family going to the mountain top to sacrifice a sheep or cow and to plant three cypress trees. These shamans also pass on the traditional stories of the Qiang. The stories include the creation story, the history of the Qiang (particular famous battles and heroes), and other cultural knowledge (see the Texts for some of the stories). As there was no written language until recently, story telling was the only way that this knowledge was passed on. Very few such shamans are left, and little story telling is done now that many villages have access to TVs and VCD players.
1.3.7. Mobility Because the Qiang villages are generally high up on the mountains, and there often is no road to the village, only a steep narrow path (this is the case, for example, in Ronghong village [see Plate 2], where the nearest road is hours away), travel has traditionally been by foot, though horses are sometimes used as pack animals where the path or road allows it. In the summer the horses are taken to remote pastures to prevent them from eating the crops near the villages. In some cases there is a road to the village large enough for vehicles to pass, but the condition of the road is usually quite bad, and as it runs along the very edge of the mountain, it can be quite dangerous. On every field trip we saw at least one car or truck that had just fallen off the side of a mountain. Because the condition of the road varies with the weather and there are sometimes landslides, before attempting to drive to (or near) a village, one has to try to find out if the road is actually passable. The streams and rivers are too shallow to navigate, and so the Qiang do not make boats.
1.3.8. Livelihood In general it was the work of the men to hunt, weave baskets (large back baskets and small baskets), shepherd the cows, gather wild plants, and do some of the harder labor such as plowing the fields, getting wood, and building houses, and it was the work of the women to weave cloth,
16
Introduction
embroider, hoe the fields, spread seeds, cook most of the food, and do most of the housework. In the winter men often went down into the flatlands to dig wells for pay (this often involved a twelve-day walk down to the Chengdu area!). Any trading was also only done by men. In the past the Qiang traded opium, animal skins and medicinal plants in order to get gold, silver, coral, and ivory. These items were often made into jewelry for the women. Nowadays both men and women cook and gather wild plants, and it is common for men to leave the village for long periods of time to go out to work in the flatlands or to sell medicinal herbs, wood, vegetables, animal skins or other items in exchange for money or rice. Although some ancient ceramics have been unearthed in the Qiang areas, in the recent past ceramics were not made by the Qiang. Most Qiang-made utensils were of wood, stone or iron. There were specialists in metalworking. Nowadays most such items are bought from outside the Qiang area.
1.4. Previous work on Qiang Fieldwork on Qiang and initial analysis was first carried out by Wen Yu in the late 1930’s (Wen 1940, 1941, 1943a, 1943b, 1943c, 1945). Wen also did some initial comparisons and historical work on the language (1943b, 1947), and published two vocabularies of Qiang (1950, 1951). Chang Kun (1967) used Wen’s data for a comparative study of the southern Qiang dialects, and attempted to reconstruct the protolanguage. In the late 1950’s the Chinese Academy of Sciences organized teams of linguists to go to the different areas where ethnic minority peoples lived and carry out fieldwork. Two members of the team that worked on Qiang were Sun Hongkai and Liu Guangkun.8 An early report drafted by them was published with “Institute of Nationalities, Chinese Academy of Sciences” as the author in the journal Zhongguo Yuwen in 1962. They have also published much of the material available on Qiang since then (Sun 1981a, 1981b, 1982, 1983, 1985, 1988; Liu 1981, 1984, 1987, 1997, 1998a, 1998b, 1999). Huang Bufan, another member of the team, now retired from the Central University of Nationalities, has also done important work on Qiang (1987, 1991, 1994, 2000, 2002), and is now in the process of
The data and their presentation
17
writing a grammar of the Qugu Village variety of the Yadu subdialect of the Northern dialect. These three scholars have trained a native Qiang linguist, Huang Chenglong, who has published a number of articles on his native dialect, the Ronghong Village variety of the Yadu subdialect of the Northern dialect (1992, 1993, 1994, 1997, 1998, 2000a, 2000b, 2003; Huang, Yu & Huang 1992), on which this grammar is also based. Sun Hongkai and Huang Chenglong are currently preparing a manuscript entitled Studies on Qiang Dialects that will compare 20 different Qiang dialects in terms of phonology and to some extent grammar as well. Randy LaPolla has published an overview sketch of Ronghong Qiang (LaPolla 2003c) and a paper on the evidentials of the Ronghong variety (LaPolla 2003d), as well as a lexical list and texts in the Qugu variety (LaPolla, 2003e; LaPolla & Poa, in press). Randy LaPolla and Huang Chenglong have presented papers on adjectives (LaPolla & Huang 2002a) and copula constructions (LaPolla & Huang 2002b) in Qiang. Jonathan Evans has published a monograph on the Southern Qiang lexicon and phonology (2001a) and a paper on contactinduced tonogenesis in Qiang (2001b), and has presented a paper on the directional prefixes (2000). Randy LaPolla, Huang Chenglong, Dory Poa, Jonathan Evans, and Wang Ming-ke are currently collaborating with Zhou Facheng and a team of other Qiang linguists on the Qiang Dialect Map Project, which will attempt to record the language and customs in at least fifteen Qiang villages and make the data and images available on an Internet web site (the Qiang Language and Culture Web Site: http://victoria.linguistlist.org/~lapolla/qiang/index.htm).
1.5. The data and their presentation All data presented in the Grammar, Texts, and Glossary are of the Yadu subdialect of northern Qiang spoken in Ronghong Village, Yadu Township, Chibusu District, Mao County (see Plates 1 and 2). The data are from Mr. Huang Chenglong, a native of Ronghong Village, and members of his family. The grammatical analysis is based on naturally occurring texts (narratives) as well as elicited sentence patterns. Examples taken from the Texts are marked by the number of the text and the line number(s) the example appears on. For example, “(T3:2324)” means the example appears in lines 23-24 of Text 3, “An Orphan”.
18
Introduction
Stories and lexical items were also collected from the Qugu variety of Northern Qiang, also of Chibusu district, from Mr. Chen Yonglin, though as the Qugu variety differs somewhat from the Ronghong variety, those data are not presented here. The lexical data and some of the stories have been published separately as LaPolla, 2003e, and LaPolla & Poa, in press, respectively. All of the fieldwork was carried out in Chinese, and the first draft of the grammar and stories had only Chinese glosses. The glosses and free translations were then translated into English. The English glosses for the items in the Glossary are largely from the Handbook of Chinese Dialect Vocabulary, which was used as a basis for the lexical elicitation.9 For this reason the glosses are in a sense twice-removed (twice-translated) from the Qiang, and so some ambiguities may have been introduced that were not in the first translation. If readers have questions about any such items, they should contact Randy LaPolla (
[email protected]). The glossary is also available as a freestanding Hypercard™ application which includes the original Chinese glosses (and the Qugu lexical data mentioned above), for those who might be able to make use of it. Again, contact Randy LaPolla. Reconstructions given for Proto-Tibeto-Burman forms are from Benedict 1972, except for the numerals, which are from Matisoff 1997. The last section of this chapter is a typological overview of the language. The discussion in the rest of the grammatical description is divided into four main parts: the sound system of the language (Chapter 2), the form of representation of the participants of an action or state and the expression of their relationship to the verb and to each other (Chapter 3), the form of representation of an action or state (Chapter 4), and complex structures (Chapter 5). Following the grammatical description are Qiang oral texts, presented with interlinear glosses and a free translation at the end of each text. Following the Texts is an annotated glossary of basic Qiang vocabulary organized by semantic field, and an English alphabetical index to the glossary. The Lingua Descriptive Studies: Questionnaire (Comrie & Smith 1977) was very helpful in collecting part of the data, though the mode of presentation in this grammar is not always that of the Questionnaire. The guidelines for summarizing grammatical information prepared as part of the research project “The Categories of Human Language” being carried out by R. M. W. Dixon and Alexandra Y. Aikhenvald were also
Typological profile
19
helpful in trying to make the information presented here as complete as possible.
1.6. Typological profile Qiang is a largely agglutinative language, with some phonological processes of vowel harmony, lenition, and morpheme coalescence. Nouns take only a limited number of optional suffixes with restricted distribution, while verbs take up to three prefixes and four suffixes. Except for nominalizing suffixes and the causative suffix, which are derivational, all other verbal affixes are inflectional. Reduplication of verbs is of the whole root, and with active verbs it signifies reciprocal action (and intransitivization) or an iterative sense; with stative verbs it signifies intensification or plurality. Qiang has a rather complex phonological system, with thirty-seven initial consonants, including voiced and voiceless fricatives at seven different points of articulation and many consonant clusters. Unlike most Tibeto-Burman languages, Qiang has many consonant finals, including clusters, due to the collapsing of two syllables into one (there is a tendency towards monosyllable words). There are two open lexical classes: nouns, those forms which can take definite marking and number marking, and verbs, those forms which can take the negative prefix and person marking (see Chapters 3 and 4 respectively). Adjectives are a subset of the verbs, and can be identified as a set by their semantics and their morphosyntactic behavior (§4.2.3). Closed lexical classes include pronouns (including demonstratives, interrogatives, and personal pronouns; §3.1.2), classifiers (§3.1.6), postpositions (§3.2), definite/indefinite markers (§3.1.4), clause-final particles (§4.3), and adverbs (§4.4). Of these the pronouns and classifiers are subsets of the nouns. Qiang has both head marking and dependent marking. Noun phrases can take enclitic postpositions to show their semantic or pragmatic role in the clause (§3.2), and there is person marking of an animate actor and/or an animate non-actor on the verb (§4.3.2). There is no other agreement marking in Qiang. Qiang has not grammaticalized syntactic relations (i.e. there are no syntactic pivots—see Van Valin & LaPolla 1997, Ch. 6 on this concept); the postpositions and person marking are
20
Introduction
of the semantically based type discussed in Dixon 1994, Ch. 2. The use of the topic marker, and to some extent the non-actor person marking, are controlled by pragmatic factors. While the word order is generally verb-final, the order of noun phrases is determined by pragmatic factors. Negation precedes the verb, while modal and aspect marking follow the verb. Within the noun phrase, the noun head can be preceded by a genitive phrase or relative clause, and may be followed by an adjective, a demonstrative pronoun or definite marker, and a numeral plus classifier phrase, in that order. There are intransitive, transitive, and ditransitive verbs, plus some ambitransitive verbs where the single argument of the intransitive use corresponds to the actor of the transitive use. Transitives can be formed from intransitives, or ditransitives from transitives, by the addition of the causative suffix. There is no intransitivizing marking other than the reduplication that marks the reciprocal. When a verb is part of a predicate (verb complex), it can be preceded by an adverbial, a directional prefix, a negative marking prefix, and an aspectual prefix, and can be followed by the causative suffix, aspectual suffixes, and person marking suffixes. This complex can be followed by clause final particles marking illocutionary force, modality, mood, and evidentials.
Chapter 2 The phonological system
In the context of Tibeto-Burman, the phonological system of Qiang is rather complex, as there are a large number of consonants, both in initial and final position, and a large number of complex consonant clusters, also both in initial and final position. In particular, having such a variety of consonant finals and clusters sets it apart from most other SinoTibetan languages. While the basic vowel inventory is not large, there are phonemic length and r-coloring distinctions. There is also a complex system of vowel harmony, and there are vowel changes due to differences in stress. We will discuss and exemplify the consonant system in §2.1, the vowel system in §2.2, the syllable canon in §2.3, and phonological processes in §2.4. Sound symbolism does not seem to play a significant role in the language. The only somewhat sound symbolic form found was the use of /˚a/ for the meaning ‘small’ instead of the usual word /≈t®å/ (which is very un-sound-symbolic!) in one example: (2.1)
moÙu-˚a-kå: de-w! wind-small-INDEF:CL DIR-exist ‘There is a light wind (blowing)!’
The only iconic forms are the ideophonic adverbials, such as /≈uå ≈uå/ ‘the sound of water flowing’ (see §4.4 for examples of these adverbial uses).
2.1. Consonants There are thirty-seven consonant phonemes found in the Qiang language, as listed in Table 2:
22
The phonological system
Table 2. The Qiang consonants labial dental
retroflex
palatal
velar
uvular
glottal
(÷)
voiceless stop voiceless aspirated stop
p
t
k
q
ph
th
kh
qh
voiced stop
b
d
g
voiceless affricate voiceless aspirated affricate
ts
t®
t˚
tsh
t®h
t˚h
voiced affricate
dz
dÂ
d
s
®
˚
x
≈
h
 (%)
()
(©)
Ù
¿
≤10
≥
voiceless fricative
π(f)
voiced fricative
(v)
z
nasal
m
n
voiceless lateral
¬
voiced lateral
l
approximant
(w)
(j)
The items in parentheses in Table 2 are not phonemic: [%] is an allophone of /Â/ in initial position; [] and [©] are voiced allophones of /˚/ and /x/, respectively, when they appear as the first consonant of clusters where the second consonant is voiced (see the discussion of clusters below). A glottal stop can also often be heard when there is an absence of any other initial, but it does not contrast phonemically with a pure vocalic onset. There also does not seem to be a contrast between /u/ and /wu/ or /i/ and /ji/, but I am using the symbols /j/ and /w/ rather than /i/ and /u/ respectively for the relevant sounds when they appear in syllable-initial position to allow for easy syllable recognition in words such as [tiwike] Æa tall onefl. As these sounds do not follow the voicing harmony pattern of consonant clusters (that is, they can be preceded by a voiceless consonant, as in the second syllable of /Âå≈uå/ Æinsidefl),
Consonants
23
they are clearly within the vocalic segment of the syllable and not part of the initial, and so I have not used /j/ and /w/ when they are not the intial sound in the syllable (to avoid them being confused with consonant clusters). All of the phonemic consonants can be initials, though /¿/ only appears as the initial of one of the directional prefixes and a commonly used filler/emphatic interjection /¿å/, and /≥/ only appears as an initial before the vowel /u/. Many of these consonants (almost all except the aspirated stops) can be finals. The large number of finals is not due to the preservation of Proto-Tibeto-Burman finals; all of the original Proto-Tibeto-Burman finals were lost (cf. Liu 1984, Benedict 1983, Huang 1998). Only in Chinese loan words can the finals be said to be “original”. After the loss of the original finals, and the destressing of second syllables in two syllable compounds, the two syllables merged, with the initial of the original second syllable, or a reduced form of it, becoming the final of the original initial syllable (e.g. [s˙f] Ætreefl < /s˙/ Æwoodfl + /ph˙/ Æforestfl, where /ph˙/ reduces to [f] in non-word-initial position due to the stress on the initial syllable; see §2.3). Following are examples of single consonant contrasts in initial position:
på phå bå få må wå tå thå dås tså tshå-thå dzå så zå nå ¬å lå
Æbloom (vi.)fl Æsun (clothes) (vt.)fl Æoldfl Æclothesfl Æmother (address term)fl (verb particle) Æwear a hatfl Ætherefl Æfinish (v.)fl Æherefl Æwipefl (< Ch.) Æpursuefl Æbloodfl Ærice ladlefl Ægoodfl Æslipperyfl Æwolffl (< Ch.)
Âåwå ˚åt˚å-lå t˚hå ˚i t˚i di ≤å jå ku kå kha gån kh˙u xu ≥u˙ qå qhå(q) ≈åf
Æstonefl INDTV prefix
Æwherefl Ædrink (1sg)fl Æreleasefl Æbearfl Æbrotherfls sonfl Æandfl Æivoryfl Ægo (1sg)fl Ærice huskfl11 Æsnap buttonfl (< Ch.) Æfragrantfl Æsilverfl 1sg pronoun Æbitterfl Ægrassfl
24
The phonological system
t®å t®hå dÂå ®å
Æfilter, strain (solids)fl Ædeepfl Æearlyfl Æborder (garments) (vt.)fl
Ùå hå-≤i hå-qå ¿å-qå
locative postposition Ætwelvefl Ægo upfl Ægo downfl
Following are examples of single consonants in final position:
®uåp Ùuam ≈åf wet w˙s dÂuz t®uåts t®huen ju-®pul t®h˙®
Ætorchfl Æservantfl Ægrassfl Æstickfl Æeggfl Æchew the cudfl Ætablefl (< Ch.) Ætread onfl (< Ch.) Æfistfl Æspiderfl
ata t®h˙t® ©z˙˚ ®pet˚ ip˙k jimig‘u t®ho≥-thå ®uaq t®ue≈ håÙ
Æimmediatelyfl Æweigh (vt.)fl Æland otterfl Æpatch (vt.)fl Æarrivefl Ætracefl Æaggressivefl (< Ch.) Æmoonlightfl Æhave the mumpsfl Æexit (v.)fl
Phonemically, consonant clusters are formed by /®/ followed by /p, t, k, q, t˚, b, d, g, m, d/, /x/ followed by /k, s, t˚, ®, t®, ¬, l, z, d, Â, dÂ/, or /≈/ followed by /q, s, ®, t®, ¬, l, d, z, n, d, ≤, Â, dÂ/. Phonetically the situation is more varied, as /®/ becomes [s] before /t/ and /d/, and becomes [˚] before /pi/, /pe/, /bi/, /t˚/ and /d/,12 and the preinitials all become voiced before voiced initials. Following are examples of the various consonant clusters in initial position.
mi:-xkåm stå xs˙ xt®u xt®åp xt˚epi x®u x¬iex-bu zdu ®ku˙ ®på ®qu
Æeyebrowfl Æentrust tofl Ænewfl Æsweatfl Æpitch darkfl Æknifefl Æbarking deerfl Æloess soilfl Ædeerfl Æthieffl Æsorghumfl Æboilfl
≈su ≈®˙ ≈t®u ≈¬u ≈¬åte Âbu Âgue Âmu di Ùduå Ùlu Ùn˙i
Æliving, to be alivefl Æmanurefl Æsixfl Æhawkfl Æwavefl Ædrumfl Æfoxfl Æcorpsefl Ædiseasefl Æhammer (n.)fl Æstonefl Ækind of wild goatfl
Vowels
®qå-≤i ©lu ©z˙ ©Âem ≈qu ©dÂ˙
Ùzu ÙdÂ˙s Ù≤is ˚pies ˚t˚i:mi bie
Ædicefl Æroll (v.)fl Æhot (peppery); numbfl Ærice gruel, congeefl Ægoldfl Æenoughfl
25
Æchisel (n.)fl Ætoenailfl Æspring (of water)fl Ænoodlefl Æheartfl Æsoak (barley to make wine)fl
Examples of some clusters in final position:
t®hex¬ w˙≈® l˙©z ˙©l
dÂå˚t˚ lax® ˙xt®
Æsip (vt.)fl Æhorse dungfl Æbookfl Æuprightfl
Ælaugh (v.)fl Æpalm (of hand)fl Æshade (vt.)fl
2.2. Vowels 2.2.1. The basic inventory There are eight vowel positions, seven of which show a phonemic contrast in length. Table 3 gives the forms for all the Qiang vowels: Table 3. The Qiang vowel inventory front high i, i: y, y: mid e, e: low a, a:
mid ˙
back u, u: o, o: å, å:
The functional loads of the /u/-/o/ contrast and the /i/-/e/ contrast are not very great: in many cases /o/ and /u/ are interchangeable, and /i/ and /e/ are interchangeable. Aside from this, /o/ can also be pronounced [ø], and /e/ is often pronounced [‰]. The length contrast in some cases is lexical, but in many cases it is grammatical, reflecting a collapsing of a lexical item and a following classifier or locative postposition, or reflecting the prospective aspect marking, as in the following examples: (2.2)
a. the b. t˚å
Æthatfl Æwherefl
+ ze (CL) > the: + lå (LOC) > t˚å:
3sg pronoun Æwherefl
26
The phonological system
c. dytå ÆChengdufl + lå (LOC) > dytå: Æin/at Chengdufl + lå (LOC) > q˙påt®å: Æat the headfl d. q˙påt® Æheadfl Æto gofl + å: (PRS) > kå: Æwill gofl e. k˙ There is also nasalization of some word-initial high vowels, such as in the second person singular pronoun /÷~u/, but this may be related to what Matisoff (1975) has called rhinoglottophilia, the spontaneous nasalization of vowels when they are preceded by a glottal segment (see also the affirmative reply [÷~˙h~˙], §4.3.5.3).13 Following are examples of the vowel contrasts in open syllables:
pi pe paha p˙ på po pu mi mi: phi-phi se s˙
Æpen, writing brushfl Æsnowfl Æstrawfl Æbuyfl Æbundle (CL)fl Æthick (e.g. thread)fl Æpint, 1/10 peckfl Æhuman beingfl Æeyefl Ædigfl Æsprinkle (vt.)fl Æday; woodfl
bå ba ba: kh˙stå båhå dytå: t˚o do: ku-thå ku: gu gu:
Æoldfl Æbigfl Æclothfl Æhusbandfls motherfl Æremotefl Æin/at Chengdufl Æten fen (cents)fl Æchinfl Æhire, to employfl Æelder brotherfl Æable to fit infl Æplow-sharefl
Examples of some of the vowels in closed syllables:
phi® fen dam b˙l
Æwhitefl Æpowderfl (< Ch.) Æforgetfl Æmaggotfl
bu me:fi pho® båq
Ædrizzlefl Ævulvafl Æscarffl
2.2.2. Diphthongs and triphthongs Aside from the monophthongs listed above, there are fourteen native diphthongs (/ia, iå, ie, ye, eu, ˙u, ei, ˙i, oi, uå, ua, u˙, ue, ui/) and one native triphthong (/u˙i/). Another diphthong, /ya/, only appears as a result of person marking, as in /t˚ya/ ÆI carryfl, from /t˚ye/ + the first
Vowels
27
person suffix /-å/ (when /å/ is added to a root ending in /-e/, /-i/, or /-y/, the resulting form is generally /-a/; see §4.3.2). There is also a longvowel form of this diphthong (/t˚ya:/), which appears only in the prospective aspect, as the prospective aspect marker is the suffix /-å:/ and is subject to the same assimilatory process (see §4.3.4). Among the native diphthongs there are both on-glides and off-glides. Some forms also show length and r-coloring distinctions (see below, §2.2.3). Aside from these native forms, there are two off-glide diphthongs (/ai/, /au/) and two triphthongs (/uai/, /iåu/) that appear only in Chinese loan words (see examples below). In theory, all of the native diphthongs should be able to appear in both open and closed syllables, as originally, before the coalescence of two syllables into one that gave rise to the consonant finals, all were open syllables, but no unmarked lexical examples of /˙i, oi, ye, eu, ui/ in closed syllables have been found. Even so, for those diphthongs where there are no lexicalized closed syllables, closed syllables could be formed by the addition of certain grammatical morphemes, such as the agentive nominalizer /-m/, the instrumental nominalizer /-s/, the comparative standard marker /-s/, and the genitive marker /-t˚/. Following are examples of each type of diphthong and triphthong. Examples of the native diphthongs and triphthong in open syllables:
mia-pi phie ei-≤i i®p˙i doÙoi t˚ye t˚˙u (˚t˚y) heu phiå-que
Æeyelidfl Æplant (vt.)fl Ænext yearfl Æmotherfls brotherfls wifefl Æcall to, summon (vt.)fl Æhoe (n.)fl Æhomefl Ærepay (debt)fl Ægreyfl
Ùuå Ùua ku˙ ®å gue-≤i guefi gue:fi dza:khui ®ku˙i
Æoutsidefl Æleftfl Æhave diarrheafl Ænearfl Æarmyfl Æroadfl Æafternoonfl Æmountain goatfl
Examples of the native diphthongs in closed syllables:
ji-miaq pies stu˙® t˙khueÂ
Æthumbfl Æmeatfl Æpot luck mealfl Æanger (vt.)fl
®uaq duåÙl tu˙s
Æmoonlightfl Æcurved knifefl Æcarrying polefl
The phonological system
28
Examples of diphthongs and triphthongs due to Chinese borrowings:
phai t˚åu-ts˙
Æplaying cardsfl Ædumplingsfl
kuåi-thå phiåu-ts˙
Æblame (vt.)fl Æpaper moneyfl
2.2.3. R-coloring An additional aspect of the vowel system is r-coloring, which is a retroflexion of the tongue at the end of the vowel. At least four of the basic vowels show a contrast in lexical items (i, e, ˙, a),14 and all vowels can take r-coloring when they are the final vowel of a verb with first person plural marking (which is /-fi/; see §4.3.2). This r-coloring is often lost in rapid speech, and it seems that it is being lost completely among the younger people, as there is variation and uncertainty about its use. The r-coloring also often appears on words followed by the expression meaning Æallfl. This meaning is variously expressed as [wu], [le-wu], [©le-wu], [lefiwu], [-efiwu], and [-fiwu]. In the case of the latter form, the final vowel of the previous word becomes r-colored, e.g.: (2.3)
a. b. c. d.
tså-≈s˙fiwu å-s˙fiwu å-j˙fiwu mifiwu
[this:one-few (< ≈s˙):all] [one-day (< å-s˙):all] [one-night (< å-j˙):all] [person (< mi):all]
Æall thesefl Æall dayfl Æall nightfl Æall the peoplefl
While the r-coloring is used to represent Chinese final /-fi/, /-n/ or /-≥/ in nativizations of some Chinese loan words (e.g., /fefi/ Æcentfl < Chinese f—en; /thiåuk˙fi/ Æspoonfl < Chinese ti|aog—eng), and may in some cases be due to either the historical evolution of a post-initial retroflex segment (/%/ or /Â/ e.g., *phri > phifi; see Huang 1992:154, 157) or to synchronic assimilation to a following retroflex consonant, it is not treated here as a consonantal phoneme, as it participates in the vowel harmony scheme (see §2.4.3). Following are some examples of contrasting r-colored and non-r-colored vowels, and long and short r-colored vowels.
se sefi fu se:fi-muj‘u
Æsprinkle (vt.)fl Æmourning apparelfl Æmushroomfl
kh˙stå kh˙fi phi-phi
Æhusbandfls motherfl Æsaw (vt.)fl Ædigfl
Vowels
s˙ s˙:fi (s˙l wefi we
Æday; woodfl Æwillow treefl Æface southfl)15 Æreducefl Æexist/be atfl
phifi-phifi påu≈uåfi gu˙fi gu˙:fi
Ærip (v.)fl Æshavingsfl Æarmyfl Æroadfl
¿a-kh˙fip dy-g˙fim Ù˙fip
Ægo blindfl Ædoorkeeperfl ÆHan personfl
29
Examples in closed syllables:
khefix påfi≈ z˙-tefim pefiÂ
Æcombfl Æclawfl Æearthquakefl Æbreed, raise (vt.)fl
2.2.4. Morphologically derived vowel forms The following are vowels and diphthongs that only appear in morphologically derived verb forms: a:fi å:fi ufi yfi iefi ia: ia:fi u˙fi uå: uå:fi yefi ya ya: ya:fi ua: ua:fi
tsa:fi på:fi qhufi t˚yfi phiefi phia: phia:fi gu˙fi guå guå:fi t˚hyefi t˚hya t˚hya: t˚hya:fi stua: stua:fi
(< tse) (< p˙) (< qhu) (< t˚y) (< phie) (< phie) (< phie) (< gu˙) (< gu˙) (< gu˙) (< t˚hye) (< t˚hye) (< t˚hye) (< t˚hye) (< stue) (< stue)
Ælook (PRS:1pl)fl Æbuy (PRS:1pl)fl Æfire gun (1pl)fl Æbring/carry (1pl)fl Ætill land (1pl)fl Ætill land (PRS:1sg)fl Ætill land (PRS:1pl)fl Æput on clothes (1pl)fl Æput on clothes (PRS:1sg)fl Æput on clothes (PRS:1pl)fl Æpen livestock (1pl)fl Æpen livestock (1sg)fl Æpen livestock (PRS:1sg)fl Æpen livestock (PRS:1pl)fl Æpull up weeds (PRS:1sg)fl Æpull up weeds (PRS:1pl)fl
30
The phonological system
2.3. The syllable canon The coalescence of syllables resulting in the creation of new finals and clusters (discussed in §2.1) has affected the syllable canon, which is given in Figure 1: (C) (Ci) (V) V (V) (C) (C f) [fric]
[glide] [glide][fric]
Figure 1. The Qiang syllable canon
The minimum syllable type is a single vowel, such as one of the forms for the word for Æonefl: /å/. While a glottal stop often appears at the beginning of a syllable with no other consonant initial, there is no phonemic difference between glottal stop onset and vocalic onset. 16 Glottal stops also often appear at the end of syllables with short vowels and no final consonant, but again, this is not phonemic. The initial consonant of the syllable may be any of the consonants listed in Table 2, but if there is a pre-initial consonant (i.e. the first consonant of a cluster), it must be a fricative.17 As the final consonant clusters derive from initial clusters, the same restriction applies: the first consonant of the two must be a fricative.18 Most of the combinations of the optional items given in parentheses in Figure 1 are possible forms in Qiang. I have not yet found an example where there is an off-glide and a following consonant cluster, though there is nothing in principle that would make this an impossible combination. Following are the possible syllable types and examples (“V” here is used for both full vowels and on/off glides within a single syllable): V VV VC VCC CV CVV CVVV CVC CVCC
å åu ås ˙≈® p˙ khu˙ kuåi-thå påq b˙x®
Æonefl Æone pilefl Æone dayfl Ætightfl Æbuyfl Ædogfl Æstrangefl Æinterestfl Æhoneyfl
CVVC CCV CCVV CCVVV CCVC CCVCC CCVVC CCVVCC
duåp xt®e ®kue ®ku˙i ®p˙l ®p˙≈s ®quap ˚piex¬
Æthighfl Ælousefl Æroastfl Æmt. goatfl Ækidneyfl ÆChibusufl Æquietfl Æscarfl
Phonological processes
31
The VC and VCC forms are generally formed from a single vowel form, such as the number Æonefl or the Æinner-directedfl directional prefix (§4.3.3), plus a reduced form of a classifier or verb, respectively. The word in Qiang is defined on phonological grounds, as a free form with pauses at both ends within which the phonological processes discussed in §2.4 operate. It may include more than one grammatical word, such as when a directional verb follows a main verb and forms one phonological word with it. While very often bimorphemic, the word tends to reduce to a single syllable in the case of unmodified nouns and verbs. Huang (1998:64) counted 836 basic words, and found 444 were monosyllabic and 392 were bisyllabic or polysyllabic. Even when various derivational and relational affixes have been added the root may still be monosyllabic due to processes of syllable weakening and vowel dropping (see §2.4 below, and Huang 1998). 19 There is no sense of ‘word’ in the Qiang language (what we would call the sociological word), only /så/ 'sentence'. Other than the word, we recognize the noun phrase, the verb complex, the clause, and the complex sentence as levels of grammatical structure.
2.4. Phonological processes In this section we will discuss the weakening of initial consonants, stress, vowel harmony and epenthesis. These phonological processes occur within a unit that can be defined as the phonological word.
2.4.1. Initial weakening Several types of initial consonant undergo a form of weakening when, due to derivation, they appear in non-word-initial position, particularly in non-syllable-initial position. This occurs both in compounds and when the directional prefix is added to verb roots. Following are some examples (see also Huang 1998; see §2.4.2 on the effects of the change in stress on the vowels): (2.4)
ph > π ± f: a. ˙- DIR
+
ph˙
Æblowfl
> ˙π
Æblow (imperative)fl
32 The phonological system
b. s˙ Ætreefl + c. d˙- DIR +
ph˙ phu
Æforestfl > s˙f Ætree/shrubfl Æescapefl > duπu Æescaped (perf.)fl
(2.5)
kh > x: a. me:fi Ærainfl + kh˙fi Æfall (of frost)fl > mefix Æfrost (n.)fl b. n˙- DIR + kh˙fite Æhit (people)fl > n˙xte Æhit (perf.)fl
(2.6)
dz > z: ˙- DIR + dzu˙ Æsitfl
> ˙z‘u‘˙
Æsit (imperative)fl
d > l:20 må- NEG + dÂ˙
> må-l
Ænot ablefl
(2.7)
(2.8)
b > w: a. t˙DIR DIR b. t˙-
Æablefl
+ b˙ + ba
Æpilefl > Æbigfl >
t˙w Æpiled (perf.)fl t˙wa Æbecome bigfl
When an aspirated initial becomes the final of a preceding syllable, losing its own vowel, it also generally loses its aspiration. For example, when the word /t˚h˙/ Ædrink, eat (wet foods)fl takes a directional prefix (as in an imperative), it becomes [s˙t˚]. Comparing the Ronghong forms with those of some of the more conservative Qiang dialects, such as the Mawo dialect (Sun 1981a), we can see that a similar type of weakening has occurred historically to preinitial consonants in Ronghong. Compare the following Ronghong and Mawo dialect forms. (2.9)
Ronghong xs˙ xs˙ x®u˚t˚ ≈sutu ≈så ≈®˙ ©z˙ ©z˙ifå ©Â˙
Mawo khsi khs˙ kh˚ust qhsu qhså qh®˙ gz˙ gziguafi gÂ˙
Gloss Ægodfl Ænewfl Æhear/listenfl Æjumpfl Æknow/understandfl Æmanurefl Ægovernment officialfl Æwingfl Æfourfl
Phonological processes 33
2.4.2. Stress and its effects Intonation is usually even in a clause, with no particular peaks on any one part of the clause. Stress is used for emphasis in, for example, imperative constructions, where the prefix and sometimes the root as well are stressed, but stress does not seem to be used for emphatic (focal) contrast, e.g. in English I came YESTERDAY with phonetic stress on yesterday, marking it as the focus of the assertion. To have emphatic focus on the verb in Qiang (e.g. the equivalent of English I BOUGHT this, I didn’t MAKE it), it is necessary to use a cleft construction (see §5.2). Within individual words, in most cases, the stress is on a single vowel, with the other vowels being to different degrees unstressed. Changes in stress often occur when syllables form compounds, or when grammatical morphemes are added to root forms. In cases where the unstressed vowel is any vowel other than /i/ or /e/, that vowel may be reduced to [˙], devoiced, or dropped altogether. Following are some examples (stress is marked by an acute accent mark in these examples): (2.10) a. ¿å- DIR + t®hå Ædeepfl + -Â CAUS > ¿|åt®h˙Â Ædeepenfl b. t˙- DIR + watsi Æshortfl > t˙w|åtsi Æbecome shortfl c. t˚å- CON + watsi Æshortfl > t˚|åw˙tsi Æstill shortfl It seems in the examples of /watsi/ Æshortfl given in (2.10b-c) that there is a three-way pattern of stress and vowel form: without any prefix, the first vowel of the root is [a], with an unstressed prefix it is [å], and with a stressed prefix, it is [˙]. In general there is a trochaic pattern of stress,21 which leads to the loss of second syllables in bisyllabic words, but the stress of a particular derived form depends on the number and type of syllables that appear in the particular word, and this effects the realization of the vowels. Compare the following two examples: (2.11) a. ¿|å-m˙-t˚|î-xt®|åp˙-t˚ DIR-NEG -CON-dark-GEN Æbefore it got darkfl
b. ¿|å-xt®˙p-≤ike DIR-dark-after Æafter it got darkfl
34 The phonological system
In (2.11a), there is stress on the continuative aspect prefix (as well as the directional prefix), even though it breaks the usual strong-weak stress pattern, as this prefix is always stressed, and on the root vowel, so the root vowel is realized as [å], whereas in the example in (2.11b), the stress is only on the directional prefix, and so the root vowel reduces to [˙]. In cases where the final vowel of a compound or prefixed verb is /u/ or /u˙/, unstressing/devoicing often gives a rounded quality to the preceding syllable (e.g. the prefix). Following are some examples of words where this happens (I do not have a way to mark the rounding, but the initial syllables in the forms on the right are more rounded than they would be in isolation): (2.12) a. b. c. d.
a må˙a
Æonefl + NEG + DIR + Æonefl +
gu˙ ≥u˙ dzu˙ tu
Æbasketfl > COP > Æsitfl > Æspanfl >
ag‘u‘˙ må≥‘u‘˙ ˙z‘u‘˙ åt‘u
Æone basketfullfl Æis notfl Æsit! (imperative)fl Æone handspanfl
If the final is /˙/, then it is simply dropped. We saw several examples of this just above, in §2.4.1. Following are some other examples: (2.13) a. b. c. d.
˙s˙b˙ tsu˙
+ + Æbeefl + Æwaterfl + DIR DIR
dz˙ t˚h˙ ≈®˙ Â˙
Æeatfl Ædrinkfl Æmanurefl Æoxfl
> > > >
˙z s˙t˚ b˙≈® tsu˙Â
Æeat! (imperative)fl Ædrink! (imp.)fl Æhoneyfl Æwater buffalofl
In some cases, where the final vowel of a bimorphemic compound that would otherwise be dropped becomes a non-final vowel due to the addition of a third syllable, the vowel takes on a full, harmonized form, e.g. [p˙s] Ætodayfl (< p˙-s˙), but [p˙su-quå] Æthis morningfl. This dropping of an unstressed final vowel is a regular phonological process, and has led to the total loss of the final vowel in some cases (i.e. it has lexicalized), e.g. there are two forms [p˙k] Æarrive therefl and [p˙l] Æarrive herefl. These are seen as indivisible lexical items by many Qiang speakers, yet they clearly derive from the verb /p˙/ Æarrivefl plus the deictic motion verbs /k˙/ Ægofl and [lu ± l˙] Æcomefl respectively. There is also a loss of an unstressed vowel when a prefix is added to forms whose base form is a reduplicated form. E.g.:
Phonological processes 35
(2.14) a. n˙- DIR + b. t˙- DIR +
l˙lå Æexchangefl > n˙llå Æexchangedfl t®h˙t®h˙ Æweighfl > t˙t®t®h˙ Æweighedfl
Another type of vowel loss often occurs in certain combinations of demonstrative, number, and classifier (e.g. [tsou] < tse-o-u (this-oneCL) Æthis (child)fl) or definite marker, number and classifier (e.g. /tou/ < /te-o-u/ (DEF-one-CL) Æthe (child)fl). The word [tsai] Ænowfl is derived from such a coalescence: /tse-å-i/ (this-one-time).
2.4.3. Vowel harmony In general, the pattern of vowel harmony is for the vowel of the first syllable of a compound or prefix + root combination to harmonize with the vowel of the second syllable or root. This is most common when the first vowel is /˙/. The harmony pattern is generally roughly in terms of the height of the vowel: before /o/ or /u/ the first vowel becomes [o] or [u], before /i/ or /e/ the first vowel becomes [i] or [e], before /å/ and /u˙/ the first vowel becomes [å]. In cases where the first vowel is /å/ and the second vowel is /i/, then the first vowel often changes to [a]. Following are some examples (See also the examples of the kinship prefix in §3.1.1.1 and the directional prefixes in §4.3.3): (2.15) a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
w˙ m˙ ph˙ ˙˙håji
Æbirdfl + Æfirefl + Æforestfl + DIR + DIR + Ætenfl + Ætwo +
®pu -xu x®u pi tse t®i -su
Æflockfl Æsmokefl Æroe deerfl Æunclefl Ælook atfl Æonefl22 Ætenfl
> > > > > > >
wu®pu mux‘u phux®u ipi itse hat®i jusu
Æ(wild) pigeonfl Æsmokefl Æwild animalfl Æunclefl Æsawfl Æelevenfl Ætwentyfl
R-coloring is also involved in vowel harmony: if the second syllable of a compound or prefix + root form has r-coloring, in many cases the first syllable also takes on r-coloring. E.g.: (2.16) a. Ùuå Æfivefl + khefi Æhundredfl > Ùuåfi-khefi Æfive hundredfl23 b. me Ænotfl + wefi Æreducefl > mefi-wefi Æunceasinglyfl
36 The phonological system
This shows that r-coloring is feature of the vowel, and so is not a consonant phoneme (see §2.2.3). There are also cases where the vowel harmony works in the opposite fashion, that is, the vowel of the second (or third) syllable harmonizes with the vowel of the preceding syllable, as in the following examples involving loan words from Chinese that take the Qiang verb /p˙/ Æto dofl (see §3.1.1 on loan words): (2.17) a. Chinese zh\aog\u + Qiang p˙ Æto dofl > t®åuku-pu Ætake care offl b. Chinese w—ak«u + Qiang p˙ Æto dofl > Ùuåkhu-pu Æbe sarcastic offl
2.4.4. Epenthetic vowels While there are many consonant clusters in Qiang, there are restrictions on the type of clusters allowed by the syllable canon. When there is a collocation of consonants due to derivation or compounding that results in a cluster of consonants not allowed by the canon, an epenthetic vowel (/˙/) is inserted to break up the cluster. Following are some examples: (2.18) a. b. c. d. e.
di-t®hop-˙m stuåhå-b˙l-˙m b˙l-˙s-je b˙l-˙Â-mo-Ùu ≤iq-˙®
[illness-cure-NOM (< -m)] [rice, food-do-NOM (< -m)] [do-NOM (< -s)-good to eat] [do-CAUS (< -Â)-NEG-allow] [black-too (< -®)]
Ædoctorfl Æcook (n.)fl Æadvantageousfl Æhinderfl Ætoo blackfl
2.4.5. Assimilation In Section 2.1 it was mentioned that there is assimilation of the first consonant of a cluster in terms of voicing and place of articulation to that of the second consonant of the cluster, with the phonemically posited /®/ becoming [s] before /t/ and /d/, and [˚] before /pi/, /pe/, /bi/, /t˚/ and /d/, and all the preinitials becoming voiced before voiced initials. Aside from this we also find assimilation of /l/ to [n] when it follows a nasal in rapid speech, as in [themne], an alternate form of the 3pl pronoun [themle], in several tokens of the word [lefiwu] Æallfl in the Texts pronounced as [nefiwu] when it followed [-hån] Ækindfl (e.g.
Phonological processes 37
T5:54), and in several tokens of the definite marker /le/ in the Texts which were pronounced [ne], e.g. one token of [jin-ne:] (< /jin-le:/) Æmonkfls robefl in “The Story of a Lazy Man” (T5:163). Vowel harmony, both in the position of articulation and the retroflexion of the vowel, discussed in Section 2.4.3, is also a kind of assimilation.
2.4.6. Free variation Quite a number of lexical items in Qiang allow variation of the preinitial, initial, vowel, or final consonant. Examples:
phi® ± phi≈ ± phi mux‘u ± muπ‘u ®quat® ± ≈quat® qu˙t ± qu˙t˚ khesu ± khefisu
Æwhitefl Æsmokefl Æstealfl Æcoverfl Æeightyfl
≤iq ± ≤ix fut ± futs xupå ± fupå ®qu ± ≈qu
Æblackfl Æincensefl Æfurfl Æmouthfl
The most common of these is the /®/-/≈/ variation. There are also cases where there is variation not in the form of the final, but in whether there is a final or not, or whether there are two syllables or one, as in the following:
mutu ± mutup Æskyfl qhå ± qhåq Æbitterfl kåp ± kåp˙t® Æorphanfl
Chapter 3 The noun phrase
In Section 3.1 we discuss the syntax of the noun phrase and certain individual elements of the noun phrase, plus modifiers of nouns within the noun phrase. In Section 3.2 we discuss the various roles the noun phrase can have in the clause and the different types of marking it takes when it has those roles.
3.1. Structure The structure of the noun phrase is generally head-initial, though a genitive phrase or relative clause (or both) precedes the head noun. The maximum structure of a simple noun phrase is as in Figure 2: GEN phrase + Rel. clause + Noun + ADJ + DEM/DEF + (NUM + CL)/PL Figure 2. The structure of the Qiang noun phrase
Any combination of the above elements is possible, as long as they follow the order given above, though a numeral must be followed by a classifier. Classifiers also occur with demonstratives alone (i.e. without numerals). A demonstrative plus classifier expression, or an adjective plus (in)definite marking and classifier, or even (in)definite marking plus classifier alone, can be used alone as a noun phrase. Some items can be doubled, such as the adjective (no more than two can appear together24). When more than one adjective appears in a noun phrase, the relative order of the adjectives in terms of type of adjective (value, shape, quality, age, or color; see Dixon 1982) is the mirror image of that in English (i.e. HEAD^color^shape^age^quality^value), but the same if one thinks in terms of order relative to the head. Compare the examples in (3.1a-j).
40
(3.1)
The noun phrase
a. Ùuåt®å låpå ba bowl flowery big Æbig colorful bowlfl
b. få phi® dÂ˙ clothing white long Ælong white clothingfl
c. få phi® bå clothing white old Æold white clothingfl
d. få dÂ˙ bå clothing long old Æold long clothingfl
e. mianpåu phi® måt®å bread white soft Æsoft white breadfl
f. t®hets˙ xs˙ car new Ægood new carfl
g. xt®epi dÂ˙ nå knife long good Ænice long knifefl
h. s˙f po ti-wi tree thick DIR- tall Ætall thick treefl
i. stei xs˙ tse axe new sharp Æsharp new axefl
j. mi xs˙ tshimpe person new smart Æsmart young personfl
nå good
Modification of a noun by an adjective phrase can be done by either a non-nominalized post-head adjective, as in the examples in (3.1), or by a nominalized adjective in a pre-head relative clause structure. Whether a post-head adjective or a pre-head relative clause structure is used often depends on the complexity of the modifier: a complex modifier will appear in the pre-head relative clause structure, while the simple adjective will generally appear in the post-head position. Compare the following two examples: (3.2)
mi a. ˚t˚imi nå-t˚ heart good-GEN person Æ(a) good hearted personfl
b. mi nå person good Æ(a) good personfl
There is also a form where the head noun is followed by a nominalized adjective which is in apposition to the head, e.g. /mi ba-m/ [person bigNOM] Æa person, a big onefl (see §4.2.3).
Structure
41
The noun phrase may also be followed by postpositions and/or the topic marker (see §3.2). Following are some examples of complex noun phrases (the noun phrases are in brackets for clarity): (3.3)
lu-m ®pe th˙ xs˙-zi]-wu [nes yesterday come-NOM Tibetan that three-CL-AGT t®hets˙-le: de-˚t˚i-ji-t˚i. DIR-push-CSM-3pl car-DEF:CL ÆThose three Tibetans who came yesterday pushed the car away.fl
(3.4)
[qå p˙tsa-≤i z˙-p˙-t˚ ba: ≤iq tsa 1sg just.now-ADV DIR-buy-GEN cloth black this i-j˙-t®]-≥u˙≤i qå ÷~u de-le ˚t˚åq-lu-å . one-two-feet-TOP 1sg 2sg DIR-give heart-come-1sg ÆI want to give you these few feet of black cloth that I just bought.fl
(3.5)
[the:-t˚-t˚iÙuå bå the-zi] pienå-lå [Âåwå ba xs˙-zi] 3sg-GEN-house old that-CL beside-LOC rock big three-CL ®˙. exist ÆThere are three big rocks beside that old house of his.fl
(3.6)
i-p˙-l-˙m tu˙t®‘u-le:] [t˚ile n˙s 1pl yesterday DIR-arrive-come-NOM younger.brother-DEF:CL ≈umt®i ≥u˙. COP (name) ÆOur brother who returned yesterday was Xumt®i.fl
This last example has both a genitive phrase (though one not marked by the genitive postposition) and relative clause preceding the head noun. In some instances, an adverbial noun phrase is formed from a combination of a demonstrative and a numeral plus classifier or measure word. In these cases it is as if the demonstrative pronoun precedes the head, though it is the normal order for DEM + (NUM)-CL.25 (3.7)
a. tse Æthisfl + å Æonefl + p˙ Æyearfl > ts˙p Æthis yearfl b. the Æthatfl + å Æonefl + s˙ Ædayfl > thås Æthat dayfl
42
The noun phrase
c. tse Æthisfl + å Æonefl + i
Ætimefl > tsai
Ænowfl
It is also possible to have noun phrases in apposition to pronouns or other types of noun phrases where they specify the nature of the pronoun or first noun phrase, as in the following examples: (3.8)
a. t˚ile s˙t®huån mi 1pl Sichuan people Æwe/us Sichuan peoplefl
b. t˚ile le©z su-m 1pl book learn/teach-NOM Æwe/us scholars/teachersfl
(3.9)
Âm˙t®i-le: ≤å Âm˙t®i-s˙tsim jautsan emperor-DEF:CL COM emperor-wife man.eating.devil demi s˙-l . . . (T6:298-300) (name) DIR-look ÆThe emperor and his wife, the man-eating devil Demi, looked . . . fl
Kinship terms used with personal names follow this pattern as well (unlike the order found in Chinese), e.g. [upu-≈umt®i] ÆUncle Xumt®ifl. Noun phrases can be omitted if they are recoverable from the context. There is no system for distinguishing more important third person referents from less important ones, such as in an obviative/proximate system; there is only the topic/non-topic contrast (see §3.2.1), the person marking (see §4.3.2), and the definite/indefinite contrast (see §3.1.4). (See also the discussion of the pronoun /qupu/ in §3.1.2, below for something of an exception to this statement).
3.1.1. The noun The noun in Qiang may be defined as a free form that can be followed by an (in)definite marker26 and a numeral-classifier phrase or number marking, and is generally not predicative without the use of a copula. Some nouns can also take gender and diminutive marking. When acting as a noun phrase, they can be followed by the relational morphemes that are introduced in Section 3.2, and can appear as the complement of a copula clause. Aside from being the head of a noun phrase, nouns can be used to modify other nouns directly (appearing immediately before the modified noun) or in a genitive phrase (also pre-head, with or
Structure
43
without a genitive postposition). There does not seem to be any semantic restriction on the class of nouns (e.g. only words with concrete reference). In terms of structure, a noun may be as simple as a single monosyllable, or it may be a complex construction consisting of two nouns, one modifying the other, two tightly coordinated nouns, a nominalized verb, a noun plus classifier, or a noun plus verb combination. As in all Sino-Tibetan languages, in the case of compound nouns where one noun modifies the other, the modifying noun must always precede the modified noun, as in (3.10): (3.10) a. s˙-Ùuåt®å wood-bowl Æwooden bowlfl
b. bu-zd˙ plank-ladder Æplank ladderfl
c. pie-n˙s pig-bed Æpig-penfl
d. b˙-x® bee-manure Æhoneyfl
In the case of tightly coordinated nouns, no mark of coordination is used, and the two nouns simply appear one after the other, as in (3.11): (3.11) a. ep-ew father-mother Æparentsfl
b. tu-tuwa yngr.brother-older.brother Æbrothersfl
Lexicalized deverbal nouns are formed using one of two types of marking. The nominalizing suffix /-s/ is used to form instrumental, locative, and object nouns out of verbs: (3.12) a. b. c. d.
n˙ gu˙ dz˙ su˙suå
Æsleepfl Æwearfl Æeatfl Æcalculatefl
+ + + +
-s -s -s -s
NOM NOM NOM NOM
> > > >
n˙s gu˙s dz˙s su˙suås
Æbedfl Æclothingfl Ægrainfl Æabacusfl
In some cases a noun + verb combination is nominalized using the /-s/ suffix to form an instrumental noun phrase:
44
The noun phrase
(3.13) a. pies
+ qhua Æcutfl + -s piesqhuas Æclothingfl + jeji Æsewfl + -s b. få fåjejis + bie Æcarryfl + -s c. t˚ymi Æchildfl t˚ymi bies Æmeatfl
> Æchopping knifefl > Æneedle & threadfl > Æbaby strapfl
The nominalizing suffix /-m/ (< /mi/ Æmanfl) is added to a verb or noun + verb combination to form an agentive noun (this term from Comrie & Thompson 1985), that is, one which refers to an animate being, generally a person (Æone who . . .fl): Æhelpfl + -m > Ùuam Æservantfl (3.14) a. Ùua b. t˚iÙuå Æhousefl + le Æexistfl + -m > t˚iÙuålem Æoccupantfl NEG + q˙ Æhavefl + -m > maq˙m Æpauperfl c. ma Comrie & Thompson (1985) divide lexical nominalizations into two major categories, Æname of activity or statefl and Æname of an argumentfl, and divide the latter into six sub-types: Æagentive nounsfl, Æinstrumental nounsfl, Æmanner nounsfl, Ælocative nounsfl, Æobjective nounsfl, and Æreason nounsfl. Qiang does not seem to have any nominalizations of the Æname of activity or statefl type, and within the Æname of an argumentfl type have no Æmanner nounsfl or Æreason nounsfl formed by lexical nominalization have been found. Examples of the other types were given above. Nouns can also be formed from adjectives (reduplicated or not) by simply adding one of the definite markers after the adjective: > ≤iqle: Æthe black onefl (3.15) a. ≤iq Æblackfl + le: DEF:CL + te: DEF:CL > bate: Æthe big onefl b. ba Æbigfl + ke: INDEF:CL > tiwike: Æa tall onefl c. tiwi Ætallfl There are few clear examples of nouns formed from a noun plus a classifier in Qiang (though this method of forming nouns is found in other Sino-Tibetan languages, e.g. Chinese; see Chao 1968:396). One example is the word /t˚iså/ Æroomfl, from /t˚i/ Æhousefl plus /så/, the classifier for rooms and sections. The nouns formed from a noun plus verb combination without overt nominalization are sometimes straightforward, such as [s˙-ste] Æfire
Structure
45
tongsfl, from Æfirewoodfl + Æpick up with chopsticksfl, but often they involve a verb that is uniquely used for the action involving that noun, and it isnflt clear whether the noun was formed from a monosyllabic noun plus the verb, or the verb was formed from part of the original disyllabic noun. Most of the examples are natural phenomena. 27 Following are some examples: (3.16) a. b. c. d. e f.
mefix zd˙qhu ts˙på mefig‘u ˚i®ue lå(m)på
Æfrostfl Æfogfl Æicefl Æthunderfl Æmoonfl Æflowerfl
< me:fi < zd˙ < ts˙ < me:fi < ˚i < lå(m)
Ærainfl Æcloudfl Æwaterfl Ærainfl Æmoonfl Æflowerfl
+ khefi + qhu + på + gu + ®ue + på
Æfall (of frost)fl Ædescend (clouds)fl Æform (of ice)fl Æthunder (v.)fl Æbrightfl28 Æto bloomfl29
In each case the verb can follow the combined noun plus verb form, e.g. /ts˙på p˙/ Æto form icefl, /zd˙qhu do-qhu/ Æfog formedfl, /låmpå då-på/ Æflowers bloomedfl. There are many nouns which include an identifiable morpheme, but there is also an added final consonant relative to the usual form of the morpheme. This final consonant may be the result of compounding, though the rest of the original syllable has been lost, and so is no longer identifiable. In some cases, the form with the extra final consonant has the same or a very similar meaning to the plain form, but in some cases the meaning is quite different. The most common such finals are /-q/ and /-p/. The final /-q/ in many cases may be a remnant of /q˙/ Æheadfl. The use of a morpheme meaning Æheadfl in forming nouns would parallel the use of t|ou Æheadfl in Chinese, where it also sometimes changes the meaning of the root form and sometimes doesnflt, e.g. qu|an-t|ou [fisthead] Æfistfl, ch—î-t|ou [eat-head] Æthe quality of being good to eatfl. The suffix /-p/, as suggested by James A. Matisoff (p.c., 1997), may derive from the common Tibeto-Burman suffix *-pa. This is particularly likely in cases where the form with /-p/ refers to a type of person, as in (3.17a) and (3.17e), below. Following are more examples of both suffixes: (3.17) a. b. c. d.
t˚ip z˙p mutup duåp
Æmasterfl Æearth, groundfl Æskyfl Æthighfl
< t˚i < z˙ < mutu < duå
Æhousefl Æground, landfl Æskyfl Ælegfl
46
The noun phrase
e. f. g. h. i. j.
Ù˙fip m˙ziq-p˙ ji-såq qhåq ˚t˚åq-lu ®uaq
ÆHan personfl Ætalk in sleepfl Æfingerfl [hand-section] Æbitterfl Æthink of, wantfl Ælightfl
< Ù˙fi < m˙zi < så < qhå < ˚t˚i < ®ue
ÆHan personfl Æsleepfl Æsection, jointfl Æbitterfl Æheartfl Æbrightfl
There may even be related sets that have the same root but differ in terms of the finals, such as /liaq/ Æpenisfl and /lie®/ Æsperm, semenfl, though I do not have enough evidence to be sure of this sort of connection. Some nouns, particularly the names of some birds, are iconic with the sound the bird makes: /gug‘u/ Æpigeonfl, /kuput/ Æcuckoo birdfl, /˚t˚i˚t˚åq/ Æmagpiefl. Another type of iconic noun is a sound that represents an action, such as in /mi: ph˙q-ph˙q-p˙/ [eyes-ph˙q-ph˙q-do] Æto bat the eyes, blinkfl. This type is rather rare. A large number of loan words are also used by the Qiang people. The majority of these loan words are from Chinese (the Southwestern Mandarin dialect), as there has been substantial contact with Chinese since at least the thirteenth century (Sun 1988), but there are also some loan words from Tibetan. There are in fact two or more layers of loans from Chinese, as there are older, harder to identify loans, such as /lup/ Æradishfl (< Chinese l|uobo) and /lå/ Æwolffl (< Chinese l|ang), and newer, more transparent loans, such as /kunt®håntån/ Æcommunist partyfl (< Chinese g\ongch«and«ang). As shown by Sun (1988), there are differences in the phonology and use between the old and the new loans. The Tibetan loans are generally old loans, such as /sin/ (or /si≥gi/) Ælionfl (from Sanskrit, through Tibetan). This form is now being replaced by the Chinese loan /s˙ts˙/ (< sh—îzi) in the speech of the younger Qiang speakers. Tibetan loans are somewhat more frequent in the Qiang spoken by the Tibetans of Heishui County. The loan words which appear in the Glossary are identified as being from Chinese or Tibetan. (See also Liu 1981 on the Tibetan loans). When verbs (including stative verbs) are borrowed into Qiang, they are generally borrowed as nouns. In order to be used as verbs in Qiang, the suffix /-thå/ is added to monosyllabic borrowed verbs, and the verb /-p˙/ Æto dofl is added to polysyllabic borrowed verbs. Following are some examples:
Structure
(3.18) a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
tuen-thå ®˙-thå thåu-thå ≈uå-thå ˚un≤ian-p˙ tetsui-p˙ ph˙iphan-p˙ pethiåu-p˙
Æsquatfl Æspend (money)fl Æwash (rice)fl Æpaintfl Ætrainfl Æoffendfl Æcriticizefl Æchatfl
< < < < < < <
/ke:/. If a referent is known to the speaker, but not to the hearer, then the indefinite form is used; there is no difference in marking of specific vs. non-specific referents. Space relations between referents do not affect the form of the definite marking. Following are some examples of the differences in meaning the use of the markers can make: (3.42) a. the: sum-ke-ze (or -ke:) ≥u˙. 3sg teacher-INDEF-CL COP ÆHe is a teacher.fl b. the: sum-le: ≥u˙. 3sg teacher-DEF:CL COP ÆHe is the teacher.fl (3.43) a. qå pi-le: mefiÂa. 1sg pen-DEF:CL search:1sg ÆI am looking for the pen.fl
(< mefiÂ)
b. qå pi-å-lå mefiÂa. 1sg pen-one-CL search:1sg ÆI am looking for a pen.fl
(< mefiÂ)
(3.44) a. dytå: k˙-t˚ t®hets˙-e-ze Chengdu:LOC go-GEN car-one-CL (one of several cars) Æa car that is going to Chengdufl b. dytå: k˙-t˚ t®hets˙-le: Chengdu:LOC go-GEN car-DEF:CL (one specific car) Æthe car that is going to Chengdufl Following is the first part of one Qiang story, “An Orphan”, to show how the definite and indefinite markers are used in context. (3.45) qe:fi-qefi-tu before-before-LNK ≥u˙-kei-t˚u, COP-INF:HS -PART
kåp˙t®-kkou INT orphan-INDEF :one: CL ep l˙ me-Âi ew father also NEG -exist mother ¿ålå
62
The noun phrase
me-Âi-kke: ≥u˙-k˙i-t˚u. NEG -exist-INDEF:CL COP-INF:HS -PART l e : ¿ålå ®kup-l -≥u˙≤i ¿å-tsu RESULT INT orangutan-DEF:CL -TOP INT-here kåp˙t®-ttou dz˙ kånt˚hi-kui-t˚u, orphan-DEF:one:CL eat think/want-INF:HS-PART kåp˙t®-llou dz˙ kånt˚i: tu ¿ålå, orphan-DEF:one:CL eat think/want RESULT INT kåp˙t®-ttou g˙s-tå ¿å-xt®˙på:-j˙-tu orphan-DEF:one:CL night-LOC DIR-dark:PRS-REP-LNK qu-k˙p˙-k˙i-®, . . . (T3:1-7) be.afraid- HABIT-INF:HS-LNK ÆLong ago (there was) an orphan, one with no father or mother. The orangutan wanted to eat the orphan, wanted to eat the orphan, (so) the orphan was afraid at night, when it will get dark again, . . .fl ˙ also tu
In the first line the orphan is introduced with the /ke/ indefinite marker (in this case combined with the number Æonefl and a classifier into a single syllable), and in the second line, in giving a characterization of the orphan as a person with no father or mother, the indefinite marker is again used, but after that (in lines four and five) the two definite markers are interchangeably used in referring to this referent. It is interesting that the /®kup/ Æorangutanfl is not introduced into the story, but is assumed at its first mention to be accessible to the audience. The /®kup/ shows up in a lot of Qiang stories,37 and is the typical bogeyman, and so is known to all the Qiang. It is for this reason that it does not need to be introduced.
3.1.5. Numerals and quantifiers The cardinal numeral system is a simple decimal system, with Æonefl to Ætenfl being unique forms, Æelevenfl to Ænineteenfl being Ætenfl + Æonefl, etc., Ætwentyfl to Æninetyfl being Ætwofl + Ætenfl, etc., and the numerals in between being Ætwofl + Ætenfl + Æonefl, etc., though the forms for Ætenfl used in Æelevenfl to Ænineteenfl and Ætwentyfl and up are different: /hå/ is used for the former, and /su/ is used for the latter. The forms of the basic
Structure
63
numerals differ somewhat in word initial and non-initial position; most notable, the prefixes are dropped from Æthreefl, Æfourfl, Æsixfl, and Æninefl. As mentioned in §2.3, this is significant because more recent word formations generally preserve the prefixes of second syllables. The bisyllabic numerals then must have been formed and fossilized at a time before the prefixes became inseparable parts of the root morphemes. The element meaning Æfivefl in Æfifteenfl, [-≥‘u] more closely reflects the original form of the word Æfivefl in Proto-Tibeto-Burman (*b/l-≥å). It is unclear whether the initial /Ù-/ in /Ùuå/ is the original prefix and has preempted the initial, or is a reflex of the original initial *≥-. Counting of the numbers is done without classifiers: [å, j˙, xs˙, ©Â˙ . . .]. All of the forms are the original Qiang forms, except for Æzerofl and Æten thousandfl, which are Chinese loan words. There are variant forms for Æonefl ([dÂ˙ ± t®i]) which appear in Æelevenfl, Ætwenty-onefl, Æthirtyonefl, etc., a form for Ætwofl ([≤i]) which appears only in Ætwelvefl, and a form for Æthreefl ([si]) which appears only in Æthirteenfl. The forms [dÂ˙ ± t®i] and /-≤i/ representing Æonefl and Ætwofl in combinations seem to be more direct descendants of the Proto-Tibeto-Burman forms *g-tik & *gtyak and *g-ni-s/k respectively (the reconstructed forms are from Matisoff 1997). Following are the basic numbers and combinations: (3.46) lin å j˙ xs˙ ©Â˙ Ùuå
hådÂi ± håt®i hå≤i håsi hå hå≥‘u håt®‘u hå˚ håkhefi håg‘u jusu
Æzerofl Æonefl Ætwofl Æthreefl Æfourfl Æfivefl
≈t®u ˚t˚˙ khefi ± khe38 Âgu˙ hot˚u
Æsixfl Æsevenfl Æeightfl Æninefl Ætenfl
Æelevenfl Ætwelvefl Æthirteenfl Æfourteenfl Æfifteenfl Æsixteenfl Æseventeenfl Æeighteenfl Ænineteenfl Ætwentyfl
jusut®i jusuj˙ jusuxs˙ xsusu ©Âusu Ùosu ≈t®usu ˚t˚usu khesu ± khefisu Âgusu
Ætwenty-onefl Ætwenty-twofl Ætwenty-threefl Æthirtyfl Æfortyfl Æfiftyfl Æsixtyfl Æseventyfl Æeightyfl Æninetyfl
64
The noun phrase
e-khe ± e-khefi 100 e-khe-≤å-e:(eze) 101
å-stu å-Ùuan
1,000 10,000
There are no ordinal numerals in Qiang; only Æthe most front onefl (= Æthe first onefl), Æthe one after this (one)fl (= Æthe next onefl), Æthe one after thatfl (= Æthe third onefl), and Æthe last onefl have special forms, but they do not involve the use of numbers. (3.47) a. b. c. d.
t˚i-q˙:fi-le: ts˙-steke-le: th˙-steke-le: t˚i-steke-le:
(most-front-DEF:CL) (this-back-DEF:CL ) (that-back-DEF:CL) (most-back-DEF:CL )
Æthe first onefl Æthe second/next onefl Æthe third onefl Æthe last onefl
Above the first three, the cardinal numbers plus classifiers are used as ordinal numbers, e.g. /©Â˙-ze/ (Æfourfl + classifier) Æthe fourth (one)fl (= Æfour (of something)fl). Following are some other quantifiers: (3.48) a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.
mifiwu [person:all] å-hå [one-pl] e-ze [one-CL] e-ze e-ze [one-CL] å-zå ± å-z˙ [one- CL] ˙izi [one:two:CL] å-i [one-time] hodu-ma-xt®e a®pala i©i-l˙ lefiwu [pl:all] ®˙®e:fiwu [exist:REDUP:all] ¿å:n
Æeach onefl Æsome/a few (number)fl Æanyonefl Æone by onefl Æa little, some (quantity)fl Æseveralfl Æa little whilefl Æten oddfl Æsomewherefl Æwhat also; anythingfl Æeveryone/body; allfl39 Æeverything; allfl Æaboutfl
The modifier [å:n ± ¿å:n] Æaboutfl follows a numeral expression: (3.49) ©Âusu-≤å-å-≈åu-¿å:n t®uå. fourty-and-one-size-about wear(shoes):1sg ÆI wear about a size 41 (of shoes).fl
(< t®u˙)
Structure
65
3.1.6. Classifiers and measure words Classifiers are necessary whenever a number, demonstrative pronoun or (in)definite marker is used, though often the classifier is simply reflected in a long vowel on the demonstrative pronoun or (in)definite marker. The long vowel can represent almost any classifier. That is, there is a neutralization of classifiers in rapid speech when the classifier is replaced by the lengthened vowel. Only one classifier can be used with a noun at any one time. The classifiers in Qiang are not used to mark specific referents the way they are in, for example, Cantonese, though a number plus classifier can be used without a head noun to refer to a referent (see §3.1.5). The classifiers can be divided semantically into measure words and sortal classifiers, depending on whether they represent quantities rather than forms/functions, but syntactically they pattern in the same way. A number of both types, particularly measure words, are clearly related to nouns, e.g. /qu/ Æmouthfulfl < /®qu/ Æmouthfl, /t®å/ Æbowlfullfl < /t®å/ Æbowlfl; /så/ Æclassifier for sectionsfl < /såq/ Æjointfl. Following is a list of some common classifiers (the form of the number Æonefl is given with each classifier to show how it varies due to harmony with the vowel of the classifier—the vowels of all of the numbers from Æonefl to Ætenfl, except for Æsixfl, Æeightfl, and Æninefl harmonize with the vowel of the classifier; numbers above ten do not harmonize with the classifier): (3.50) e-ze
å-lå å-på e-x®e e-tue e-tsi o-u
General (default) classifier, used for people, houses, belts, and many other types of objects, particularly if one is unsure of the usual classifier used. Used for stick-like, long, thin objects, and clothes (native word). Used for long stick-like objects (where the stick is a handle, e.g. a broom; < Chinese b«a). Used for one item of things that usually come in pairs, such as shoes and chopsticks. One pair (< Chinese d\ui). One pair (native word). Used generally for (small) round objects (such as steamed bread), but in some cases also for people (with the same semantics as [eze]).
66
The noun phrase
å-w
Used for piles of things (cf. the verb /b˙/ Æto pilefl which becomes [w˙ ± w] when there is a prefix, e.g. [t˙w] Æpiledfl).40 å-t® Used only for people (there seems to be no difference in the semantics or occasion of use of the three classifiers that can be used for people, though there is a difference in frequency, with [eze] being the most frequent). e-pe One bowl (of something). å-t®å One bowl (of something) (< /t®å/ Æwooden bowlfl). o-Âgu One tree. o-pu One liter (of something). å-z˙ A little bit (of something). e-fi ± πi Used for flat, thin things, such as a leaf. e-pi The form for a unit of currency (< Chinese b\î). Used for a family of people. o-qpi e-kue Used for a backload of things (< /kue/ Æto transportfl). å-q˙ Used for a string of small things, such as beads. å-qu˙t One bushel (of something). å-så One clause or other stretch of speech (< /så/ Æsoundfl). o-xo One box (of something) (possibly < Chinese h|e). Used for sections (e.g. room of a house), joints (cf. å-så /såq/ Æjointfl). å-t‘u One handspan, thumb to tip of extended middle finger (< PTB *twa). One fathom (finger to finger with arms outstretched). e-ze å-p(˙) One year (of time/age). å-Ùuå One step (cf. /Ùuåtsi/ Æto step over/acrossfl). Also used as a classifier for houses in some dialects (e.g. Qugu). e-®e One lifetime. å-s One day. å-˚(˙) One month. o-lu One ounce (< Chinese li«ang). One volume (< Chinese b«en). e-pen e-phin One bottle (< Chinese p|îng). Used for flat things, like tables (< Chinese zh—ang). a-t®ån One catty (a unit of 500 grams) (< Chinese j—în). å-t˚ One can/bottle (< /q˙p/ Æbottlefl). å-q˙p
Structure
å-g‘u‘˙ o-Âbu å-hån
67
One backbasketful (cf. /gua≈ga/ Æbackbasketfl); also used as a classifier for houses. One team (of people). One kind/type (sometimes pronounced [≈ån]).
Of the two words for Æpairfl, /tsi/ is used for shoes, chopsticks, and (legs of) pants, while /tue/ is used for earrings and bracelets. Some of the classifiers are borrowed from Chinese. A borrowed word will not necessarily take a borrowed classifier, though. Where the semantics of the Chinese word fit a native classifier, then a native classifier will be used. There are also cases where a native Qiang word is used with a borrowed classifier. Following are examples of these different possibilities. Qiang word-Qiang classifier: (3.51) a. wets e-tsi chopsticks one-pair Æone pair of chopsticksfl
b. khu˙ e-ze dog one-CL Æone dogfl
c. jåpå e-x®e hand one-CL Æone handfl Qiang word-Chinese classifier: (3.52) a. dzig‘u e-pi money one-CL Æone dollarfl c. tolu å-på broom one-CL Æone broomfl
b. l˙©z e-pen book one-CL Æone bookfl
68
The noun phrase
Chinese word-Qiang classifier: (3.53) a. phi˚ye e-tsi leather.boot one-CL Æa pair of leather bootsfl
b. thånts˙ e-ze blanket one-CL Æone blanketfl
c. pi: å-lå pen one-CL Æone penfl Chinese word-Chinese classifier: (3.54) a. phinko å-t˚ apple one-catty Æone catty of applesfl
b. t®uåts å-t®ån table one-CL Æone tablefl
c. phit˚˙u e-phin beer one-bottle Æone bottle of beerfl Verbal action classifiers precede the verb they modify. They are often derived from the verbs themselves, as in the case of (3.55c,d) below. Following are some examples (verb forms that might be used with these classifiers are given in imperative form in parentheses in the normal word order): (3.55) a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
å-® (ulu) o-qu (˙t˚) e-≈¬i (t˙≈¬i) å-t®u (˙t®‘u) å-xui (˙k) a-i (uz‘ulu) e-zdue (¿ån)
Æ(come in) one timefl Æ(eat) one bitefl (cf. ®qu Æmouthfl) Æ(hit) one timefl Æ(kick) one timefl Æ(go) one timefl (< Chinese h|ui) Æ(wait) a little whilefl Æ(sleep) one timefl
Structure
69
3.1.7. Number marking Number marking on nouns involves only singular and plural. Singular is unmarked. There are two plural markers, /å-hå/ [one-pl] Æa fewfl, which is used for the vast majority of referent types, and [le] (< ©le Æfewfl), which is used only on pronouns, kinship terms, and some nouns referring to people. Following are examples of these latter two uses (see §3.1.2 for its use with pronouns): (3.56) a. åp˙-le Ægrandfathersfl
b. upu-le Æunclesfl
c. it˚i-le Æauntsfl
d. t˚ymi-le Æchildrenfl
The full form of this latter marker, /©le/, appears only after the definite marker (possibly because the reduced form of the plural marker has the same form as the definite marker—the two are distinguished by the fact that the definite marker is followed by a classifier or has a long vowel), e.g. /t˚ymi-le-©le/ (child-DEF-pl) Æthe childrenfl, /wut®hu-pu-m-le-©le/ (help-do-NOM-DEF-pl) Æthe helpersfl; in all other cases the form is [le]. Aside from this use of [le] (/©le/), there is no animate vs. inanimate or other distinction in plural marking, all types take /å-hå/. The plural marker follows the definite marker or demonstrative pronoun, if there is one. It was mentioned in § 3.1.4 above that the vowel of the definite/indefinite marker is supplanted by the /å/ of /å-hå/, becoming [låhå], [tåhå], or [kåhå]; this is true also of the demonstrative pronouns, e.g. /the/ + /å-hå/ > [thåhå]. When there is no definite marker or demonstrative pronoun, /å-hå/ can be used alone. Following are some examples of the use of /å-hå/:
qå (3.57) a. qhål-lå-hå steamed.bun-DEF:one-pl 1sg ÆGive me the steamed buns.fl
de-l. DIR-give
b. qhål-thå-hå qå de-l. steamed.bun-that:one-pl 1sg DIR-give ÆGive me those steamed buns.fl
(< le)
70
The noun phrase
c. qhål-lå-hå je-wa. steamed.bun-DEF:one-pl delicious-very ÆThe steamed buns are very delicious.fl d. the: qhål-å-hå z˙-p. 3sg steamed.bun-one-pl DIR-buy ÆHe bought some steamed buns.fl A less prototypical use of the plural marking is when it follows a proper name in order to refer to that person Æand othersfl, as in the following example:
upu-b˙s-lå-hå-≥u˙≤i ˚i (3.58) t˚iquå-lå inside-LOC uncle-snake-DEF:one-pl-TOP liquor t®he-k˙i-st~u, (T4:57-58) drink-INF:HS-PART ÆUncle Snake and others are drinking inside.fl Plural marking is not used when a numeral + classifier phrase is used, and when plural marking is used, there is only one token of the number marking within a noun phrase. That is, there is no number marking on adjectives in agreement with nouns. In a noun phrase containing two coordinated plural noun phrases there may be one token of the plural at the end of the total noun phrase or one token at the end of each of the two coordinated noun phrases, e.g. [pu≤u (lå-hå) ≤å khu˙ lå-hå] (cat-(DEF:one-pl) COM dog DEF:one-pl) Æthe cats and the dogsfl. Number marking on verbs is part of the person marking system (see §4.3.2) and unrelated to this system.
3.2. Nominal relational morphology In this section we discuss the forms and uses of relational morphology, essentially postpositions, which express relations between the verb and its arguments or between the arguments themselves, but also word order. In this section we are only dealing with marking which appears on the noun phrase; for relational morphology marked on the verb, see Section 4.3.
Nominal relational morphology
71
The semantic and pragmatic roles of the major arguments of a clause are mainly expressed by word order and postpositions. Postpositions are used for marking some topics, some agents, instruments, genitives, goals, recipients, locatives, ablatives, allatives, perlatives, temporal expressions, comitatives, and comparatives, among others. There is no vocative marking postposition. Postpositions are generally used alone, but there are some instances where a locative and the ablative postposition, or a semantic postposition (e.g. a locative postposition) and the topic marker, are used together. The postpositions are enclitic on the noun phrase, that is, they follow whatever elements appear in the noun phrase and generally form a phonological unit with the noun phrase. The use of postpositions after nominalized verbs or clauses is the same as after non-derived nouns and noun phrases. Below we will discuss each of the roles a noun phrase can play in a clause, and its marking when it has that role. See Section 3.2.22 for a form-function summary of the relational marking.
3.2.1. Topic The topic is the first noun phrase or postpositional phrase in a clause, regardless of its semantic role, and sometimes there is a secondary topic after the first topic. If there are two topics, one is usually a scene-setting temporal or locative adverbial phrase. The topic may be a lexical noun, a pronoun, or a nominalized sentential complement (with or without overt nominalization marking). It is optional to use the topic marker /≥u˙≤i/ after a topic, and when there are multiple topics it is possible for there to be marking on the second topic and not the first, as in (3.59b), below, or on both topics, as in (3.59c-d). That is, there could be no overt topic marking on any topic, or there could be marking only on the first topic, or marking only on the second, or marking on both, depending on which topic(s) the speaker wants to emphasize. This marking is unlike the other types of marking to be discussed below, as it marks a pragmatic rather than a semantic status. Following are some examples of its use:
72
The noun phrase
(3.59) a. dÂ˙-≥u˙≤i qå the:-tå affair-TOP 1sg 3sg-LOC ÆI told him about the affair.fl
k˙-ji-wå. thus-say-3sgU:1sg
b. t˚iquå-lå upu-b˙s-lå-hå-≥u˙≤i ˚i inside-LOC uncle-snake-DEF:one-pl-TOP liquor t®he-k˙i-st~u, . . . (T4:57-58) drink-INF:HS-PART ÆUncle Snake and others are drinking inside, . . .fl c. tså-tåu-tu-≥u˙≤i kåp˙t®-tou-≥u˙≤i this:one-time-LNK-TOP orphan-DEF:one:CL-TOP tså-≈safiwu gul ¿e-se-kei-stu . . . (T3:79-80) this:one-few:all friend DIR-make-INF:HS-PART ÆThis time, the orphan had made friends with all these, . . .fl d. t˚iquå-lå-≥u˙≤i t˚y-le:-≥u˙≤i Ùoi-k˙-m inside-LOC-TOP chicken-DEF:CL-TOP call-go-NOM he-˚i-kui-st~u, . . . (T4:25-26) DIR-send-INF: HS-PART Æ(Uncle Snake) while inside sent the chicken to come and call, . . . fl There may even be three topics marked in a clause, as in (3.60) (in this case the first topic is marked by position alone, while the second and third are marked by the topic marker):
å-s-meqå-≥u˙≤i ≤iu-≥u˙≤i (3.60) må:-le:-wu Mom-DEF:CL-AGT one-day-each-TOP wool-TOP å-s pån-t˚in-wu pån-t˚in t˙-t®h˙-≤i . . . one-day half-kilo-INST half-catty DIR-weigh- ADV ÆEach day Mom (takes) half a catty of wool and weighs it (to make yarn balls).fl The topic may also be a clausal complement or complex noun phrase in sentence-initial position. In this case it may or may not be followed by the topic marker:
Nominal relational morphology
73
(3.61) a. [÷~u p˙s må-k] ¿e-m˙-si. NEG -go DIR-NEG -allow 2sg today ÆYou cannot not go today.fl (lit.: ÆYour not going is not allowed.fl)
qå b. [p˙tsa-≤i-z˙-p˙-ji-pån˙-lå-hå]-≥u˙≤i just.now-ADV-DIR-buy-CSM-thing-DEM:one-pl-TOP 1sg the: de-l-wå. (< le + w˙ + å) DIR-give-3sg U:1sg 3sg ÆI gave him the things that were just bought.fl There is also a “double topic” construction similar to that described for Chinese and Japanese, where there is a genitive or part-whole relation between the first and second topics, and in this case it is possible to have a topic marker after the first noun phrase in the construction:41 (3.62) the:-≥u˙≤i s˙kue 3sg-TOP stomach ÆHis stomach hurts.fl
di. pain
The topic marker is often used for contrastive topics, as in (3.63) (from T6:17-18): (3.63) pit˚-≥u˙≤i Âm˙t®i ®pi-®, q˙:fi-≥u˙≤i juånÙuåi Âm˙. now-TOP emperor call-LNK before-TOP yuanwai be.named ÆNow hefls called emperor; in the past, he was called yuanwai.fl In a noun phrase with a numeral expression modifying the head, the topic marker can appear between the head and the numeral expression, as in (3.64):
z˙-p-≤i t˚aÙa-lå (3.64) Âb˙-≥u˙≤i xs˙-zi yak-TOP three-CL DIR-buy-ADV cowpen-LOC ¿å-dy-≤i Âi-Â˙-kui-t˚u, . . . (T5:69-70) DIR-tether- ADV exist-CAUS-INF: HS-PART Æ(He) had three yaks (he) had bought and tethered in the cowpen.fl
74
The noun phrase
In the sections to follow, we will state whether the noun phrase representing the particular role being discussed can be followed by the topic marker or not.
3.2.2. Single direct argument of an intransitive verb The single direct argument of an intransitive verb is the only argument that is semantically necessary for the verb to be used in a clause. All other arguments are oblique arguments, are optional, and when present in a clause, are marked by some sort of relational morphology showing their non-direct status. The direct argument of an intransitive verb can be of at least two different semantic types, actor (including experiencer) or undergoer. In Qiang clauses where there is an intransitive verb, the single direct argument always precedes the verb, and is often in sentence-initial position, but may be preceded by a temporal or locative adverb(ial). There is no word order difference based on information structure (as is found, e.g. in Italian and Chinese, where the direct argument of an intransitive verb can occur after rather than before the verb if that argument is not topical). The single direct argument of an intransitive verb is generally a topic, and so can be followed by the topic marker /≥u˙≤i/, but no semantically based marking can be used, whether the argument is an actor or an undergoer (e.g., neither the agentive marker /-wu/ or the dative /-tå/ can be used with the single argument of an intransitive verb, though the locative and ablative markers can be used for a second non-direct argument). There is no difference whether the noun phrase is a pronoun or a lexical noun. Following are examples of agentive and non-agentive arguments: Agentive:
t˚˙u-lå kå:. (3.65) qå go:PRS:1sg 1sg home-LOC ÆIflm going to go home.fl
(< k˙)
(3.66) the: j˙ts-le:-tå o-zu. 3sg chair-DEF:CL -LOC DIR-sit ÆHe sat down on the chair.fl
(< dzu)
Nominal relational morphology
75
(3.67) a. the: t˚y-tå-wu ¿o-≈su. 3sg building-LOC-ABL DIR-jump ÆHe jumped from a/the building.fl b. the: ts˙-Ùå Ùlu. 3sg water-LOC swim ÆHe is swimming in the river.fl Non-agentive: (3.68) a. khuåÙl-le: die-®e. puppy-DEF:CL DIR-die ÆThe puppy died.fl (3.69) a. me:fi de-˚i! rain DIR-fall ÆItfls raining!fl
b. m˙ ≈qå. sky clear ÆThe sky is clear.fl
c. m˙si ˙-ts‘u. sun DIR-shine ÆThe sun is out.fl (3.70) the: t˚y-tå-wu d˙q 3sg building-LOC-ABL floor ÆHe fell down from a/the building.fl
¿å-l˙. DIR-come
It is also possible to have a non-referential/impersonal subject, but again the marking (i.e., the lack of postposition, the word order) is the same:
wu-≥uå, (3.71) mi people many-Q ÆAre there many people?fl
mo-wu-≥uå? NEG -many-Q
One subtype of intransitive clause is an exception to the rule given above in that it has two unmarked noun phrases. This is the double-topic construction mentioned in §3.2.1, for example (3.62), above, and (3.72a-b), below. Even though there are two unmarked noun phrases,
76
The noun phrase
the clause is intransitive, as the primary topic of the clause is not acting on the secondary topic, but instead has a possessive relation with it. Although there is a possessive relation between the referents of, for example, [the:] Æhefl and [q˙påt®] Æheadfl in (3.72a) (the two topics), no genitive marking can appear between the two noun phrases, so they cannot be considered a single noun phrase. The latter noun phrase, while part of a comment about the primary topic, also cannot be considered part of the predication, as if an adverb is added to the predicate, it would follow the secondary topic, not precede it. (3.72) a. the: q˙påt® di. 3sg head ache ÆHe has a headache.fl
b. the: ku ®å. 3sg stomach runs ÆHe has diarrhea.fl
3.2.3. Actor of a transitive verb The actor of a transitive or ditransitive verb is the argument that performs, either volitionally or not, or experiences the action or state specified by the verb. Depending on the semantics of the verb and the context, the actor may be agentive, or it may be non-agentive, i.e., a force, an effector, or an experiencer. In both transitive and ditransitive clauses, if the word order is , that is, when the actor is the topic, then the noun phrase representing the actor need not take any agentive marking. With few exceptions, this is true regardless of whether the noun phrase is a noun or a pronoun, or whether the referent is first, second, or third person, or whether the argument is agentive or non-agentive, and is true for all aspects. The topic marker can be used after the noun phrase, though, to emphasize the topical nature of the actor referent. The person marking on the verb generally reflects the person and number of the actor, regardless of whether the actor is agentive or non-agentive. Following are some examples:
Nominal relational morphology
77
Agentive: (3.73) a. the: påut®˙ tse. 3sg newspaper look.at/read ÆHe is reading a/the newspaper.fl b. qå påut®˙ tsa. 1sg newspaper look.at/read:1sg ÆI am reading a/the newspaper.fl
(< tse + å)
påut®˙ tse-n. c. ÷~u 2sg newspaper look.at/read-2sg ÆYou are reading a/the newspaper.fl (3.74) qå stuåhå 1sg rice/food ÆI am eating.fl
t˚hå. eat:1sg
Â˙t˚håq-e-ze (3.75) ≈umt®i Xumt®i rabbit-one-CL ÆXumt®i killed a rabbit.fl
(< t˚h˙)
¿å-t®. DIR-pierce(kill)
(3.76) a. the: få ≈u˙lå. 3sg clothes wash ÆHe is washing clothes.fl
b. the: s˙ gue. 3sg firewood chop ÆHe is chopping firewood.fl
Non-agentive: (3.77) a. ≈umt®i khumtsi42 Xumt®i Khumtsi ÆXumt®i likes Khumtsi.fl b. qå khumtsi 1sg Khumtsi ÆI like Khumtsi.fl
topu. like
topu-å. like-1sg
78
The noun phrase
c. ÷~u khumtsi topu-n. 2sg Khumtsi like-2sg ÆYou like Khumtsi.fl (3.78) qå the:-t˚-Â˙wå me-˚t˚a. 1sg 3sg-GEN-word NEG -believe:1sg ÆI donflt believe what he says.fl (3.79) the: is˙u 3sg sneeze ÆHe sneezed.fl
(< ˚t˚e)
p˙. do
There is an agentive marking postposition /-wu/, but generally only when there is marked word order, or when there is a need to emphasize the agentivity of the actor, is the agentive marker used after the noun phrase representing the actor, as in the following example:
pi:-xs˙-lå sum-wu de-l-ji ≥u˙. (3.80) the:-t˚ 3sg-GEN pen-three-CL teacher-AGT DIR-give-CSM COP ÆThe teacher gave him three pens.fl In this example, because the noun phrase representing the actor is not in the clause-initial topic position, in order to avoid ambiguity in the assignment of actor status (especially as the actor and recipient are both third-person singular referents, so person marking on the verb is of no assistance in identifying the actor), the agentive marker /-wu/ must appear after /sum/ Æteacherfl. Consider the following two clauses:
khumtsi (3.81) a. ≈umt®i-(wu) khumtsi ≈umt®i-(AGT) Æ≈umt®i hit Khumtsi.fl b. khumtsi ≈umt®i-wu khumtsi ≈umt®i-AGT ÆKhumtsi was hit by ≈umt®i.fl
z˙-d˙-u. DIR-hit-VIS
(< dete)
z˙-de-u. DIR-hit-VIS
(< dete)
Nominal relational morphology
79
In (3.81a), it is not necessary to have the agentive marker after the noun phrase representing the actor. If it is used, it is to emphasize that ≈umt®i, and not someone else, is the actor. In (3.81b), as the noun phrase representing the actor is not in initial position, the agentive marker must be used. (This is not a passive clause, but the English passive translation comes closest to approximating the pragmatics of the word order difference.) This agentive marker can only be used on the actor of transitive clauses; it cannot be used in intransitive clauses. As there has been no grammaticalization of a passive construction in Qiang (in the sense of a construction in which the actor of the verb does not appear as a direct argument and the verb is intransitve), in order to take the undergoerfls perspective in presenting an action, generally the noun phrase representing the undergoer will be put in the clause-initial topic position, and possibly take the topic-marking postposition.43 In this case the noun phrase representing the actor must take the agentive marking, otherwise the meaning might be unclear. In this regard, compare the following three clauses:
dete. (3.82) a. the: qå 3sg 1sg hit ÆHe is hitting me.fl b. qå the:-wu z˙-de. DIR-hit 1sg 3sg-AGT ÆI was hit by him.fl
(< dete)
c. the: qå-wu z˙-da. DIR-hit:1sg 3sg 1sg-AGT ÆHe was hit by me.fl
(< dete)
In some cases, even when the word order is actor-undergoer, if the flow of action is marked (e.g. a third person referent is acting on a first person referent), or if the actor is inanimate, then agent marking is often used for clarity, as in the following examples:
qå (3.83) mi-wu person-AGT 1sg ÆSomebody hit me.fl
z˙-di. DIR-hit
80
The noun phrase
(3.84) moÙu-wu qå då-tu˙-Â-(®å). wind-AGT 1sg DIR-fall.over-CAUS-1sgU ÆThe wind knocked me over.fl (3.85) tsh˙må-wu qå-doquq-tå thorn-AGT 1sg-foot-LOC ÆA thorn pierced my foot.fl
˙-t®-(®å). DIR-pierce-1sgU
These last two examples are evidence that non-animate actors can take the agentive marker /-wu/, so the condition on the use of /-wu/ is not related to volitionality. (In these two examples there is no need to mark the number or definiteness of the actor, and the 1sg non-actor marking is not obligatory; it would be used only for emphasizing onefls affectedness.) If on the other hand the semantic relations are clear given the nature of the referents and the action involved, then even with marked word order the agent marking is not necessary, as in the following example:
qå z˙-p-ji ≥u˙. (3.86) khu˙-le: dog-DEF:CL 1sg DIR-buy-CSM COP ÆThe dog was bought by me. / It was me who bought the dog.fl People buy dogs, dogs do not buy people, so even with marked word order and no agentive marking, the relationship between the two referents is still clear. In many cases it is possible to omit the noun phrase representing the actor, particularly when the person and number of the actor and/or a non-actor animate argument are reflected on the verb (see §4.3.2). Following are some examples where there is no noun phrase representing an actor, but there is non-actor marking: (3.87) a. qå de-®å 1sg hit-1sgU ÆI was hit (by him).fl c. the: de-w 3sg hit-3sgU ÆHe was hit (by him).fl
b. ÷~u de-sån 2sg hit-2sgU ÆYou were hit (by him).fl
Nominal relational morphology
81
3.2.4. Topic of a copula clause The nature of the initial noun phrase of an equational (identifying) or attributive copula clause is quite different from the direct argument of an intransitive verb or the actor of a transitive verb, in that it has no semantic role, only a pragmatic role, that of topic, but the formal treatment of this argument in Qiang does not differ from that of the direct argument of an intransitive verb. The noun phrase representing this referent must appear in clause-initial position, and no semanticallybased postpositions can be used after the noun phrase. Only the topic marker can be used, as in (3.88) (see also (3.129) below). (3.88) the:-≥u˙≤i ®pe 3sg-TOP Tibetan ÆHe is a Tibetan.fl (3.89) qå sum 1sg teacher ÆI am a teacher.fl
≥u˙. COP
≥uå. COP:1sg
(3.90) l˙©z-tse-pen qå-t˚ book-this-CL 1sg-GEN ÆThis book is mine.fl
(< ≥u˙)
≥u˙. COP
There is no formal difference between identificational and attributive copula clauses other than the addition of the definite marking in the case of the former. Compare (3.89) above (an attributive) with the following identificational clause:
sum-le: (3.91) qå 1sg teacher- DEF:CL ‘I am the teacher.’
≥uå. COP:1sg
(< ≥u˙)
3.2.5. Undergoer of a transitive verb The undergoer of a transitive verb is often within the focus of the information structure, and so the noun phrase representing the
82
The noun phrase
undergoer often appears in the immediately preverbal focus position, following the noun phrases representing the actor and any locative and temporal adverbs. Less commonly it appears in the clause-initial topic position. In this case the noun phrase may be followed by the topic marker. Other than this, the noun phrase representing the undergoer of a transitive verb, whether it is a topic or part of the focus, is definite or indefinite, whether it is a pre-existing referent or one created by the action of the verb, generally does not take any marking of its undergoer status. (In the following examples the noun phrase representing the undergoer is underlined.)
ts˙-p xs˙-p (3.92) the: 3sg this-year three-years ÆHe is three years old this year.fl (lit.: ÆHe (now) has three years.fl)
le-ji. exist-CSM
(3.93) the: qhål-xs˙-zi 3sg steamed.bun-three-CL ÆHe ate three steamed buns.fl
s˙-dz˙-ji. DIR-eat-CSM
(3.94) the: l˙©z-j˙-pen 3sg book-two-CL ÆHe read two books.fl
i-tsi-ji. DIR-look.at/read- CSM
(3.95) the: l˙©z-th˙-j˙-pen 3sg book-that-two-CL ÆHe read those two books.fl
(< tse44)
i-tsi-ji. DIR-look.at/read- CSM
(3.96) the: l˙©z-th˙-j˙-pen lefiwu i-tsi-ji. 3sg book-that-two-CL all DIR-look.at/read- CSM ÆHe read both of those two books.fl (3.97) l˙©z-th˙-j˙-pen the: book-that-two-CL 3sg ÆThose two books he read.fl
i-tsi-ji. DIR-look.at/read- CSM
Nominal relational morphology
(3.98) qå t˚ymi-t˚-q˙i 1sg child-GEN -voice ÆI heard a/the childfls voice.fl
˙-må. DIR-hear:1sg
83
(< m˙)
(3.99) ≈umt®i the:-t˚-t®i-le: ¿å-t˙˚t˚y-≤i ≈umt®i 3sg-GEN-child-DEF:CL DIR-take-ADV upu-t˚-t˚˙u-lå k˙. uncle-GEN -house-LOC go Æ≈umt®i took his son to (his) unclefls house.fl (lit.: ÆTaking his son (he) went to unclefls house.fl) (3.100) the:-t˚-doqu-le: Âo:pu-e-ze hole-one-CL 3sg-GEN-pants-DEF:CL ÆThere is now a hole in his pants.fl
de-w. (< we) DIR-exist
Non-referential/non-specific object: (3.101) the: gue:fi-pienå-lå bi ˚e. 3sg road-side-LOC urine release ÆHefls urinating on the side of the road.fl Stimulus of a cognitive verb (T3:90-91): (3.102) p˙-maha-≥u˙≤i ®kup-te: mo-qu-å. day-evening-TOP orangutan-DEF:CL NEG -be.afraid-1sg ÆTonight (I) am not afraid of the orangutan.fl The one exception to the lack of marking of the undergoer of a transitive verb is when the undergoer is animate and the noun phrase representing the actor does not have agentive marking, so there might be confusion of which referent is the actor and which is the undergoer. In this case the dative/allative marker /-tå/ can be used after the noun phrase representing the undergoer to disambiguate the actor from the undergoer or emphasize the undergoer, as in the following examples:
qå-tå (3.103) the: 3sg 1sg-DAT ÆHe is hitting me!fl
de! hit
84
The noun phrase
(3.104) khu˙-le: qå-tå dog-DEF:CL 1sg-DAT ÆThe dog bit me.fl (3.105) x®e-le: ÷~u-tå bull-DEF:CL 2sg-DAT ÆThe bull gored you.fl
¿a-ÙdÂe-®å. DIR-bite-1sgU
˙-t˙-sån. DIR-gore-2sgU
In example (3.102) above about being afraid of the orangutan, no undergoer marking was necessary, as there is no possibility (in the story) of the orangutan being afraid of the young boy (the orphan). There is no change in the transitivity of the clause with the use of this marking (even though it is often used to mark peripheral arguments), as its use here is purely to distinguish semantic roles. While generally it is used when the agentive marking is not used, the two markers can appear in the same clause. For example, (3.103) could also have the agentive marker /-wu/ after the noun phrase representing the actor. We can see the locative origins of this marking in examples that straddle the line between a purely locative sense and a non-actor direct argument sense, such as the following example:
khu˙-le:-tå de-we! (3.106) xt®˙ bullet dog-DEF:CL-DAT DIR-exist Æ(The) bullet hit the dog!fl (as opposed to the intended target; lit.: Æ. . . came to be at the dog.fl) The noun phrase representing the undergoer of a ditransitive verb also takes no marking other than the topic marker (and this only if it is in clause-initial position). Its position in the clause also depends on the information structure of the clause, appearing most often in the position immediately before the verb, following the noun phrases representing the actor, any locative and temporal adverbs, and the recipient/goal. Unlike the noun phrase representing the undergoer of a mono-transitive verb, though, the noun phrase representing the undergoer of a ditransitive verb has a third possibility in terms of position: if the undergoer is neither the topic nor the focus of the information structure, the noun phrase representing it can appear before the noun phrase in the
Nominal relational morphology
85
focus position but following any other noun phrases in the clause. Following are some examples; see also the examples in §3.2.6. (3.107) a. sum the:-t˚ pi:-xs˙-lå de-l. teacher 3sg-GEN pen-three-CL DIR-give ÆThe teacher gave him three pens.fl b. qå the:-tå Ùz˙-xs˙-lå fish-three-CL 1sg 3sg-LOC ÆI bought three fish from him.fl
z˙-på. DIR-buy:1sg
(< p˙)
c. qå Ùz˙-xs˙-lå the:-tå 3sg-LOC 1sg fish-three-CL ÆI bought three fish from him.fl
z˙-på. DIR-buy:1sg
(< p˙)
3.2.6. Goal or recipient of a ditransitive verb Qiang formally distinguishes between two types of argument that we will call goal and recipient. The goal of an action is the referent at which an action is directed, such as a person being told something. The verb involved may be a transitive or a ditransitive verb. The recipient of an action is the referent who receives some object as a result of the action. The verb expressing such an action must be ditransitive. These two types of argument are marked by different postpositions in Qiang. The positions in the clause in which noun phrases representing these arguments can appear are the same, though. The unmarked position is between the noun phrases representing the actor and the undergoer, but it is also possible to have the noun phrase representing the goal or recipient appear in the immediately preverbal focus position or the clause-initial topic position (see examples below). The postposition used after a noun phrase which represents a goal argument is /-tå/, the same form as one of the locative postpositions. We saw above (§3.2.5) that this form is also used in some cases for the undergoer of a transitive verb. Following are examples of its use in ditransitive clauses and of the different positions in the clause in which the noun phrase representing the goal (here underlined) can appear.
86
The noun phrase
(3.108) the: qå-tå Ùz˙-xs˙-lå 3sg 1sg-LOC fish-three-CL ÆHe sold me three fish.fl (3.109) t®hets˙-Â˙-≥u˙≤i qå 1sg car-affair-TOP ÆI told him about the car.fl
t˙-≈uå-(®å). DIR-sell-1sg U
the:-tå 3sg-LOC
(3.110) qå the:-(tå) Âme-Â 1sg 3sg-LOC Qiang-language ÆI teach him Qiang.fl
k˙-ja. (< ji) thus-say:1sg
su-å. teach-1sg
In these clauses, the only postposition that can be used after the noun phrase representing the goal is /-tå/, it is not possible to use /-t˚/, the postposition used for marking a recipient. For example, were (3.108) to have /-t˚/ instead of /-tå/, then the meaning would be either ÆHe sold fish for mefl or ÆHe sold my fishfl (see Sections 2.2.10 and 2.2.15). What is possible, at least in (3.110), is to not use any postposition after the relevant noun phrase, as the fact that the first person is the actor is clearly marked on the verb, so there would be no ambiguity even if the postposition marking the goal were to be omitted. It would even be possible to omit the noun phrase representing the actor without any problem of ambiguity, as the person and number of the actor are recoverable from the person marking. Even so, if there is a marked word order, where the noun phrase representing the goal appears in topic position with only the topic marker following, then the noun phrase representing the actor would take the agentive marker /-wu/ (see §3.2.3), as in (3.111).
qå-wu (3.111) the:-≥u˙≤i 3sg-TOP 1sg-AGT ÆI teach him Qiang.fl
Âme-Â Qiang-language
su-å. teach-1sg
As mentioned above, the postposition used to mark a noun phrase representing a recipient argument is /-t˚/, the same form as the genitive postposition. Consider the clause in (3.112):
Nominal relational morphology
(3.112) sum the:-t˚ pi:-xs˙-lå teacher 3sg-GEN pen-three-CL ÆThe teacher gave him three pens.fl
87
de-l. DIR-give
While the recipient marker has the same form as the genitive marker, in this example [the:-t˚] and [pi:-xs˙-lå] are two noun phrases (the word order could be changed with [pi:-xs˙-lå] appearing in topic position, and native speakers feel they are two separate arguments, not one possessed entity). In this clause, the noun phrase representing the recipient argument can only take the postposition /-t˚/, it cannot take /-tå/. Comparing (3.108) and (3.112), we can see that even though the person to whom something is sold is often treated in grammatical theories as a semantic recipient, the formal treatment of this argument in the grammar of Qiang is not the same as the recipient of the verb Æto givefl. Yet there are some situations where the relevant referent can be profiled (presented) in the clause as either a goal or as a recipient, and therefore either /-tå/ or /-t˚/ can be used, but the meanings of the resulting two clauses will differ somewhat. Compare (3.113a) and (3.113b).
lisΩ-tå t˙-©Â˙. (3.113) a. ≈umt®i-wu tsi-le: ≈umt®i-AGT daughter-DEF:CL Li.Si-LOC DIR-marry.off ÆXumt®i married off his daughter to Li Si.fl b. ≈umt®i-wu tsi-le: lisΩ-t˚ t˙-©Â˙. ≈umt®i-AGT daughter-DEF:CL Li.Si-GEN DIR-marry.off ÆXumt®i gave his daughter in marriage to Li Si.fl In (3.113a), the emphasis is on Li Si as the goal of the action, not as recipient of an object, whereas (3.113b) emphasizes the nature of Li Si as “recipient” of the woman in marriage. If a true genitive phrase occurs in a clause with a recipient, then there can be two tokens of the same marker, but with different meanings, as in (3.114).
the:-t˚-få-le: the:-t˚ (3.114) qå 1sg 3sg-GEN-cothing-DEF:CL 3sg-GEN ÆI gave him his clothes.fl
de-l-å. DIR-give-1sg
88
The noun phrase
3.2.7. Standard of a comparative construction In a comparative construction, the usual word order is as follows: [NP entity being compared | NPstandard of comparison-COMP | Predicate]. The noun phrase representing the standard of comparison in a comparative construction follows the clause-initial topic noun phrase, and is followed by the comparative marker. In positive clauses, the comparative marker is /-s/, while in negative clauses it is /-≤iki/. The clause initial noun phrase can take the topic marker, and actor person marking on the verb, if there is any, reflects the person and number of this topic. It is also possible to have non-actor person marking reflecting a salient standard of comparison, as in (3.115). (In the examples below, the standard of comparison is underlined.)
qå-s (3.115) the:-≥u˙≤i 3sg-TOP 1sg-COMP ÆHe is bigger than me.fl
ba-(®å). big-1sgU
(3.116) qå ÷~u-≤iki må-wa. NEG -big:1sg 1sg 2sg-COMP ÆI am not as big as you are.fl (3.117) qå the:-s t˚e-fia. CON-white:1sg 1sg 3sg-COMP ÆI am lighter (in color) than him (a lot lighter).fl
(< ba)
(< phi)
It is not possible, as it is in some other Tibeto-Burman languages, to change the order of the two noun phrases in a comparative construction, even if the topic marker is used after the fronted standard of comparison: (3.118) *the:-s-≥u˙≤i 3sg-COMP-TOP
qå 1sg
t˚e-fia. CON-white:1sg
Where long phrases or clauses are compared, only the referent(s) that differs between the two things or actions being compared need be mentioned in the standard of comparison:
Nominal relational morphology
(3.119) ÷~u-t˚-t˚iÙå-le: the:-s 3sg-COMP 2sg-GEN-house-DEF:CL ÆYour house is bigger than his.fl
t˚a-wa. CON-big
89
(< ba)
(3.120) qå-k˙-s-tå the:-s t˚å-dÂå. 1sg-go-NOM-LOC 3sg-COMP CON-early ÆI went earlier than him.fl (lit.: ÆWhen I went was earlier than (when) he (went.fl)
3.2.8. Standard of an equative comparative construction In Qiang there is no way to say one referent is 'the same as' some other referent, but the same meaning can be expressed by saying that one referent and another are 'the same' in respect to some quality. If there are two noun phrases representing the two referents, they are joined by the comitative/conjunction marker /-≤å/ (which comes between them; see §3.2.13), to form a single large noun phrase, and so the person marking on the verb, if there is any, is plural. 45 This larger noun phrase is the topic of the construction, so can be followed by the topic marker. (3.121) ÷~u-≤å-qå a-q˙s bafi. (< ba) 2sg-and-1sg one-form big:1pl ÆYou are as big as me.fl (lit.: ÆYou and I are the same big.fl) (3.122) ÷~u-≤å-the:-t˚-t˚iÙuå a-q˙s ba-t˚i. 2sg-and-3sg-GEN-house one-form big-3pl ÆYour house is as big as his.fl (lit.: ÆYour house and his house are the same big.fl) It is also possible to have one plural noun phrase representing the two referents:
Âuaha a-q˙s wefi. (3.123) a. t˚izzi 1dl height one-form exist:1pl ÆThe two of us are of the same height.fl
(< we)
90
The noun phrase
b. thizzi Âuaha a-q˙s we-(t˚i). 3dl height one-form exist-3pl ÆThose two persons are of the same height.fl If, instead of the comitative/conjunction marker coming between the two noun phrases, it follows the second noun phrase, then the meaning is somewhat different, as there are then two arguments (one direct, one oblique) instead of one, and the person marking, which reflects the singular topic, is singular. Compare the following two examples:
a-q˙s me-w-(t˚i). (< we) (3.124) the:-≤å-≤ile-ku: 3sg-COM-3plREFL-brother one-form NEG -exist ÆHe is different from his brother.fl (person marking is optional here) (3.125) the: ≤ile-tåt˙-≤å a-q˙s 3sg 3plREFL-father-COM one-form ÆHe is very much like his father.fl
we. exist
In (3.124) the two referents form one plural topic. The literal meaning of the clause is ÆHe and his brother do not have the same formfl. In (3.125) the topic is the single third person referent, and the literal meaning is ÆHe has the same form as his fatherfl (see §3.2.13 for more on the use of the comitative/conjunction marker).
3.2.9. Predicate noun phrases Predicate noun phrases in some cases can appear without a following verb, as in (3.126) and (3.127), though in most cases the predicate noun phrase is followed by the copula, /≥u˙/, the verb /Âm˙/ Æbe calledfl, or the verb /pe/ Æbecomefl, as in (3.128) to (3.131). If the predicate noun phrase is attributive, it is often followed by the indefinite marker /ke/ plus a classifier (or the classifier is represented as a lengthened vowel on the indefinite marker: /ke:/). If it is identificational (equational), then it can be followed by the definite marker (/le/ or /te/; see discussion in §3.1.4) plus a classifier or lengthened vowel. There is no other formal difference between attributive and identifying copula clauses. The
Nominal relational morphology
91
initial noun phrase in this construction is a topic, and can take the topic marker (see §3.2.4). (3.126) p˙s xs˙-˚˙-t˚-Ùo-t˚u. today three-month-GEN-five-beginning ÆToday (is) March fifth.fl (3.127) khumtsi åkuå-wut˚in-t˚˙-s˙tsim. Khumtsi uncle-Wut˚in-GEN -wife ÆKhumtsi is Uncle Wut˚infls wife.fl
≥u˙. (3.128) the: mi 3sg person COP ÆHe is a person (man).fl (3.129) the:-≥u˙≤i khumtsi ≥u˙ / Âm˙. 3sg-TOP Khumtsi COP / be.called ÆShe is (is called) Khumtsi.fl (3.130) the: sum-(ke:) 3sg teacher-INDEF:CL ÆHe became a teacher.fl
pe. become
(3.131) but®qhå xt®åmphå-(ke:) caterpillar butterfly-INDEF:CL ÆThe caterpillar became a butterfly.fl
pe. become
3.2.10. Benefactive The benefactive is the referent for whose benefit an action is performed. The noun phrase representing this referent is generally marked with the postposition /-t˚/, the same form as the genitive marker and recipient marker. As the form of the clause involving a benefactive argument with this marking is sometimes the same as the genitive construction, out of context there is the possibility of ambiguity, as in (3.133) and (3.134).
92
The noun phrase
(3.132) ÷~u qå-t˚ 2sg 1sg-GEN(BEN) ÆOpen the door for me!fl
dy door
de-Âge-n-på! DIR-open-2sg-HORT
(3.133) qå må:-t˚ ku®‘u i-t®hue-lå. 1sg Mom-GEN (BEN) vegetable DIR-fry-REQU:1sg ÆLet me fry Momfls vegetables.fl / ÆLet me fry vegetables for Mom.fl
qå-t˚ få ®pet˚. (3.134) må: Mom 1sg-GEN(BEN) clothing sew ÆMom is sewing my clothes,fl / ÆMom is sewing clothes for me.fl As with the use of this marker for the recipient sense (see §3.2.6), native speakers feel, for example in (3.132), with a benefactive meaning, that the speaker and the door are two separate arguments, and not one argument with a possessor. The order of the noun phrases can also be reversed, such as if the door were made a topic. Aside from the use of /-t˚/, it is also possible to mark a benefactive with the postposition /≈uå-≤i/ Æin order to, in place of, for, for the sake offl. (/≈uå/ can be used by itself, but generally the adverbial marker /≤i/ is used together with it.)
qå-≈uå-≤i s˙ (3.135) the: 3sg 1sg-BEN-ADV firewood ÆHe went to chop wood for me.fl
gue-k. chop-go
(3.136) t˚ile t˚y:mi-le:-≈uå-≤i Âbot˚u-s ≥u˙-≥‘u‘˙. (< wå) 1pl child-DEF:CL-BENADV think-NOM COP-EMPH ÆWe should think about the child(fls benefit).fl
3.2.11. Source The type of marking that appears on a noun phrase representing a semantic source can be of three types, depending on the semantic nature of the source. If the source referent is a person, then the marking is the
Nominal relational morphology
93
locative postposition /-tå/. (In the following examples, the noun phrase representing the source is underlined.) (3.137) qå-≥u˙≤i the:-tå 3sg-LOC 1sg-TOP ÆI heard it from him. fl
˙-må. DIR-hear:1sg
(3.138) qå the:-tå Ùz˙-xs˙-lå fish-three-CL 1sg 3sg-LOC ÆI bought three fish from him.fl
(< m˙)
z˙-på. DIR-buy:1sg
(< p˙)
If the source is the origin in time or location of an action, or is the object out of which something is made, then the marking used is the ablative postposition /-wu/. (3.139) steke lå-s-Ùå, t˚et˚i-lå-wu muf‘u behind DEF:one-day-LOC everywhere-LOC-ABL smoke t˙-lå-i, ts˙i-≤ike, mi lu-ji. DIR-come-HS like.this-after people come-CSM ÆThe next day, smoke could be seen coming up out of everywhere, and from that time on there were people.fl (T1:15-16)
˙-må. (3.140) the-≈®e-te:-wu DIR-hear:1sg that-side-DEF:CL-ABL Æ(I) heard (it) from there.fl
(< m˙)
(3.141) tsaq-(tå)-wu su˙q i-p˙-k. Spring/Summer-LOC-ABL Fall/Winter DIR-arrive-go Æfrom tsaq (Spring/Summer) up to su˙q (Fall/Winter)fl 46 (3.142) w˙tshi-le: Âåw˙-wu t˙-≈qua-ji sparrow-DEF:CL stone-INST DIR-carve-CSM ÆThe sparrow was carved out of a stone.fl (3.143) the: Âåw˙-wu w˙tshi-e-ze 3sg stone-INST sparrow-one-CL ÆS/he carved a stone into a sparrow.fl47
≥u˙. COP
t˙-≈qua. DIR-carve
94
The noun phrase
If the source is some sort of containment out of which a referent comes, then the marking is the locative postposition /-Ùå/. (3.144) tshef‘u-≥u˙≤i tshe-Ùå wool-TOP sheep-LOC ÆWool comes from sheep.fl (3.145) me:fi-≥u˙≤i zdåm-Ùå rain-TOP cloud-LOC ÆRain comes out from clouds.fl
lu-ji come-CSM
lu-ji come-CSM
≥u˙. COP
≥u˙. COP
3.2.12. Instrument The noun phrase representing an instrumental referent usually appears just before the noun phrase representing the undergoer, and after the noun phrase representing the actor, unless the instrumental noun phrase is the topic and therefore in clause-initial position. It is also possible for the instrumental noun phrase to follow the undergoer noun phrase, so that the instrumental noun phrase is in the immediately preverbal focus position. The instrumental noun phrase is marked by the postposition /wu/, the same form as the agentive and ablative markers.48 Very often the definite marker appears between the noun and the instrumental marker if the referent is identifiable.
Ùduå®-te:-wu the: (3.146) a. qå 1sg hammer-DEF:CL-INST 3sg ÆI use the hammer to hit it.fl
deta. hit:1sg
b. qå-≥u˙≤i the: Ùduå®-te:-wu 1sg-TOP 3sg hammer-DEF:CL-INST ÆI use the hammer to hit it.fl
(< dete)
deta. hit:1sg
c. qå Ùduå®-te:-wu the: z˙-me-da. (< dete) 1sg hammer-DEF:CL-INST 3sg DIR-NEG -hit:1sg ÆI didnflt use the hammer to hit it.fl
Nominal relational morphology
95
(3.147) qå Âåw˙-le:-wu Ùduå® hå-≥‘u‘˙-Â˙-≤i 1sg stone-DEF:CL-INST hammer DIR-COP -CAUS-ADV tints˙ Âeta. (< Âete) nail pound:1sg ÆI used the stone as a hammer to pound in the nail.fl
qå Ùosu-pi-wu z˙-p-ji ≥u˙. (3.148) få-tså-q˙i-≥u˙≤i clothing-this:one-CL-TOP 1sg fifty-CL-INST DIR-buy-CSM COP ÆThis item of clothing I bought with fifty dollars.fl
3.2.13. Comitative, conjunction A referent in a comitative relation with another referent is represented using one of two constructions: either the two noun phrases representing the two referents are conjoined together in a single large noun phrase with the comitative/conjunction marker /-≤å/ between them, or one noun phrase is made the topic, and the second noun phrase is made an oblique argument followed by the comitative/conjunction marker. These two constructions express slightly different meanings: in the first case, the meaning is that the two referents are doing something together ((3.149)-(3.150)), whereas in the second the meaning is that one referent (the referent represented by the noun phrase in topic position) does something Æwithfl, or Æfollowsfl, the second referent in doing something, similar to the difference between John and Mary went to the store and John went to the store with Mary ((3.151)). (3.149) m˙-≤å-©lu-j˙-t®-≥u˙≤i, zuåm˙-πu-o-Âgu-tå brother-COM-sister-two-CL-TOP cypress-tree-one-CL-LOC i-pi-≈uå-≤i, ¿o-mu-xt˚u-wei. (T1:2-4) DIR-hide-because-ADV DIR-NEG -burn-INF:HS ÆBecause the brother and sister hid in a cypress tree, they did not get burned.fl (3.150) mutsit®u-≤å-tugant®u z˙p˙q-tå ¿o-lu-å:-ji. (T2:1) Mutsit®u-COM-Tugant®u earth-LOC DIR-come-PRS-CSM ÆMutsit®u and Tugant®u wanted to come to earth.fl
96
The noun phrase
(3.151) qå khumtsi-≤å tiånts˙-Ùå kå:. 1sg Khumtsi-COM store-LOC go:PRS:1sg ÆI am going to go to the store with Khumtsi.fl Compare these structures with the equational clauses presented in §3.2.8, repeated below. (3.152) a. the:-≤å-themle-tåt˙ a-q˙s 3sg-COM-3pl-daddy one-form ÆHe and his father are the same.fl
we-(t˚i). exist-3pl
a-q˙s we. b. the: themle-tåt˙-≤å 3sg 3pl-father-COM one-form exist ÆHe is a lot like his father.fl The marker /≤å/ is also used for certain arguments of certain verbs (e.g. the stimuli of some cognition verbs), such as in the examples below: (3.153) ÷i÷i-≤å t˚e-khue. 2sgREFL-COM NEG.IMP-upset ÆDonflt be mad at yourself.fl (3.154) kåp˙t®-tou . . . ≈a-le:-≤å orphan-DEF:one:CL needle-DEF:CL-COM e-t®epe-k˙i-t˚u. DIR-meet- INF:HS-PART ÆThe orphan . . . met (with) a needle.fl
(T3:5-10)
(3.155) ÷~u-≤å ¿å-s˙-≤i ˚t˚i-k‘u‘˙ nå-wa. 2sg-COM DIR-know-ADV heart-base good-very ÆI am very happy to know (meet) you.fl While /≤å/ can be used for the comitative sense of English with, there is no use of this marker with, for example, a negative prefix for the privative sense of English without. A possessive structure with a negated possessive verb (see §3.2.14 below) must be used to express a privative meaning. See also §5.4 for more examples of coordination.
Nominal relational morphology
97
3.2.14. Possessor in a possessive clause In a clause in which the predication expresses possession, the form that the possessor noun phrase takes depends on the type of relationship involved (temporary possession or ownership) and on the nature of the possessed referent. The verb involved in all cases is one of the existential verbs (see §4.2.4). If the relationship is inalienable possession and the referent is something that does not normally exist apart from the possessor, such as a body part, then the clause takes the form of a simple existential clause, and the possessor appears as a genitive possessor of the body part in a single noun phrase with the body part, and the verb is intransitive (with that one noun phrase as its sole argument), as in (3.156a). The person marking on the verb reflects the person and number of the possessor, not the possessed. If instead the relationship is one of temporary physical possession, and not ownership, and the referent is able to exist independently of the possessor, then the noun phrase representing the (temporary) possessor takes the locative/dative marker /-tå/, as in (3.156b). Here again the verb is intransitive, with the noun phrase representing the possessed referent as the single direct argument in an existential clause, but with the noun phrase representing the possessor appearing as an oblique argument and the person marking reflecting the person and number of the possessed referent rather than those of the possessor (inanimates are unmarked). (< we) (3.156) a. qå-doqu-ji-tuå wa. (connected to main entity) 1sg-leg-two-CL exist:1sg ÆI have two legs.fl (lit.: ÆMy two legs exist.fl) b. ÷~u-doÙu-le: qå-tå ®˙. 1sg-LOC exist 2sg-key-DEF:CL ÆYour key is at my place.fl / ÆI have your key.fl
(inanimate)
If the situation involves ownership of an object which is not part of the person (i.e. is not physically inalienable, including other people, such as in kinship relations), then the causative suffix (see §4.2.2) is used with the verb of possession to make it transitive. The noun phrases representing the possessor and the possessed referent then are both
98
The noun phrase
direct arguments of the verb, and so the possessor does not take any semantic case marking, as in (3.157)-(3.159). (3.157) khumtsi dz˙g‘u k˙n å-hå Khumtsi money very one-pl ÆKhumtsi has a lot of money. fl
®˙-Â. exist-CAUS
(inanimate)
(3.158) khumtsi tut®-©Â˙-zi Âi-Â. Khumtsi younger.brother-four-CL exist-CAUS ÆKhumtsi has four younger brothers.fl
(animate)
(3.159) the: s˙f-å-hå we-Â. 3sg tree-one-pl exist-CAUS Æ He has some trees.fl
(connected to main entity)
Verbs of possession/existence differ with the type of noun possessed (see §4.2.4; the type of possessed noun is given at the right margin of each example). There is no difference between present and past possession, and there are no nouns that are obligatorily possessed. There is also no difference in the construction based on whether the possessor is represented by a pronoun, a proper noun or common noun. Aside from the verbs given above, which are inherently intransitive and have both existential and possessive uses, there is one verb, /q˙qe/, which is inherently transitive and used only for possession, and particularly for personal ownership of some important or valuable entity, as in (3.160a-c). With this verb the noun phrase representing the possessor always is a direct argument, and does not take any semantic case marking.
®ku qusu (3.160) a. ÷~u 2sg gold much ÆYou have a lot of gold.fl b. qupu t˚ymi Ùuå-t® 3sg child five-CL ÆS/he has five children.fl
q˙qe-n. have-2sg
q˙qe. have
Nominal relational morphology
c. qå tshe a-w‘u 1sg sheep one-flock ÆI have a flock of sheep.fl
q˙qa. have:1sg
99
(< q˙qe)
There is no preposition that can be used with the possessive sense of English Æwithfl, as in ÆThe man with the knifefl, or Æthe man without the knifefl; instead a relative clause using a possessive verb must be used.
®˙-Â-˙m (3.161) a. xt®epi knife exist-CAUS-NOM Æ(the) person with (the) knifefl b. xt®epi må-®-Â-˙m NEG -exist-CAUS-NOM knife Æ(the) person without (the) knifefl
(inanimate)
(inanimate)
Possession of a quality involves the same structure as possession of an object; the use of a relative clause structure (see §5.2) is also possible ((3.162c)). (3.162) a. the: qhu-s we. exist 3sg hate-NOM ÆS/he is very mischievous.fl
(connected to main entity)
b. the: q˙påt® le. (inside vessel) 3sg head exist ÆS/he is very brainy.fl (cf. English Shefls got a head on her shoulders) c. ˚t˚imi nå-t˚ mi heart good-GEN person Æ(a) good hearted personfl
3.2.15. Genitive A genitive noun phrase appears before the noun it modifies, and can be followed by the genitive marker /-t˚(˙)/. When the relationship between
100 The noun phrase
two nouns in a genitive relationship is clear, as in most cases of inalienable possession, the genitive marker is not needed. Generally the closer the relationship between the possessor and the thing possessed, the less likely the genitive marker will be used. With kinship relations, usually the plural pronoun of the possessor is used (to be more polite; see §3.1.2), and no genitive marker is used, but if the singular is used, then the genitive marker is often used.
pu≤u (3.163) a. ˚iåut®å≥-t˚˙ Little.Zhang-GEN cat ÆLittle Zhangfls catfl
b.
the:-t˚ pi: 3sg-GEN pen Æhis/her penfl
(3.164) a. qå-t˚ l˙©z 1sg-GEN book Æmy bookfl
b.
÷~u-t˚ t˚iÙå 2sg GEN house Æyour housefl
(3.165) a. khu˙ sikue dog tail Æ(a) dogfls tailfl
b.
s˙f q˙-stå tree head-place Ætop half of a treefl
Where the noun modified by the genitive phrase is a common noun (not a pronoun or proper name), and the noun phrase is identifiable, the noun phrase can take definite marking, as in the following example:
t˙-di. (3.166) ˚iåut®å≥-t˚˙-pu≤u-le: Little.Zhang-GEN-cat-DEF:CL DIR-sick Little Zhangfls cat is sick. The genitive postposition is also used for some temporal phrases that modify nouns: (3.167) tse: n˙p-t˚-påut®˙ ≥u˙. this:CL last.year- GEN-newspaper COP ÆThis is last yearfls newspaper.fl We have seen that the genitive marker is used for recipient (§3.2.6) and benefactive (§3.2.10) arguments, and for some nominalizations/relative
Nominal relational morphology
101
clauses (e.g. exx. (3.2) and (3.4)—see §5.2 for more on relative clauses).
3.2.16. Whole-part relations Aside from the whole-part relationships discussed in Section 3.2.15, above, such as Ædogfls tailfl, etc., there are no expressions for Æamongfl, Æoffl (as in Ætwo of (some set)fl or Æa part of (some set)fl or Ænone of (some set)fl). If the whole of the whole-part relation is mentioned, it usually is in topic position and takes the locative postposition meaning Ælocation within some sort of containmentfl ((3.168a-b)), unless the part is all of the whole, as in (3.169). If the whole is not mentioned, the relevant part can be made the topic, as in (3.170a-b). A nominalized structure is often used when the part equals zero ((3.171)).
k˙-s ≥u˙. (3.168) a. themle-Ùå xs˙-zi 3pl-LOC three-CL go-NOM COP ÆFrom among them, three people must go.fl b. qhål-Ùuå-zi-Ùå qå ji-zi s˙-dza. (< dz˙) steamed.bun-five-CL-LOC 1sg two-CL DIR-eat:1sg ÆI ate two of the five steamed buns.fl (3.169) themle wu stuåhå 3pl all rice/food ÆThey have all eaten.fl
s˙-t˚-jy-(t˚i). DIR-eat-ASP-3pl
(< t˚h˙)
(3.170) a. t®i-ji-t®-≥u˙≤i u-t˚u-s me-Âi-ji-(t˚i). boy-two-CL-TOP DIR-see- NOM NEG -exist-CSM-3pl ÆTwo of the boys (among them) have disappeared.fl b. t®i-å-hå-≥u˙≤i u-t˚u-s me-Âi-ji-(t˚i). boy-one-pl-TOP DIR-see- NOM NEG -exist-CSM-3pl ÆSome of the boys have disappeared.fl
102 The noun phrase
(3.171) stuåhå s˙-t˚-˙m49 DIR-eat-NOM rice/food ÆNo one has eaten.fl
me-Âi. NEG -exist
(< t˚h˙)
3.2.17. Price, value When a noun phrase representing the price/value of a referent is added to a clause as an oblique argument, if it is marking the amount of money used to buy an item, it can be marked by the instrumental postposition /-wu/, as in ( 3 .172), below, or it can take the locative marker /-Ùå/. If it is marking how much something sold for, it may not take any postposition, or it may take the locative postposition, as in (3.173). There seems to be a relationship between the completion or not of the action and the marking on the noun phrase representing the price/value involved, in that when it is completed, /-wu/ or /-Ùå/ can be used, but if the action is not completed, then no marking is used. In (3.174) no marking is possible because the auxiliary verb marks it as a state rather than a completed action. Without the auxiliary verb, /-wu/ or /-Ùå/ could be used.
qå Ùosu-pi-wu z˙-p-ji ≥u˙. (3.172) få-tså-q˙i-≥u˙≤i clothes-this:one-CL-TOP 1sg fifty-CL-INST DIR-buy-CSM COP ÆI bought this piece of clothing for 50 dollars.fl (3.173) få-thå-q˙i-≥u˙≤i qupu Ùosu-pi-(Ùå) ≈uå. clothes-that:one-CL-TOP 3sg fifty-CL-LOC sell ÆS/he is selling that piece of clothing for fifty dollars.fl (3.174) pi-tså-lå e-khe-pi l˙lå pen-this:one-CL one-hundred-CL exchange ÆThis pen is worth one hundred dollars.fl
dÂ˙. can
If the price/value is a direct argument of the verb, then it does not take any postpositional marking, as in (3.175).
Nominal relational morphology
103
(3.175) få-thå-q˙i-≥u˙≤i Ùosu-pi lu. clothes-that:one-CL-TOP fifty-CL worth ÆThat piece of clothing is worth fifty dollars.fl
3.2.18. Extent, distance The extent of an action, or the distance covered by an action, is generally expressed by a preverbal adverbial with no adverbial or temporal/locative marking. (3.176) qå dza:-t˚˙k‘u wu the: 1sg lunch-before all 3sg ÆI was chasing him/her all morning.fl
dzå. chase:1sg
(3.177) hot˚u-t®ån-ti-wi-t˚-s˙f ten-zh\ang(CL)-DIR- tall-GEN-tree Æa ten-zhang50 tall treefl (3.178) Ùuå-stu-li-dÂ˙-t˚-gue:fi five-thousand-l«î(CL)-long-GEN-road Æa distance (road) of five thousand lifl
3.2.19. Inclusion, exclusion, addition To express the idea Ænot only/aside from X but also Yfl, [me-t˚hi] Ænot onlyfl is used after the X argument, which is the topic of the sentence, as in the following example:
me-t˚hi e-©lefiwu lu-ji-(t˚i). (3.179) khumtsi Khumtsi NEG -only one-pl:all come-CSM-3pl ÆNot just Khumtsi, but everyone came.fl If this sentence has a negative predicate phrase, then it means Æall the people, including Khumtsi, didnflt comefl:
104 The noun phrase
(3.180) khumtsi me-t˚hi e-©lefiwu mo-lu-ji-(t˚i). Khumtsi NEG -only one-pl:all NEG -come-CSM-3pl ÆNone of the people, not even Khumtsi, came.fl To express the concept Æexcept for Xfl, then [må-≥‘u‘˙-t˚i] (Ænotfl + COP + exception marker) or the exception marker [t˚i ± ji ± j˙] alone is used after the noun phrase, and the verb is not negated. The same structure, but with the verb negated, is used to express Æonly Xfl (i.e. Æexcept for X, there is nothing elsefl; cf. Japanese X sika nai [X aside.from not.have/exist] Æthere is only Xfl). Compare the following two examples:
må-≥‘u‘˙-ji e-©lefiwu lu-ji-(t˚i). (3.181) khumtsi Khumtsi NEG -COP-EXC one-pl:all come-CSM-3pl ÆExcept for Khumtsi, everyone came.fl (3.182) khumtsi må-≥‘u‘˙-ji e-©lefiwu mo-lu-ji-(t˚i). Khumtsi NEG -COP-EXC one-pl:all NEG -come-CSM-3pl ÆNo one came except Khumtsi / Only Khumtsi came.fl Following are more examples of the Æonly Xfl usage: (3.183) qå ©lu-o-u-t˚i me-Âi.51(3sg person marking) 1sg younger.sister-one-CL-EXC NEG -exist ÆI only have one younger sister.fl (lit.: ÆAside from my younger sister, there is no one.fl)
dytå: må-≥‘u‘˙-t˚i må-kå. (< k˙) (3.184) qå NEG -go:1sg 1sg Chengdu:LOC NEG -COP-EXC ÆI only go to Chengdu.fl (lit.: ÆI donflt go anyplace that is not Chengdu.fl) Either [må≥‘u‘˙-t˚i] or [t˚i ± ji ± j˙]52 alone are possible, but the former is more emphatic. Compare the following two examples: (3.185) a. qå få-a-q˙i-t˚i må-®˙-Âå. (< Â˙) NEG -exist-CAUS:1sg 1sg clothes-one-CL-EXC ÆI only have one piece of clothing.fl
Nominal relational morphology
105
b. qå få-a-q˙i må-≥‘u‘˙-t˚i må-®˙-Âå. (< Â˙) 1sg clothes-one-CL NEG -COP-EXC NEG -exist-CAUS:1sg ÆI only have one piece of clothing.fl If the noun phrase that precedes the exception marker is a time phrase, then the expression can have the meaning Æonly thenfl or Æuntilfl: (3.186) t˙p-≤i-j˙ dÂ˙ me-we. (no reference to person) tomorrow-ADV-EXC thing NEG -exist ÆIflm free (there is nothing) until tomorrow.fl This same structure, when used with the phrase [me-t˚hi] Ænot wantfl, has the meaning Æcan, be able tofl. (3.187) mutu su-ji-(wå), t˚ile k˙-j˙ sky bright-CSM-RCA 1pl go-EXC ÆItfls daybreak; we can go.fl
me-t˚hi-ji. NEG -want-CSM
There is also a somewhat metaphorical use of this construction to mean Æjust Xfl as in English Iflm just a kid. In Qiang we have the following example from the story “An Orphan”: (3.188) qå ep l˙ me-Âi, ˙w l˙ me-Âi, 1sg father also NEG -exist mother also NEG-exist kåp˙t®-kou-j˙ må-≥uå. (T3:46-48) orphan-INDEF:one:CL-EXC NEG -COP:1sg ÆI have no father and no mother, I am just an orphan.fl To express ÆX, in addition to Yfl, then a comitative structure (see §3.2.13) is used, as in the following example: (3.189) mi-xs˙-t®˙-≤å-khumtsi lu-ji-(t˚i). people-three-CL-and-Khumtsi come-CSM-3pl ÆIn addition to Khumtsi, three people came.fl
106 The noun phrase
3.2.20. Locative, directional phrases A noun phrase representing a locative referent may be marked in a number of ways. Noun phrases representing some large locations, such as cities, and some locational nouns, can appear without a locative postposition for unmarked location in that city or place. Most noun phrases representing locative referents require one of four types of locative postposition. The unmarked locative postpositions are /-tå/ and /-lå/. Both of these postpositions also can have the meaning of an allative postposition, depending on the context. In the case of allative meaning, then the use of the locative postposition with the names of cities, etc. is not optional. Both these locative postpositions can be (though are not necessarily) used with the ablative postposition /-wu/ to form a more specific ablative (e.g. (3.191b)). The difference between /-lå/ and /tå/ is that /-lå/ is more often used with bisyllabic place names or locational nouns, while /-tå/ is more often used with monosyllabic place names or locational nouns, though there are many common exceptions to this generalization, such as /t˚˙u-lå/ Æat homefl.53 It is also possible in some cases for the locative postposition to appear as a lengthened vowel on the noun representing the location, e.g. /dytå-lå ± dytå:/ Æin/to Chengdufl. The locational nouns also take the locative markers; /m˙q/ Ætopfl and /Âek‘u/ Æbetweenfl take /-tå/, while the others all take /-lå/ (see also below). The locative postpositions are also used for non-direct arguments of certain verbs, as in (3.194b) and (3.202c), below. Following are some examples of the use of /-lå/ and /-tå/:
Âi (3.190) a. pet˚in-(lå) Beijing-LOC exist Æ(someone) is in Beijingfl
b. pet˚in-lå k˙ Beijing-LOC go Ægo to Beijingfl
(3.191) a. t˚˙u-lå home-LOC Æat homefl
b. t˚˙u-lå-wu family-LOC-ABL Æfrom homefl
(3.192) the: t˚iÙuå-le:-tå 3sg house-DEF:CL-LOC ÆI went to his/her house.fl
då-qå. DIR-go:1sg
Nominal relational morphology
107
(3.193) a. b˙i≈a t®uåts˙-le:-m˙q-tå lå. housefly table-DEF:CL-above-LOC fly ÆA fly is flying above the table.fl b. b˙i≈a t®uåts˙-le:-®q˙l-lå Âi. housefly table-DEF:CL-under-LOC exist ÆA fly is under the table.fl (3.194) a. pi-le: t®uåts˙-le:-tå pen-DEF:CL table-DEF:CL-LOC ÆThe pen is on the table.fl
®˙. exist
b. the: zå Ùå b˙l˙-s-tå he-the-wa. 3sg land LOC do/work-NOM-LOC DIR-capable-very ÆShe is very good at working in the fields.fl It is also possible for noun phrases representing human referents to take the locative marker /tå/. Depending on the context, the meaning is either that of an undergoer or dative argument (see Sections 3.2.5 and 3.2.6), or that of a location associated with the human referent(s), as in the following example: (3.195) qå themle-tå ja. live/stay:1sg 1sg 3pl-LOC ÆI live at (am staying at) their place.fl
(< je)
The locational nouns /steke/ Æbehindfl, /m˙q/ Ætop, abovefl, /Âek‘u/ Æbetween, centerfl, /®q˙l/ Æbelowfl, /pienå/ Ænear, (be)sidefl, and /q˙:fi/ Æbeforefl do not require the genitive marker when in a genitive relation with a noun (e.g. /t˚iÙuå-le:-pienå/ Æbeside the housefl, lit.: Æthe housefls sidefl). Use of the locative postposition with bisyllabic locational nouns is optional, but monosyllabic locational nouns must take a locative marker.
k˙ (3.196) a. ®q˙l-lå under-LOC go Ægo underfl
b. Âek‘u-tå between-LOC Æbetween (two things)fl
108 The noun phrase
(3.197) a. Ùuå-lå Âi out-LOC exist Æ(a person) is outsidefl
b. t˚iÙuå-le:-pienå Âi house-DEF:CL-near exist Æ(a person) is near the housefl
(3.198) t˚iÙuå-le:-pienå-lå k˙ house-DEF:CL-nearby-LOC go Ægo to the area near the housefl (3.199) a. t®hets˙-le:-qe:fi-lå Âi car-DEF:CL-before-LOC exist Æ(a person) is in front of the carfl b. t®hets˙-le:-steke-lå Âi car-DEF:CL-behind-LOC exist Æ(a person) is in back of the carfl (3.200) a. t®uåts˙-le:-pienå-lå Âi table-DEF:CL-nearby-LOC exist Æ(a person) is beside the tablefl b. Ùopu-le:-tå då-qå mountain-DEF:CL-LOC DIR-go Ægo over the mountainfl (3.201) a. the-x®-tå that-side-LOC Æon that sidefl
b. the:-x®-tå that-side-LOC Æon that side (farther away)fl
The locative postposition /-Ùå/ generally has an inessive, illative or elative meaning, i.e. it marks containment in some sort of vessel or container or movement in or out of one. This postposition can also be used together with the ablative postposition /-wu/ to make the elative sense more explicit (see ex. (3.206a)). (3.202) a. panko≥®˙-Ùå Âi office-LOC exist Æ(a person) is in the officefl
Nominal relational morphology
109
b. panko≥®˙-Ùå ˙-qå office-LOC DIR-go Æenter the officefl c. the: l˙©z su-Ùå tshimpe-wa. 3sg book study-LOC smart-very ÆShe is very good at her studies.fl (lit.: ÆShe is smart in her studies.fl) The ablative postposition is the same form as the agentive and instrumental postposition, /-wu/. It can be used alone, or with one of the other locative postpositions introduced above.
lu (3.203) a. t˚iÙuå-le:-pienå-wu house-DEF:CL-nearby-ABL come Æcome from nearby the housefl b. pet˚in-wu Beijing-ABL Æfrom Beijingfl (3.204) a. m˙q-tå-wu lå above-LOC-ABL fly Æfly from abovefl b. tse-x®e-wu då-qå this-side-ABL DIR-go Ægo this wayfl (3.205) a. the-x®e-wu z˙-lå that-side-ABL DIR-come Æcame from that directionfl b. ®q˙l-lå-wu lu below-LOC-ABL come Æcoming from belowfl
110 The noun phrase
(3.206) a. panko≥®˙-Ùå-wu hå-lå office-LOC-ABL DIR-come Æcame out of the officefl b. tse-x®e-wu då-qå this-side-ABL DIR-go Æcross over (go over from here)fl The postposition /-wu/ can also be used with a perlative meaning, Æalongfl:
k˙ (3.207) ts˙-le:-pienå-wu water-DEF:CL-nearby-ABL go Ægoing along the riverfl
3.2.21. Temporal phrases A noun phrase representing a temporal referent in some cases can be unmarked, but if it takes a postposition, it takes one of the same postpositions as are used for the locative meanings, except for /-lå/, or it takes the adverbial marker /-≤i/. The form /-tå/ is used for some large time periods, such as seasons. The locative postposition /-Ùå/ is used for the meaning Æwithin/at a time periodfl, but not for large time periods, where /-tå/ is used. The ablative postposition /-wu/ is used for temporal Æfromfl. The adverbial marker /-≤i/ (see §4.4) can be used for some adverbial time phrases. For shorter periods, /-Ùå/ and /-≤i/ are both possible, but not /-tå/. To express the meaning Æonly thenfl, the exception construction is used (see §3.2.19).
a-i pe-≤i (3.208) qå 1sg one-time become-ADV ÆI'll come in a minute.fl
lu-å:. come-PRS:1sg
(3.209) qå å-p Âa:. 1sg one-year exist:PRS:1sg ÆIflm going to stay one year.fl (not there yet)
(< Âi)
Nominal relational morphology
(3.210) a. å-s-m˙qå one-day-each Æeach dayfl
b. å-p-m˙qå one-year-each Æeach yearfl
111
c. n˙-s last-day Æyesterdayfl
(3.211) a. ˚int˚hiji54-Ùå Monday-LOC Æon Mondayfl
b. thå-s-Ùå that:one-day-LOC Æ(on) that dayfl
(3.212) a. j˙-˚-Ùå two-month-LOC Æin Februaryfl
b. j˙-˚˙-t˚-ju-t˚u-Ùå two-month-GEN-two-first-LOC Æon the second of Februaryfl
(3.213) a. ˚t˚i-tian-Ùå seven-o'clock-LOC Æat sevenfl
b. Âme-de-Ùå Qiang-festival-LOC Æat the Qiang Festivalfl
(3.214) a. jit˚˙uwupå≤ian-Ùå 1958-LOC Æin 1958fl
b. su˙q-tå autumn/winter-LOC Æin autumn/winterfl
(3.215) a. tsaq-≤i spring/summer-ADV Æin spring/summerfl
b. dza:-t˚ik‘u-≤i lunch-before-ADV Æin the morningfl
(3.216) a. j˙-p pe-ji two-years become-CSM Ætwo years ago (two years have passed)fl b. j˙-s pe-≤ike two-days become-after Æafter two daysfl (3.217) ei≤i-≤ike qå tså Âa:. (< Âi) next.year-after 1sg here exist:PRS:1sg ÆAfter next year I am going to be here.fl
112 The noun phrase
As mentioned in the discussion of the marking of source arguments (§3.2.11), the postpositions /-Ùå/ and /-tå/ can be optionally used with /-wu/ after a temporal expression to mean Æstarting from that timefl:
su˙q i-p˙-k. (3.218) tsaq-(tå)-wu spring/summer-LOC-ABL autumn/winter DIR-arrive-go Æfrom spring/summer to autumn/winter.fl (3.219) ˚int˚hiji-wu Monday-ABL Æstarting Mondayfl Temporal adverbials also often take the topic marker /≥u˙≤i/. This is true even if the actor or some other constituent in the clause is also marked by /≥u˙≤i/. (3.220) å-s-Ùå-≥u˙≤i mi-Ùuå-t® one-day-LOC-TOP person-five-CL ÆIn one day five people came.fl
i-p˙-l. DIR-arrive-come
(3.221) må:-le:-wu å-s-m˙qå-≥u˙≤i ≤iu-≥u˙≤i Mom-DEF:CL-AGT one-day-each-TOP wool-TOP å-s pån-t˚in-wu pån-t˚in t˙-t®h˙-≤i . . . one-day half-kilo-INST half-catty DIR-weigh- ADV Each day Mom (takes) half a catty of wool and weighs it (to make yarn balls). (T5:10-12) Whether the temporal expression is adverbial or predicative, it often takes the adverbial marker /-≤i/, though when the temporal phrase directly modifies a noun, it often takes the genitive marker.
su˙q-≤i (3.222) Âme-de-≥u˙≤i Qiang-festival-TOP autumn/winter-ADV ÆThe Qiang festival is in autumn.fl (3.223) tse: n˙p-t˚-påut®˙ this:CL last.year- GEN-newspaper ÆThis is last yearfls newspaper.fl
≥u˙. COP
≥u˙. COP
Nominal relational morphology
(3.224) tse: tep-≤i-b˙l-s this:CL tomorrow-ADV-make-NOM ÆThis is tomorrowfls work.fl
113
≥u˙. COP
In (3.224), the genitive cannot be used, as the temporal phrase is modifying the verb of the nominalized clause (/b˙l/ Æmake, dofl), not a noun phrase. Some of the locational nouns are also used in a temporal sense, such as /steke/ Æbehindfl, which is used for the meaning Æafter (that time)fl, and /q˙:fi/ Æbeforefl, which is used for the meaning Æbefore (that time)fl. The latter is often used at the beginning of stories with the meaning Ælong long ago . . .fl (see ex. (3.45), above).
mi pefiÂ˙-s ≥u˙-≈uå-≤i, . . . (3.225) steke-tå after-LOC person raise-NOM COP-because- ADV ÆLater, in order to propagate descendants, . . .fl (T1:4-5) (3.226) q˙:fi jautsan demi before man.eating.devil (proper name) pe-m-le: (T6:192-193) become-NOM-DEF:CL Æthe one who had before become the man-eating devil Demifl The ablative postposition /-wu/ is also used with the distal demonstrative to mean Æaside from thatfl, Æfrom thatfl or Æafter thatfl (T6:284 and T6:242 respectively): (3.227) t˚ile-t˚ jåut˚hiu t˚iu-®˙, ≤iu≈uån-≥u˙≤i å-t˚, 1pl-GEN demand just-is55 bezoar-TOP one-catty the-wu, mudu-≥u˙≤i å-w ph˙ t˚he-wå. that-ABL charcoal-TOP one-pile burn(blow) want-DTV ÆOur demand is that we want one catty of bezoar (a kind of medicine), and after that a pile of charcoal should be burned.fl (3.228) t®i pe-tu, ˚t˚˙-p boy become-LNK seven-year tå:-su-wå, the-wu DIR: INDTV-study-DTV that-ABL
le-≤i l˙©z exist-ADV book hat®i-p le-≤i eleven-year exist-ADV
114 The noun phrase
qå ta:-mefiÂ-wå. 1sg DIR: INDTV-look for-DTV ÆIf it is a boy, (when the boy) is seven years old, have him study, after that, (when) he is eleven years old, have him come look for me.fl
3.2.22. Form-function summary of relational marking In the previous sections we looked at how various functions are coded in Qiang. In this section we will illustrate the functions that the different types of postpositions have. Following are the postpositions and the types of roles they mark. Two numbers are given after each function name: the first refers to an example of this type of usage given below (the relevant marker is given in bold in the examples); the second is the section of this chapter where that usage is discussed in detail.
≥u˙≤i wu
t˚(˙) lå tå
Ùå t˚i ± ji ≤å s ≤iki ≤i ≈uå-(≤i)
Topic (3.229), §3.2.1 Agentive (3.230a), § 3 . 2 . 3 ; Instrumental (3.230b), §3.2.12; Ablative (3.230c), §3.2.20; Perlative (3.230d) §3.2.20 Genitive (3.231a), § 3 . 2 . 1 5 ; Benefactive/Recipient (3.231b), §3.2.6, §3.2.10 Locative (3.232a), §3.2.20; Allative (3.232b) §3.2.20 Locative (3.233a) (see also (3.235)), §3.2.20; Allative (3.233b), §3.2.20; Temporal (3.233c), §3.2.21; Goal (3.233d) §3.2.6 Inessive/Illative/Elative (3.234a), §3.2.20; Temporal (3.234b) (see also (3.232)) §3.2.21 Exception (3.235), §3.2.19 Conjunction (3.236a) (see also (3.229)), Comitative, (3.236b) §3.2.13 Comparative (positive) (3.237a), §3.2.7 Comparative (negative) (3.237b), §3.2.7 Adverbial (3.238), §3.2.21, §4.4 Benefactive (3.239), §3.2.10
Nominal relational morphology
115
(3.229) m˙ ≤å ©lu j˙-t®-≥≥u˙≤i, older.brother COM younger.sister two-CL-TOP zuåm˙-πu o-Âgu-tå i-pi-≈uå-≤i, cypress-tree one-CL-LOC DIR-hide-because-ADV ¿o-mu-xt˚u-wei.. (T1:2-4) DIR-NEG -burn-INF:HS ÆThe brother and sister, because (they) hid in a cypress tree, they didnflt burn (up).fl
wu (3.230) a. “®kup-te:-w maha qå dz˙ lå: ” orangutan-DEF:CL-AGT night 1sg eat come-PRS j˙-®˙, . . . (T3:13-14) say-LNK Æ“The orangutan is going to come and eat me”, he said, . . .fl wu b. m˙-le: t˙-khueq, duåÙl-le:-w older.brother-DEF:CL DIR-angry scythe-DEF:CL-INST s˙xte-≤i . . . (T1:13-14) chop-LNK ÆThe brother got angry and chopped (it) with a scythe . . .fl wu c. Ùu-q-tå-w ¿o-©lu, mountain-peak(head)-LOC-ABL DIR-roll Æ(They) rolled it down from the mountain top.fl
(T1:7)
wu d. ts˙-le:-pienå-w k˙ water-DEF:CL-nearby-ABL go Ægoing along the riverfl (3.231) a. “qå-tt˚ -t®i, ≤i©i p˙ns˙ u-su-n-å?” j˙-kui, 1sg-GEN-son what ability DIR-learn-2sg-Q say-INF: HS Æ“My son, what ability did you learn?”, she said.fl (T5:47) b. må:-le:-tt˚-≥u˙≤i ˚i-≥u˙≤i . . . pånt˚in mom-DEF:CL-GEN -TOP wine-TOP half.catty lie-k˙p˙-kui-wå. (T5:19-20) carry-HABIT-INF: HS-EMPH ÆFor his mom (he) would bring back half a catty of liquor.fl
116 The noun phrase
(3.232) a. qefilot®u-Ùå, mutu-llå mujuq‘u Âgu˙-zi we-i. the.past-LOC heaven-LOC sun nine-CL exist-HS ÆIn the past there were nine suns in the sky.fl (T1:1) b. mutu-llå t˚e-tse-®u. NEG.IMP-look-DTV heaven-LOC ÆDo not look towards the heavens.fl
(T2:12)
(3.233) a. buzd-le:-ku-ttå ¿å-n˙-kui-t˚u. (T3:115-16) plank.stairs-DEF:CL-foot-LOC DIR-sleep-INF:HS-PART Æ(The stone mortar) slept at the foot of the stairs.fl b. themle z˙p˙q-ttå i-p˙-l-≤ike, . . . 3pl world-LOC DIR-arrive-come-after ÆAfter they returned to the world, . . .fl
(T2:22)
c. steke-ttå mi pefiÂ˙-s ≥u˙-≈uå-≤i, . . . later-LOC people raise(child)-NOM COP-because- ADV ÆLater, in order to propagate descendants, . . .fl (T1:4-5) d. t®huåts˙-le: s˙-ttå t˙-≈uå:-n-å? table-DEF:CL who-LOC DIR-sell:PRS-2sg- Q ÆTo whom are you going to sell the table?fl (3.234) a.
upu-b˙s-te: qhafiÙue-låw-ÙÙå uncle-snake-DEF:CL stone.pile-DEF:one:CL-LOC i-p˙-k. DIR-arrive-go ÆUncle Snake went into a stone pilefl
(T4:18)
b. xs˙-s-ÙÙå i-me-t˚i-p˙-l. (T6:327-328) three-day-LOC DIR-NEG -CON-arrive-come ÆOn the third day (they) had not yet come.fl (3.235) qå t˚˙u-lå ou-tt˚i me-Âå-wå. (< Âi) NEG -exist:1sg-EMPH 1sg home-LOC one:CL-EXC ÆI am the only one at homefl (lit.: ÆExcept for me there is no one at home.fl)
Nominal relational morphology
117
≤å ©lu (3.236) a. m˙ l˙-zi i-dÂi-t˚i. older.brother COM younger.sister DEF-CL DIR-discuss-3pl ÆThe brother and sister talked (it) over.fl (T1:5-6) ≤å b. ÷ile-ep-te: l˙ tsoqpi 2pl-father-DEF:CL also this.family COM qu˙quå-s-tå-≥u˙≤i die-®e-j˙-ka:-ji. (T6:336-338) fight-NOM-LOC-TOP DIR-die-REP-INF: PRS-CSM ÆWhen your father also fought with this person he perhaps died.fl qå-ss å-z˙ ti-wi. (3.237) a. the: 3sg 1sg-COMP one-CL DIR- tall ÆS/he is a bit taller than I am.fl (from Huang 1998:62) ≤iki b. qå ÷~u-≤ ma-wa. NEG -big:1sg 1sg 2sg-COMP ÆI am not as big as you are.fl
(< ba)
≤i (3.238) maha-≤ ¿o-lu-k˙p˙-wå. DIR-come-HABIT -EMPH night-ADV Æ(He) comes at night.fl ≈uå-≤i (3.239) the: qå-≈ s˙ 3sg 1sg-BEN-ADV firewood ÆHe went to chop wood for me.fl
(T3:24)
gue-k. chop-go
Chapter 4 The verb complex
For the purposes of this discussion, the verb complex is defined as the predicating part of the clause, not including the sentence final mood particles. The end of the verb complex is marked by the person marking; the last element of the verb complex takes the person marking suffix, and anything after that is considered to be outside the verb complex. This is done because the person marking is enclitic, and immediately follows the verb if there is no causative or aspect marking, but appears after the causative suffix if there is one, or after the aspect if there is any, but not after other particles that follow the verb complex. The beginning of the verb complex is the adverbials which modify the verb. No nominal arguments (all of which were discussed above) are included in the verb complex. Nominal predicates were discussed in §3.2.9. In this section we will focus on verbal predicates. In Section 4.1 we will discuss the structure of the verb complex, in Section 4.2 we will discuss the different types of verbs and derivational morphology, in Section 4.3 we will discuss the relational and other non-derivational morphology in the verb complex, and in Section 4.4 we will discuss adverbial modification.
4.1. Structure The verb complex in its most expanded form has an adverbial (including manner adverbials, certain adverbs covered in §4.4, and the verbal action classifiers discussed in §3.1.6), a directional prefix, a negative prefix (either unmarked negative or prohibitive negative), a continuative aspect (Æyet, stillfl) prefix, the verb, causative marking, prospective aspect marking, change of state aspect marking, and person marking. There are three other particles that can follow the verb inside the verb complex. One ([j˙], glossed ÆREPfl) has the meaning Æagainfl. The meaning of this particle prevents it from occurring together with both
120
The verb complex
the negative and continuative aspect prefixes, as the meaning would be Ænot yet again Vfl. The second particle marks a first person indirect directive, and does not appear with prospective aspect marking. The third particle marks inferentially derived information (see §4.3.7), and also generally does not appear with prospective aspect marking. The full list of possible elements of a single-verb verb complex can be represented as in Figure 3 (not all of these affixes can occur together): intensifying adverb direction/orientation prefix or 3rd person indirect directive marking prefix (or the two combined as one syllable) 3. simple negation /m˙-/ or prohibitive /t˚˙-/ prefix 4. continuative aspect marking prefix /t˚i-/ VERB ROOT 5. causative marking suffix /-Â/ 6. prospective aspect marking suffix /-å:/ 7. auxiliary directional verb /k˙/ Ægofl or /l˙/ Æcomefl 8. repetition marking suffix /-j˙/ suffixes 9. change of state aspect marking suffix /-ji/ 10. 1st person indirect directive marking suffix /-l-/ 11. inferential evidential and mirative marking suffix /-k/ 12. visual evidential marking suffix /-u/ 13. non-actor person marking (1sg /-®å/, 2sg /-sån/, 1pl /-®˙fi/, 2pl /-såi/, 3sg/pl [-wu/ ± -u]) 14. actor person marking (1sg /-å/, 2sg /-n/, 1pl /-˙fi/, 2pl /-i/, 3pl /-t˚i/) 15. hearsay evidential marking suffix /-i/ Figure 3. The structure of the Qiang verb complex prefixes
1. 2.
A minimal verb complex would be just the verb and third person singular (zero) person marking. In some cases the prospective aspect marking will appear on the person marking suffix, e.g. [sum the: xewå:] [teacher 3sg scold-PRS:3sgU] ÆThe teacher will scold himfl, where /å:/ + /w˙/ > [wå:]. There is also a 3rd person indirect directive prefix (/˚å:-/) that can appear in the same slot as the directional prefixes, either instead of a directional prefix or merged with it (see §4.3.5.2 for examples). If there is an auxiliary verb in the clause, then it follows the (semantically) main verb. In the case of Æcomefl / Ægofl and Ælikefl, when they follow another verb (e.g. /Ùoi-k˙/ [call-go] Ægo callfl, [≤i©i dz˙ topu-
Verb types
121
n-å] [what eat like-2sg-Q ] Æwhat do/would you like to eatfl), generally nothing comes between the two verbs. Person marking always appears on the last element of the verb complex, regardless of whether it is a main verb, an auxiliary, or an aspect marker. Prospective aspect marking may appear on the main verb even if there is an auxiliary verb. In the case of intransitive stative verbs, there are also some adverbs that follow the verb. Examples of the different combinations possible can be found in the discussions of the individual items that go into the verb complex in Sections 4.2 and 4.3.
4.2. Verb types The verb in Qiang can be defined as an element that can take the directional prefixes, the negative prefix, and the causative suffix. Below we discuss the different types of verbs, both derived and underived, that can appear in the verb complex.
4.2.1. Intransitive, transitive, reciprocal Intransitive verbs take only one direct argument, and any other participants added to the clause must take some sort of semantic case marking (see §3.2.22 for a summary and examples). With transitive verbs there are two unmarked arguments. While most verbs in Qiang fall into these two classes, a number of verbs are ambitransitive, that is, they can be used either intransitively or transitively, such as /©lu/ Ærollfl and /dz˙/ Æeatfl. As there is no applicative construction that has the function of adding an undergoer or benefactive argument, for most of the verbs where the single argument of the intransitive use corresponds to the actor of the transitive use, such as Æeatfl (e.g. ÆI eatfl vs. ÆI eat somethingfl), the transtive and intransitive uses differ only in terms of whether an undergoer argument appears in the clause or context. That is, the single argument of the intransitive use corresponds to the actor of the transitive use. Where the single argument of the intransitive is semantically an undergoer, the transitive is generally formed using the causative suffix (see below), but for a few verbs the transitive can be formed by simply adding an actor, such as with /©lu/ Ærollfl, as in (4.1a-
122
The verb complex
b). With these verbs use of the causative is also a possibility, as in (4.1c), but the meaning is slightly different: in (4.1b) the actor must be involved in the rolling, whereas in (4.1c) the actor may have just done something that caused the stone to roll. (4.1)
a. Âåwå ¿o-©lu. stone DIR-roll ÆThe stone rolled down.fl
b. qå Âåwå ¿o-©lu-å. 1sg stone DIR-roll-1sg ÆI rolled the stone down.fl
c. qå Âåwå ¿o-©lu-Â-å. 1sg stone DIR-roll-CAUS -1sg ÆI caused the stone to roll down.fl It is not possible to form an intransitive from a transitive simply by dropping the noun phrase representing the actor (at least in the case of first and second person actors) because of the person marking on the verb reflecting the person and number of the actor. In general there is no formal difference between telic and non-telic verbs other than use of a directional prefix to mark the fact that the logical conclusion of the telic situation has been reached. In general there is no special citation form for verbs other than the unmodified root, but there are a few verbs that seem to have a final syllable /te/ or /tu/ (depending on harmony with the preceding vowel) in citation form that generally does not appear when the verbs are used in context. Following is a complete list of those we have found: (4.2)
≈sutu qhutu Âgutu ≤ete dete tshuate ©liete tshuåte w˙te
Æjumpfl Æspread, sprinklefl Æthrowfl Ælickfl Æhitfl Æstamp the feetfl Ærub between the handsfl Æchop (e.g. meat)fl Æstirfl
˚ete ph˙te tshuete Âete lete phete kh˙fite Ùu˙te
Æsmell (v.)fl Æspitfl Æpeckfl Æpound, knockfl Æspin (yarn)fl Æwag, shake, patfl Æhit (people)fl Æthrowfl
It is possible to derive verbs from nouns by putting the verb /p˙/ Æto dofl after the noun. We saw examples of this in the discussion of
Verb types
123
Chinese loan words in §3.1.1. Other than this there is no way to derive verbs from nouns. With some verbs intransitives can be formed by reduplicating the verb to make a reciprocal, as in the following examples: (4.3)
a. Ùu Æcursefl b. zd˙ Æconnectfl c. Ùua Æhelpfl
> > >
ÙuÙu zd˙zd˙ Ùu˙Ùua
Æcurse each otherfl Æmutually connectfl Æhelp each otherfl
The verb in this construction can either take one plural argument (which is possibly comprised of two conjoined noun phrases) or two arguments, one of which is marked as an oblique argument by the comitative/conjunction marker /-≤å/. In the first of these two situations, the verb would take plural person marking, in the second, the verb would take singular person marking. In the case of certain verbs that involve some other referent than the two human referents that are mutually involved, or have only one human referent, the verb remains transitive with reduplication, and the meaning of reduplication can be iteration, such as with the verbs in (4.4).and (4.5). (4.4)
a. må Æplaster (a wall)fl > m˙må Æbe plasteringfl > stuistue Æbe pulling (weeds)fl b. stue Æpull (weeds)fl > didi Æbe climbing (a tree)fl c. di Æclimbfl
(4.5)
the: s˙ qhiqhi. 3sg firewood chopping ÆHe is chopping firewood.fl
(< qhi)
Some verbs have a reduplicated form as their base form. In these cases, no further reduplication is necessary to express the reciprocal (e.g. /®que®que/ Æpullfl, /l˙le/ Æinsertfl). Reciprocal verbs can be nominalized, e.g. /l˙lå-s/ (Æexchangefl + nominalizer > Æthat which is exchangedfl); the nominalized form expresses the goal of the action. Reciprocal meaning can also be emphasized by use of the adverbial expression /e:-wu e:-tå/ (one:CL-AGT one:CL-DAT ) Æeach otherfl. Following are some examples of the use of reciprocals.
124
(4.6)
The verb complex
a. khumtsi-≤å-≈umt®i qu˙quå-t˚i. fight:RECIP-3pl Khumtsi-COM-Xumt®i ÆKhumtsi and Xumt®i are fighting.fl
(< quå)
b. thizzi e:-wu e:-tå få phifiphifi-t˚i. 3dl one:CL-AGT one:CL-DAT clothing tear:RECIP-3pl ÆThe two of them tore each otherfls clothes.fl In the negative, verbs do not require reduplication to be reciprocal, such as /s˙/ Æto know (a person)fl in (4.7). In the positive this would be [s˙s˙:fi]. (4.7)
t˚ile må-s˙:fi. 1pl NEG -know:1pl ÆWe donflt know each other.fl (or ÆWe donflt know it/him/herfl)
While there is marking of the reciprocal on the verb, and there are some verbs with an inherently reciprocal meaning, there is no marking of reflexives on the verb, and there are no verbs with an inherently reflexive sense. Instead, reflexive pronouns are used to express a reflexive meaning (see §3.1.2). There are also no middle voice56 or passive constructions. Transitive verbs can be formed from intransitives using the causative construction (see §4.2.2, below). It is also possible to add an oblique argument to a transitive or ditransitive verb by using the benefactive postposition /≈uå-≤i/ (see §3.2.10).
4.2.2. Causatives There are three types of causative marking in Qiang, though only one of these is productive. This is the causative suffix /-Â(˙)/, which increases the valency of intransitive, transitive, and ditransitive verbs. There is no difference in the causative marking of these three types of verbs. Causatives derived using this suffix can be permissive or causative, and either direct or indirect causatives. The actor person marking on the verb (§4.3.2, Table 8) reflects the person and number of the causer only, and the marking is added to (follows) the causative suffix, using the
Verb types
125
same forms as for non-causativized verbs. Non-actor person marking (§4.3.2, Table 9), if there is any, marks the person and number of the causee, not the undergoer (only animates are marked). Prospective aspect marking, if there is any, also appears after the causative suffix. In terms of the marking of the noun phrases representing the causer, there is no formal difference which depends on the agentivity and/or intentionality of the causer, but there is a difference which depends on the animacy of the causer; the noun phrase representing the causer of a derived monotransitive clause generally does not take the agentive marker /-wu/ unless it is inanimate, e.g. Æwindfl in the following example: (4.8)
moÙu-wu qå då-tu˙-Â. wind-AGT 1sg DIR-fall.over- CAUS ÆThe wind knocked me down.fl
This clause is a causative of an intransitive, so the resulting form is a monotransitive clause, in this case with an inanimate actor/causer and animate undergoer/causee. The noun phrase representing the causee can take agentive marking, though, if the basic clause from which it is formed is transitive, as in (4.9).57 The use of the agentive marker is not related to the willingness of the causee to perform the action; s/he may be willing or not. (4.9)
qå the:-wu p˙its˙-e-ze cup-one-CL 1sg 3sg-AGT ÆI made him/her buy a cup.fl
z˙-p-Âå. (< Â˙) DIR-buy-CAUS :1sg
The noun phrase representing the causer can often be omitted, as the person marking on the verb reflects the person and number of the causer, but the noun phrase representing the causee cannot be omitted. Following are some examples of causatives formed from different base types:
126
The verb complex
Unmarked intransitive: (4.10) ts˙ tu-≈su-ji. water DIR-boil-CSM ÆThe water has come to a boil.fl Causativized intransitive: (4.11) a. qå ts˙ tu-≈su-Â-ja. DIR-boil-CAUS -CSM:1sg 1sg water ÆI brought the water to a boil.fl
(< ji + å)
b. qå the: dytå: l˙©z su-k‘u-Âå:. (< Â˙) 1sg 3sg Chengdu:LOC book study-go-CAUS:PRS ÆI am going to make him/her go to Chengdu to study (attend school).fl Causativized transitive: (4.12) a. xs˙-hån thunt®˙ tu-p-Â˙. (T5:297) DIR-do-CAUS three-kind notify Æ(These) three things you must proclaim (to the people).fl (lit.: cause someone to notify themfl) b. qå the:-wu l˙©z å-f˙≥ ¿e-Âi-Âå. (< Â˙) 1sg 3sg-AGT book one-CL DIR-write-CAUS:1sg ÆI made him write a letter.fl c. ≈umt®i qå-wu Xumt®i 1sg-AGT ÆXumt®i made me hit you.fl
÷~u 2sg
z˙-d˙-Â.58 DIR-hit-CAUS
Causativized ditransitive: (4.13) qå 1sg
≈umt®i-wu Xumt®i-AGT
l˙©z-te-pen book-DEF-CL
khumtsi-tå Khumtsi-LOC
(< Â˙)
Verb types
t˙-≈uå-Âå:. DIR-buy-CAUS :PRS:1sg ÆIflm going to make Xumt®i buy the book for Khumtsi.fl
127
(< Â˙)
The copula can also take the causative suffix, as in translative constructions: (4.14) a. khu˙-le: pu≤u hå-≥u˙-Â. dog-DEF:CL cat DIR-COP -CAUS ÆMake the dog replace/become the cat.fl (Treat the dog as a cat.’ b. t˚ile the: ¿å-ståq˙-≤i linthåu ≥u˙-Âå:. (< Â˙) 1pl 3sg DIR-choose- ADV leader COP-CAUS:PRS ÆWe chose him to be leader.fl In (4.14b), the verb /ståq˙/ Æchoosefl appears in a manner adverbial phrase modifying the main verb of the clause, the causativized copula, to express how the causee became the leader.59 Causatives can also be used with reciprocals: (4.15) qå thizzi l˙lå-Âå:. 1sg 3dl exchange-CAUS:PRS:1sg ÆI had the two of them exchange with each other.fl
(< Â˙)
(4.16) qå thizzi qu˙quå-Âå:. 1sg 3dl hit:REFL-CAUS:PRS:1sg ÆI had the two of them hit each other.fl
(< Â˙)
Of the two types of non-productive causative marking, one derives from the Proto-Sino-Tibetan *s- prefix (LaPolla 2003a:22 and references therein). Only one example of this has been found to date: /˚t˚˙/ Æfeed (vt.)fl, from /t˚he/ Æeat (rice)/drinkfl (with assimilation of the prefix to point of articulation of the initial). While this is the only such example found in Qiang, it matches well with forms found in closely related languages and dialects; the lack of examples may simply be due to lack of data or the obscuring of the prefix by assimilatory processes.
128
The verb complex
The second type of non-productive causative marking is a voicedvoiceless (aspirated) contrast in simplex-causative or intrasitivetransitive pairs (also a feature of Proto-Sino-Tibeto—LaPolla 2003a:23). There is also a concomitant difference in the directional prefix used with each type (see §4.3.3 for more on this difference). (4.17)
simplex a. de-pe b. da-Ùe c. da-Ùli
causative ¿e-phe ¿a-qhe ¿a-≈¬i
Ætear (of clothes)fl Æbreak (of bowls, etc.)fl Æbreak (in two) (of tree limbs, etc.)fl
These are the only three forms we have found so far in the Ronghong subdialect, but there are quite a few more in the Mawo dialect (see Sun 1981a:192-3). This type has more of a sense of direct causation, and not permission, than the productive causative. These causative forms cannot take a further productive causative suffix.
4.2.3. Intransitive state predicate verbs (adjectives) In this section we will be discussing the nature of intransitive state predicate verbs, i.e. stative verbs with only one argument. (See also Huang Chenglong 1994, LaPolla & Huang 2002.) Intransitive state predicate verbs form a separate sub-class of verb distinct from other transitive and intransitive verbs, and since they are words for dimension, age, value, color, quality, and shape, we can use the term Æadjectivesfl for this sub-class of verbs (they are morphosyntactically unlike English adjectives, though). They can be predicates without the use of the copula, as can verbs, and take the same person marking (agreement) forms, orientation/directional marking, causative marking, evidential marking, and most aspect and negation marking as non-stative intransitive verbs, but unlike non-stative verbs, they can be nominalized using the definite and indefinite markers (see §3.1.4—existential verbs can also be nominalized in this way), many can act as adverbials (taking the adverbial marker /-≤i/), and many can take the postpositive adverb /-wa/ Æveryfl.60 Non-stative verbs can only modify a noun in the form of a pre-head relative clause construction, while adjectives can modify a noun directly in post-head position (as
Verb types
129
well as appear in relative clause constructions), as in [mi nå] (person good) Æ(a) good personfl. The meaning of reduplication for most verbs is reciprocity (see §4.2.1), while the meaning of reduplication for adjectives is intensification or plurality.61 There is no morphology for deriving adjectives from non-adjectival verbs, although adjectives can take causative marking and become transitive verbs. There is no nounadjective overlap, and no way to derive an adjective from a noun except by use of the auxiliaries /-thå/ and /-p˙/ mentioned in §3.1.1 in the discussion of loan words above. This is done only with borrowed words, not with native words. The class of adjectives is an open class with many members, although the majority of new members are loan-words from Chinese (see §3.1.1 on loan words). The class includes items related to dimension, age, value, color, physical property, human propensity, speed, difficulty, qualification, and quantification. Some meanings that are expressed by adjectives in other languages are not expressed by adjectives in Qiang. For example, words expressing the semantic field of position are (locational) nouns (/steke/ Æbehindfl, /m˙q/ Ætop, abovefl, /Âek’u/ Æbetween, centerfl, /®q˙l/ Æbelowfl, /pienå/ Ænear, (be)sidefl, and /q˙:fi/ Æbeforefl), numbers form a separate word class (they must appear with a classifier when used as modifier or predicate), and there are no words for similarity. Within some of the semantic types that are generally expressed by adjectives in Qiang there are some words that are not adjectives. For example, within the quantification type, the meanings Æallfl and Æonlyfl are represented by adverbs, and the meaning Æsome, a fewfl is represented by the numeral for Æonefl plus the plural marker ([å-hå]), or Æonefl + Ætwofl plus a classifier (e.g. [˙-j˙-u]). Some concepts are not represented by basic words, but by negation of basic words, e.g. in qualification, Æcorrectfl is a basic word, /pe/, but there is no basic native word for Æincorrectfl, only the negation of Æcorrectfl, /me-pe/. Adjectives and certain other verbs which represent gradient concepts can appear as the predicate in a comparative construction (see §3.2.7 for examples), but adjectives can be comparative even without overt marking of comparison ((4.18a)). Addition of an adverbial meaning Æveryfl can clarify that a non-comparative sense is intended ((4.18b)). To specify a comparative sense, an adverbial such as [å-zå] (Æonefl-CL) Æa littlefl can be added before the adjective ((4.18c)).
130
(4.18)
The verb complex
a. the: ti-wi. 3sg DIR- tall ÆHe is tall/taller.fl
b. the: ti-wi-wa. 3sg DIR- tall-very ÆHe is very tall.fl
c. the: å-zå ti-wi. 3sg one-CL DIR- tall ÆHe is a bit taller.fl There are only three types of reduplication of adjectives: AA, Au:A, AAu: (/u:/ is a syllable added to the reduplicated form—this type is only possible with adjectives); there is no ABB, ABAB, or AABB reduplication. Reduplicated forms are nominalized even without the (in)definite marking. The meaning of AA reduplication is plurality; the meaning of Au:A reduplication is intensification; the meaning of AAu: reduplication is plurality plus intensification. With AAu: and Au:A reduplication, the phonetic stress is on /u:/ (the stress is marked with an acute accent in the examples in (4.19)). Following are examples: (4.19)
a. AA b. Au:A c. AAu:
påt®påt® påt®|u:påt® påt®påt®|u:
Æsome round thingsfl Ævery round thingsfl Æsome very round thingsfl
Reduplicated adjectives can appear together with a common noun, and are generally followed by the indefinite marker /-ke/. They are then noun phrases in their own right in apposition to the common noun, clarifying the nature of the referent of the common noun. In this structure the nominalized adjective can precede or follow the common noun. (See §3.1 on the modifiers of the noun phrase.) Following are examples:
påt®påt®-ke: (4.20) a. qhål steamed.bun round.round-INDEF:CL Æround steamed bunsfl (lit.: Æsteamed buns, round onesfl) b. få ≤iq≤iqu:-ke: clothing black.black-INDEF:CL Ævery black clothingfl (lit.: Æclothing, black onesfl)
Verb types
c. pat®u:pat® pana lå-hå t˚å-lå round.round thing DEF:one-pl where-LOC ÆWhere are the very round things?fl
131
®˙? exist
In most cases reduplicated forms do not modify a noun, but instead are simply nominalized by /-ke/ and used with the copula (e.g. [qhål påt®påt®-ke: ≥u˙] Æqhål (steamed buns) are round thingsfl). Adjectives are generally only nominalized by the definite and indefinite markers or reduplication, although, as mentioned in Section 3.1, in certain situations they can also be nominalized by /-m/ and /-t˚/ (see §5.2 on these nominalizers). In the case of /-m/ nominalization, the referent is generally a person, as in the following examples:
ba-m (4.21) a. mi person big-NOM Æ(a) big personfl
b.
mi ti-wi-m person DIR- tall-NOM Æ(a) tall personfl
In these particular examples, there are two noun phrases in apposition to each other, something like Æa person, a big onefl. This contrasts with the usual form of the adjective without nominalization, e.g. mi ba [person big] Æbig personfl. In the case of nominalization by /-m/ or /-t˚/, the form would generally be followed by the indefinite or definite marker, as in the following example:
˚upu-t˚-ke: (4.22) få clothing red-GEN-INDEF:CL ÆThere is an item of red clothing.fl
®˙. exist
Although this form looks similar to a single noun phrase which has both a post-head adjective and indefinite marking (i.e. [få-˚upu-ke:] (clothing-red-INDEF:CL)), it is clearly two noun phrases, as the order of the two noun phrases could be reversed. This structure is used for emphasizing the quality of the referent in question, such as in a contrastive context. Some adjectives are formed from noun + verb combinations with metaphorical meanings. Following are some examples using the noun /˚t˚i:(mi)/ Æheartfl:
132
The verb complex
(4.23) a. ˚t˚i:mi-di b. ˚t˚i:mi-ba c. ˚t˚i-k‘u‘˙-nå
Æsadfl Æbravefl Æhappyfl
< <
l˙le 'put inside'
136
The verb complex
d. ®˙ 'exist (inanimate)'
>
®˙®˙ 'put (someplace)'
Unlike in some other Tibeto-Burman languages (e.g. Tibetan), the existential/locative verbs have not grammaticalized into any sort of construction marking tense, aspect, or evidentials.
4.2.5. ‘Come’ and ‘go’ Æ Comefl and Ægofl are somewhat irregular verbs.. Æ Gofl has the following third person forms: /--qå/ prefixed perfective (e.g. /¿åqå/ Æwent downfl), /k˙/ unprefixed,64 /-Ù˙/ prefixed imperfective or prospective (e.g. /dåÙ/ Ægo outfl). ÆComefl has the following forms: /lu/ imperfective, /-lå/ prefixed perfective, /lu-å:/ prospective aspect. (See §4.3.3 for discussion of the directional prefixes.) Both these verbs function as main verbs, and as directional auxiliary verbs, following other verbs. When used as auxiliary verbs, they form a single nucleus with the preceding verb, and so do not take prefixes separately. For example, in [stuåhå ˚å:-t˚ k˙] (food/rice INDTV :3sg-eat go) ÆLet (him/her) go eat!fl, the indirect directive prefix appears on the verb meaning Æeatfl, not on Ægofl. With certain verbs Æcomefl and Ægofl appear very regularly as auxiliaries, and this has led to the situation where the vowel of Æcomefl and Ægofl has been lost, and the initial has fused with the preceding verb, forming a new verb, e.g. /p˙l/ Æcome backfl < /p˙/ Æarrivefl + /lu/ Æcomefl; /p˙k/ Ægo backfl < /p˙/ Æarrivefl + /k˙/ Ægofl. In the case of these compound verbs and some others like this, they have lexicalized to the point that they are no longer seen as including the verbs Æcomefl and Ægofl by the Qiang speakers.
4.2.6. Auxiliary verbs Auxiliary verbs follow the (semantically) main verb, often in a complement-matrix structure (see §5.3 for the structure), generally with no nominalizing, adverbial or other marking between the two verbs. If there is person marking, the marking appears on the auxiliary or final particle of the verb complex, though aspect marking may appear on the embedded (main) verb. If there is negation of the auxiliary, the negative prefix appears on the auxiliary verb. There is no requirement that the
Verb types
137
two verbs agree in transitivity (such as is found, for example, in Rawang [LaPolla 2000a]). The potential to perform an action is expressed by use of the auxiliary verbs /©Â˙/ for learned ability, /dÂ˙/ or /qe/ for natural (physical) ability, and /gu/ for ability to fit into something else. See Section 4.3.6.4 for examples of their use. Willingness to perform an action or to allow others to perform an action is expressed by using the auxiliary verb /Ùu/. This verb can also be used for possibility, either directly following a verb or in a construction with a nominalized verb.
k˙ Ùu. (4.37) a. the: thå-Âi 3sg there-exist thus willing/allow ÆS/he might be there.fl b. p˙s m˙ ma-≈qa, tsh˙i t˙-≤i≈ Ùu. today weather NEG -clear prickly.ash.peel DIR-black will ÆToday the weather is not good, the prickly ash peel will become black.fl The auxiliary verb /x®u/ is used to express the idea Æto darefl to do an action.
stu n˙ (4.38) the: e-ze 3sg one-CL alone sleep ÆS/he doesnflt dare sleep alone.fl
mo-x®u. NEG -dare
In some expressions, /x®u/ can be used alone: (4.39) khu˙-tå mo-x®u, pie-tå x®u. dog-DAT NEG -dare pig-DAT dare ÆBully the weak and fear the strong.fl (lit.: ÆDoesnflt dare X to a dog, but will to a pig.fl) The auxiliary verb /Ùze/ Æought tofl can be used in some contexts to express obligation (physical or moral) to perform an action. There is no person marking when using this auxiliary verb, so even if a first or second person pronoun were added to, for example, (4.40a) or (4.40b),
138
The verb complex
specifying who must or must not go, there would be no change in the verb. (4.40) a. k˙ Ùze-ji! go must-CSM ÆItfls time to go!fl (ÆI/we/you must go!fl) b. k˙ ma-t˚i-Ùze!65 go NEG -CON-must Æ(You/we) neednflt / shouldnflt go yet!fl (4.41) a. stuåhå t˚h˙ Ùze-ji. rice/food eat must-CSM ÆItfls time to eat!fl (ÆI/you/we must eat!fl) b. stuåhå t˚h˙ ma-t˚i-Ùze. rice/food eat NEG -CON-must ÆI/we/you shouldnflt eat!fl The auxiliary verb /se/ is used to express permission or lack of it: (4.42) ˚o˚åu-Ùå Âme-Â de school-LOC Qiang-language speak ÆSpeaking Qiang is permitted in school.fl
¿e-se. DIR-allow
See also Section 4.3.6.1 for examples of the auxiliary verbs /˚t˚åq-lu/ Æthink of, wantfl, and /zulu/ Æwaitfl, used in optative constructions, and Section 4.3.4.4 on the auxiliary verb /de/, which is used to mark the experiential aspect.
4.2.7. The copula There is only one copula, /≥u˙/, which is used in identificational, attributive, and cleft constructions, and after nominalized verbs (see for example §4.3.6.3, §5.2). The copula can take person marking in some contexts, but often does not take aspect marking, unless it is causativized or appears with the particle /-®/ (see §4.4).
Verb types
139
In some < NP NP > type equational clauses, most noticeably statements of the date or of the age of a person, the copula is optional, as in the following example:
xs˙-˚˙-t˚-Ùo-t˚u. (4.43) p˙s today three-month-GEN-five-beginning ÆToday is March fifth.fl Following are examples of the copula with first and second person marking (see §5.3 on the structure of these examples):
the: z˙-di ≥uå. (4.44) a. qå-wu 3sg DIR-hit COP:1sg 1sg-AGT ÆI hit him (emphatic) / I am the one who hit him.fl
(< ≥u˙)
b. ÷~u-wu the: z˙-di ≥u˙-n. 2sg-AGT 3sg DIR-hit COP-2sg ÆYou hit him (emphatic) / You are the one who hit him.fl
4.3. Verbal morphology This section presents the most complex aspect of Qiang grammar, the verbal morphology. It begins with a look at how a speaker can take different perspectives in profiling an event or situation using differences of word order (§4.3.1), then covers the different morphological systems for marking person (§4.3.2), the direction or orientation of the action (§4.3.3), aspect (§4.3.4), illocutionary force (§4.3.5), mood (§4.3.6), and evidentials (§4.3.7).
4.3.1. Perspective There is no voice opposition in the verb, though the perspective taken in expressing an action can differ due to changes in word order because of topicalization or the use of a cleft construction. The noun phrase representing the undergoer can be simply fronted to make it the topic, though the noun phrase representing the recipient generally must appear
140
The verb complex
in a cleft construction to be a topic. See also the section on transitive actors (§3.2.3). Compare the following three examples:
khu˙-e-zi (4.45) a. qå 1sg dog-one-CL ÆI bought a dog.fl
z˙-på. DIR-buy:1sg
(< p˙)
b. khu˙-le: qå-wu på: lu. dog-DEF:CL 1sg-AGT buy:1sg:PRS will ÆI will buy the dog.fl (ÆThe dog I will buy.fl) c. khu˙-le: qå-(wu) z˙-p-ji ≥u˙. dog-DEF:CL 1sg-AGT DIR-buy-CSM COP ÆIt was I who bought the dog.fl (ÆThe dog was bought by me.fl) The clause in (4.45a) is an unmarked clause structure; most often the actor is the topic, and so the word order is Actor-Undergoer-Verb, but the word order does not determine grammatical or semantic relations and is not determined by grammatical or semantic relations. The clause in (4.45b) has the noun phrase representing the undergoer in topic position, while the one in (4.45c) has the undergoer as topic of a cleft construction. Because this last example has a third person referent as the first argument of the copula, there is no first person marking on the copula. Of the following two examples, (4.46a) has the undergoer in topic position, and the reference to the non-specific actor is optional. In (4.46b) there is more emphasis on the non-specific actor, as the noun phrase used to refer to it is in topic position.
(mi-wu) z˙-di. (4.46) a. qå 1sg person-AGT DIR-hit ÆI was hit.fl (lit.: ÆSomeone hit me.fl) b. mi-wu qå z˙-di. person-AGT 1sg DIR-hit ÆSomeone hit me.fl
Verbal morphology
141
It is also possible in many cases to omit reference to a referential actor, as in the following example. The identity of the referent is often still recoverable from the person marking on the verb, but omitting such reference puts more emphasis on the undergoer.
¿å-≈-k˙-n. (4.47) pån˙-le: thing-DEF:CL DIR-bad- INF-2sg ÆIt seems the thing was broken (by you).fl (lit.: ÆIt seems you broke the thing.fl) Following is an example of the noun phrase representing the undergoer of a ditransitive clause in topic position (in a cleft construction):
the: de-l-ji ≥u˙. (4.48) t®hets˙-le: qå car-DEF:CL 1sg 3sg DIR-give-CSM COP ÆThe car was given to him by me.fl The non-actor person marking on the verb has the sense in some contexts of an adversative passive. See the next section (§4.3.2) for examples.
4.3.2. Person marking In general, the verb in a non-nominalized Qiang clause has marking which reflects the person and number of the actor of a transitive clause and the single direct argument of an intransitive clause. The marking takes the form of suffixes, which are added to the last element in the verb complex. The forms are given in Table 8. Table 8. The Qiang person marking suffixes for intransitive verbs 1 2 3 singular -å -n -õ plural -fi -i -t˚i
All verbs can take person marking, including adjectives (intransitive stative predicate verbs; see §4.2.3 for examples of person marking on
142
The verb complex
adjectives), but only animate arguments are reflected in the person marking. In some contexts, such as nominalizations, no person marking is used, while in other contexts, such as with some third-person plural actors, the person marking is optional. The use of the person marking also has meaning within the system of evidentials (see §4.3.7). The suffix for first-person actor is /-å/ (possibly < Proto-Qiangic *-≥å), but if the final vowel of the verb complex is /e/ or in some cases /i/, the first-person actor marking combines with the final vowel of the root to become [a] (e.g. /tse/ Ælook atfl > [tsa] ÆI look atfl; /Âi/ Ælocative/existential verb for animatesfl > [Âa] ÆI am [at some location]fl), or, if the vowel is /y/ or in some cases /i/, the first-person actor marking becomes [a] and is added after the final vowel (e.g. /jy/ Æpostverbal aspect particlefl > [jya]; /tiwi/ Ætallfl > [tiwia] ÆIflm tall(er)fl). If the final vowel of the verb complex is a schwa, then this vowel drops completely when /-å/ is added (e.g. /p˙/ Æbuyfl > [på] ÆI am buyingfl); otherwise the suffix is added after the final vowel (e.g. /zulu/ Æwaitfl > [zuluå] ÆI am waitingfl). When combined with prospective aspect marking, the vowel is lengthened (e.g. /p˙/ Æbuyfl, [på] ÆI am buyingfl, [på:] ÆI’m going to buyfl). The second person singular form possibly derives from a ProtoQiangic *-na, which itself (as well as the Proto-Qiangic first person singular form) would have been a grammaticalization of the free pronoun into person marking on the verb (cf. the discussion of the Tangut forms in LaPolla 1992b, 1994). The origin of the plural first and second person forms is unknown. The third person plural form seems, from comparative evidence, to derive from number rather than person marking: in the Mawo dialect (Sun 1981a; Liu 1999), the form /-t˚i/ is used for both second and third person plural forms, and is distinct from the person marking (/-n/ and /-ji/ respectively). In the Mawo dialect the prospective aspect marker (/-å:/) can appear between the number and person marking, e.g. [dzut˚a:n] (< /dzu + t˚i + å: + n/) Æyou(pl) will sitfl (cf. Liu 1998b), which shows they were originally two distinct grammatical categories, but in the Ronghong dialect this distinction has been lost. Following are full examples of the three singular markings:
Verbal morphology
143
(4.49) qå Ùosu-pi-wu få-å-q˙i z˙-på. 1sg fifty-CL-INST clothes-one-CL DIR-buy:1sg ÆI bought one item of clothing for fifty dollars.fl (4.50) ÷~u Ùosu-pi-wu få-å-q˙i z˙-p˙-n. 2sg fifty-CL-INST clothing-one-CL DIR-buy-2sg ÆYou bought an item of clothing for fifty dollars.fl (4.51) the: Ùosu-pi-wu få-å-q˙i z˙-p˙. 3sg fifty-CL-INST clothing-one-CL DIR-buy ÆS/he bought an item of clothing for fifty dollars.fl There is another set of suffixes which can be used to mark the undergoer of a transitive verb, the goal/recipient of a ditransitive verb (the undergoer of a ditransitive verb is not reflected in the person marking), or even a genitive or benefactive argument.66 These forms are given in Table 9: Table 9. The Qiang non-actor person marking suffixes 1 2 sg -®å -sån pl -®afi -såi
3 -w˙ ± -u -w˙ ± -u
The first and second person forms clearly incorporate the first and second person actor forms /-å/, /-fi/ and /-n/, /-i/ respectively, but the origins of the initial of the first person forms and /så/ of the second person forms are unclear.67 As mentioned above, the non-actor person marking also helps to show perspective, as it is generally used only when the topic is a nonactor human referent. Contrast (4.52a), which has a 1st person actor/topic and (4.52b), which has a third person non-actor/topic.
the: l˙©z (4.52) a. qå-(wu) 1sg-AGT 3sg book ÆI gave him a book.fl
e-pen one-CL
de-l-å. DIR-give-1sg
144
The verb complex
b. the: qå-wu l˙©z 3sg 1sg-AGT book ÆHim I gave a book to.fl
e-pen one-CL
de-l-wå. (< w˙ + å) DIR-give-3sg:1sg
The non-actor marking is optional in most contexts, and when used it sometimes has the feeling of an adversative passive, as in (4.53a-b): (4.53) a. ei≤i ÷~u mo-lu-n-tu the: mi-tå next.year 2sg NEG -come-2sg-LNK 3sg other.person-LOC ©Âå:-sån. marry:PRS-2sgU ÆIf you donflt come back next year, she will marry someone else.fl b. ÷~u tså t˚å-låu-thå, tåt˙ t˙-khua:-sån. 2sg here NEG.IMP-be.noisy-AUX father DIR-angry:PRS-2sgU ÆDonflt be noisy here or your father will be angry (at you).fl Here the use of the non-actor marking is not marking an argument of the verb, but a referent who will be affected by the action (in a negative way). The forms for first and second person non-actor are generally used only when there is a third person actor. The entire set of possible suffixes for the transitive verb are given in Table 10. Table 10. The Qiang person marking suffixes for transitive verbs Non-Actor 1sg 1pl 2sg 2pl 3sg A 1sg -å -å -wå c 1pl -fi -fi -w˙fi t 2sg -n -n -w˙n o 2pl -i -i -w˙i r 3sg -®å -®afi -sån -såi -w˙ 3pl -t˚i-®å -t˚i-®å -t˚i-sån -t˚i-såi -w˙-t˚i
3pl -wå -w˙fi -w˙n -w˙i -w˙-t˚i -w˙-t˚i
Following are examples of the non-actor person marking that would be used in imperfective, prospective and perfective situations. The first person forms are generally not used in situations were the clause refers to some future event, and so the examples in (4.57a-b) do not have this marking, and instead have the marking usually used for first person
Verbal morphology
145
actors. This is quite exceptional in the overall system, which is generally clearly based on an actor/non-actor contrast. Imperfective: (4.54) a. låus˙ qå xe-®å. teacher 1sg scold-1sgU ÆThe teacher is scolding me.fl b. låus˙ t˚ile xe-®afi. teacher 1pl scold-1plU ÆThe teacher is scolding us.fl (4.55) a. låus˙ ÷~u xe-sån. teacher 2sg scold-2sgU ÆThe teacher is scolding you(sg).fl b. låus˙ ÷ile xe-såi. teacher 2pl scold-2plU ÆThe teacher is scolding you(pl).fl (4.56) a. låus˙ the: xe-w. teacher 3sg scold-3U ÆThe teacher is scolding him/her.fl b. låus˙ themle xe-w-t˚i. teacher 3pl scold-3U-3pl ÆThe teachers are scolding them.fl Prospective aspect: (4.57) a. låus˙ qå xa:. teacher 1sg scold:PRS:1sg ÆThe teacher will scold me.fl b. låus˙ t˚ile xa:fi. teacher 1pl scold:PRS:1pl ÆThe teacher will scold us.fl
146
The verb complex
(4.58) a. låus˙ ÷~u xa:-sån. teacher 2sg scold:PRS-2sgU ÆThe teacher will scold you(sg).fl b. låus˙ ÷ile xa:-såi. teacher 2pl scold:PRS-2plU ÆThe teacher will scold you(pl).fl (4.59) a. låus˙ the: xe-wå:. teacher 3sg scold-PRS:3U ÆThe teacher will scold him/her.fl b. låus˙ themle xe-wå:-t˚i. teacher 3pl scold-PRS:3U-3pl ÆThe teacher will scold them.fl Perfective: (4.60) a. the: n˙-xe-w. 3sg DIR-scold-3U Æ(The teacher) scolded him/her.fl b. themle n˙-xe-w-t˚i. 3sg DIR-scold-3U-3pl Æ(The teachers) scolded them.fl (4.61) a. qå n˙-xe-®å. 1sg DIR-scold-1sgU ÆThe teacher scolded me.fl b. t˚ile n˙-xe-®afi. 1pl DIR-scold-1plU ÆThe teacher scolded us.fl (4.62) a. ÷~u ne-xe-sån. 2sg DIR-scold-2sgU ÆThe teacher scolded you(sg).fl
Verbal morphology
147
b. ÷ile ne-xe-såi. 2pl DIR-scold-2plU ÆThe teacher scolded you(pl).fl Following is an example with third plural actor marking and first singular non-actor marking: (4.63) themle qå xe-t˚i-®å. 3pl 1sg scold-3pl-1plU ÆThey are scolding me.fl In the next two examples there is a first or second person actor and a third person undergoer, and so the verb exhibits first or second person actor marking and third person non-actor marking. In the case of ditransitives, such as these examples, the non-actor person marking reflects the person of the goal or recipient, not the undergoer.
the:-tå k˙-ji-wå. (< w˙ + å) (4.64) dÂ˙-≥u˙≤i qå 3sg-LOC thus-say-3sgU:1sg thing-TOP 1sg ÆI told him/her about something concerning him/her.fl (4.65) dÂ˙-≥u˙≤i ÷~u the:-tå k˙-ji-w˙-n. thing-TOP 2sg 3sg-LOC thus-say-3sgU-2sg ÆYou told him/her something concerning him/her.fl The following two examples show one situation in which plural marking is not necessary, that where two referents are conjoined into a single plural argument by the conjunction /≤å/:
it˚i (4.66) qå-≤å-the: 1sg-COM-3sg together ÆS/he and I will go together.fl
kå:. go:PRS
(4.67) x®e-≤å-tshe zå-Ùå ≈åf dz˙. cow-COM-sheep field-LOC grass eat ÆThe cow and sheep eat grass in the field.fl
148
The verb complex
The following three examples show person marking reflecting a possessor, a benefactive marked with /≈uå-≤i/ and a benefactive marked with /-t˚/, respectively:
tså (4.68) ÷~u-pån˙-lå-hå 2sg-thing-DEF:one-pl here ÆYour things are here.fl
®˙-sån. exist-2sgU
(4.69) ÷~u-≈uå-(≤i) qupu i˚t˚imåqå hå-Ù-≤i 2sg-BEN-ADV 3sg often DIR-go-ADV s˙pe phiphi-k˙p˙-sån. medicine dig-HABIT-2sgU ÆFor your sake, s/he often goes to dig medicine.fl (4.70) the: qå-t˚ 3sg 1sg-GEN ÆS/he bought it for me.fl
z˙-p-®å. DIR-buy-1sgU
Following are the full paradigms for intransitive and transitive verbs with different types of finals, in their imperfective, prospective aspect and prefixed (perfective) forms:68 n˙ Æto sleepfl Prospective Imperfective Prefixed -------------------------------------------------------------------------------nå: nå ¿ånå 1sg sleep 2sg sleep nå:n n˙n ¿ån˙n 3sg sleep nå: n˙ ¿ån 1pl sleep nå:fi n˙fi ¿ån˙fi 2pl sleep nå:i n˙i ¿ån˙i 3pl sleep nå:t˚i n˙t˚i ¿ånt˚i zei Æto cryfl Prospective Imperfective Prefixed -------------------------------------------------------------------------------zeiå: zeiå ¿ezeiå 1sg cry 2sg cry zeiå:n zein ¿ezein 3sg cry zeiå: zei ¿ezei 1pl cry zeiå:fi zei˙fi ¿ezei˙fi 2pl cry zeiå:i zei˙i ¿ezei˙i
Verbal morphology
3pl cry
zeiå:t˚i
zeit˚i
¿ezeit˚i
phu Æto fleefl Prospective Imperfective Prefixed -------------------------------------------------------------------------------phuå: phuå duπuå 1sg flee 2sg flee phuå:n phun duπun 3sg flee phuå: phu duπu 1pl flee phuå:fi phufi duπufi 2pl flee phuå:i phui duπui 3pl flee phuå:t˚i phut˚i duπut˚i ®ue Æto shinefl Prospective Imperfective Prefixed -------------------------------------------------------------------------------®ua: ®ua i®ua 1sg shine 2sg shine ®ua:n ®uen i®uen 3sg shine ®ua: ®ue i®ue 1pl shine ®ua:fi ®uefi i®uefi 2pl shine ®ua:i ®uei i®uei 3pl shine ®ua:t˚i ®uet˚i i®uet˚i ≈så Æunderstandfl Prospective Imperfective Prefixed -------------------------------------------------------------------------------≈så: ≈så t˙≈så 1sg understand 2sg understand ≈så:n ≈sån t˙≈sån 3sg understand ≈så: ≈så t˙≈så 1pl understand ≈så:fi ≈såfi t˙≈såfi 2pl understand ≈så:i ≈såi t˙≈såi 3pl understand ≈så:t˚i ≈såt˚i t˙≈såt˚i xe Æto scold/cursefl Prospective Imperfective Prefixed --------------------------------------------------------------------------------xa: xa n˙xa 1sg scold 2sg 69 1sg scold 3sg xa: (xewa:) xa (xewa) n˙xewa 1sg scold 2pl xa: xa n˙xa 1sg scold 3pl xa: xa n˙xa 2sg scold 1sg xa:n xen n˙xen 2sg scold 3sg xewa:n xewen n˙xewen 2sg scold 1pl xa:n xen n˙xen
149
150
The verb complex
2sg scold 3pl 3sg scold 1sg 3sg scold 2sg 3sg scold 3sg 3sg scold 1pl 3sg scold 2pl 3sg scold 3pl 1pl scold 2sg 1pl scold 3sg 1pl scold 2pl 1pl scold 3pl 2pl scold 1sg 2pl scold 3sg 2pl scold 1pl 2pl scold 3pl 3pl scold 1sg 3pl scold 2sg 3pl scold 3sg 3pl scold 1pl 3pl scold 2pl 3pl scold 3pl
xewa:n xa: xa:sån xewå: xa: xa:såi xewå: xa:fi xa:fi xa:fi xa:fi xa:i xewa:i xa:i xewa:i xewa:t˚i xa:sån xewå:t˚i xa:t˚i xa:såi xewå:t˚i
xewen xe xesån xew xe xesåi xew xefi xefi xefi xefi xei xewei xei xewei xet˚i xesån xewt˚i xet˚i xesåi xewt˚i
n˙xewen n˙xe n˙xesån n˙xew n˙xe n˙xesåi n˙xw n˙xefi n˙xefi n˙xefi n˙xefi n˙xei n˙xewei n˙xei n˙xewei n˙xet˚i n˙xesån n˙xewt˚i n˙xet˚i n˙xesåi n˙xewt˚i
bie Æcarry (on back)fl Prospective Imperfective Prefixed -------------------------------------------------------------------------------bia: bia ¿eibia 1sg carry 2sg 1sg carry 3sg bia: bia ¿eibia 1sg carry 2pl bia: bia ¿eibia 1sg carry 3pl bia: bia ¿eibia 2sg carry 1sg bia:n bien ¿eibien(--bin) 2sg carry 3sg biewå:n biew˙n ¿eibiw˙n 2sg carry 1pl bia:n bien ¿eibin 2sg carry 3pl biewå:n biew˙n ¿eibiw˙n 3sg carry 1sg bia: bie ¿eibi 3sg carry 2sg bia:sån biesån ¿eibisån 3sg carry 3sg biewå: biew ¿eibiw 3sg carry 1pl bia:i bie ¿eibi 3sg carry 2pl bia:såi biesåi ¿eibisåi 3sg carry 3pl biewå: biew ¿eibiw
Verbal morphology
1pl carry 2sg 1pl carry 3sg 1pl carry 2pl 1pl carry 3pl 2pl carry 1sg 2pl carry 3sg 2pl carry 1pl 2pl carry 3pl 3pl carry 1sg 3pl carry 2sg 3pl carry 3sg 3pl carry 1pl 3pl carry 2pl 3pl carry 3pl
bia:fi bia:fi bia:fi bia:fi bia:i biewa:i bia:i biewa:i bia:it˚i bia:sån biewa:it˚i bia:it˚i bia:såi biewa:t˚i
biefi biefi biefi biefi biei biewei biei biewei biet˚i biesån biewt˚i biet˚i biesåi biewt˚i
¿eibiefi ¿eibiefi ¿eibiefi ¿eibiefi ¿eibii ¿eibiwei ¿eibii ¿eibiwei ¿eibit˚i ¿eibisån ¿eibiwt˚i ¿eibit˚i ¿eibisåi ¿eibiwt˚i
mefi Æsearch forfl Prospective Imperfective Prefixed -------------------------------------------------------------------------------mefiÂå t˙mefiÂå 1sg search for 2sg mefiÂå: 1sg search for 3sg mefiÂå: mefiÂå t˙mefiÂå 1sg search for 2pl mefiÂå: mefiÂå t˙mefiÂå 1sg search for 3pl mefiÂå: mefiÂå t˙mefiÂå 2sg search for 1sg mefiÂå:n mefiÂ˙n t˙mefiÂ˙n 2sg search for 3sg mefiÂwå:n mefiÂw˙n t˙mefiÂw˙n 2sg search for 1pl mefiÂå:n mefiÂ˙n t˙mefiÂ˙n 2sg search for 3pl mefiÂwå:n mefiÂw˙n t˙mefiÂw˙n 3sg search for 1sg mefiÂå:i mefi t˙mefi 3sg search for 2sg mefiÂå:sån mefiÂsån t˙mefiÂsån 3sg search for 3sg mefiÂwå: mefiÂw t˙mefiÂw˙ 3sg search for 1pl mefiÂå:i mefi t˙mefi 3sg search for 2pl mefiÂå:såi mefiÂsåi t˙mefiÂsåi 3sg search for 3pl mefiÂwå: mefiÂw˙ t˙mefiÂw˙ 1pl search for 2sg mefiÂå: mefiÂ˙fi t˙mefiÂ˙fi 1pl search for 3sg mefiÂå: mefiÂ˙fi t˙mefiÂ˙fi 1pl search for 2pl mefiÂå: mefiÂ˙fi t˙mefiÂ˙fi 1pl search for 3pl mefiÂå: mefiÂ˙fi t˙mefiÂ˙fi 2pl search for 1sg mefiÂå:i mefiÂ˙i t˙mefiÂ˙i 2pl search for 3sg mefiÂwa:i mefiÂwei t˙mefiÂwei 2pl search for 1pl mefiÂå:i mefiÂ˙i t˙mefiÂ˙i
151
152
The verb complex
2pl search for 3pl 3pl search for 1sg 3pl search for 2sg 3pl search for 3sg 3sg search for 1pl 3sg search for 2pl 3sg search for 3pl
mefiÂwa:i mefiÂå:it˚i mefiÂå:sån mefiÂwå: mefiÂå:it˚i mefiÂå:såi mefiÂwå:t˚i
mefiÂwei mefiÂt˚i mefiÂsån mefiÂw˙ mefiÂt˚i mefiÂsåi mefiÂw˙t˚i
t˙mefiÂwei t˙mefiÂt˚i t˙mefiÂsån t˙mefiÂw˙ t˙mefiÂt˚i t˙mefiÂsåi t˙mefiÂw˙t˚i
zulu Æto wait forfl Prospective Imperfective Prefixed -------------------------------------------------------------------------------zuluå: zuluå uz‘uluå 1sg wait for 2sg 1sg wait for 3sg zuluå: zuluå uz‘uluå 1sg wait for 2pl zuluå: zuluå uz‘uluå 1sg wait for 3pl zuluå: zuluå uz‘uluå 2sg wait for 1sg zuluå:n zulu˙n uz‘ulu˙n 2sg wait for 3sg zul‘uwå:n zul‘uw˙n uzul‘uw˙n 2sg wait for 1pl zuluå:n zulu˙n uz‘ulu˙n 2sg wait for 3pl zul‘uwå:n zul‘uw˙n uzul‘uw˙n 3sg wait for 1sg zuluå:i zul‘u uz‘ulu 3sg wait for 2sg zuluå:sån zul‘usån uz‘ulusån 3sg wait for 3sg zul‘uwå: zul‘uw˙ uzul‘uw˙ 3sg wait for 1pl zuluå:i zul‘u uz‘ulu 3sg wait for 2pl zuluå:såi zul‘usåi uz‘ulusåi 3sg wait for 3pl zul‘uwå: zul‘uw˙ uzul‘uw˙ 1pl wait for 2sg zuluå:fi zulu˙fi uz‘ulu˙fi 1pl wait for 3sg zuluå:fi zulu˙fi uz‘ulu˙fi 1pl wait for 2pl zuluå:fi zulu˙fi uz‘ulu˙fi 1pl wait for 3pl zuluå:fi zulu˙fi uz‘ulu˙fi 2pl wait for 1sg zuluå:i zului uzului 2pl wait for 3sg zul‘uwa:i zul‘uwei uzul‘uwei 2pl wait for 1pl zuluå:i zului uzului 2pl wait for 3pl zul‘uwa:i zul‘uwei uzul‘uwei 3pl wait for 1sg zuluå:it˚i zul‘ut˚i uzul‘ut˚i 3pl wait for 2sg zuluå:sån zul‘usån uzul‘usån 3pl wait for 3sg zul‘uwå: zul‘uw˙ uzul‘uw˙ 3pl wait for 1pl zuluå:it˚i zul‘ut˚i uzul‘ut˚i 3pl wait for 2pl zuluå:såi zul‘usåi uzul‘usåi 3pl wait for 3pl zul‘uwå:t˚i zul‘uw˙t˚i uzul‘uw˙t˚i
Verbal morphology
153
dete Æto hitfl Prospective Imperfective Prefixed -------------------------------------------------------------------------------deta: deta z˙dita 1sg hit 2sg 1sg hit 3sg deta: deta z˙dita 1sg hit 2pl deta: deta z˙dita 1sg hit 3pl deta: deta z˙dita 2sg hit 1sg deta:n deten z˙diten 2sg hit 3sg detewå:n detew˙n zeditew˙n 2sg hit 1pl deta:n deten z˙diten 2sg hit 3pl detenwå:n detew˙n z˙ditew˙n 3sg hit 1sg deta:i dete z˙dite 3sg hit 2sg deta:sån detesån z˙ditesån 3sg hit 3sg detewå: detew z˙ditew 3sg hit 1pl deta:i dete z˙dite 3sg hit 2pl deta:såi detesåi z˙ditesåi 3sg hit 3pl detewå: detew z˙ditew 1pl hit 2sg deta:fi detefi z˙ditefi 1pl hit 3sg deta:fi detefi z˙ditefi 1pl hit 2pl deta:fi detefi z˙ditefi 1pl hit 3pl deta:fi detefi z˙ditefi 2pl hit 1sg deta:i detei z˙ditei 2pl hit 3sg detewa:i detewei z˙ditewei 2pl hit 1pl deta:i detei z˙ditei 2pl hit 3pl detewa:i detewei z˙ditewei 3pl hit 1sg deta:it˚i detet˚i z˙ditet˚i 3pl hit 2sg deta:sån detesån z˙ditesån 3pl hit 3sg detewå: detew z˙ditew 3pl hit 1pl deta:it˚i detet˚i z˙ditet˚i 3pl hit 2pl deta:såi detesåi z˙ditesåi 3pl hit 3pl detewå:t˚i detewt˚i z˙detewt˚i del Æto givefl Prospective 70 Imperfective Prefixed -------------------------------------------------------------------------------dela: dela dela 1sg give 2sg 1sg give 3sg dela: dela dela 1sg give 2pl dela: dela dela 1sg give 3pl dela: dela dela 2sg give 1sg dela:n del˙n del˙n
154
The verb complex
2sg give 3sg 2sg give 1pl 2sg give 3pl 3sg give 1sg 3sg give 2sg 3sg give 3sg 3sg give 1pl 3sg give 2pl 3sg give 3pl 1pl give 2sg 1pl give 3sg 1pl give 2pl 1pl give 3pl 2pl give 1sg 2pl give 3sg 2pl give 1pl 2pl give 3pl 3pl give 1sg 3pl give 2sg 3pl give 3sg 3pl give 1pl 3pl give 2pl 3pl give 3pl
delwå:n dela:n delwå:n dela: dela:sån delwå: dela: dela:såi delwå: dela:fi dela:fi dela:fi dela:fi dela:i delwa:i dela:i delwa:i dela:t˚i dela:sån delwa:it˚i dela:t˚i dela:såi delwå:t˚i
delw˙n del˙n delw˙n del delsån delw˙ del delsåi delw˙ del˙fi del˙fi del˙fi del˙fi del˙i delwei del˙i delwei delt˚i delsån delw˙t˚i delt˚i delsåi delw˙t˚i
delw˙n del˙n delw˙n del delsån delw˙ del delsåi delw˙ del˙fi del˙fi del˙fi del˙fi del˙i delwei del˙i delwei delt˚i delsån delw˙t˚i delt˚i delsåi delw˙t˚i
4.3.3. Direction marking There is a set of verbal prefixes in Qiang which mark the direction of the action. There are eight different prefixes, but not all verbs can take all eight prefixes; some, such as /tse/ Ælook atfl can only take one prefix. This restriction seems to be in some cases lexical rather than semantic (in some cases it is clearly semantic), as there is another verb, /l˙/ Ælook atfl which has roughly the same semantics as /tse/, but can take all eight of the directional prefixes (see below). Out of a study of 400 verbs, Huang (1997:71) found that 104 of them (26%) took only one of the prefixes, 116 (29%) took two prefixes, 88 (22%) took all eight prefixes, and the rest took between three and seven of the prefixes. Of the prefixes that the verbs could take, the two marking Æupfl and Ædownfl (see
Verbal morphology
155
below) were the most common, being used on 243 and 234 verbs respectively, while the rest were used on 123 to 199 verbs of the set. Huang explains this as being related to the fact that the Qiang people live on steep mountain sides. Another factor could be the many metaphorical uses of Æupfl and Ædownfl (see the list of metaphorical pairs below). While the systems of direction marking prefixes are generally similar among Qiang dialects (and is found in other Qiangic languages), the Ronghong dialect system differs from the Mawo dialect system discussed in Sun 1981a and Sun 1981b, in that it does not include the two forms referring to action towards or away from a stream in a mountain valley, and it also does not have a form for backward motion. Instead it has two other prefixes that mark the direction of action into some container or out of some container (distinct from the two prefixes marking direction towards the center and outward from the center). This system is then more similar to that in the southern Qiang dialect of Taoping, also discussed in Sun 1981a.71 The form of the prefix follows the rules of vowel harmony: with a stressed root vowel, the prefix harmonizes with it (see §2.4.3); with an unstressed root vowel, the vowel of the prefix is usually [-˙], [-a], or [-å]. In a few cases, the vowel can become a diphthong: [¿ei-bi] < /bie/ Æcarry on backfl; [de-®e ± die-®e] < /®e/ Ædiefl; [da-q˙thi ± dia-q˙thi ± dieq˙thi] Ætake (clothes, backpack) off from onefls backfl; [de-mi ± die-mi] Ægo outfl. Following are examples of the use of the prefixes with different verbs. lu Æcomefl ---------------------tulu Æcome vertically upfl ¿olu Æcome vertically downfl nulu Æcome upstreamfl sulu Æcome downstreamfl zulu Æcome towards the centerfl (no form) ulu Æcome infl holu Æcome outfl
Ùu˙te Æthrowfl ----------------------t˙Ù‘u Æthrow vertically upfl ¿aÙ‘u Æthrow vertically downfl n˙Ù‘u Æthrow upstreamfl s˙Ù‘u Æthrow downstreamfl z˙Ù‘u Æthrow towards centerfl daÙ‘u Æthrow out from centerfl ˙Ù‘u Æthrow infl haÙ‘u Æthrow outfl
156
The verb complex
l˙ Ælookfl ----------------------t˙l Ælook upwardfl ¿ål Ælook downwardfl n˙l Ælook upstreamfl s˙l Ælook downstreamfl z˙l Ælook toward centerfl dål Ælook outward from centerfl ˙l Ælook infl hål Ælook outfl
t®hu Æstretchfl ---------------------tut®hu Æstretch upwardfl ¿ot®hu Æstretch downwardfl nut®hu Æstretch upstreamfl sut®hu Æstretch downstreamfl zut®hu Æstretch toward centerfl dot®hu Æstretch out from centerfl ut®hu Æstretch infl hot®hu Æstretch outfl
Which prefix is used of course reflects where the person performing the action is relative to the goal. For example, in (4.71), we can guess that the addressee (not necessarily the speaker) is or will be in the Chibusu District, as the prefix marking movement down-river is used with the verb, and the Mao County county seat is down-river from Chibusu District: (4.71) ÷~u ®qu≤i s˙-Ùå:-n-å? 2sg Mao.County DIR-go: PRS-2sg-Q ÆAre you going (down-river) to the county seat?fl Repeating a verb with different prefixes can express a certain kind of repetition of an action by one or more people. (The /z˙/ prefix marks movement towards the center, while /d˙/ marks movement away from the center; the vocalic prefix marks movement in, while the /h˙/ prefix marks movement out.) (4.72) a. b. c. d. e. f.
l˙lå ÙuÙu pi ≥uasi kefil Ùoi
Æchangefl Æcursefl Æhidefl Æborrowfl Æaskfl Ætreatfl
z˙-lå då-lå zu-Ùu do-Ùu i-pi he-pi zi-≥uasi de-≥uasi zi-kefil de-kefil zu-Ùoi do-Ùoi
Æchange back and forthfl Æcurse back and forthfl Æhide in and outfl Æborrow back and forthfl Æask back and forthfl Ætreat each other (to a meal)fl
Aside from marking the actual direction of the action, the directional prefixes also are used to mark a change in the Aktionsart (inherent verbal aspect) of the verb, from state or activity to achievement or
Verbal morphology
157
accomplishment, or from an absolute state to a contingent (temporary/abnormal) state. Let us first introduce some of the concepts to be employed here. If we look at the types of verbs found in the worldfls languages, we find the following semantic types (From Van Valin & LaPolla 1997, Ch 3, based on Vendler 1967): a. States: be sick, be tall, be dead, love, know, believe, have b. Achievements: pop, explode, collapse, shatter (all intransitive) c. Accomplishments: melt, freeze, dry (the intransitive versions); recover from illness, learn d. Activities: march, walk, roll (the intransitive versions); swim, think, rain, read, eat These four types can be distinguished using the three characteristics [± dynamic], [± telic], and [± punctual], as in the following chart:72 a. State: b. Activity: c. Accomplishment: d. Achievement:
[– dynamic], [– telic], [– punctual] [+ dynamic], [– telic], [– punctual] [+ dynamic], [+ telic], [– punctual] [+ dynamic], [+ telic], [+ punctual]
Each of these four types also has a causative form: a. State: a´. Causative state: b. Achievement: b´. Causative achievement: c. Accomplishment: c´. Causative accomplishment: d. Activity: d´. Causative activity:
The boy is afraid. The dog frightens/scares the boy. The balloon popped. The cat popped the balloon. The ice melted. The hot water melted the ice. The ball rolled around the room. The girl rolled the ball around the room.
Using a form of lexical decomposition, we can represent these verbs types using the following form of notation:
158
The verb complex
Verb Class STATE ACTIVITY ACHIEVEMENT
Logical Structure predicate´ (x) or (x,y) do´ (x, [predicate´ (x) or (x, y)]) INGR predicate´ (x) or (x,y), or INGR do´ (x, [predicate´ (x) or (x, y)]) ACCOMPLISHMENT BECOME predicate´ (x) or (x,y), or BECOME do´ (x, [predicate´ (x) or (x, y)]) CAUSATIVE α CAUSE β, where α, β are LSs of any type Following is an example of this type of representation for the English sentence Max broke the window. (4.73) [do´ (Max, Ø)] CAUSE [BECOME broken´ (window)] In Qiang, the form of most verbs directly reflects the elements of the lexical decomposition, as the basic form of the verb is usually a state or activity, which becomes an achievement or accomplishment with the addition of the directional prefix, and becomes a causative with the addition of the causative suffix (see §4.2.2).7 3 Following are some examples of this phenomenon: (4.74) a. ba b. t˙wa c. t˙waÂ
big´ (x) State BECOME big´ (x) Accomplishment74 [do´ (y, Ø)] CAUSE [BECOME big´ (x)] Causative Accomplishment
(4.75) a. ≈t®å b. ¿å≈t®å c. ¿å≈t®åÂ
small´ (x) State BECOME small´ (x) Accomplishment [do´ (y, Ø)] CAUSE [BECOME small´ (x)] Causative Accomplishment
(4.76) a. t˚h˙ b. s˙t˚
do´ (x, [eat´ (x) or (x, y)]) Activity BECOME do´ (x, [eat´ (x) or (x, y)]) Accomplishment
c. s˙t˚˙Â [do´ (x, Ø)] CAUSE [BECOME do´ (x,[eat´ (x) or (x, y)])] Causative Accomplishment
Verbal morphology
159
(4.77) a. ©lu do´ (x, [roll´ (x) or (x, y)]) Activity b. do©lu INGR do´ (x, [roll´ (x) or (x, y)]) Achievement c. do©lu [do´ (x, Ø)] CAUSE [INGR do´ (x, [roll´ (x) or (x, y)])] Causative Achievement This change is often used to affect something like a perfective sense (analyzed as past tense in Sun 1981a and Huang 1993). For this usage usually only one of the eight prefixes is regularly used, but which prefix is used differs between verbs, as can be seen from the examples just given. Because of this, the directional prefixes in some cases help to differentiate different verbs, as roots with the same form may take different prefixes. For example, /su/ can be Ælearnfl or Ædizzyfl, but Ælearnfl only takes the vocalic prefix ([usu]), while Ædizzyfl only takes the prefix /¿˙-/ ([¿osu]). In the case of Æbecome bigfl and Æbecome smallfl there is a semantic basis for the choice of prefix, as /t˙-/ is for upward direction, and /¿˙-/ is for downward direction. This is also true for Æbecome fatfl vs. Æbecome thinfl. These two prefixes are the most commonly used with adjectives. Following are examples of prefixed forms of some adjectives where addition of one of these two prefixes gives the sense of an accomplishment verb: (4.78) t˙wa t˙phå t˙phi(πi) tu˚upu tuxku˚t˚u t˙®ue t˙nå t˙phå tuj’uku t˙si t˙tshimpe
Æbecome bigfl Æbecome fatfl Æbecome whitefl Æbecome redfl Æbecome hardfl Æbecome lightfl Æbecome goodfl Æbecome swollenfl Æbecome dryfl Æbecome hotfl Æbecome smartfl
¿å≈t®å Æbecome smallfl ¿aÙ˙i Æbecome thinfl t˙≤iq Æbecome blackfl ¿åxt®˙p Æbecome darkfl ¿åm˙t®å Æbecome softfl ¿åt®hå Æbecome deepfl ¿aÙ˙i Æbecome badfl ¿e®e Æbecome less swollenfl ˙≤i Æbecome wetfl z˙mpå Æbecome coldfl (no corresponding antonym)
We can see from these examples that metaphorically becoming good or light is movement upwards, while becoming dark or bad is movement downwards (except in the case of Æbecome blackfl—colors all take the Æupwardsfl prefix; with Æbecome softfl either prefix is acceptable). The
160
The verb complex
antonyms of Æbecome dryfl and Æbecome hotfl are given in the lower right of this set of forms for the sake of completeness. These forms do not take the Æupfl or Ædownfl prefixes; the form for Æbecome wetfl takes the Æinfl prefix, /˙-/, presumably because the water seeps into something to make it wet, and the form for Æbecome cold (feel cold)fl takes the Ætowards the centerfl prefix /z˙-/ (though [t˙mpå] is also possible), possibly like in English when we say the cold gets into your bones. Some of these metaphoric associations are found in English as well, such as smarten up vs. dumb down. Also heat up, lighten up, soften up, and dry up. Use of a different directional prefix can also affect the agentivity of the argument of some intransitive verbs, or can be part of the causativization (see Section 4.2.2 on causatives) or transitivization of some verbs. Following are some examples of this difference in agentivity (cf. Huang 1997:73):75 (4.79) då-¬å Æslipfl do-tshu Æfall (e.g. of fruit from a tree)fl de-phe Æbreak open (of bundle)fl
da-qhua Æcollapse (of house)fl da-Ùa da-Ùli
Æsmash (bowl; vi.)fl Æbreak (tree branch; vi.)fl
¿å-¬å Æslidefl ¿o-tshu Æpick (fruit from a tree)fl ¿e-phe Æbreak open (a bundle)fl ¿a-qhua Æknock down (a house)fl ¿a-qhe Æsmash (bowl; vt.) ¿a-≈li Æbreak (tree branch; vt.)fl
In these examples, the prefixes involved are /d˙/, which marks movement away from the center, and /¿˙/ which marks movement downward. In the first set, Æslipfl is non-agentive, while Æslidefl is the same action, but purposely carried out, i.e. agentive slipping. In the second set, the difference is whether the fruit falls out of the tree of its own accord, or is picked out of the tree. There are some instances where use of different prefixes reflects different meanings or facets of the actions involved:
¿å-qu˙tsu Ælower the headfl (4.80) hå-qu˙tsu Ælift the headfl å-quå Æturn off (a light)fl hå-quå Æclose (a door)fl tu-qu Æbe victorious (in battle)fl ho-qu Ælose (in battle)fl
Verbal morphology
161
In some of these cases (e.g. /qu/) the root form is never used alone, and so it is difficult to give it a distinct gloss. When the habitual-marking verb suffix /-k˙p˙/ appears after a prefixed adjective, it has the meaning Æhas the ability/tendency to become the state represented by the adjectivefl e.g. [t˙-wa-k˙p˙] Æwill become bigfl. This meaning is not possible without the prefix. The directional prefixes are also the main means of marking an imperative (see Section 4.3.5.2).
4.3.4. Aspect Qiang does not have grammaticalized tense marking, but it has several types of aspect marking, including prospective aspect marking, the use of the directional prefixes to mark perfective aspect,76 change of state marking, experiential aspect marking, marking of repetition of an action, continuative aspect marking, habitual aspect marking, marking of a resultant state, and simultaneous action marking.
4.3.4.1. Prospective aspect Prospective aspect is the sense of English going to, as in It is going to rain. In Qiang it patterns most of the time very much like a future tense, and has been analyzed as such in the past (e.g. Sun 1981a, Huang Bufan 1991), but can be used in certain constructions involving past situations (see (4.83) below). It is marked by adding the suffix /-å:/ to the verb, before the person marking, in some cases replacing the root vowel of the verb, when that vowel is /å/ or /˙/, as in (4.81a), where /m˙på/ becomes [m˙på:] in the second clause, and (4.81b), where /p˙/ becomes [på:].
ts˙-s (4.81) a. p˙s m˙på wa, t˙p-≤i today cold very tomorrow-ADV this-COMP t˚å-m˙på: lu. CON-cold:PRS will ÆToday is very cold; tomorrow is going to be even colder than this.fl
162
The verb complex
b. qå få ˚upu-å-thåu på:. buy:PRS:1sg 1sg clothes red-one-CL ÆI am going to buy a suit of red clothes.fl
(< p˙)
In cases where the root vowel (or the last part of a diphthong) is a front vowel, the prospective aspect suffix merges with that vowel, forming [a:]. (4.82) a. me:fi ˚a:. rain fall:PRS ÆItfls going to rain.fl b. the: z˙ phia:. 3sg land till:PRS ÆS/he is going to till the land.fl
(< ˚e)
(< phie)
The key examples for the determination of this marking as aspect rather than tense are those given in (4.83), where the marking appears in a clause representing an action that was Ægoing tofl be carried out at some time in the past, which in some cases turned out not to have been done.
the: mefiÂå:-≤i the: lu-ji. (4.83) a. qå thå-s-Ùå 1sg that:one-day-LOC 3sg look.for:PRS-ADV 3sg come-CSM ÆJust when I was going to (go) look for him, he came.fl b. qupu n˙maha l˙©z tsa:-lai, (< tse) 3sg last.night book read:PRS-DEF:one:time muwu die-mi. lamp DIR-go.out ÆJust when he was going to read last night, the lamp went out.fl
≈qu-å:-≤i t˚ho≈u må-®˙-ji, c. it˚i khumtsi ˚i aunt khumtsi liquor boil-PRS-LNK yeast NEG -exist-CSM
Verbal morphology
163
¿o-mu-≈qu. DIR-NEG -boil ÆAunt Khumtsi was going to boil liquor, but there was no distillerfls yeast, (so she) didnflt boil (any).fl Prospective aspect marking is generally not used in the negative clauses of polarity verb-not-verb question forms (i.e. where the question is formed by coordinating a positive and negative form of the verb), as in (4.84a) below, and often is not used with negatives in other types of constructions, such as the conditional phrase in the (4.84b) below, but there are some situations where the prospective aspect marking and the negative prefix can appear on the same verb, as in (4.84c).
stuåhå t˚hå:-n-å (4.84) a. ÷~u 2sg food eat-PRS-2sg-Q ÆAre you going to eat?fl
må-t˚h˙-n-å? NEG -eat-2sg-Q
b. ei≤i ÷~u mo-lu-n-tu the: mi-tå next year 2sg NEG -come-2sg-if 3sg other.person-LOC ©Âå:-sån. marry:PRS-2sgU ÆIf you donflt return next year, she is going to marry someone else.fl c. the: t˙p-≤i må-kå:-ji, p˙s kå:-ji. 3sg tomorrow-ADV NEG -go:PRS-HS today go:PRS-HS Æ(I heard) he is not going to go tomorrow (but) will go today.fl In (4.84a), the verb in the first part of the question (a polarity verb-notverb question; see §4.3.5.3) is in the prospective aspect, asking the intention of the addressee, while the verb in the second clause is not in the prospective aspect, as it has the negative prefix. In (4.84c) the use of the prospective aspect marking is made necessary by the fact that the word for Ætomorrowfl appears in the clause. The relevant factor in (4.84a) and (4.84c) seems to be intention. That is, in (4.84a) the speaker is asking about the addresseefls intention to eat (not his or her intention to
164
The verb complex
not eat), whereas in (4.84c) the speaker is talking about the personfls intention to not go on a certain day.
4.3.4.2. Perfective and imperfective aspect Aside from marking pure direction, the directional prefixes also mark perfective action, while the unprefixed form of the verb is used for imperfective actions. Compare the two clauses in (4.85):
qå ˙-qå-lai the: stuåhå t˚h˙. (4.85) n˙s yesterday 1sg DIR-go:1sg-DEF:one:time 3sg food/rice eat ÆYesterday when I entered the room, s/he was eating.fl The first clause expresses a completed action, while the second clause expresses an action that was ongoing at the time referred to in the first clause. Now compare the two clauses of the following example:
Ùuåt®˙ ≈u˙lå-k. (4.86) the: s˙-t˚-≤ike, 3sg DIR-eat-after bowl wash-go ÆS/he finished eating and went to wash the bowl.fl In the first clause the action is expressed as completed, and so there is a directional prefix on the verb, while the action of washing the dishes expressed in the second clause had not been completed (or it was not relevant to mark it as completed), and so the verb does not have the directional prefix. If neither clause has a completed action, as in certain types of habitual action or simultaneous action, then neither verb has the directional prefix, as in the following examples:
k˙-lai Âbot˚u. (4.87) a. the: 3sg go-DEF:one:time think ÆS/he thinks while walking.fl b. qå stuåhå t˚h˙-lai, the: 1sg food/rice eat-DEF:one:time 3sg ÆWhen I am eating, s/he is smoking.fl
jan cigarette
t®he. smoke
Verbal morphology
165
4.3.4.3. Change of state aspect The most common aspect marking is /-ji/, which marks a recent change of state or situation. (4.88) a. me:fi ˚i-ji. rain fall-CSM ÆItfls started raining.fl b. me:fi de-˚i-ji. rain DIR-fall-CSM ÆIt has already rained (and stopped).fl (4.89) a. the: z˙ phie-ji. 3sg land till-CSM ÆS/he has begun to till the land.fl b. the: z˙ i-fi-ji. 3sg land DIR-till- CSM ÆS/he has already tilled the land.fl
(< phie)
As /-ji/ expresses a recent change of state, it can have the sense of an inchoative aspect marker (see also §4.3.3 on the use of the directional prefixes in marking an inchoative aspect). (4.90) the: dz˙-ji. 3sg eat-CSM ÆS/he has just begun to eat.fl Compare the following two sentences in terms of the interaction of the directional prefix and the aspect marking: (4.91) n˙p, qå t˚˙u-lå k˙-s-tå, the: l˙©z su-ji. last.year 1sg home-LOC go-NOM-LOC 3sg book study-CSM ÆLast year when I came home, s/he was already studying.fl (4.92) n˙s qå qupu-t˚˙u-lå yesterday 1sg 3sg-home-LOC
k˙-s-tå, go-NOM-LOC
the: 3sg
166
The verb complex
dytå: ¿å-q˙-ji. Chengdu DIR-go-CSM ÆYesterday when I got to her/his home, s/he had gone to Chengdu.fl In (4.91), the action of studying had begun, so is marked with the change of state marker /-ji/, but there is no directional prefix on the verb, as the action was still in progress at the time expressed by the first clause. In the second example the action was already completed at the time referred to in the first clause, and so the verb has both the directional prefix (which here has double duty, showing actual direction plus completion) and the change of state marker. The change of state suffix can also be used together with prospective aspect marking to express the idea Æabout to Vfl, giving it a more immediate sense. (4.93) me:fi ˚a:-ji. rain fall:PRS-CSM ÆItfls about to rain.fl
(< ˚e)
The change of state marker can be used after the auxiliary verb /då-s/ Æfinishfl to express the completion of an action. (4.94) the: pie ˚t˚˙ då-s-ji. 3sg pig feed DIR-finish- CSM ÆS/he finished feeding the pig.fl (4.95) the: dz˙ då-s-å:-ji. 3sg eat DIR-finish- PRS-CSM ÆS/he is going to finish eating soon.fl In many cases the change of state marker has the form /-jy/, and is often translated as meaning the action had Æalreadyfl begun or been carried out. It may be that this form is a combination of the usual form of the change of state marker /-ji/ plus the visual evidential /-u/ or the third person non-actor marker [-u ± w˙]. For this reason it is glossed as ASP instead of CSM. Following are some examples:
Verbal morphology
(4.96) qå å-tian u-z‘ulu-jya. DIR-wait-ASP:1sg 1sg one-hour ÆI have already waited for one hour. fl
167
( < jy + å)
(4.97) me:fi de-˚i-jy. rain DIR-fall-ASP ÆItfls already raining.fl (Just begun and still raining) (4.98) the: stuåhå s˙-t˚-jy. 3sg food/rice DIR-eat-ASP ÆS/he has already eaten. fl (4.99) the: z˙ i-fi-jy. DIR-till- ASP 3sg land ÆS/he has already tilled the land.fl (just completed)
(< phie)
This form also can be (and often is) used with the auxiliary verb /dås/ Æfinishfl: (4.100) the: dz˙ då-s-jy. 3sg eat DIR- finish-ASP ÆS/he has already finished eating.fl
4.3.4.4. Experiential aspect Use of the auxiliary verb /-de/ after the main verb marks the action represented by the verb as having been experienced by the actor of the clause: (4.101) qå dytå: ¿å-q˙-da. DIR-go-EXP:1sg 1sg Chengdu:LOC I have been to Chengdu.
(< de)
(4.102) qå l˙©z-tse-pen 1sg book-this-CL ÆI have read this book.fl
(< de)
i-tsi-da. DIR-read-EXP:1sg
168
The verb complex
(4.103) (pån˙)-tså-hån themle z˙-p˙-de-t˚i. thing-this:one-kind 3pl DIR-buy-EXP-3pl ÆThey have bought this kind of thing. fl If the assertion is of having not yet experienced an action, the negative and contiuative aspect prefixes are prefixed to the auxiliary verb:
l˙©z-tse-pen i-tsi-me-t˚i-da. (4.104) qå DIR-read-NEG -CON-EXP:1sg 1sg book-this-CL ÆI have not yet read this book.fl
(< de)
4.3.4.5. Repetition Repetition of an action (though not iterative in the sense of, e.g. tapping onefls fingers on the table; by repetition here is meant doing an action Æagainfl) is expressed by the suffix /-j˙/, which precedes the other aspect suffixes and person marking. 77 It can also be used with prospective aspect marking and the change of state marker. (4.105) a. me:fi de-˚i-j˙-ji. rain DIR-fall/release-REP-CSM ÆItfls raining again.fl b. the: dz˙-j˙-ji. 3sg eat-REP-CSM ÆHe is eating again.fl (4.106) t˙-wa-j˙-ji-ji j˙. DIR-big- REP-CSM-2pl say ÆHe said you(pl) have gotten big again.fl This suffix is often used together in the same clause as a free morpheme /xs˙/ Æagainfl (actually the word for Ænewfl), as in the following example:
Verbal morphology
169
(4.107) xs˙ mefiÂ˙-l˙-m i-p˙-l-j˙-kui. (T6:95-96) again look.for-come-NOM DIR-arrive-come-REP-INF:HS ÆAgain someone came looking (for him).fl (lit.: Æone who was looking for him came again.fl)
4.3.4.6. Continuative aspect The prefix [t˚e- ± t˚i- ± t˚å- ± t˚o-] Æstill, yetfl is used to express continued actions or states, much like 'still' and 'yet' in English. In some cases this prefix has the same form as the prohibitive (negative imperative) prefix (see §4.3.5.2), but as the two prefixes appear in different types of contexts (and the negative imperative is not used with prospective aspect marking) there usually is no problem of ambiguity. 78 (4.108) a. me:fi t˚e-˚i. rain CON-fall ÆItfls still raining (has been raining all along).fl b. qå n˙s tså z˙-lå-lai, me:fi t˚e-˚i. 1sg yesterday here DIR-come-DEF:one:time rain CON-fall ÆWhen I came here yesterday, it was still raining.fl (4.109) the: z˙ t˚e-fi. (< phie) 3sg land CON-till ÆS/hefls still ploughing (has been ploughing all along).fl This prefix can also be used with the prospective aspect to mean Æstill wants to/is going to Vfl (that is, actions that have stopped but there is intention to continue or possibility that something will continue) ((4.110)-(4.112)), or with the negative prefix to mean Ænot yetfl ((4.113)(4.114)). (4.110) (qå) t˚å-nå:. 1sg CON-sleep:PRS ÆIflm still going to sleep.fl (ÆI want to sleep some morefl)
(< n˙)
170
The verb complex
(4.111) me:fi t˚e-˚a:. rain CON-fall:PRS ÆItfls still going to rain.fl (4.112) the: z˙ t˚e-fia:. 3sg land CON-till:PRS ÆS/he is still going to till the land.fl (4.113) ¿å-m˙-t˚i-qå DIR-NEG -CON-go:1sg ÆI havenflt gone yet.fl
(< ˚e)
(< phie)
(< k˙)
(4.114) n˙s qå k˙ kant˚hi-lai, the: yesterday 1sg go want-DEF:one:time 3sg i-m˙-t˚i-p˙-l. DIR-NEG -CON-arrive-come ÆYesterday when I wanted to go, s/he hadnflt returned yet.fl It can also be used with a prefixed verb to mean ÆV a little longerfl or Æcontinue to Vfl, as in the following example: (4.115) ÷ile å-zå å-t˚i-t˚˙-i. 2pl one-CL DIR-CON- wait-2pl ÆDonflt go now!fl (lit.: ÆWait a while longer.fl) This prefix sometimes also has the meaning of Æagain (yet one more time)fl or Æalsofl, as in the following examples: (4.116) tse-tsi xsusu-≤å-Âgu˙-≈åu-≤å-pan, ÷~u å-® this-pair thirty-COM-nine-size-COM-half 2sg one-time i-t˚i-tsi-n. DIR-CON- see-2sg (trying on shoes) ÆThis pair (is a) size 39 1/2, you try once againfl (lit.: Æsee yet one (more) timefl)
å-f˙fi hå-t˚i-≥‘u‘˙. (4.117) Ùz˙-pies fish-meat one-portion DIR-CON-COP ÆAlso bring (give me) a portion of fish.fl
Verbal morphology
171
4.3.4.8. Habitual aspect The habitual aspect is expressed by adding the suffix /-k˙p˙/ or /-p˙/ after a verb.79 If the verb is a prefixed adjective (intransitive stative verb), then /-k˙p˙/ has the meaning that the subject Æhas the ability/tendency to becomefl the state represented by the adjective, e.g. /t˙-wa-k˙p˙/ (directional prefix + Æbig (< /ba/)fl + /-k˙p˙/) Æwill/can become bigfl. This meaning is not possible without the directional prefix.
i-p˙-k-˙s q˙:fi, qå (4.118) (qåq˙i)-t˚˙u-lå 1sgREFL-home-LOC DIR-arrive-go-NOM before 1sg i˚t˚imåqå ˙-j˙-så Ùoi-k˙på. (< k˙p˙) often one-two-sentences call-HABIT:1sg ÆBefore returning to my own home, I often call out a few sentences.fl (4.119) q˙:fi-tå, qå i˚t˚imåqå before-LOC 1sg often ÆIn the past I often ate meat.fl
pies meat
dz˙-på. (< p˙) eat-HABIT:1sg
Habitual actions can also sometimes be expressed using simple unprefixed forms, as mentioned in the discussion of (4.87a-b), above. See also (4.174), below.
4.3.4.9. Resulting state An on-going state resulting from a change of state or action can be expressed using the prefixed (achievement or accomplishment) form of the verb, the change of state marker, plus the copula. In this case the copula is the main verb, so if there is any person marking, then the person marking appears on the copula.
de-Âg˙-ji ≥u˙. (4.120) dy-le: door-DEF:CL DIR-open- CSM COP ÆThe door is open.fl (ÆThe door remains open.fl)
172
The verb complex
4.3.4.10. Simultaneous actions For two actions occurring simultaneously, the adverbial marker /≤i/, sometimes combined with /i˚t˚i/ Ætogetherfl, is used after the expression of the first action: (4.121) a. the: stuåhå t˚h˙-≤i˚t˚i tian®˙ tse. 3sg food/rice eat-ADV:together television watch ÆS/he eats while watching television.fl b. ¿e-zei-≤i då-q˙-j˙-k˙i. DIR-cry- ADV DIR-go-REP-INF:HS Æ(He) went along again crying (as he went).fl
(T3:30)
4.3.5. Illocutionary force Illocutionary force is the type of speech act, such as question, statement, order, warning, etc. performed by an expression. Here we are interested in the formal expressions most commonly used for performing these speech acts, such as the declarative (§4.3.5.1), the imperative and prohibitive (§4.3.5.2), and interrogative constructions (§4.3.5.3).80 The forms discussed here involve marking both within and outside the verb complex, but as they are functionally similar, they are being discussed together. We will discuss each type in turn. 4.3.5.1. Declarative The declarative is the unmarked form of the verb, used mainly for making statements. Almost all of the examples up to this point have been declarative clauses. In declarative clauses, it is possible to add the particle /-ja/ (said with falling intonation) to the end of the clause to make a stronger statement. Following is an example:
lu-s ≥u˙-ja! (4.122) ÷~u 2sg come-NOM COP-PART ÆYou definitely must come!fl
Verbal morphology
173
4.3.5.2. Imperative and prohibitive The marking of an imperative clause involves the same prefixes used for direction marking, so in many cases has the same form as a normal declarative clause, and it is only the intonation and context that mark it as an imperative. In imperatives the prefix, which may be any one of the directionals, is stressed, unlike non-imperative directional prefixes.81 A secondary characteristic of the imperative is that person marking is optional, though the imperative sense is stronger if person marking is used. In order to make an imperative more polite, it is possible to add the polite imperative particle /-nå/, which appears outside the verb complex, i.e. after the person marking.82 There are various other particles that can be used with the imperative form (see examples further below). Following are examples showing the different prefixes used with different verbs, and their different forms with and without person marking, and with second person singular and plural person marking (the dual takes the same person marking as plural, so dual forms are not listed separately): (4.123) a. ˙-z-(nå)! DIR-eat-IMP ÆEat!fl
b. ˙-z˙-n-(nå)! DIR-eat-2sg-IMP ÆYou(sg) eat!fl
c. ˙-z˙-i-(nå)! DIR-eat-2pl- IMP ÆYou(pl) eat!fl (4.124) a. ¿å-qut˙-(nå)! DIR-kneel-IMP ÆKneel down!fl
b. ¿å-qut˙-n-(nå)! DIR-kneel-2sg-IMP You(sg) kneel down!fl
c. ¿å-qut˙-i-(nå)! DIR-kneel-2pl- IMP ÆYou(pl) kneel down!fl (4.125) a. tu-ju-(nå)! DIR-stand- IMP ÆStand up!fl
b. tu-ju-n-(nå)! DIR-stand-2sg-IMP ÆYou(sg) stand up!fl
174
The verb complex
c. tu-ju-i-(nå)! DIR-stand-2pl-IMP ÆYou(pl) stand up!fl (4.126) a. hå-f‘u! DIR-spit ÆSpit it out!fl
b. hå-fu-n-(nå)! DIR-spit-2sg-IMP ÆYou(sg) spit it out!fl
c. hå-fu-i-(nå)! DIR-spit-2pl-IMP ÆYou(pl) spit it out!fl In some cases of verb concatenation, the prefix and person marking are split between different verbs, as the person marking is added to the last element of the verb complex: (4.127) ÷~u ts˙-e-pei ˙-t˚-k˙-n. 2sg water-one-CL DIR-drink-go-2sg ÆGo drink a glass of water.fl It is also possible in imperatives to have free pronouns representing the actor appear before the verb. A noun phrase representing an undergoer, goal, or recipient may also appear in the clause. Following are some examples:
˙-z‘u‘˙! (4.128) a. ÷~u 2sg DIR-sit ÆYou sit!fl
b. ÷~u ¿o-lu-n! 2sg DIR-come-2sg ÆYou come down here!fl
(4.129) a. qå de-l! 1sg DIR-give ÆGive me (it)!fl
b. dy-le: de-Âge-(n)! door-DEF:CL DIR-open-2sg ÆOpen the door!fl
(4.130) a. Ùuåt®å-lå-hå t˙-x®ol-(˙n)! bowl-DEF:one-pl DIR-gather-2sg ÆGather the bowls together.fl
Verbal morphology
175
b. the: z˙-l-(˙n)! 3sg DIR-move-2sg ÆBring it (here)!fl The prohibitive (negative imperative) is expressed by the prefix [t˚å± t˚˙- ± t˚o- ± t˚e-] (from Proto-Tibeto-Burman *tå-), which appears in the same position as the normal negative prefix, just before the verb, after the directional prefix, if there is one (the directional prefix is not obligatory in negative imperatives). (4.131) a. t˚o-lu-n-(nå)! NEG.IMP-come-2sg-IMP ÆDonflt come!fl
b. t˚å-k˙-n! NEG.IMP-go-2sg ÆDonflt leave!fl
(4.132) a. hå-t˚˙-Ù! DIR-NEG.IMP-go ÆDonflt go out!fl
b. ¿å-t˚˙-Ù‘u! DIR-NEG.IMP-throw ÆDonflt throw it down!fl
(4.133) ÷~u tså t˚å-låu-thå, tåt˙ t˙-khua:-sån. 2sg here NEG.IMP-be.noisy-AUX father DIR-angry:PRS-2sgU ÆDonflt be noisy here or your father will be angry (at you).fl A more polite prohibitive is expressed by adding the phrase /ma-qe/ Æcanfltfl or /me-t˚hi/ Ænot wantfl after the main verb. It is also possible to use the hortative particles (discussed below) with the prohibitive construction.
t˚ile (4.134) me:fi de-˚i-wå, rain DIR-fall-RCA 1pl ÆItfls raining, so letfls not go!fl
k˙-ma-qe-®afi! go-NEG -able-HORT:1pl
There is a set of clause-final hortative particles for expressing the idea that the speaker is directing or requesting the addressee to perform an action. These particles can be used with either prefixed (i.e. imperative) or unprefixed verbs. In the case of first person plural, the form is /®å/ if there is only the speaker and one or two other people. If there are a large number of people involved, then the form takes the plural marking, becoming [®afi], as in the example just given above.
176
The verb complex
(4.135) stuåhå food/rice ÆLetfls eat!fl
t˚h˙-®å! drink/eat-HORT:1sg
(4.136) t˚izzi it˚i 1dl together ÆLetfls eat together!fl
dz˙-®å! eat-HORT:1sg
(4.137) t˚ile the: Ùua ®afi. 1pl 3sg help HORT:1pl ÆLetfls help him/her!fl (4.138) t˚ile tsai tianjin tse-k-®afi. 1pl now movie watch-go-HORT:1pl ÆLetfls go watch a movie now!fl There is also a particle /wu/ which can be added after the first person hortative /®å/ or the indirect directive form /lå/ (see below for /lå/) to make the expression much more polite, and more of a request. Though the form /wu/ is the same form as the agentive/ablative/ instrumental postposition, which is also used on clauses in correlative comparative constructions (see §4.4.3) and to show the cause of some state of affairs (see §5.5), this form seems to be a separate morpheme. (4.139) må:, k˙-®å-wu? mom go-HORT:1sg-REQU ÆMom, Letfls go, O.K.?fl (4.140) t˚ile b˙l-®afi-wu? 1pl do-HORT:1pl-REQU ÆLetfls do it, O.K.?fl (4.141) qå t˙-Ùua lå-wu. 1sg DIR-help INDTV:1sg-REQU ÆLet me help you, O.K.?fl
Verbal morphology
177
(4.142) ≈oitshu å-z˙ a-Ù‘u lå-wu. hot.pepper one-CL DIR-put INDTV:1sg-REQU ÆLet me put in a little hot pepper.fl For second person directives, the forms [på ± bå ± wå] or /®u/ are used. The latter form has a somewhat stronger directive meaning. These forms contrast with the imperative marker /nå/, as [på ± bå ± wå] is more polite than the imperative marker, and /®u/ has a stronger directive sense than the imperative marker. (4.143) ˙-t˚h˙-n-bå! DIR-drink/eat-2sg- DTV ÆPlease eat!fl (4.144) nå-ji u-su-n-bå! good-ADV DIR-teach/study-2sg-DTV ÆStudy hard!fl (4.145) ÷~u Âme-Â nå-ji u-su-n-®u. (emphatic) 2sg Qiang-language good-ADV DIR-teach/study-2sg-DTV ÆLearn Qiang well!fl The form /pu/ can also be used for requesting the addressee to do a certain action. This is the most polite of the particles discussed. (4.146) ÷~u t˚h˙-då-s-≤i 2sg drink/eat-DIR-finish-ADV ÆFinish eating before you go!fl
˙-k˙-(n)-nå! DIR-go-2sg-IMP
(4.147) ÷~u t˚h˙-då-s-≤i ˙-k˙-(n)-pu! 2sg drink/eat-DIR-finish-ADV DIR-go-2sg-DTV ÆWhy donflt you finish eating before you go!fl
(order)
(request)
(4.148) ÷~u Âo:kum-le: å-® de-Âge-n-pu. (request) 2sg window-DEF:CL one-time DIR-open-2sg-DTV ÆCould you open the window a bit?fl
178
The verb complex
(4.149) ÷~u qå-t˚ dy de-Âge-n-på. (request) ÷~u qå-t˚ dy de-Âge-n-pu. (request; more polite) 2sg 1sg-BEN door DIR-open-2sg-DTV ÆOpen the door for me, would you?fl There is also a kind of indirect directive marking, the form of which differs with the person of the referent being directed or allowed to perform an action. For first person referents, the form is the verbphrase-final particle /lå/, which when added to a clause has the meaning Ælet me . . .fl. This form can also take plural marking, becoming /lafi/,83 and, as mentioned above, can be followed by the polite request particle /-wu/ (this latter particle is outside the verb complex, as defined here, because it follows the person marking).
dz˙ lå! (4.150) qå 1sg eat INDTV:1sg ÆLet me eat!fl (4.151) qå ÷~u t®åuku tu-p‘u lå.84 1sg 2sg look.after DIR-do INDTV:1sg ÆLet me look after you.fl (4.152) qå t˙-Ùua 1sg DIR-help ÆLet me help!fl (4.153) t˚ile t˙-Ùua 1pl DIR-help ÆLet us help!fl
lå-wu. INDTV:1sg-REQU
l˙fi-wu. INDTV:1pl-REQU
(4.154) qå dy de-Âge 1sg door DIR-open ÆLet me open the door!fl
lå-wu. INDTV:1sg-REQU
There is no second person form of indirect directive marking. For third person referents, the form is the prefix /˚å:-/. There is no negative form of this; the phrase /me-t˚hi/ Ænot wantfl is used after the verb instead.
Verbal morphology
179
(4.155) stuåhå ˚å:-t˚-k˙. food/rice INDTV-eat-go ÆLet (him/her) go eat!fl If the verb taking the third person form also could take one of the directional prefixes (see §4.3.3) in a particular context, it is possible to either replace the prefix with /˚å:-/, or simply change the vowel of the prefix to /å:/, as in the following examples: (4.156) a. b. c. d. e. f.
p˙ Æbuyfl > zå:-p˙ ± ˚å:-p˙ Æallow 3sg to buyfl t˚h˙ Ædrinkfl > så:-t˚ ± ˚å:-t˚ Æallow 3sg to drinkfl t®˙ Ækillfl > ¿å:-t® ± ˚å:-t® Æallow 3sg to killfl lu Æcomefl > tå:-lu ± ˚å:-lu Æallow 3sg to comefl tse Ælookfl > a:-tse ± ˚a:-tse Æallow 3sg to lookfl phe Ædig (horizontally)fl > ¿a:-πe ± ˚a:-πe Æallow 3sg to digfl
The form with /˚å:/ is more emphatic than the form where the initial of the prefix is retained. For plural referents the plural marker /-t˚i/ is added after the verb.
4.3.5.3. Interrogatives Yes-no questions are marked by rising intonation and by the addition of the clause-final syllable /-nå/ for second person singular actors/topics, or /-≥uå/ (often pronounced [wå]) for all actors/topics of all other persons and numbers. The question particle that is part of these forms is outside the verb complex, and so follows aspect and person/number marking, but is discussed here with the other illocutionary force markings. The form /-nå/ is comprised of the second person singular person marking /-n/ plus the question particle /-å/, though the nonsecond person singular question particle /-≥uå/ does not seem to derive from the copula /≥u˙/ plus /-å/, as /≥uå/ often follows the copula. It also does not seem to be a form of the third person non-actor marking (as is the case with the debitive construction; see §4.3.6.3) plus /-å/, as the aspect and person marking suffixes appear on the element preceding /≥uå/.
180
The verb complex
(4.157) ÷~u Âme ≥u˙-n-å? 2sg Qiang COP-2sg-Q ÆAre you(sg) Qiang (a Qiang person)?fl (4.158) the: Âme 3sg Qiang ÆIs s/he Qiang?fl
≥u˙-≥uå? COP-Q
(4.159) ÷ile Âme ≥u˙-i-≥uå? 2pl Qiang COP-2pl-Q ÆAre you(pl) Qiang?fl (4.160) themle Âme ≥u˙-t˚i-≥uå? 3pl Qiang COP-3pl-Q ÆAre they Qiang?fl (4.161) ÷~u dytå: ¿å-q˙-n-å? 2sg Chengdu:LOC DIR-go-2sg-Q ÆDid you go to Chengdu?fl (4.162) the: dytå: ¿å-q-≥uå? 3sg Chengdu:LOC DIR-go-Q ÆDid s/he go to Chengdu?fl Rhetorical questions are marked by /-ja/ (the same form as for statements, but with different intonation) or /-t˚å/ or /-≥ui/. The form /≥ui/ is only for first person imperfective actions (often used together with prospective aspect marking), and can be used after regular polarity verb-not-verb type question formations.
Âme (4.163) t˚ile wu 1pl all Qiang ÆAre we all Qiang?fl
≥u˙fi-ja? COP:1pl-Q
(4.164) qå Âme må-≥uå-ja? 1sg Qiang NEG -COP:1sg-Q ÆAm I not Qiang?fl (ÆArenflt I Qiang?fl)
Verbal morphology
181
(4.165) qå ≤i©i b˙lå:-≥ui? 1sg what do:PRS:1sg-Q ÆWhat am I going to do?fl (4.166) qå t˙p-≤i kå:-≥uå 1sg tomorrow-ADV go:PRS-Q ÆAm I going tomorrow or not? fl
må-kå:-≥ui? NEG -go:PRS:1sg-Q
Guesses, either positive or negative, involving a request for confirmation, can be marked by the clause final particle /-luÙuå/. (4.167) a. the: Âme ≥u˙-luÙuå? 3sg Qiang COP-(guess) ÆS/hefls Qiang, isnflt s/he?fl b. the: Âme må-≥‘u‘˙-luÙuå? 3sg Qiang NEG -COP-(guess) ÆS/hefls not Qiang, is s/he?fl c. the: ˙-qå-luÙuå? 3sg DIR-go-(guess) ÆS/he went in, didnflt s/he?fl The form [luÙuå], when used alone, marks a type of tag question, but when used with the inferential evidential marker /-k/, as in (4.168), or the [tån/låhån] ‘possibility’ construction in (4.169) (see §4.3.7.4 for this construction), it simply marks the clause as less certain.
luÙuå. (4.168) the: tshinpi-wa-k 3sg intelligent-very-INF Q ÆShe is intelligent.fl (guessing) wa-m-tån ≥u˙ (4.169) the: tshinpi 3sg intelligent very-NOM-appearance COP She possibly is intelligent.
luÙuå. Q
The form /luÙuå/ seems to involve two morphemes, /lu/ Æcomefl, which can be used alone to express possibility and is used in the
182
The verb complex
compound /˚t˚åq-lu/ Æthink of, wantfl, and a second morpheme /Ùuå/, though the meaning of this second morpheme is not clear. Following is an example of /lu/ used alone:
m˙på wa, t˙p-≤i ts˙-s (4.170) p˙s today cold very tomorrow-ADV this-COMP t˚å-m˙på: lu. CON-cold:PRS will ÆToday is very cold, tomorrow is going to be even colder than this.fl A post-nominal or post-clausal adverb, /luo/, can also be used to express possibility:
å-® i-tsi-k˙, z˙-Ùå (4.171) ÷~u hå-Ù-≤i 2sg DIR-go-ADV one-time DIR-look-go field-LOC w˙tshi poqu®-luo Âi Ùu. bird livestock-perhaps exist allow ÆYou go out and take a look, perhaps there are livestock or birds in the field.fl The form /-wå/ (distinct from the alternate form of /≥uå/) can be used as a reaffirmation question particle (e.g., ÆDo you really want to go?fl).
dytå: kå:-wå? (4.172) ÷~u 2sg Chengdu:LOC go:PRS-Q ÆAre you really going to Chengdu?fl Polarity (Æyes-nofl) questions can be formed by repeating the entire verb complex, with the first token in the positive and the second token in the negative (sometimes called ÆA-not-Afl or Æverb-not-verbfl questions), and the question particle on both tokens, as in (4.166) and the following examples:
dytå: ¿å-q˙-n-å ¿å-m˙-qå-n-å? (4.173) a. ÷~u 2sg Chengdu:LOC DIR-go-2sg-Q DIR-NEG -go-2sg-Q ÆDid you go to Chengdu?fl
Verbal morphology
b. the: dytå: ¿å-q˙-≥uå 3sg Chengdu:LOC DIR-go-Q ÆDid he go to Chengdu?fl
183
¿å-m˙-qå-≥uå? DIR-NEG -go-Q
There is sometimes a difference in meaning between a polarity question with prospective aspect marking in the first clause and one without prospective aspect marking in the first clause. Compare the following two examples:
jan t®he-n-å (4.174) ÷~u 2sg cigarette smoke-2sg-Q ÆDo you smoke?fl
me-t®he-n-å? NEG -smoke-2sg-Q
(4.175) ÷~u jan t®ha:-n-å me-t®he-n-å? 2sg cigarette smoke:PRS-2sg-Q NEG -smoke-2sg-Q ÆWill you smoke?fl The first example does not have prospective aspect marking on the verb of the first clause, and so expresses the question of whether or not the addressee smokes as a habit; the second example has prospective aspect making on the verb in the first clause, and so is asking if the addressee intends or wants to smoke now. Question particles are used even if interrogative pronouns are used in the clause. Interrogative pronouns can appear in initial position, second position, or immediately preverbal position, depending on the overall context (e.g. the difference between (4.176) and (4.177) is whether the table is topical (4.176) or not (4.177)), and can take the same case markers as lexical nouns and other pronouns (see §3.1.2).
s˙-wu (4.176) t®uåts˙-le: table-DEF:CL who-AGT ÆWho bought the table?fl
z˙-p-wå? DIR-buy-Q
(4.177) s˙-wu t®uåts˙-le: z˙-p-wå? who-AGT table-DEF:CL DIR-buy-Q ÆWho bought the table?fl
184
The verb complex
(4.178) a. pi:-tså-lå s˙-wu pen-this:one-CL who-AGT ÆWho gave you this pen?fl
÷~u-(t˚) 2sg-GEN
b. ÷~u-t˚ pi:-tså-lå s˙-wu 2sg-GEN pen-this:one-CL who-AGT ÆWho was it that gave you this pen?fl
de-l-≥uå? DIR-give-Q
de-l-≥uå? DIR-give-Q
Just about any type of argument can be questioned using interrogative pronouns. Examples (4.176)-(4.178) are examples of interrogative pronouns representing actor arguments; following are examples of interrogative pronouns representing benefactive (4.179), recipient (4.180), genitive (4.181), and adverbial (4.182) arguments:
s˙-t˚ z˙-på:-n-å? (4.179) t®huåts˙-le: table-DEF:CL who-GEN DIR-buy: PRS-2sg-Q ÆFor whom are you going to buy the table?fl (4.180) t®huåts˙-le: s˙-tå t˙-≈uå:-n-å? table-DEF:CL who-LOC DIR-sell:PRS-2sg-Q ÆTo whom are you going to sell the table?fl (4.181) s˙-t˚-t®hets˙-le: ¿a-≈-≥uå? who-GEN-car-DEF:CL DIR-bad/broken-Q ÆWhose car has broken down?fl (4.182) t®hets˙-le: ≤i-ke: t˙-b˙l˙-n-å? car-DEF:CL WH-INDEF:CL DIR-do-2sg-Q ÆWhat did you do to the car?fl The order of words in the question is generally reflected in the answer, e.g. if the interrogative pronoun is in initial position, then the answer also appears in initial position. The answer to a question involving an interrogative pronoun can be a whole clause, or may simply be the noun phrase representing the information completing the open proposition (i.e. the question), with or without case marking. Compare the three different responses given below to the following question:
Verbal morphology
(4.183) Question: pi:-tså-lå s˙-wu pen-this:one-CL who-AGT ÆWho gave you this pen?fl
185
÷~u de-l-≥uå? 2sg DIR-give-Q
Answer: a. khumtsi-wu de-l. khumtsi-AGT DIR-give ÆKhumtsi gave it (to me).fl b. khumtsi-wu. khumtsi-AGT ÆKhumtsi (did)fl c. khumtsi. ÆKhumtsi (did).fl Echo questions take the same form as regular questions, though it is possible to use /-ja/ at the end of yes-no echo questions. More than one element of the clause can be subject to echo-questioning. Leading questions can be asked using either the form /-ja/ or /-nå/. Following are two sets of question and answer (both positive and negative answers; no person marking appears in the confirmatory questions, and it is optional in the answers): (4.184) Question: ÷~u k˙ ˚t˚åq-mo-lu-ja? 2sg go heart-NEG-come-Q ÆDonflt you want to go? fl Answers: a. ≥u˙, (qå) k˙ ˚t˚åq-mo-lu. COP (1sg) go heart-NEG-come ÆNo, I donflt want to gofl. (lit.: ÆYes, I donflt want to go.fl) b. ÷~˙h~˙,85
(qå) k˙ ˚t˚åq-lu. NEG 1sg go heart-come ÆYes, I want to go.fl (lit.: ÆNo, I want to go.fl)
186
The verb complex
(4.185) Question: ÷~u stuåhå s˙-t˚-jy-nå? 2sg food/rice DIR-eat-ASP-Q ÆHave you already eaten? fl Answers: a. ÷~˙, (s˙-t˚ya). Yes, (DIR-eat:ASP:1sg) ÆYes, I have. fl b. ÷~˙h~˙, (s˙-m˙-t˚i-t˚ha). NEG , (DIR-NEG -CON-eat:1sg) ÆNo, I havenflt eaten yet. fl c. s˙-t˚ya / s˙-m˙-t˚i-t˚ha DIR-eat: ASP:1sg / DIR-NEG-CON- eat:1sg ÆI have eatenfl / ÆI have not yet eatenfl There are no tag-question constructions in Qiang except for guesses marked by /luÙuå/ (see above); the unmarked question form is used instead:
˚i å-z˙ ¿o-jy-lå-≥uå? (4.186) ÷~u-t˚ 2sg-GEN wine one-CL DIR-pour-INDTV:1sg-Q ÆWill you let me pour you a little wine?fl
4.3.6. Mood 4.3.6.1. Optative The desire to do an action is expressed by the addition of the auxiliary verbs /˚t˚åq-lu/ Æthink of,wantfl (Æheartfl + Ædesirefl (< Æcomefl) (/lu/ can also be used alone), /kånt˚hi/ Æthink/wantfl, or /zulu/ Æwaitfl after the main verb, which is not overtly nominalized. First, second, and third person actors can all appear in this construction. First person marking on /˚t˚åq-lu/ is optional, but /zulu/ inflects normally: [zuluå, zulun, zul‘u]. The person marking reflects the actor of the matrix clause, i.e. the actor of /˚t˚åq-lu/ or /zulu/, not of the subordinate clause. There is no person
Verbal morphology
187
marking of the subordinate (inner) verb, as only one verb in a sentence can take person marking (see §4.3.2), and that is the last (the matrix [outer]) verb, though aspect can be marked on the subordinate (inner) verb in these constructions. The construction with /zulu/ often has the verb before /zulu/ marked with prospective aspect. (4.188) the: t˚˙u k˙ ˚t˚åq-lu. 3sg home go heart-come ÆS/he wants to go home.fl (4.189) a. qå t˚˙u k˙ ˚t˚åq-lu-å. 1sg home go heart-come-1sg ÆI want to go home.fl b. ÷~u t˚˙u k˙ ˚t˚åq-lu-n. 2sg home go heart-come-2sg ÆYou want to go home.fl (4.190) khu˙-le: qå-wu på: lu. dog-DEF:CL 1sg-AGT buy:PRS will ÆI am going to buy the dog.fl (ÆThe dog will be bought by me.fl) (4.191) a. qå the: i-p˙-la: 1sg 3sg DIR-arrive-come: PRS ÆI hope s/he is going to return.fl
zulu-å. wait-1sg
b. ÷~u the: i-p˙-la: 2sg 3sg DIR-arrive-come: PRS ÆYou hope s/he is going to return.fl
zulu-n. wait-2sg
c. the: the: i-p˙-la: 3sg 3sg DIR-arrive-come: PRS ÆS/he hopes s/he is going to return.fl
zul‘u. wait
Another method for expressing the optative mood is to nominalize the verb with the instrumental nominalizer /-s/ and add /≥u˙-≤i/ (copula + ADV), or /må-≥u˙-t˚i/ (Ænotfl + copula + ADV). The form /≥u˙-≤i/ is used for positive clauses, and either /må-≥u˙-≤i/ or /må-≥u˙-t˚i/ is used
188
The verb complex
for negatives. No aspect or person contrasts are marked in sentences with /må-≥u˙-t˚i/ or /≥u˙-≤i/.86 (4.192) t˙p-≤i me:fi ˚e-s må-≥u˙-t˚i. tomorrow-ADV rain release-NOM NEG -COP- ADV ÆI hope it wonflt rain tomorrow.fl (4.193) a. qå t®hets˙-le: ¿a-≈-˙s må-≥u˙-t˚i. 1sg car-DEF:CL DIR-bad/broken-NOM NEG -COP- ADV ÆI hope my car hasnflt broken down.fl b. the: t®hets˙-le: ¿å-≈-˙s 3sg car-DEF:CL DIR-bad/broken-NOM ÆI hope his/her car has broken down.fl
≥u˙-≤i. COP-ADV
(4.194) a. t˙p-≤i tianjin ˚e-s tomorrow-ADV movie release-NOM ÆI hope a movie is showing tomorrow.fl
≥u˙-≤i. COP-ADV
b. t˙p-≤i tianjin ˚e-s må-≥‘u‘˙-t˚i. tomorrow-ADV movie release-NOM NEG -COP-PART ÆI hope no movie is showing tomorrow.fl In some cases the second person directive particle /-®u/ can be used as a strong expression of desire for the addressee to perform a particular action. (4.195) a. ÷~u t˚o-lu-n-®u. 2sg NEG.IMP-come-2sg-DTV ÆI hope you wonflt come.fl b. ÷~u t˚å-k˙-n-®u. 2sg NEG.IMP-go-2sg-DTV ÆI hope you wonflt leave.fl (4.196) t˙p-≤i ≈t®u-tian-Ùå i-p˙-l-˙n-®u. tomorrow-ADV six-oflclock-LOC DIR-arrive-come-2sg-DTV ÆI hope you will come tomorrow at six oflclock.fl
Verbal morphology
189
4.3.6.2. Intentional To express the intention to carry out a particular action, the prospective aspect form of the verb can be used alone, or a nominalized verb form followed by /≥u˙-≤i/ can be used. The construction with nominalized verb plus /≥u˙-≤i/ was introduced above as a way of expressing the optative mood, and it has this use, but its main meaning is one of obligation (cf. English I must have that piece of cake!). It can also be used in some contexts to express intention. Between these two forms, the use of the prospective aspect marking has a stronger sense of intention than the use of /≥u˙-≤i/.
˚upu-å-thåu på:. (4.197) qå få buy:PRS:1sg 1sg clothes red-one-CL ÆI am going to buy a set of red clothes.fl (4.198) a. qå Âme-Â nå-ji 1sg Qiang-language well-ADV ÆI am going to learn Qiang well.fl
(< p˙)
su-å:. learn-PRS:1sg
b. the: Âme-Â nå-ji su-å:-i. 3sg Qiang-language well-ADV learn-PRS-HS ÆI heard s/he is going to learn Qiang well.fl (4.199) a. qå Ùu-q-tå hå-Ùå:. 1sg mountain-peak(head)-LOC DIR-go: PRS:1sg ÆI am going to go up to the mountain top.fl b. qå Ùu-q-tå hå-Ù˙-s ≥u˙-≤i. 1sg mountain-peak(head)-LOC DIR-go-NOM COP-ADV ÆI am going to go up to the mountain top.fl The construction involving /˚t˚åq-lu/ Æthink of, wantfl, also introduced as a way of expressing optatives, can be used to express intention as well.87
190
The verb complex
(4.200) qå t˚iÙuå-le: x¬ie ˚t˚åq-lu. 1sg house-DEF:CL build heart-come ÆI want (plan) to build the house.fl
4.3.6.3. Debitive (Obligation) The construction used to express obligation to perform an action involves a nominalized verb followed by the copula /≥u˙/,88 and this is followed optionally by /®å/ in the first person, /sån/ in the second person, or /≥‘u‘˙/ in the third person. These forms are the non-actor person marking suffixes (see §4.3.2). (The form /≥‘u‘˙/ is an alternate form of the third person non-actor marker /w˙/, which by assimilation to /≥u˙/ becomes /≥‘u˙‘ /.) ÆMustfl and Æought tofl use the same construction. No formal distinction is made between moral and physical obligation. No distinction of degrees of obligation is marked. Epistemic and root modality are expressed using the same structures. Person marking on the verb is optional in this construction, but if it appears it is the nonactor marking that is used.
lu-s (4.201) the: t˚˙u-lå 3sg home-LOC come-NOM ÆS/he must come home!fl
≥u˙-≥‘u‘˙. COP-3sgU
(4.202) a. qå Âme-Â nå-ji su-s 1sg Qiang-language well-ADV learn-NOM b. ÷~u Âme-Â nå-ji su-s 2sg Qiang-language well-ADV learn-NOM c. the: Âme-Â nå-ji su-s 3sg Qiang-language well-ADV learn-NOM ÆI / you / s/he must learn Qiang well.fl (4.203) a. qå 1sg b. ÷~u 2sg
stuåhå food/rice stuåhå food/rice
b˙l˙-s make-NOM b˙l˙-s make-NOM
(< w˙)
≥u˙-(®å). COP-1sgU ≥u˙-sån. COP-2sgU ≥u˙-≥‘u‘˙. COP-3sgU
≥u˙-ji-(®å). COP-CSM ≥u˙-ji-sån. COP-CSM -2sgU
Verbal morphology
191
c. the: stuåhå b˙l˙-s ≥u˙-ji-≥‘u‘˙. 3sg food/rice make-NOM COP-CSM -3sgU ÆI / you / s/he must make the meal.fl (prepare to begin) The construction with nominalized verb plus /≥u˙-≤i/, discussed above as having a sense of intention similar to the use of the prospective aspect marking, is also a way of expressing a kind of obligation or necessity. Contrast the following two examples, where the prospective aspect marking or nominalized verb plus /≥u˙-≤i/ can be used in the same context, but the latter has more of a sense of necessity.
måuså kå:. (4.204) a. qå 1sg toilet go:PRS:1sg ÆIflm going to go to the bathroom.fl b. qå måuså k˙-s ≥u˙-≤i. 1sg toilet go-NOM COP-ADV ÆI have to go to the bathroom.fl
(intention)
(necessity)
An interesting feature of this construction is that if there is only one human referent referred to in the clause, as in the examples above, then the person marking on the verb reflects the person and number of that referent, but if there are two human referents referred to in the clause, then the person marking reflects the non-actor argument. The initial noun phrase of this construction is the topic of an identificational structure, and so normally we would expect argreement with that argument, particularly as the other referent mentioned is mentioned within a nominalized clause, but instead we get agreement with the embedded argument. This is a clear example of how use of the nonactor person marking is not limited to specific semantic or grammatical roles. Following are examples where two human referents are referred to:
Ùua-s ≥u˙-sån. (4.205) a. the: ÷~u-(tå) 3sg 2sg-DAT help-NOM COP-2sgU ÆS/he should help you.fl
192
The verb complex
b. t˚ile the: Ùua-s ≥u˙-≥‘u‘˙. 1pl 3sg help-NOM COP-3sg ÆWe ought to help him/her.fl c. t˚ile t˚y:mi-le:-≈uå-≤i Âbot˚u-s ≥u˙-(≥‘u‘˙). 1pl child-DEF:CL-BEN-ADV consider-NOM COP-3sg ÆWe must consider the interests of the child.fl In two of the traditional stories that were recorded, the nominalization part of this structure appears in a non-final clause without the copula, but the sense of obligation or determination is the same. In (4.206), from “The Creation of the World”, the structure appears twice, in the first line with the copula, followed by /≈uå-≤i/ Æbecausefl, and in line four, as simply a nominalization, but with the sense Æ(they) should (become a family)fl. In (4.207), from “The Story of a Lazy Man” three nominalized clauses are subordinated to one copula. pefiÂ˙-s ≥u˙-≈uå-≤i, . . . mi (4.206) steke-tå after-LOC people raise(child)-NOM COP-because- ADV 2 ≤ut˚uku dzuåÙl e-x®e ¿ei-bi-≤i, each stone.mill one-CL DIR-carry.on.back-ADV 3 Ùu-q-tå-wu ¿o-©lu, dzuåÙl j˙-x®e mountain-head-LOC-ABL DIR-roll stone.mill two-CL p˙-s, 4 e-t®etup-tu, ≤izzi oqpi DIR-bump- LNK 3dl one.family become-NOM 5 dzuåÙl j˙-x®e ¿o-©lu-s-tå, stone.mill two-CL DIR-roll-NOM-LOC 6 qhuåt e-t®etup-wei, ¿å-ts˙i-≤ike, as.it.happens DIR-bump.into-INF:HS INT-this.manner-after 7 m˙ ≤å ©lu l˙-zi oqpi older.brother COM younger.sister DEF-CL one.family 8 ¿o-p˙-i. (T1:4-11) DIR-become- HS ÆLater, in order to propagate descendants, (the brother and sister decided that) each would carry a stone mill on his or her back and roll it down from the mountain peak. If the two stone mills joined together, the two should get married. As it happened, when the two stone mills rolled down (to the river
Verbal morphology
193
bank) they joined together, and so the brother and sister married (became a family).fl (4.207) Âm˙t®i-le:-t˚ tsi-le:-≥u˙≤i emperor-DEF:CL-GEN daughter-DEF:CL -TOP 2 ≈uån-t˚hiånmefi-tå ©Â˙-s, Huang-Qianmen-DAT marry-NOM 3 ≈uån-t˚hiånmefi-≥u˙≤i Âm˙t®i dzu-s, Huang-Qianmen-TOP emperor sit-NOM 4 Âm˙t®i-le: tsi-le:-≥u˙≤i ¿å-thå emperor-DEF:CL daughter-DEF:CL -TOP INT-there 5 de-l-˙s , ¿å-k˙ ≥u˙-ku-tu, . . . (T5:308-314) DIR-give-NOM INT-thus COP-INF:HS -LNK Æ(Because the emperor had said he would marry his daughter to whoever found the parrot,) the emperor had to marry his daughter to Huang Qianmen, and Huang Qianmen became the emperor, (he had to) give (him) the daughter.fl In the following example from the story “An Orphan”, the sense of the nominalization construction is of obligation in terms of the best thing to do in that situation. We can see in the fourth line of this example that even the copula can be nominalized and subordinated to the copula.
®˙®e:fiwu ≤iånt˚i (4.208) the-maha-≥u˙≤i (t˚iu) that-night-TOP †(INT) exist:REDUP:all together 2 gånphai-tu-p‘u-k˙i-stu, ≈a-le:-≥u˙≤i t˚å-l˙ arrange-DIR -do-INF:HS-PART needle-DEF:CL-TOP where-LOC je-s ≥u˙, t˚å-l˙ n˙-s 3 t˚å-l˙ live/stay-NOM COP where-LOC where-LOC sleep-NOM ≥u˙, t˚å-l˙ ≥u˙, 4 t˚å-l˙ ≤i©i ≥u˙-s COP where-LOC where-LOC what COP-NOM COP 5 ¿å-ts˙i gånphai-tu-p‘u-k˙i-t˚u. (T3:101-106) INT -this:manner arrange-DIR -do-INF:HS-PART ÆThat night everybody made a plan together, where the needle should stay, where (each of them) should sleep and what not and it was all settled.fl
194
The verb complex
Another form of this construction is where the continuative aspect prefix appears on the copula, i.e. [t˚å-≥‘ u ‘ ˙ ] ( C O N + COP ). The combination [t˚å-≥‘u‘˙] can also take the negative prefix. (Without the continuative aspect prefix, the form would express an action that had been agreed upon or set beforehand.)
k˙-s t˚å-≥‘u‘˙. (4.209) a. qå 1sg go-NOM CON-COP ÆI (still) must go.fl b. qå k˙-s må-t˚˙-≥u˙. 1sg go-NOM NEG -CON-COP ÆI (still) shouldnflt go.fl (4.210) a. the: l˙©z zd˙-s 3sg book read/study-NOM ÆI (still) must study.fl b. the: l˙©z zd˙-s 3sg book read/study-NOM ÆI (still) donflt need to study.fl
t˚å-≥u˙. CON-COP
må-t˚˙-≥u˙. NEG -CON-COP
Obligation can also be expressed using the auxiliary verb /Ùze/ Æought tofl. If this auxiliary verb is negated (Æmust notfl) and/or takes the continuative aspect prefix [t˚i ± t˚å ± t˚e ± t˚o], the negative or other prefix appears between the main verb and the auxiliary (i.e. is prefixed to the auxiliary verb).
t˚h˙-Ùze-ji. (4.211) a. stuåhå food/rice eat-must-CSM Æ(We/You/One) ought to eat!fl (i.e., ÆTime to eat!fl) b. stuåhå t˚h˙-ma-t˚i-Ùze. food/rice eat-NEG-CON-must Æ(We/You/One) ought not to eat yet!fl
Verbal morphology
195
4.3.6.4. Potential The potential to perform an action is expressed by the use of auxiliary verbs, with the choice of auxiliary verb depending on the type of potentiality. Person marking is added to the auxiliary verb. Following are examples of each type: /©Â˙/ for learned ability: (4.212) a. the: Âme-Â 3sg Qiang-language ÆS/he can speak Qiang.fl
de speak
©Â˙. can
b. ÷~u Âme-Â 2sg Qiang-language ÆYou can speak Qiang.fl
de speak
©Â˙-n. can-2sg
c. qå Âme-Â 1sg Qiang-language ÆI can speak Qiang.fl
de speak
©Âå. can:1sg
(< ©Â˙)
/dÂ˙/ or /qe/ for natural (physical) ability:89 (4.213) a. mi lå må-l, w˙ lå dÂ˙. person fly NEG -able bird fly able ÆPeople cannot fly, but birds can.fl
(< m˙ + dÂ˙)
b. misaq-wu qå quaha t˙-≤i≈-Â dÂ˙. sun-AGT 1sg face DIR-black-CAUS able ÆThe sun can make my face become black.fl c. qå u-t˚u 1sg DIR-see ÆI canflt see.fl
må-lå. NEG -able:1sg
(< m˙ + dÂ˙ + å)
(4.214) the: Âåwå-le: t˙-tsi qe-≥uå? (dÂ˙ also possible here) 3sg rock-DEF:CL DIR-lift able-Q ÆCan s/he lift the rock?fl
196
The verb complex
Comparing (4.215) and (4.216), below, we can see that while the forms /©Â˙/ and /dÂ˙/ are phonetically similar, the meanings are somewhat different and /©Â˙/ does not undergo phonetic reduction when it is prefixed.
sei må-©Â˙. (4.215) tsi˚i infant walk NEG -can ÆAn infant cannot walk.fl (not yet learned) (4.216) the:-doqu-le: dak-wu, pit˚ sei må-l-jy. (< dÂ˙) 3sg-foot-DEF:CL break-INST now walk NEG -able-ASP ÆHis/her foot is broken so he/she cannot walk now.fl /gu/ for ability to fit into something else: (4.217) t®u˙wa-le-tsi s˙-le gu-≥uå? shoe-DEF-CL DIR-pack able.to-Q ÆCan this pair of shoes fit in?fl /Ùu/ or /se/ for the sense of Æwillingfl or Æ(be) allowedfl: (4.218) a. ˚o˚åu-Ùå Âme-Â de-Â school-LOC Qiang-language speak-CAUS ÆSpeaking Qiang is allowed in the school.fl b. ˚o˚åu-Ùå Âme-Â de-Â school-LOC Qiang-language speak-CAUS ÆSpeaking Qiang is allowed in school.fl
Ùu. allow
¿e-se. DIR-allow
/je/ Ægood to eatfl (an adjective) for the sense of Æpossiblefl: (4.219) tså Âe-s me-je. here write-NOM NEG -possible Æ(You) can't write here.fl A construction involving the exclusion particle on the main verb and the expression /me-t˚hi/ Ænot wantfl following the main verb can also be
Verbal morphology
197
used to express the ability (either physical or learned) or permission to do something. (4.220) a. ˚o˚åu-Ùå Âme-Â de-ji school-LOC Qiang-language speak-EXC ÆIt is all right to speak Qiang in school.fl
me-t˚hi. NEG -want
b. ts˙ tu-≈su-ji-wå, t˚ile quaha ≈u˙lå-j˙ water DIR-boil-CSM-RCA 1pl face wash-EXC me-t˚hi-ji. NEG -want-CSM ÆThe waterfls boiled, so we can wash our faces.fl
4.3.7. Evidentials, degree of certainty/authority The evidential system in Qiang basically has three terms, visual (§4.3.7.1), inferred/mirative (§4.3.7.2), and reported marking (§4.3.7.3) (this is the B1 type of system discussed in Aikhenvald 2003), but it does not necessarily involve marking of the evidential category on all clauses, and there are complications related to verb types and combinations of forms. The inferential can appear together with the hearsay or visual marker, therefore it may be seen as two systems rather than three paradigmatically related items in one system. The actor person marking, when used without the inferential/mirative marker, also is involved in expressing an evidential meaning, in that it implies direct observation, and cannot be used with the hearsay marker. In general, an unmarked clause is assumed to represent knowledge that the speaker is sure of, most probably, but not necessarily, from having seen the situation or event first-hand, and so, for witnessed events, there is no obligatory marking of the events as witnessed. If the speaker wants to emphasize that he or she saw the event or that the statement represents incontrovertible common knowledge, then it is possible to use an overt marker, [-u ± -wu], as in (4.221a) below. This marker is actually rarely used, and difficult to elicit from linguistically naive speakers. It is generally only used when the actor(s) of the clause is animate, and it is necessary to emphasize that the speaker actually saw the other person(s) carry out the action. This form is used together
198
The verb complex
with the actor person marking suffixes, but use of the person marking suffixes alone can also imply visual observation, as in (4.221b). (4.221) a. the: dytå: ¿å-q˙-(w)u. 3sg Chengdu:LOC DIR-go-VIS ÆHe went to Chengdu.fl (used in a situation where the speaker saw the person leave and that person has not yet returned)
t˚e≈un tu-pu-ji-n. b. ÷~u 2sg marry DIR-do-ASP -2sg ÆYou got married.fl (I saw you get married) If the speaker is not completely sure of the information being presented in the utterance, which generally means s/he did not witness it, then it is necessary to use one of two non-visual markers. In reporting second-hand or third-hand knowledge of some situation or event the speaker is unsure of, the hearsay marking suffix /-i/ is used after the verb. Only one token of the hearsay marker is used in a clause; it cannot be repeated to show the number of sources between the speaker and the event, as in Tsafiki (Dickinson 2000:408). Statements that represent “just discovered” information (mirative) or information based on inference derived from some physical or other non-visual evidence take the suffix /-k/ after the change of state marker, if there is one, but before the prospective aspect and person marking (if there is any—3sg animate and inanimates are unmarked), a different position in the verb complex from the narrative evidential marking. This marker in some contexts, and particularly in combination with the hearsay marker, can be used to mark simple uncertainty (not necessarily inference).
4.3.7.1. Direct evidential The unmarked verb form can be used for visual evidence, and for generally known facts and for observations that lead to a strong conclusion, such as if you say ÆHe is a strong manfl when you see him do
Verbal morphology
199
something that makes that obvious. In this latter case, use of the inferential marker would be optional, and would imply less certainty. The visual evidential marker can be used for past events (as in exx. (4.221a-b)) or ongoing events, but not future events. When it is used, the visual marker is used together with the actor person marking. In most cases the person marking reflects the person and number of the actor of the clause, the usual situation with the person marking, as in (4.222a), but in the case of a 3sg actor, which would normally have zero person marking, it is possible to add 1sg person marking in order to particularly emphasize that the speaker saw the person do the action, as in (4.222b) (the resulting form, [wå], is to be distinguished from the clause-final emphatic particle /wå/, which appears in (4.222a)).
de-se-ji-wu-t˚i-wå. (4.222) a. themle jimi 3pl fertilizer DIR-spread-CSM-VIS-3pl-EMPH ÆThey spread the fertilizer.fl (I saw them do it.) b. the: jimi de-se-ji-w-å. 3sg fertilizer DIR-spread- CSM-VIS-1sg ÆShe spread the fertilizer.fl (I saw her spread it.) This same form is also used when the actor is 1sg, but then the meaning is one of unintentional action, as in (4.223). (4.223) qå the:-tå de-we-Â-u-å. 1sg 3sg-LOC DIR-hit-CAUS -VIS-1sg ÆI hit him (accidentally).fl (The context for this was the speaker having hit the person while leaning back and stretching his arms back without looking behind him.) The visual marker [-u ± -wu] is only used for visual sensory information, not other types of sensory information. If you hear some noise, such as the sound of drums in the next room, and you want to say ÆSomeone is playing drums next doorfl, you would use the inferential marker, as in (4.224). Even if you feel something in your hand but cannot see it, the inferential marker, not the visual marker, would be used.
200
The verb complex
(4.224) mi Âb˙ Âete-k! person drum beat-INF ÆSomeone is playing drums.fl (It seems to me from hearing a noise that sounds like drums.)
4.3.7.2. Inferential/mirative marking The suffix /-k/ has both an inferential sense and a mirative sense. The inferential sense is primary when the action involved is an activity, as in (4.224) and (4.225a). The inference may be based on evidence obtained visually or by some other sense. If what is reported is a state or the resulting state of some action, as in (4.225b-c), then the meaning is mirativity (Æjust discoveredfl).90 (4.225) a. the: dytå: ¿å-q˙-k. 3sg Chengdu:LOC DIR-go-INF ÆHe went to Chengdu.fl (Used in a situation where the speaker knew the person was supposed to go to Chengdu, but wasnflt sure when, and then saw the personfls luggage gone, so assumed he had left for Chengdu. /-k/ could not be used if the speaker saw the person leave.) b. the: ˚t˚imi di-k! 3sg heart sick-INF ÆHefls unhappy!fl (just discovered; relatively sure, not guess) c. dy de-Âge-ji-k! door DIR-open- CSM-INF ÆThe door is open!fl (just discovered; see that the door was opened, but donflt know who opened it) If the speaker needs to express an inferential sense in talking about a state or perfective situation, then the speaker would use the adverbial phrase /≈su-≤i/ Æseemsfl or the construction with [-tån] or [-låhån] for marking possibility (both discussed in §4.3.7.4 below), not the inferential marker. For example, if the speaker feels wind on her back and makes the assumption that the door is open, she could say (4.226).
Verbal morphology
201
(4.226) dy Âge-m-tån ≥u˙. door open-NOM-appearance COP ÆIt appears the door is open.fl / ÆApparently the door is open.fl Generally the inference marker is used for single instances of an event, such as if someone was supposed to quit smoking, but then the speaker sees cigarette butts in an ashtray, the speaker could use the inference marker to comment that (it seems) the person had smoked. If it was discussed as a habitual action, then again generally the construction with [tån] or [låhån] would be used.
t®he-m-tån (4.227) a. the: jan 3sg cigarettes smoke-NOM-appearance ÆS/he might smoke (It seems s/he smokes).fl (lit.: ÆS/he is s smokerfls appearance.fl) b. the: jan t®he-m-lå-hån 3sg cigarettes smoke-NOM-DEF:one-kind ÆS/he might smoke (might be a smoker).fl (lit.: ÆS/he is a smoking kind of person.)
≥u˙. COP
≥u˙. COP
The inferential/mirative marker is also used together with the person marking, with the person marking always reflecting the person and number of the actor, as in (4.228a-b), but with first person actors the interpretation is not only that the action was just discovered, but also that it was unintentional or originally unknown, as in (4.228c-d)
¿å-≈-k-˙n. (4.228) a. pån˙-le: thing-DEF:CL DIR-broken- INF-2sg ÆYou broke the thing.fl (inference from seeing the broken pieces in the personfls hands) stuåhå s˙-t˚h˙-ji-k-t˚i. b. themle 3pl food/rice DIR-eat-CSM-INF -3pl ÆThey have already eaten.fl (inference from seeing used dishes)
202
The verb complex
c. qå dzig‘u t˚y-k-å-≤i! 1sg money bring-INF-1sg-ADV ÆI have money!fl (Used when the speaker originally thought she didnflt have money, but then opened her wallet and found she did have money.)
¿å-m˙-suå-k-å! d. (qå) dy 1sg door DIR-NEG -lock-INF-1sg ÆI didnflt lock the door!fl (Used in a situation where the speaker had thought he had locked the door.) The suffix /-k/ can appear alone with a mirative sense (e.g. (4.225bc)), but often in these cases the particle /-≤i/ or /-wå/ is added at the end of the clause, as in (4.228c). The particle /-≤i/ is an adverbial marker used also to mark surprise and/or disbelief; /-wå/ is an emphatic marker. Itfls use with /-k/ gives the construction a stronger mirative sense. Examples (4.229a-b) show the use of the suffix /-k/ together with /-wå/ and /-≤i/ respectively.
de-˚i-k-wå! (4.229) a. me:fi rain DIR-release- INF-EMPH ÆItfls raining!fl (just discovered; this clause could also mean Æit has rainedfl, with the statement based on inference from having seen the ground wet) b. the: dytå: ¿å-q˙-k-≤i! 3sg Chengdu:LOC DIR-go-INF-ADV ÆHe went to Chengdu!fl (just discovered) The suffix /-k/ is used with 1st, 2nd, or 3rd person actors, though with first and second person actors, /wå/ is not used to emphasize the sense of Æjust discoveredfl; instead /-≤i/, /-®/ or /≤iåu/ is used for first person actors (of these three, the latter is stronger) and /-≤i/ is used for second person actors (/-≤i/ can be used for other persons, but if the clause has a second person actor, then /-≤i/ must be used). The combination [-k-wå] is stronger (more certain) than /-k/ alone, but weaker than [-k-≤i], which can have the sense that you canflt believe your own inference, that it is totally unexpected. The auxiliary verb /Ùu/
Verbal morphology
203
Æwilling, allowfl can also be added after /-k/ to weaken (make less certain) the force of the statement. Following are examples of first and second person actors ((4.230a-b) respectively).
da-m-k-å-®! (4.230) a. qå DIR-forget-INF-1sg-EMPH 1sg ÆI (just realized I) forgot!fl
(if plural, then [k-˙fi-®])
b. ÷~u s˙ i-t˚hi-k-˙n-≤i! (if plural, then [k-˙i-≤i]) 2sg wood DIR-bring.in-INF-2sg-ADV Æ(I see) you brought the wood in!fl (just discovered) The inferential marker, the visual marker, and the person marking can all be used together for ongoing or past events. This would be possible given a situation such as the following: after having guessed someone was playing drums next door the speaker went next door and saw the person standing there holding a drum or drumsticks. When commenting that ÆHe WAS playing drumsfl, adding (/-k/ + /-u/ > [ku]) after the verb (see ex. (4.231a)) adds the sense of Æas I had guessed and now pretty-well confirmfl. This interpretation holds when the clause has a 2nd person actor ([k-u-˙n] 2sg, as in (4.231b), [k-u-i] 2pl) or 3rd person plural actor ([k-u-˙t˚i]). If upon opening the door in that situation the person was still playing drums, the speaker could say (4.231c). Adding the 1sg person marking where the actor is 3sg marks the clause as representing information obtained by direct visual observation. The forms with [-k-] and the visual and person marking contrast with forms without [-k-] in that with the latter do not imply a previous supposition.
the: Âb˙ Âete-k-u! (4.231) a. oh, oh 3sg drum beat-INF-VIS ÆOh, he WAS playing drums!fl b. ÷~u dytå: ¿å-q˙-k-u-˙n. 2sg Chengdu DIR-go-INF-VIS-2sg ÆYou went to Chengdu.fl
204
The verb complex
c. oh, the: Âb˙ Âete-k-u-å! oh 3sg drum beat-INF-VIS-1sg ÆOh, he IS playing a drum!fl If the actor is 1st person, use of the inferential, visual and person marking together involves an implication not only that the action was done unintentionally and just discovered, as with use of the inferential and person marking alone, but also that the action was a mistake of some kind, as in (4.232) (if the actor was 1pl, then the suffixes would be [k-u-˙fi]).
tså t˚y-k-u-å. (4.232) qå åp˙-t˚˙-iantu-le: 1sg grandfather- GEN-pipe-DEF:CL here bring-INF-VIS -1sg ÆI mistakenly brought Grandfatherfls pipe here.fl Usually no marking of evidentials is necessary in retelling dreams, as long as the speaker remembers the dream clearly, but if not, then the speaker would use the adverbial phrase /≈su-≤i/ Æseemsfl or the construction with [-tån] or [-låhån] for marking possibility (both discussed below), not the inferential or hearsay markers. When retelling some event witnessed on TV the unmarked form can also be used, but often the hearsay marker would be used (the visual marker cannot be used), as when retelling something heard on the radio. There is no special marking for information that is not to be taken literally, such as metaphors or sarcasm.
4.3.7.3. Hearsay marking The hearsay marking suffix /-i/, derived from the verb [j˙ ± ji ] Æto sayfl, is used to mark hearsay of future or presently ongoing events (e.g. ÆI heard hefls leavingfl) or relatively recent past events, as in (4.233) (could be up to 40-50 years, but generally not ancient history, though there are exceptions).
¿å-q˙-i. (4.233) the: dytå: 3sg Chengdu:LOC DIR-go-HS ÆHe went to Chengdu.fl (I heard)
Verbal morphology
205
The hearsay marker is used only for hearsay, and not for simple uncertainty, when it is used alone. It can also appear in narratives recounting distant past events (e.g., ex. (4.234a), the first line in the traditional creation story (T1:1)), but generally in distant past narratives (story-telling) it is used together with the inferential marker, to show a greater degree of uncertainty, as in ex. (4.234b), the first line of another traditional story.91 The hearsay marking is not used together with second person marking (e.g. (4.234c)). Unlike in Jarawara (Dixon 2003), the hearsay particle is not used in clauses with a 2nd person actor to remind the person of what they said. mujuq‘u Âgu˙-zi we-i. (4.234) a. qe:filot®u-Ùå, mutu-lå before-LOC heaven-LOC sun nine-CL exist-HS Æ(It is said) in the past there were nine suns in the sky.fl b. qe:fi-qe:fi-tu ¿ålå kåp˙t® kou before-before-LNK INT orphan INDEF:one:CL ≥u˙-k˙i-t˚u. (T3:1) COP-INF :HS-PART Æ(It is said) in the past there was an orphan.fl c. ÷~u t˚e≈un tu-pu-ji-i-≤i! 2sg marry DIR-do-ASP -HS-ADV Æ(I heard) you got married!fl Generally there is no difference between second-hand and third-hand reported information, but if the hearsay marker is used in a clause with 1sg marking on the verb, as in (4.235), the utterance must be interpreted as similar to a direct quote (even though the representation of the speaker quoted is 3rd person), with the assumption being that, for example in (4.235), that the referent mentioned in (4.235) himself told the speaker of (4.235) that he (the referent mentioned in (4.235)) is unhappy. 92 If instead the verb root is the third person form plus the hearsay marker (i.e. would be [di-i] in (4.235)), then the implication is that someone else told the speaker the other person was unhappy. (4.235) the: ˚t˚imi da-i. 3sg heart sick:1sg-HS ÆHefls unhappy.fl (he told me)
(< di-å-i)
206
The verb complex
4.3.7.4. Evidential strategies Two other types of marking might be considered evidential strategies rather than evidential marking. The adverbial particle /≈su-≤i/ can be added to the end of the clause, after the verb complex (and so does not take person marking), to show uncertainty about some information. This adverbial functions something like English Æseemfl, taking the whole clause in its scope. The (semantically) main clause may or may not take the hearsay evidential marker /-i/ (compare (4.236a) and (4.236b)).
¿å-q˙-i ≈su-≤i. (4.236) a. the: dytå: 3sg Chengdu:LOC DIR-go-HS seem-ADV ÆIt seems s/he went to Chengdu.fl (guessing, unsure if true) b. dytå: le ≈su-≤i. Chengdu:LOC exist seem-ADV ÆIt seems (s/he) lives in Chengdu.fl For expressing contingent (Æit is possible thatfl, Æperhapsfl) situations, often a construction involving a clause nominalized by /-m/, plus [låhån ± lå-h˙n] (definite marker + Æonefl + Ækindfl), [kå-hån ± kå-h˙n] (indefinite marker + Æonefl + Ækindfl), or /tån/ (Æappearancefl), and the copula is used. This is structurally similar to the Japanese yoo-da and soo-da constructions (see Aoki 1986). Following are examples of a direct evidential ((4.237a)) and a construction using the nominalizer /-m/ plus /tån/ ((4.237b)). (4.237) a. the: thå Âi. 3sg there exist ÆS/he is there.fl b. the: thå-Âi-m-tån ≥u˙. 3sg there-exist-NOM-appearance COP ÆS/he might be there.fl (lit.: ÆS/he is the appearance of one who is there.fl) An expression with [-m-tån] is more of a certainty than one with [≈su(≤i)] Æseemsfl. The former can also be used for non-past events.
Verbal morphology
207
To make a strong statement of certainty, or of information that was not recently discovered, but known for some time, then a clause nominalized by /-s/ and followed by the copula is used without /tån/ or /lå-h˙n/ (this construction was also discussed in §4.3.6). This form cannot be used for past/perfective actions.
Âmu tsu-s ≥u˙. (4.238) a. p˙s today meeting hold-NOM COP ÆThere is a meeting today.fl (set and known about beforehand) b. the: thå-Âi-s 3sg there-exist-NOM ÆS/he is definitely there.fl
≥u˙. COP
4.3.7.5. Correlations with other grammatical categories Use of evidential marking in a question is not obligatory, as long as no assumptions about the source of the addresseefls information are made, but if it is used, in the case of the visual or hearsay marking it would imply the assumption that the hearer saw (visual, as in (4.239a)), or heard about (hearsay, as in (4.239b)), the action being questioned. It is the action that is questioned, not the source of the information. (4.239) a. the: ¿å-q˙-u 3sg DIR-go-VIS ÆDid he go?fl
≥uå?
b. the: ¿å-q˙-i 3sg DIR-go-HS ÆDid he go?fl
≥uå?
Q
Q
If the speaker of a question assumes the addressee of the question also does not have visual evidence of information about the situation being asked about (though knows more about the situation than the speaker), the inferential particle can be used in the question, as in (4.240):
208
The verb complex
(4.240) the: hå-q˙-k 3sg DIR-go-INF ÆDid he go?fl
≥uå? Q
The form used by the one responding to the question would then depend on the source of that personfls information, visual, inference or hearsay. If the speaker is asking the addressee about his or her own actions, then the inferential marker can still be used, but in this case would not represent a presupposition that the addressee is also not clear about the situation. Instead it would represent a guess about some aspect of the question, for example in (4.241), the guess that Chengdu is the place that the person went to. (The question marker used in this example also differs from the usual second person question marker /-å/, in that it represents more of a guess about the situation.)
dytå: ¿å-q˙-k-˙n (4.241) ÷~u 2sg Chengdu:LOC DIR-go-INF-2sg ÆDid you go down to Chengdu?fl
da? Q
Other examples of the use of the inferential marker in questions are given in (4.242a-b). (Ex. (4.242b) is actually a rhetorical question, from a traditional story, “The Old Man of the Chen Family”.) (4.242) a. the: dytå: ¿å-q˙-k 3sg Chengdu:LOC DIR-go-INF ÆDid he go down to Chengdu?fl
ja? Q
b. ÷~u ≤å qå a-q˙s we-k-å:fi t˚i? 2sg COM 1sg one-form exist-INF-PRS:1pl Q Æ(Could it be) yours and mine are the same?fl (T6:137-138) The evidential markers can be used with causatives, just as with simplex clauses (see (4.223) and (4.243)). (4.243) the: ¿å-q˙-Â-i. 3sg DIR-go-CAUS -HS ÆHe was made to go.fl (I heard)
Verbal morphology
209
It is possible to use the evidential markers in some embedded clauses, with the acceptability of the marker depending somewhat on the matrix verb (contrast (4.244a) and (4.244b)).
tu-pu-ji-(u) qå dÂuk‘u la. (4.244) a. the: pieye 3sg graduate DIR-do-CSM-VIS 1sg knowledge exist:1sg ÆI know he graduated.fl b. the: pieye tu-pu-ji-i 3sg graduate DIR-do-CSM-HS ÆI heard he graduated.fl
qå 1sg
˙-må. DIR-hear:1sg
With direct quotes, as in (4.245), different evidential marking can appear on the matrix and quoted clauses, e.g. in (4.245) the inferential marker appears in the quote, and the narrative marker appears on the verb of saying (from a traditional narrative).
≥u˙-k-å,” ik˙ j˙-kui. (4.245) “ta, qå ÷ile ep INT 1sg 2pl father COP-INF -1sg thus say-INF: HS ÆHe said, “Then, I am your father.” (based on inference from what they had just said; T6:254-255)) In other types of complex sentences, evidential marking can appear either on only the final clause, when the initial clause has a hypotactic relation to the second clause, or on both clauses:
¿å-qå me-t˚hi, peit˚in-lå (4.246) a. the: dytå: 3sg Chengdu:LOC DIR-go NEG -want Beijing-LOC då-t˚˙-qå-k˙i. DIR-CON- go-INF:HS ÆIt seems he not only went to Chengdu, he also went to Beijing.fl (I heard, not too sure) b. the: Ùu-q-tå 3sg mountain-top-LOC
hå-q˙-k˙i-tu, DIR-go-INF: HS-LNK
210
The verb complex
t˚i-ke: tu-tsu-k˙i. bear-INDEF:CL DIR-meet- INF:HS ÆWhen he went up on the mountain, he ran into a bear.fl (I heard but Iflm not too sure). c. the: doqu-le: da-g-k-(˙i), pit˚ sei 3sg leg-DEF:CL DIR-break-INF-HS now walk må-l-jy-k-(˙i). NEG -able-ASP-INF-HS ÆIt seems he broke his leg and now canflt walk.fl (I heard but Iflm not too sure.) There is no marking of evidentials in relative clauses (4.247a), or conditional clauses (4.247b), or imperatives (4.248a), though the verb of saying can be added to an imperative to show that someone told the speaker to order the person to do something, as in a direct quote (4.248b). (4.247) a. qå-wu-pån˙-de-le-m mi. 1sg-AGT-thing-DIR-give-NOM person Æthe person to whom I gave somethingfl b. the: mo-lu-tu, qå-q˙i kå:. (< k˙ + å: + å) 3sg NEG -come-LNK 1sg-self go:PRS:1sg ÆIf s/he doesnflt come, Iflm going to go myself.fl (4.248) a. ÷~u ˙-zu˙-n. 2sg DIR-sit-2sg ÆYou sit!fl b. ÷~u ˙-zu˙-n ji. 2sg DIR-sit-2sg say ÆYou sit!fl (someone else told me to say that) If the visual evidential marker is used in the negative, such as to say ÆHe didnflt comefl, or ÆIt didnflt rainfl, there is a presupposition that the speaker has visual evidence of the person not coming, that is, the speaker was in the place all day, and so would have seen the person if
Verbal morphology
211
he had come, or the speaker was outside all day, and so would have seen it had it rained. When the inferential or hearsay markers are used with a negative clause (e.g. [må-t˚i-k˙-k] [N E G-CON-go-INF ] Æ(He) didnflt go yetfl [inferred from seeing his baggage still in the hallway]), the implication is that the negative proposition is an inference or hearsay, the same as with positive propositions. Unlike in Akha (Hansson 2003), the evidential particles cannot be negated to express the idea that the speaker doesnflt know the reason for what is happening. Generally actions performed by oneself do not need to be overtly marked with evidentials, but the visual evidential can be used with inadvertent actions, as mentioned above. In the case of onefls mental or physical states, if one is not sure about some particular state, for example, whether one has caught a cold or not, usually the construction with [-tån] or [låhån] Æseemsfl would be used, e.g. ÆIt seems like I caught a coldfl, as in (4.249).
t˙-liån-thå-m-lå-hån ≥u˙. (4.249) qå 1sg DIR-catch.cold-AUX-NOM-DEF:one-kind COP ÆI might have caught a cold.fl (cf. English ÆItfls kind of like I caught a coldfl)
4.4. Adverbials The adverbials to be discussed here are the elements that modify adjectives (intransitive state predicate verbs) and verbs, not the clause as a whole. We saw examples of locative and temporal adverbs which modify the whole clause in Sections 3.2.20 and 3.2.21, and examples of another type of adverb that takes the clause in its scope in Section 4.3.7.
4.4.1. Degree marking adverbs There is some difference between the adverbs that adjectives and other verbs can take. Most adjectives, when they act as predicates, can take the postverbal adverb /-wa/ Æveryfl (e.g. /nå-wa/ (good + very) Ævery goodfl), whereas verbs, except for /topu/ Ælikefl, cannot take this adverb. Some adjectives also cannot take this adverb, but there does not seem to
212
The verb complex
be a semantic reason for this, as the adjectives that can take /-wa/ and those that cannot are often in the same semantic field, e.g. /phi-wa/ Ævery whitefl, but not */≤iq-wa/ Ævery blackfl. For the adjectives that cannot take /-wa/, the preverbal adverb [ken ± k˙n] Æveryfl (possibly a loan of Chinese g—eng) can be used. Following are some other examples of these two adverbs: (4.250) a. båstå-wa slow/late-very Ævery slow/latefl c. k˙n ≤iq very black Ævery blackfl
b. ba-wa big-very Ævery bigfl d. k˙n stå very wide Ævery widefl
Some adjectives can only take /-wa/, while some can only take /k˙n/, though some other adjectives can take either of the two adverbs, e.g. /˚upu-wa/ ± /k˙n ˚upu/ Ævery redfl. Some loan words can also take /-wa/, even when the loan word is followed by the auxiliary loan word particle (see §3.1.1). In this case /-wa/ follows the auxiliary particle, e.g. /khuaithå/ (Æfastfl < Chinese ku\ai + auxiliary loan word particle) > [khuai-thåwa] Ævery fastfl. The adverb /-wa/ can be used with the negative prefix, though the negative prefix appears before the adjective, with /-wa/ modifying the whole negative plus adjective combination, e.g. [må-nå-wa] (negative + Ægoodfl + Æveryfl) Ævery not goodfl (this cannot have the meaning Ænot very goodfl). The adverb /ken/ can be used with some verbs, e.g. /ken topu/ (Æveryfl + Ælikefl) Ælike very muchfl. An adjective modified by /ken/ can directly modify a noun (e.g. /få-ken-≤iq/ (Æclothingfl + Æveryfl + Æblackfl) Ævery black clothingfl), but this is not possible with /-wa/. The adverb /wa/ can also be followed by a nominalizer, as in the following relative clause: (4.251) ®ku-wa-m-le-ze lovely-very-NOM-DEF-CL Æthe very lovely personfl (lit.: Æthe person who is very lovelyfl)
Adverbials
213
There is another postverbal adverb, /qu˙la/ Æveryfl, used to modify adjectives and at least one auxiliary verb, e.g. /nå qu˙la/ Ævery goodfl, /˚upu qu˙la/ Ævery redfl, /dÂ˙ qu˙la/ (Æablefl + Æveryfl) Ævery capablefl. Adjectives can also be reduplicated for expressing greater intensity (see §4.2.3). For expressing the meaning Ætoo much, excessivelyfl, either a preverbal adverb, /tsan/, or a postverbal adverb, /-®/, can be used with most adjectives. The former is used only before the negative or prohibitive prefix. (4.252) a. ≤iq-˙® black-too Ætoo blackfl c. ba-® big-too Ætoo bigfl (4.253) a. tsan-må-n˙ too-NEG-good Ænot too goodfl c. tsan-me-®ue too-NEG-bright Ænot too brightfl
b. båstå-® slow/late-too Ætoo slow/latefl d. mo-po-® NEG -thick-too Ænot too thickfl b. tsan-må-≤iq too-NEG-black Ænot too blackfl d. tsan-me-tsue too-NEG-sour Ænot too sourfl
(4.254) å-z˙ ≈t®å-kå: a-Ù‘u, tsan-t˚å-©z˙-Â. (< Ùue) one-CL small-INDEF :CL DIR-put too-NEG.IMP-spicy-CAUS ÆPut a little (hot pepper), donflt make it too spicy.fl The continuative aspect marker /t˚å/ ([t˚å ± t˚i ± t˚a ± t˚o]) is used generally to mean Æstill, yetfl (see §4.3.4), but when used in the comparative construction (see §3.2.7), it has the effect of a relative degree marking adverb with the sense of 'relatively adjective' or 'even more adjective' . When this adverb appears with the negative and a directional prefix, the word order is [prefix-negative-/t˚å/-verb], as in (4.256b).
214
The verb complex
(4.255) a. t˚å-wa (< ba) CON-big Ærelatively bigfl c. t˚å-båstå CON-slow/late Ærelatively slow/latefl (4.256) a. må-t˚å-≈t®å NEG -CON-small Ænot so smallfl
b. t˚a-≤iq CON-black Ærelatively blackfl d. t˚o-po CON-thick Ærelatively thickfl b. ¿å-m˙-t˚å-≈t®å DIR-NEG -CON-small Ænot so reducedfl
The superlative of adjectives and some stative verbs is marked by the prefix /t˚i/: (4.257) a. t˚i-wa-lå-l˙ b. t˚i-topu most-big-DEF:one-CL most-like Ælike (something) mostfl Æthe biggest (stick-like object)fl c. t˚i-fi most-white Æwhitestfl
d. t˚i-≈t®å most-small Æsmallestfl
The form of the superlative is similar to one of the harmony forms of the preverbal adverb for marking a relative degree, but the superlative does not undergo vowel harmony.
4.4.2. Negation The negative adverbial prefix /m˙/ ([må ± me ± mi ± m˙ ± mo]) and the prohibitive prefix /t˚˙/ ([t˚å ± t˚e ± t˚˙ ± t˚o]) (the forms of both are affected by vowel harmony and stress) appear in the same position in the verb complex, following the directional prefix, so cannot be used together in the same verb complex, e.g., /hå-t˚˙-Ù/ (directional prefix + prohibitive + Ægofl) Ædonflt go out!fl93 vs. /hå-må-qå/ (directional prefix + negative + Ægofl) Ædidnflt go outfl (see §4.2.5 on changes in the root form of Ægofl). It is possible to have double negation in a single clause if there
Adverbials
215
is an auxiliary verb. The resulting meaning is a positive one, e.g., /må-q ¿e-m˙-se/ (Ænotfl + Ægofl + directional prefix + Ænotfl + Æallowfl) Æto not go would not be allowedfl = Æ(He) must gofl. The same negative adverbial prefix is used for all types of negation except the prohibitive. (4.258) a. b. c. d. e.
må-nå må-® V-må-l m˙-t˚i-V V-me-t˚hi
Ænot goodfl Ænot havefl Æneed not Vfl or Æcannot Vfl Ænot yet Vfl Æneed not Vfl
(4.259) qå u-t˚u må-lå. 1sg DIR-see NEG -able:1sg ÆI canflt see.fl
(< dÂ˙)
Other examples of the use of the negative and prohibitive adverbial prefixes can be found throughout Chapter 4. See especially §4.3.5.2 on the prohibitive prefix.
4.4.3. Adverbial phrases Adverbial expressions that modify non-adjective verbs as manner adverbs generally precede the verbs, and can sometimes be marked by /-≤i/ or /-ji ± t˚i/. Generally manner adverbs take /-≤i/, though if reduplicated, then /-≤i/ is not used: (4.260) a. akha-kha ˙-t˚ DIR-eat slow Æeat slowlyfl
b. akha-≤i ˙-t˚ (< t˚h˙) slow-ADV DIR-eat Æeat slowlyfl
c. hama-≤i dz˙ d. ata-≤i dz˙ stealthy-ADV eat fast-ADV eat Æeat stealthily (on the sly)fl Æeat quicklyfl The words most frequently used in adverbial expressions are similar to adjectives, but differ slightly from adjectives. They mainly appear in adverbial phrases, but can also modify nouns (in the form of
216
The verb complex
appositional structures), and can act as head of a noun phrase themselves when nominalized by the definite or indefinite markers. Semantically they seem like adjectives, but they are unlike adjectives and verbs in that they cannot act as predicates and cannot take negation, and they are also unlike other adverbs in the language, in that they can modify nouns and take the (in)definite markers, as in (4.261a-b).
≥u˙. (4.261) a. the: hama-le: 3sg stealthy-DEF:CL COP 'He is the evasive one.' b. mi hama-le: person stealthy-DEF:CL 'the evasive person' This class of forms can generally take the intensifying adverbs /k˙n/ and /-wa/, and the superlative /t˚i-/, but not the adverbs /tsan/ and /-®/. They can appear before the noun as a modifier of the noun (e.g. hamale: mi] 'the evasive person'), but this is rather rare. More than one manner adverb can appear in a clause, with no change in marking, and no marking of coordination, and each conjunct may or may not have adverbial marking:
akhakha ˙-qå. (4.262) the: hama-≤i 3sg stealthy-ADV slowly DIR-go 'S/he slowly and quietly goes/went in.' Some adjectives can act as manner adverbs in adverbial expressions, usually followed by the adverbial marker [-ji ± t˚i] or /-≤i/: (4.263) a. the: nå-ji mo-su. 3sg good-ADV NEG -study ÆS/he doesnflt study well.fl
dal˙-≤i tu-ju. b. ÷~u t˙p-≤i 2sg tomorrow-ADV early-ADV DIR-rise ÆGet up early tomorrow.fl
Adverbials
217
In some cases the manner adverb is a whole clause or verb complex: (4.264) qå kuiphåts˙-le: ¿e-t˚i-≤i sei-ja. (< ji) 1sg walking.stick-DEF:CL DIR-poke- ADV walk/run-CSM:1sg ÆI (now) walk leaning on the walking stick.fl (4.265) t˚ile the: ¿å-ståq˙-≤i linthåu ≥u˙-Âå:. (< Â˙) 1pl 3sg DIR-choose- ADV leader COP-CAUS:PRS ÆWe choose him/her to be leader.fl (4.266) qå Âåw˙-le:-wu Ùduå® hå-≥‘u‘˙-Â˙-≤i 1sg rock-DEF:CL-INST hammer DIR-COP -CAUS-ADV tints˙ Âeta. (< Âete) nail(n.) nail(v.):1sg ÆI hammer nails using the rock as a hammer.fl Ideophonic manner adverbs follow the usual phonotactics of the language. They are used for natural sounds, and not abstract concepts. (4.267) qhuå: ts˙ ≈uå ≈uå-ke: så. river.velley water huahua-INDEF:CL make.sound ÆThe river water makes a “huahua” sound.fl (4.268) moÙu bu bu (wu wu)-ke: Ùu. wind wu wu-INDEF:CL blow ÆThe wind blows “wu wu”.fl Adverbial expressions that are comparative in nature, rather than being simple manner adverbials, often follow the verb being modified. Following are examples of adverbial expressions of equality, and comparative and superlative adverbs.
a-q˙s sei dÂ˙. (4.269) thizzi 3dl one-form walk/run able ÆThe two of them can run equally fast.fl
(equality)
218
The verb complex
(4.270) the: qå-s sei t˚å-l˙. (comparative; < dÂ˙) 3sg 1sg-COMP walk/run CON-able ÆS/he runs faster than I do.fl (4.271) the: stuåhå t˚h˙ khuai-thå-wa. 3sg food/rice eat fast-AUX-very ÆS/he eats very quickly.fl (4.272) the: sei t˚i 3sg walk/run most ÆS/he can run the fastest.fl
dÂ˙. able
(comparative)
(superlative)
The correlative comparative is marked by [å-z˙] (one-CL) Æa littlefl or [lewu] Æthe morefl; the clause linker /-wu/ (= the agentive and instrumental marker) appears at the end of the first clause. (4.273) the: å-z˙ s˙-dzi-wu, å-z˙ tsha 3sg one-CL DIR-eat-LNK one-CL meat ÆThe more s/he eats, the fatter s/he gets.fl
hå-lå. DIR-come
(4.274) the: å-z˙ t˙-wa-wu, mi Â˙wå mo-x®u˚t˚. 3sg one-CL DIR-big- LNK person talk NEG -listen ÆThe bigger s/he gets, the more s/he doesnflt listen/behave.fl (4.275) z˙p lewu ≈t®å-wu, mi lewu wu q˙s we.94 place more small-LNK person more many form exist ÆThe smaller the place, the more people it seems like there are.fl It is also possible to use the comparative construction (see §3.2.7) to express the sense of a correlative comparative. (4.276) mi-wu k˙-j˙-wu-tu, (the:) ts˙-s person-AGT thus-say-LNK-LNK (3sg) this-COMP t˙-ke-k˙p˙. DIR-spirited-HABIT ÆThe more other people scold him/her, the more spirited (mischievous) he/she gets.fl
Adverbials
219
The sense of Æalmostfl, as in Æalmost have something happenfl, can be expressed using /å-z˙ t˚å-≥u˙-®˙/ (Æone-CLfl CON-COP -LNK) Æ(except for) a little still is . . .fl as a single clause, with the event that almost happened expressed in the following clause, as in the following example:
t˚å-≥uå:-®˙, (4.277) å-z˙ one-CL CON-COP:PRS-LNK må-l˙-jya. NEG -able-ASP:1sg ÆI almost couldnflt return.fl
qå i-p˙-l 1sg DIR-arrive-come (< jy)
To express the sense of Æalmostfl, as in Æalmost everyone camefl, the same clause-final particle /-®˙/ is used at the end of the first clause, which is subordinated to the copula by the adverbial particle /-t˚i/, as in the following example:
wu i-p˙-lå:-®˙-t˚i (4.278) e©le whole all DIR-arrive-come:PRS-LNK -ADV ÆAlmost all the people have come.fl
≥u˙. COP
The same clause-final particle /-®˙/ can be used in a similar structure to express the idea of Æa little . . .fl, e.g. in the following example, meaning Æa little bit alikefl: (4.279) thizzi a-q˙s wa:-®˙ 3dl one-form exist:PRS-LNK ÆThe two of them are a little alike.fl
k˙zzi
≥u˙.
INDEF:two:CL
COP
There is another use of this same clause-final particle /®˙/ to mark the first clause of a two-clause structure as expressing a hypothetical or counter-factual situation, which if realized would bring about or would have brought about the situation expressed in the second clause.95 This is clear in the examples below. (For other examples see Huang Chenglong 2000:16.) (4.280) a. qå 1sg
j˙-s say-NOM
k˙ thus
≥uå:-®˙ COP:PRS-LNK
the: 3sg
220
The verb complex
de-me-tshi-wu. DIR-NEG -wrong-3sgU ÆIf you ask me, he was not wrong.fl b. qå n˙s ®p˙≈s s˙-qå:-®˙, 1sg yesterday Chibusu DIR-go:1sg: PRS-LNK qå få-a-qai z˙-p˙-jya. 1sg clothing-one-CL DIR-buy-ASP :1sg ÆIf I had gone to Chibusu yesterday, I would have bought a piece of clothing.fl c. qå dzig‘u‘˙ q˙qa:-®˙, qå l˙©z su-k˙-jya. 1sg money have:PRS:1sg-LNK 1sg book study-go-ASP:1sg ÆIf I had money, I would go to school.fl This seems to be the sense underlying the other uses of /-®˙/ discussed above as well. That is, the sense of Æalmostfl in the example above is from Æhad it remained that way a bit more, then . . .fl; the sense of Æalmost allfl in (4.278) is from Æas if all . . .fl; and the sense of Æa little alikefl in (4.279) is from Æas if they are the samefl.
Chapter 5 The clause and complex structures
In Chapters 3-4 we discussed the various elements within the clause, and have seen many clause types in the examples given. Here we will discuss the various combinations of elements possible in a clause (§5.1), nominalizations and their use in relative clauses (§5.2), complement clause structures (§5.3), coordination and disjunction (§5.4), complex structures made up of multiple clauses (§5.5) and the structure of narratives (§5.6).
5.1. Structure The structure of the clause is to some extent affected by pragmatic factors, but this only applies to the order of noun phrases in the clause. The utterance-initial position is the unmarked topic position (though secondary topics can follow the primary topic), while the position immediately before the verb is the unmarked focus position, and so the focused element will generally appear there (see also §4.3.1). The verb always appears in final position; there is no possibility for the actor of a clause to appear in postverbal position, even if it is focal. The only exception to this is the occasional afterthought clarification of a noun phrase that was omitted or expressed as a pronoun in the clause (see T4:20-22 for an example). The clause may include a temporal phrase (TEMP); a locative phrase (LOC); the NPs representing the actor, the goal or recipient, and/or the undergoer (UG); an adverbial phrase (ADV); the verb complex (VC); and possibly a clause-final particle (PART). The most unmarked word order in the clause is given in Figure 4: (TEMP) (LOC) (ACTOR) (GOAL/RECIPIENT) (ADV) (UG) VC (PART) Figure 4. The structure of the Qiang clause
222
The clause and complex structures
The verb complex is the only necessary element for an utterance to be considered a clause, and the verb complex may be simply a predicate noun. As discussed in §4.2, the verb complex may also include an adverbial. While there are quite a few loan words in Qiang, and Qiang speakers will often code-mix, adding Chinese phrases when speaking Qiang, there does not seem to have been a lot of influence from Chinese on the grammar of Qiang. When Chinese phrases are treated as loans into Qiang, the order of elements is changed to fit the normal Qiang order. We saw examples of the this in forms such as /phit˚hi få-p˙/ (temper release-do) Æget angryfl, from Chinese f—a p|îq\î (release temper) Æget angryfl. When Chinese is used in a code-mixing sense rather than a loan sense, the expressions follow Chinese word order. Code mixing is frequent, particularly among the younger people. During the recording of the stories given in the Texts the speakers tried not to use Chinese at all, but at least one speaker used several code-mixed expressions and often interspersed Qiang text with the Chinese filler h|aish\î Æstill isfl (see in particular Text 5 for examples). Examples of code mixing can be seen in the following two segments: (5.1)
t˚iut˚in a. p˙s-≥u˙≤i Âm˙t®i-s˙tsim-le: today-TOP emperor-wife-DEF:CL †(after.all mi-le: ≥u˙-≥uå? person-DEF:CL COP-Q ÆToday, is the emperorfls wife a human?fl
®˙ be) (T6:305-306)
b. t®e-k˙-Â˙n-la mi-tse-ze-≥u˙≤i, ÆÆhai! †(this-CL-person-TOP) person-this-CL-TOP INT t ® e k ˙ p e f u t s ˙ m ˙ fi k e guo zuo pefuts˙, †white.beard †(this-CL white.beard cat give 1sg do ≈åu s˙,flfl j˙-i-stu. (T5:182-183) good thing) say-HS-PART ÆThis person, this person said, ÆÆHey, White Beard, this white beard cat did something good for meflfl.fl In (5.1a) the words /t˚iut˚in/ and /®˙/ are code-mixed Chinese, and the order of that phrase (Æemperorfls wife after all is humanfl) is verb-medial, even though /mi-le/ Æhumanfl is a Qiang word, and the larger, containing
Nominalization and relativization
223
structure is in the normal Qiang verb-final order and includes the Qiang copula. In (5.1b) there are two code-mixed segments, one of which is quite long. The speaker starts with a Chinese phrase meaning Æthis personfl, but then repeats the same meaning in Qiang. The order within the two phrases is different: in the Chinese phrase the demonstrative and classifier precede the noun, while in the Qiang phrase they follow it. In the long segment beginning in the second line, the word order is completely that of the standard Mandarin Chinese equivalent, with the recipient in post-verbal position: zh\e-ge b|aih|uzi m—ao g«ei w«o z\uo h«ao sh\î [this-CL white.beard cat give 1sg do good thing]. The speaker then finishes off the segment with the usual Qiang form for ending a quote.
5.2. Nominalization and relativization As mentioned in earlier sections (§§3.1.1, 3.1.4, 4.2.3), nominalization in Qiang is achieved either by the use of one of three nominalizing clitics, /-s/, /-m/ or /-t˚/, or by the use of a definite (/le/, /te/) or indefinite (/ke/) marker. The latter is generally possible only with adjectives and existential verbs. The nominalized forms created using the clitics reflect what were originally relative clause constructions where the relative clause (or simply a verb) modified a very general head noun.96 The form /-m/ is derived from the word /mi/ Æmanfl, and /s/ may be derived from a word meaning Æearthfl or location (cf. Tibetan /sa/ Æground, placefl, also used as a nominalizer97 ), while /-t˚/ is a palatalization of an original velar initial form (cf. Mawo dialect Qiang /-k/) that may be related to the Tibetan genitive (/kyi/). Unlike in some other Tibeto-Burman languages (e.g. Chantyal, Noonan 1997; Lahu, Matisoff 1973), nominalized forms are not used as citation forms of verbs. The creation of lexicalized deverbal nouns by adding the nominalizing suffixes /-s/ and /-m/ (e.g. [n˙s] Æbedfl and [Ùuam] Æservantfl) and the nominalization of adjectives by the use of a definite or indefinite marker (e.g. [≤iq-le] Æthe black onefl) were discussed in §3.1.1. Aside from the lexicalized deverbal nouns formed with the clitic nominalizers, nonce collocations can also be formed as needed from clauses to refer to particular objects or individuals, such as in the
224
The clause and complex structures
examples in (5.2). Here the original function as a relative clause is most clear. (5.2)
a. tåw˙-tå-m le-ze hat-wear-NOM DEF-CL Æthe person wearing a hatfl (T6:197)
b. gånts˙ ≈uå-m thå Âi. saddle sell-NOM there exist ÆThere is (a) saddle seller there.fl
k˙n he-˚a-≤i, . . . c. qå Ùoi-k˙-m 1sg call-go-NOM very(many) DIR-send:1sg-LNK ÆI have sent many to call you, . . .fl (sent many who go to call you) (T4:46-47) d. wut˚upu die-®e-m DIR-die-NOM husband Æone whose husband had diedfl
(T6:89)
It is possible in this structure to have a pronoun that is coreferential with the head noun (now a nominalizer) retained when needed for clarity, as in (5.3), where the pronoun is needed to be able to add the genitive marker to explicitly mark the benefactive relationship: (5.3)
qå the:-t˚ l˙©z de-le-m 1sg 3sg-GEN book DIR-give-NOM Æthe person to whom I gave a bookfl
le: DEF:CL
If the referent the nominalized clause represents is a location, or in some cases the time of an event, then the clause is nominalized by /-s/ and can be followed by the locative marker /-tå/, as in (5.4).98 (5.4)
qå-lu-s-tå 1sg-come-NOM-LOC Æthe place that I came fromfl
Nominalization and relativization
225
Clauses involving existential verbs can be nominalized by simply adding one of the definite markers or the indefinite marker after the verb: (5.5)
l˙ me-Âi ew l˙ a. ep father also NEG -exist mother also me-Âi-ke: ≥u˙-k˙i-t˚u. (T3:2-3) NEG -exist-INDEF:CL COP-INF :HS-PART Æ(He was an orphan), one who didnflt have a father or mother.fl b. the: thå-Âi-k Ùu. 3sg there-exist-INF willing ÆS/he might be there.fl (lit.: ÆShe might be one who is there.fl)
The nominalized constructions involving the nominalizers /-s/ and /-m/, and also another type formed with the genitive marker /-t˚/, can be used to modify another noun or noun phrase, forming a NP + N(P) structure where the first NP modifies the second. That is, what was historically a relative clause plus head noun structure (at least in the case of /-s/ and /-m/) has been reanalyzed as simply a nominalized clause and is now used to modify another noun. This is now the main form of relative clause structure used in Qiang. It is also used for noun complement structures (such as in ex. (4.118) above (repeated below as (5.74)) and the /-tån/ structure discussed in §4.3.7.4). There are no relative pronouns in Qiang. Definite marking may follow the head noun, as in (5.9). The type of nominalizer such a modifier (relative clause) takes depends on the semantics and animacy of the head noun. If the head noun is an undergoer or other noninstrument, including an inanimate actor, then the genitive marker /-t˚/ is used: (5.6)
p˙tsa-≤i-t˙-b˙l-jy-t˚ just.now-ADV-DIR-make-ASP-GEN Æthe table just madefl
(5.7)
p˙tsa-≤i-z˙-p-jy-t˚ just.now-ADV-DIR-buy-ASP-GEN Æthe clothes just boughtfl
t®uåts table
få clothes
226
(5.8)
The clause and complex structures
qå-doqu-de-we-t˚ Âåwå 1sg-foot-DIR-exist-GEN rock Æthe rock which crushed (lit.: came to be on) my footfl
If the head noun is an instrument (even if animate, as in (5.9)), then the nominalizer /-s/ is used: (5.9)
do-qu-Â˙-s khu˙-le: DIR-afraid- CAUS-NOM dog-DEF:CL Æthe dog used to frighten peoplefl
(5.10) stuåhå-t˚h˙-s t®uåts food/rice-eat-NOM table Æthe table used for eating foodfl (5.11) t˚e≈uen-på:-Ùå-gu˙-s få marry-do:PRS-LOC-wear-NOM clothes Æclothes worn when one is going to get marriedfl (5.12) låupin-t®hopu-s s˙pe tuberculosis-treat-NOM medicine Æmedicine used to treat tuberculosisfl If the head noun has an animate referent, then the nominalizer /-m/ is used. As mentioned above, this form derives from the word /mi/ Æpersonfl, but it has fully grammaticalized into a nominalizer, to the point that it can be used together with /mi/ as the head noun, as in (5.14) and (5.15) (though it can be omitted, as in (5.16)). Notice also how the use of the agentive marking within the relative clause in (5.15) changes the interpretation of the semantic role of the head noun phrase relative to that in (5.14). Here the agentive marking is performing a disambiguating function, particularly necessary here because of the lack of person marking in nominalizations.
khu˙ (5.13) qå-¿a-ÙdÂe-m 1sg-DIR-bite-NOM dog Æthe dog which bit mefl
Nominalization and relativization
227
(5.14) qå-pån˙-dele-m mi 1sg-thing-give-NOM person Æthe person who gave me somethingfl (5.15) qå-wu-pån˙-dele-m mi 1sg-AGT-thing-give-NOM person Æthe person to whom I gave somethingfl (5.16) qupu ≤i©i-b˙l˙-m ≥u˙-≥uå? 3sg what-do-NOM COP-Q ÆWhat kind of work does he do?fl (lit.: ÆHe is a person who does what?fl) (5.17) mutu-lå-fie-m w˙ sky-LOC-fly-NOM bird Æa bird flying in the skyfl (5.18) pit˚ phu-Ùå Â˙-m phu-x®u pe-wei. nowadays forest-LOC exist-NOM wild.animals become-HS Æ(They) became the wild animals who now live in the forests.fl (T2:21-22) Relative clauses can be quite complex, involving a modifier with several clauses, as in (5.19), or a head noun that is a nominalized expression itself, as in (5.20):
tåw˙-¿å-t˙-≤i Âi-m] (5.19) [soqhu-s˙-≈laÙu-≤i, gun-DIR-carry.on.back-ADV hat-DIR-wear-ADV exist-NOM mi person Æthe person carrying a rifle on his back and wearing a hatfl (5.20) tåw˙-tå-m ®ku-wa-m-le-ze hat-wear-NOM lovely-very-NOM-DEF-CL Æthe lovely person wearing a hatfl It is possible to have a pronoun as the head noun of a relative clause:
228
The clause and complex structures
(5.21) n˙-dÂ˙-m the: t˚å-n. sleep-able-NOM 3sg CON-sleep ÆS/he who likes to sleep late is still sleeping.fl A second type of relative clause in Qiang is a post-head restrictive relative clause, which is used only in some cases when the head noun is the name of a person. The relative clause is nominalized in the same way as the prehead relative. This is in fact a case of apposition rather than being a true relative, but it has the function of a restrictive relative. Following are two examples:
t˚˙u-lå Âi. (5.22) upu ˚i-t˚h˙-topu-m-le: uncle wine-drink-like/love-NOM-DEF:CL home-LOC exist ÆThe uncle who likes drinking liquor is at home.fl (5.23) ts˙i låmpå-®å-©Â˙-m-le: p˙s older.sister flower-embroider-able-NOM-DEF:CL today t®u˙wå-låmp˙-e-tse ˙-®å. shoe-flower-one- CL DIR-embroider ÆThe older sister who embroiders flowers well embroidered a pair of flowery shoes today.fl Another type of apposition structure that functions like a restrictive relative clause is when a locative phrase follows the head noun:
Âek‘u-te-zi (5.24) mi person middle-DEF-CL Æthe person in the middlefl This structure is similar to the normal [head noun-adjective-definite marker] structure, but as the post-head element is a noun and not an adjective, I am assuming it is an appositional structure (generally if one noun modifiers another, it precedes it), while the following is a simple noun phrase structure: (5.25) mi-t˚i-wa-le-zi person-most-big-DEF-CL Æthe biggest personfl
Nominalization and relativization
229
See also Section 3.1 for more examples of relative clauses.
5.3. Complementation There are two basic complement types in Qiang, one that has no overt nominalization and one that has a clitic nominalizer. Both of these are of the Æsentence-like complementfl type discussed in Noonan 1985. The nominalized form is not like what Noonan calls a Ænominalized complementfl, where the internal structure of the clause is that of a noun phrase (e.g. English gerunds). The nominalized type can be distinguished into three types based on the particular nominalizer used. Qiang does not exhibit the type of complex, massive verb concatenation found, for example, in Jinghpaw and Lahu (see Matisoff 1969, 1973, 1974); there are only a few auxiliary verbs that form a single nucleus with the main verb (see for example §4.2.5). In other cases either what would be expressed in two verbs in some languages would be expressed with a single verb plus a directional prefix, or the secondary verb would appear in an adverbial phrase marked by /-≤i/. One complex structure where the complement does not require overt nominalization is where there is a topic-comment structure with a complement clause as the topic, such as with the use of the verbs /Ùu/ or /se/ for the sense of Æ(be) allowedfl (discussed above in §4.2.6 and §4.3.6.4). These are what Dixon (1991, 1995) calls Secondary verbs, verbs which only take clausal complements as arguments. There is no person marking on the matrix verb in this type of clause, as the topic is the clause, not the human referent mentioned in the complement clause (it would be possible to have the topic marker /≥u˙≤i/ at the end of the topic clause). There is no overt marking on the complement clause to distinguish it from an independent clause. In (5.26a) brackets have been put around the complement clause to mark it off.
p˙s må-k] ¿e-m˙-se. (5.26) a. [÷~u 2sg today NEG -go DIR-NEG -allow ÆYou must go today.fl/ ÆYour not going today is not allowed.fl
230
The clause and complex structures
b. ˚o˚åu-Ùå Âme-Â de-Â school-LOC Qiang-language speak-CAUS ÆSpeaking Qiang is allowed in school.fl c. ˚o˚åu-Ùå Âme-Â de-Â school-LOC Qiang-language speak-CAUS ÆSpeaking Qiang is allowed in school.fl
Ùu. allow
¿e-se. DIR-allow
It is also possible that there is an understood impersonal third person actor, but it is not expressed overtly, and the complement clause can take the topic marker. The verb /Ùze/ Æought tofl, which expresses physical or moral obligation to perform an action (see §4.2.6), seems to pattern this way, as there is no first-person or second-person marking on the verb, even when the expression refers to a first or second person actor. (5.27) a. k˙ Ùze-ji! go must-CSM Æ(I/we/you) must go.fl (ÆItfls time to go!fl)
b. k˙ ma-t˚i-Ùze! go NEG -CON-must Æ(You/we) neednflt/ shouldnflt go yet!fl
In the case of the construction involving the expression /me-t˚hi/ Ænot wantfl to express the ability or permission to do something (discussed in §4.3.6.4), the non-nominalized complement clause takes the exclusion particle (treating it as a noun phrase), and there is no agreement with the actor of the complement clause.
Âme-Â de-ji (5.28) a. ˚o˚åu-Ùå school-LOC Qiang-language speak-EXC ÆIt is all right to speak Qiang in school.fl
me-t˚hi. NEG -want
b. ts˙ tu-≈su-ji-(wå), t˚ile quaha ≈u˙lå-j˙ water DIR-boil-CSM-RCA 1pl face wash-EXC me-t˚hi-ji. NEG -want-CSM ÆThe waterfls boiled, so we can wash our faces.fl
Complementation
231
Without the exclusion particle, the complement plus /me-t˚hi/ Ænot wantfl can be used in a complex structure to express the idea Ænot only X, but Yfl:
k˙ me-t˚hi, peit˚in-lå t˚å-kå:. (< k˙) (5.29) qå dytå: 1sg Chengdu:LOC go NEG -want Beijing-LOC CON-go:PRS:1sg ÆNot only am I going to Chengdu, but I am also going to Beijing.fl With another group of verbs, including what Dixon (1991, 1995) calls Primary B verbs, those that can take either a noun argument or a clause complement, such as Ælikefl and Æknowfl, and Secondary verbs, the complement clause is either a complete clause or, when the actor of both clauses is the same, a reduced clause. The person marking on the Primary B or Secondary verb reflects the person of the actor of the matrix clause. For example, the verbs /˚t˚åq-lu/ Æthink of, wantfl (Æheartfl + Æcomefl); /lu/ can also be used alone), /kånt˚hi/ Æthink/wantfl, or /zulu/ Æwaitfl, can be used to express the desire to do an action or the hope for some situation to happen. In (5.30a) the actor of the matrix and the complement clause are the same, while in (5.30b) the actors of the matrix and the complement clauses are different. In (5.30b) the person marking is of the actor of Æwaitfl, not Æarrivefl.
k˙ ˚t˚åq-lu. (5.30) a. the: t˚˙u 3sg home go heart-come ÆS/he wants to go home.fl b. qå the: i-p˙-la: 1sg 3sg DIR-arrive-come: PRS ÆI hope s/he is going to return.fl
zulu-å. wait-1sg
For many verbs, such as /x®u/ Æto darefl, /de/ (experiential aspect), /©Â˙/ (potential for a learned ability), /dÂ˙/ and /qe/ (potential for a natural (physical) ability), only the pattern in (5.30a), with the actors of both verbs being the same, is found, probably because of the semantics of these particular verbs. Following are some examples:
232
The clause and complex structures
(5.31) the: e-ze stu n˙ 3sg one-CL alone sleep ÆS/he doesnflt dare sleep alone.fl
mo-x®u. NEG -dare
(5.32) a. qå dytå: ¿å-q˙ 1sg Chengdu:LOC DIR-go ÆI have been to Chengdu.fl
da. EXP:1sg
(< de)
b. qå l˙©z-tse-pen i-tsi me-da. 1sg book-this-CL DIR-read NEG -EXP:1sg ÆI have not read this book.fl (5.33) qå Âme-Â de 1sg Qiang-language speak ÆI can speak Qiang.fl
©Âå. can:1sg
(5.34) mi lå må-l, w˙ lå person fly NEG -able bird fly ÆPeople cannot fly, but birds can.fl (5.35) the: Âåwå-le: t˙-tsi 3sg rock-DEF:CL DIR-lift ÆCan s/he lift up this rock?fl
(< de)
(< ©Â˙)
dÂ˙. able
qe-≥uå? able-Q
Speech act verbs also take non-nominalized complements. In quoting anotherfls speech, the quoted speech generally follows the noun phrases representing the speaker and addressee, and is followed by the verb /j˙/ ([j˙ ± ji]) Æto sayfl. Both direct and indirect quotation are possible. The structure for both types is the same; they differ only in the pronoun used. Compare the following three examples: (5.36) a. qå qupu-tå "(÷~u) lu-me-t˚hi" 1sg 3sg-DAT 2sg come-NEG -want ÆI told him/her, “Donflt come."fl
ji-wå. speak-3sgU:1sg
qupui-tå qupui lu-me-t˚hi b. qå 1sg 3sg-DAT 3sg come-NEG -want ÆI told him/her not to come.fl
ji-wå. speak-3sgU:1sg
Complementation
233
c. qå qupui-tå the:j lu-me-t˚hi ji-wå. 1sg 3sg-DAT 3sg come-NEG -want speak-3sgU:1sg ÆI told him/her that he/she (a different person) shouldnflt come.fl / ÆI told him/her, “S/he shouldnflt come”.fl In example (5.36a), the second person pronoun marks the embedded clause as a direct quote. The person marking is of a first person referent acting on a third person referent. In (5.36b) the two tokens of /qupu/ refer to the same referent, and so it is an indirect quote. Example (5.36c) is ambiguous out of context, as the pronoun /the:/ must refer to someone other than the referent of /qupu/, and so it could be either a direct or indirect quote. If there is a more specific verb of asking or replying, then this verb may precede the quoted speech, though the verb /j˙/ Æto sayfl still follows the quote, as in the two tokens of this structure in the following section of the story “An Orphan” involving Æaskfl and Æanswerfl:
t˙-kefil-kui, “ha! ÷~u (5.37) ≈sutsqhå-le:-wu stomach-DEF:CL -AGT DIR-ask-INF:HS EXCL 2sg ≤i-≈uå-≤i k˙-zei-n-å” j˙-kui, “≤i≈uå≤i WH -because-ADV DIR-cry-2sg-Q say-INF:HS why k˙-zei-n-å” j˙-kui -tu, kåp˙t®-tou DIR-cry-2sg-Q say-INF:HS-LNK orphan-DEF:one:CL he-Âgue-k˙i, “qå-≥u˙≤i ep l˙ DIR-answer-INF:HS 1sg- TOP father also me-Â˙-i ˙w l˙ me-Â˙-i, NEG -exist-CSM mother also NEG -exist-CSM g˙s-≤i ¿å-xt®˙p-≤iåufu ®kup-le: qå night-ADV DIR-dark-LNK(as.soon.as) orangutan-DEF:CL 1sg dz˙-lå:” j˙-k˙p˙-®˙, . . . (T3:56-62) say-HABIT-LNK eat-come:PRS ÆThe stomach asked him, “Why are you crying?”, he said, “Why are you crying?” The orphan answered, “I have neither father nor mother. As soon as it gets dark, the orangutan is going to come eat me.”fl Aside from these verbs which normally take non-nominalized complements, the copula can also take a non-nominalized complement.
234
The clause and complex structures
This has an emphatic sense, somewhat similar to a cleft construction, as in (5.38). (5.38) pån˙-tse: qå-wu z˙-p-ji ≥u˙. thing-this:CL 1sg-AGT DIR-buy-CSM COP ÆThis thing was bought by me.fl This form is often used for achieving the affect of clefting for highlighting adverbials: (5.39) the: hama-≤i kue-jy 3sg secretly-ADV transport-ASP ÆS/he was transported secretly.fl
≥u˙. COP
This construction differs from another construction with almost the same structure, but with a nominalized complement clause, used for making strong assertions. This is in fact pragmatically also like a cleft, in that a particular noun phrase is the focus constituent.
topu-s ≥u˙. (5.40) the:-(≥u˙≤i) t˚ile 3sg-TOP 1pl like-NOM COP ÆThe ones s/he likes are us.fl (ÆWe are the ones s/he likes.fl) The position of the focused element is variable: the focus noun phrase can precede or follow the nominalized verb. Compare the following two examples: (5.41) a. t˚ile-(≥u˙≤i) p˙-s pies 1pl-TOP buy-NOM meat ÆWhat we need (to buy) is meat.fl b. t˚ile-(≥u˙≤i) pies p˙-s 1p-TOP meat buy-NOM ÆWhat we need (to buy) is meat.fl
≥u˙. COP
≥u˙. COP
A variant of this construction has something of an epistemic sense. As we saw in the discussion of evidentials in §4.3.7, to make a strong statement of certainty, or of information that was not recently
Complementation
235
discovered, but known for some time, then a complement clause nominalized by /-s/ is used, as in (5.42). (5.42) p˙s Âmu tsu-s ≥u˙. today meeting hold-NOM COP ÆThere is a meeting today.fl (set beforehand) Another use of this structure is expressing the optative mood (§4.3.6.1). In this structure the complement is nominalized by /-s/ and the copula takes the particle /-≤i/ in the positive or /-t˚i/ in the negative (both particles normally mark adverbial phrases). No aspect or person contrasts are marked in clauses with /må-≥u˙-t˚i/ or /≥u˙-≤i/.
me:fi ˚e-s må-≥u˙-t˚i. (5.43) a. t˙p-≤i tomorrow-ADV rain fall-NOM NEG -COP-PART ÆI hope it wonflt rain tomorrow.fl b. the: t®hets˙-le: ¿å-≈˙-s ≥u˙-≤i. 3sg car-DEF:CL DIR-bad/broken-NOM COP-ADV ÆI hope his/her car has broken down.fl This same structure, but with the copula followed optionally by /®å/ in the first person, /sån/ in the second person, or [≥‘u‘˙ ± w˙] in the third person, is used to express obligation to perform an action (debitive; see §4.3.6.3 for more examples).
lu-s (5.44) the: t˚˙u-lå 3sg home-LOC come-NOM ÆS/he must come home!fl
≥u˙-≥‘u‘˙. COP-3sgU
We saw in §4.3.7 that there is a copula construction with a nominalized complement, or in some cases a complement that is a relative clause with [lå-hån ± lå-h˙n] (definite marker + Ækindfl), [kå-hån ± kå-h˙n] (indefinite marker + Ækindfl), or /tån/ (Æappearancefl) as the head noun, used to express contingent situations, as in (5.45) and (5.46). ≥u˙. (5.45) the: thå-Âi-m-tån 3sg there-exist-NOM-appearance COP ÆS/he might be there.fl
236
The clause and complex structures
(5.46) me:fi ˚i-m-lå-h˙n ≥u˙. rain fall-NOM-DEF:one-kind COP ÆIt might rain.fl This then brings us to what might be considered a pseudo-cleft construction, where the sort of relative clause plus noun construction discussed above is used as a complement of a copula clause. The topic marker can optionally be used after this complement, as it is the topic of the construction, while the noun phrase in immediate preverbal (focus) position identifies the referent represented by the head of the relative clause, as in (5.47)-(5.49).
tse: (5.47) qå-z˙-p˙-t˚-pån˙ 1sg-DIR-buy-GEN-thing this:CL ÆThe thing that I bought is thisfl
≥u˙. COP
(5.48) pån˙-tse:-z˙-p˙-m qå-(wu) thing-this:CL-DIR-buy-NOM 1sg-AGT ÆI am the one who bought this thing.fl
≥uå. COP:1sg
(5.49) kefil˙-m l˙ ≤i: ≥u˙-k˙i, ask-NOM also 3sgREFL COP-INF :HS he-Âgue-m l˙ ≤i: ≥u˙-k˙i, DIR-answer-NOM also 3sgREFL COP-INF :HS ÆThe one who asked was himself, the one who answered was himself.fl Another verb that takes nominalized complements is the existential verb /xu/, discussed in Section 4.2.4. Here is another example of its use: (5.50) ts˙-s å-z-≥u˙≤i ˚i-lå: ataÂ-≤i this-COMP one-CL-TOP small-DEF:CL fast-ADV u-Âmu ≤å99 u-t˚u-s-le: ˙-m˙-s DIR-dream COM DIR-see- NOM-DEF:CL DIR-hear-NOM xu-tu, . . . exist-LNK ÆIf you can dream of it a little faster, see or hear it, . . .fl
Complementation
237
Section 5.5 discusses other uses of nominalized clauses, but first we will discuss coordination and disjunction.
5.4. Coordination and disjunction In coordinating nouns in Qiang, the following structures are possible, where X, Y, and Z are three different nouns, and /≤å/ is the comitative/conjunction marker discussed in §3.2.13: XY, X-≤å-Y, XY≤å, XYZ, X-≤å-YZ, X-≤å-Y-≤å-Z, XY-≤å-Z, XYZ-≤å. Example (5.51) is of the X-≤å-Y-≤å-Z type, and (5.52) and (5.53), with only two nouns, are of the X-≤å-Y type: (5.51) qå-≤å-÷~u-≤å-the: 1sg-COM-2sg-COM-3sg ÆI and you and s/hefl (5.52) ut®uqu ©Â˙-pi-≤å-˚t˚i-t˚o all.together four-CL-COM-seven-CL(1/10 of a dollar) ÆAll together four dollars and seventy cents.fl (5.53) qå q˙påt®-≤å-®u˙ wu ¿å-≈‘u‘˙lå. 1sg head-COM-teeth all DIR-wash ÆI washed my hair and (brushed) my teeth, too.fl See the discussion in Section 3.2.13 on the differences in meaning between the X-≤å-Y and XY-≤å types. It is also possible to coordinate adverbial nouns, either with the conjunction marker (e.g. [p˙s-≤å-t˙p-≤i] Ætoday and tomorrowfl) or without it (e.g. [p˙s-t˙p-≤i] Ætoday and tomorrowfl). Nominalized verbs can also be coordinated: (5.54) t˚h˙-s-≤å-dz˙-s-≤å-gu˙-s drink-NOM-and-eat-NOM-and-wear-NOM Ædrink, food, and clothingfl In this case it would also be possible to just use a pause between the items instead of using the conjunction marker.
238
The clause and complex structures
In coordinating clauses, they can be simply juxtaposed, with only the particle /l˙/ Æalsofl appearing before each verb to show the relationship between the two clauses, as in (5.55a), or the clause-final linking particle /wu/ (= the ablative/instrumental postposition) can be used at the end of the first clause, as in (5.55b). (5.55) a. qå ≈o:ts l˙ ¿e-qhua, quaha le 1sg beard also DIR-shave:1sg face also ¿å-≈u˙lå-ja. DIR-wash-CSM:1sg ÆI washed my face and also shaved.fl
(ji + å)
b. ÷~u mo-lu-n-wu, tian≈uå l˙ d˙-mu-Ùoi-n. 2sg NEG -come-2sg-LNK telephone also DIR-NEG -call-2sg ÆYou didnflt come and didnflt call either. fl Where two clauses have the same verb and only the referent(s) affected changes, verb ellipsis is not possible in the second clause, even if the verb form is the same.
¿å-q˙, khefit®i l˙ ¿å-qå.100 (5.56) peimt®i dytå: Peimt®i Chengdu:LOC DIR-go Kert®i also DIR-go ÆPeimt®i went to Chengdu and Khert®i did also.fl That is, it is not possible to say the equivalent of ÆJohn left, and Mary (did) too.fl The verb must be repeated. The coordination of adjectives can be done with the adverbial marker /≤i/ ((5.57)) or with some of the other particles used for conjoining verbs, such as /me-t˚hi/ Ænot onlyfl, as in (5.58).
≤iq (5.57) a. bå-≤i old-ADV black Æboth old and blackfl
b. nå-≤i mo-π‘ulu good-ADV NEG -expensive Ægood and inexpensivefl
(5.58) bå-me-t˚hi ≤iq-ke: t˚å-≥‘u‘˙. old-NEG-only black-INDEF :CL CON-COP Æ(It) is not only old but black as well.fl
Coordination and disjunction
239
To express an Æeither-orfl (disjunction) relation, the expression /≥uå≤i/ Æorfl (distinct from the topic marker) is used, as in (5.59), below, 101 or, if it is a question, then the polarity verb-not-verb interrogative construction can be used, either with /≥uå≤i/, as in (5.60), or without it, as in (5.61) and (5.62) (see also Section 4.3.5.3 on verbnot-verb interrogatives). In a two-clause structure, such as in (5.60), the particle either appears in its own intonation unit or in the intonation unit of the second clause.
≥uå≤i the: e-ze ®p˙≈s-(tå) s˙-Ù˙-i. (5.59) ÷~u 2sg or 3sg one-CL Chibusu-LOC DIR-go-2pl ÆYou or she (one of you) go to Chibusu (district).fl (5.60) ÷~u qh˙fi t˚hå:-n-å, ≥uå≤i ˚pies t˚hå:-n-å? 2sg rice eat:PRS-2sg-Q or noodles eat:PRS-2sg-Q ÆWill you eat rice or noodles?fl (5.61) ≤iq-ke: ≥u˙-≥uå, ˚upu-ke: black-INDEF:CL COP-Q red-INDEF:CL ÆIs it a red one or a black one?fl
≥u˙-≥uå? COP-Q
(5.62) ÷~u dza:-t˚ik‘u kå:-n-å, dza:-khui kå:-n-å? 2sg lunch-before go:PRS-2sg-Q lunch-after go:PRS-2sg-Q ÆAre you going in the morning or the afternoon?fl
5.5. Other complex structures Aside from the embedding of complements discussed above, clauses, either nominalized or not, also appear in non-embedded hypotactic structures. In some cases there is no obvious nominalization by /-s/, /-m/ or /-t˚/, but the clause takes one of the postpositions used for marking the relationship between a verb and its arguments (aside from the genitive; use of semantic role-marking postpositions for marking clause relations is a common strategy in Tibeto-Burman; see Genetti 1986, 1991). For example, the use of the ablative/instrumental marker /-wu/ after a clause marks a cause-effect relation with the following clause.
240
The clause and complex structures
(5.63) the:-doqu-le: da-g-wu, pit˚ sei må-l-jy. (< dÂ˙) 3sg-foot-DEF:CL DIR-break-INST now walk NEG -able-ASP ÆBecause his foot is broken he cannot walk now. Æ (5.64) o-z‘u-wu doqu-på t˙-©z˙-®å.102 DIR-sit- INST foot-palm DIR-numb-1sgU Æ Because of sitting, my feet were numb.fl (5.65) ¿å-n-wu q˙påt® DIR-sleep-INST head ÆI felt dizzy from sleeping.fl
¿o-su-Â˙-®å. DIR-dizzy-CAUS -1sg U
A cause-effect relation can also be marked by adding the manner adverbial marker /≤i/ to the first clause: (5.66) the: diq ¿å-q˙-≤i die-®e. 3sg cliff DIR-go-ADV DIR-die ÆS/he died (from) falling off the cliff.fl To mark the purpose of an action, the postposition /≈uå-(≤i)/ (discussed in §3.2.10 as a benefactive postposition), can be used, either after a noun, a clause, or a nominalized clause:
≥u˙)-≈uå-≤i, (qupu) (5.67) the: stuåhå t˚h˙-(s 3sg food/rice eat-NOM COP-because- ADV 3sg mefiÂ. look.for(earn) ÆIn order to live, s/he seeks to earn more money.fl
dzig‘u money
(5.68) the: dzig‘u-≈uå-≤i hå-q˙-≤i ko≥tsuo-p˙-k. 3sg money-because-ADV DIR-go-ADV work-do-go ÆFor the sake of money, s/he goes out to (go to) work.fl (5.69) Âå lu-Â-≈uå-≤i, z˙-Ùå the: jimi se. crops come-CAUS-because-ADV field-LOC 3sg fertilizer spread ÆS/he spreads fertilizer in the field in order to make the crops grow well.fl
Other complex structures
241
The cause of an action or situation can also be marked by /≈uå-≤i/: (5.70) the: z˙-m˙-lå-≈uå-≤i, qåq˙i kå:. (< k˙) 3sg DIR-NEG -come-because-ADV 1sgREFL go:PRS:1sg ÆBecause s/he hasnflt come, Iflm going to go myself. fl The particle /-le/ can be used instead used instead of /≈uå-≤i/ or /-®˙/ to mark a condition or cause: (5.71) . . . quåha-≈upi l˙ u-mu-t˚u-le, t˚ile q˙ti face-appearance also DIR-NEG -see-because 1pl kill ¿e-me-se. (T6:271-272) DIR-NEG -allow ÆBecause we havenflt even seen (her) face, you canflt kill us.fl Many hypotactic clauses are nominalized using /-s/ or /-t˚/. For example, if the action expressed by the second clause is said to precede the action expressed by the first clause, then the structure /må-t˚i-Verb/ (NEG-CON-Verb) Æhad not yet Verb; before Verbfl is used in the first clause and it is nominalized by /-t˚/. (5.72) n˙s, qå må-t˚i-k˙-t˚, the: qå s˙imi de-l. yesterday 1sg NEG -CON-go-GEN 3sg 1sg fruit DIR-give ÆYesterday before I left, s/he gave me (a package of) fruit.fl (5.73) t˙p-≤i ¿å-m˙-t˚i-xt®åp˙-t˚, tomorrow-ADV DIR-NEG -CON-black-GEN ÷~u tså i-p˙-l˙-n-på. 2sg here DIR-arrive-come-2sg-DTV ÆCome here tomorrow before it gets dark.fl (5.74) qå stuåhå må-t˚i-t˚h˙-t˚, 1sg rice/food NEG -CON-eat-GEN ÆBefore I eat, I wash my hands.fl
jåp˙ hand
≈u˙lå. wash
The initial clause may instead be nominalized by /-s/ and followed by /qe:fi/ Æbeforefl, i.e. the structure becomes that of a noun complement clause.
242
The clause and complex structures
(5.75) (qåq˙i)-t˚˙u-lå i-p˙-k-˙s qe:fi, qå 1sgREFL-home-LOC DIR-arrive-go-NOM before 1sg i˚t˚imåqå ˙-j˙-så Ùoi-k˙på. often one-two-sentences call-HABIT:1sg ÆBefore returning to my own home, I often call out a few sentences.fl The form given above in (5.4) (a clause nominalized by /-s/ and followed by the locative marker /-tå/) is also used in some cases to express a temporal adverbial phrase, as in (5.75a-b).
qå t˚˙u-lå k˙-s-tå, the: l˙©z (5.76) a. n˙p, last.year 1sg home-LOC go-NOM-LOC 3sg book su-ji. study-CSM ÆLast year when I went home, s/he was already studying.fl b. t®haq-tå kuåntså Âi-s-tå market-LOC restaurant exist-NOM-LOC å-må-wå. (T5:58-59) DIR-hear:1sg-EMPH ÆI heard (it) when I was in the restaurant at the market.fl For other types of clausal relation, there are different particles that can be used to show the particular relation between the clauses. If the action expressed by the second clause is said to follow the action of the first clause (whether or not the first action was completed), then the particle /≤ike/ or /≤iånt˚i/ Æfollowingfl can be used at the end of the first clause:
stuåhå s˙-t˚-≤ike, (5.77) qå 1sg food/rice DIR-eat-after ÆAfter I eat a meal, I brush my teeth.fl (5.78) t˙p-≤i tomorrow-ADV
¿å-xt®˙p-≤ike, DIR-black-after
®u˙ teeth
÷~u 2sg
≈u˙lå. wash
tså here
Other complex structures
243
i-p˙-l-˙n-på. DIR-arrive-come-2sg-DTV ÆCome here tomorrow after dark. fl (5.79) qå tu-j‘u-≤ike, ˚t˚es s˙-t˚-≤i, 1sg DIR-get.up-after breakfast DIR-eat-ADV ®ånpån-p˙-k hå-qå. work-do-go DIR-go:1sg ÆAfter I get up and eat breakfast, I go out to go to work.fl (5.80) the: qå u-t˚u-≤ike, de-xtse. 3sg 1sg DIR-see-after DIR-go.away ÆAfter s/he saw me, s/he went away.fl (5.81) the: pie ˚t˚˙ då-s-≤ike, w˙ dÂud‘u. 3sg pig feed DIR- finish-after horse feed ÆS/he finished feeding the pig and then went to feed the horse.fl (5.82) t˙-≈quåt® ≤iånt˚i, m˙q-tå tu≥tu≥ Âo:puå-lå DIR-steal after above-LOC cave cave-LOC . . . ¿å-dy-≤i i-˚i-kui. (T5:73-76) DIR-tether- ADV DIR-put- INF:HS ÆAfter stealing (the yaks) he tethered them in a cave.fl To make explicit the idea that an action immediately followed another, the particle /≤iåufu/ is used instead of /≤ike/ or /≤iånt˚i/: (5.83) ˙-qå-≤iåufu kåp˙t®-tou n˙®-ta:-Ùa DIR-go-LNK (as.soon.as) orphan-DEF:one:CL bed-DEF:CL-LOC mo-thå-j˙-kui. (T3:126-127) grope-AUX-REP-INF: HS ÆAs soon as (the orangutan) went in, he groped again for the orphan in the bed.fl To express the conditional (Æiffl), then the particle /tu/ or /ta/ is added to the end of the first clause. No difference has been found in the degree of hypotheticality in conditional clauses.103
244
The clause and complex structures
(5.84) me:fi me-˚i-tu, t˚ile k˙-ji me-t˚hi. rain NEG -fall-if 1pl go-EXC NEG -want ÆIf it doesnflt rain, we can go.fl (5.85) the: mo-lu-tu, qåq˙i kå:. go:PRS:1sg 3sg NEG -come-if 1sgREFL ÆIf s/he doesnflt come, Iflm going to go myself.fl
(< k˙)
(5.86) the: må-k-tu, qå k˙-s pa:-ji. (< pe) NEG -go-if 1sg go-NOM become:PRS:1sg-PART 3sg ÆIf s/he doesnflt go, then I have to go.fl In (5.86) the particle /-ji/ expresses a lack of willingness to go, that is, that the speaker is going only because he or she has to. The form /tu/ is also often used with a negative copula to express the meaning Æonly iffl. In these cases the main verb appears as an adverbial element marked by /≤i/.
må-≥‘u‘˙-tu, (nai) dz˙-m me-Âi. (5.87) ÷ile dz˙-i-≤i 2pl eat-2pl-ADV NEG -COP-LNK other eat-NOM NEG -exist Æ Only if you eat will other people eatfl (lit.: If you(pl) donflt eat, then there is no one (else) who will eat.) må-≥‘u‘˙-tu, qå må-kå. (< k˙) (5.88) the: lu-≤i 3sg come-ADV NEG -COP-LNK 1sg NEG -go:1sg ÆOnly if s/he comes, will I go.fl / ÆI wonflt go unless she comes.fl (5.89) dytå: k˙-≤i må-≥‘u‘˙-tu, p˙-s må-®˙. Chengdu:LOC go-ADV NEG -COP-LNK buy-NOM NEG -exist ÆYou cannot buy it unless you go to Chengdu.fl / ÆOnly if you go to Chengdu can you buy it.fl There are also two examples in the Texts where the particles /-wu/ and /-Ùå/ (which are used after noun phrases as postpositions) are used with the sense of a conditional. In the case of /-wu/, this use occurs only after nominalized verb complexes, as in (5.90a) and (5.90b), both from the story “Uncle Snake”.
Other complex structures
245
(5.90) a. “÷~u tsi-lå-hån qå e: 2sg daugher-DEF:one-kind 1sg one:CL de-m˙-l-s-te:-wu, qå-wu ÷~u jåp˙-le: DIR-NEG -give-NOM-DEF:CL-if 1sg- AGT 2sg hand-DEF:CL da-g-Âå-wå” (T4:3-4) DIR-broken- CAUS:1sg-EMPH Æ(Uncle Snake said,) “If you donflt give one of your daughters to me, I will chop off your hand”fl b. “t˙-m˙-≈så-n-Ùå, qå phusuluq-te: DIR-NEG -understand-2sg-if 1sg clothing-DEF:CL ¿e-ge-n-bå, . . . (T4:51) DIR-hold-2sg-DTV Æ(The old mother-in-law said,) “If you didnflt understand, hold on to my clothes, . . .”fl To express a concessive (Æalthough X, Yfl), the phrase /hå-≥‘u‘˙-lu/ (DIR-COP -Æcomefl) is added to the end of the first clause: (5.91) a. qå quaha ¿å-≈u˙lå-hå≥‘u‘˙lu, ≈o:ts ¿e-me-qhua. 1sg face DIR-wash-although beard DIR-NEG -shave:1sg ÆAlthough I washed my face, I didnflt shave.fl b. få-tsa-q˙i bå-hå≥‘u‘˙lu, ˙-l˙ t˚å-nå-wa. clothes-this:one-CL old-although DIR-look CON-good-very ÆAlthough this piece of clothing is old, it still looks very good.fl In terms of cross-clause coreference, there do not seem to be either accusative or ergative syntactic restrictions on control of the zero anaphor of the second clause. Compare the following two examples:
¿å-q˙-≤ike mi-the:-(wu) (5.92) a. khu˙-le: dog-DEF:CL DIR-go-after person-that:CL-AGT u-t˚u-w‘u. DIR-see-3U ÆWhen the dog went down, that person saw (it).fl
246
The clause and complex structures
b. mi-the: ¿å-q˙-≤ike khu˙-le: u-t˚u. person-that:CL DIR-go-after dog-DEF:CL DIR-see ÆWhen that person went down, (s/he) saw the dog.fl In the first example, the noun phrase representing the single direct argument of the first clause is coreferential with the zero pronoun representing the undergoer of the second clause. This would not be possible in a language with an accusative syntactic pivot for this construction unless the second verb was passivized. In the second example, the noun phrase representing the single direct argument of the first clause is coreferential with the zero pronoun representing the actor of the second clause. This would not be possible in a language with an ergative syntactic pivot for this construction unless the second verb was anti-passivized. (See LaPolla 1993, Van Valin & LaPolla 1997, Ch. 6 for the concepts used here and for evidence of a parallel situation in Chinese.)
5.6. The structure of narratives In the stories recorded there is a clear pattern found where certain particles, such as /-t˚u/ and /-stun/ regularly appear at the end of a segment of text, and then a marker of summary, result, or change of scene, such as /tu/ starts a new segment, as in the following, from the story “An Orphan”, where two verticle bars mark the new segment: (5.93) “ha
qu me-t˚hi-wå, maha-≤i-≥u˙≤i qå afraid NEG -want-DTV night-ADV-TOP 1sg ÷~u gul zu-lu-å:-wå,” 2sg companion DIR-come-1sg:PRS-EMPH j˙-kui-t˚u. say-INF: HS-PART | | tu ¿ålå ¿e-zei, ¿e-zei-≤i då-q˙-k˙i, RESULT INT DIR-cry DIR-cry- ADV DIR-go-INF: HS EXCL
The structure of narratives
247
då-q˙-k˙i-tu. (T3:16-19) DIR-go-INF: HS-LNK ‘“Ha, don’t be afraid, at night I will come be your companion”, (he) said. | | Then/later/after that (the boy) went on his way, crying, crying.’ The particle /tu/ or /¿å-tu/ is very frequent in the texts other than in this construction as well, marking a sort of transition. It is glossed as RESULT because the action described in the clause that follows it is often the result of the action or situation described in the clause that precedes it (and it was translated as ‘result’ in Chinese), but it can mark other types of transition as well. For example, in the following text segment, from “The Orphan”, it is marking a transition similar to a change of paragraph:
¿å-ts˙i (5.94) kåp˙t® tou-≥u˙≤i orphan DEF:one:CL-TOP INT-this.manner mo-qu-ke: Âi-k˙i. NEG -afraid-INDEF:CL exist- NAR | | tu the-maha-≥u˙≤i t˚iu ®˙®e:fiwu ≤iånt˚i RESULT that-night-TOP †(then) exist:REDUP:all together gånphai-tu-p’u-k˙i-stu. (T3:99-102) arrange-DIR -do-NAR-PART ‘In this way the orphan was not afraid (lit.: ‘There was the orphan who was not afraid’). That night they all got together and arranged what to do.’ Another pattern, the “tail-head” construction commonly found in Tibeto-Burman languages, is for a verb to end a segment, either with the evidential marking or with the evidential marking followed by one of the segment-final particles mentioned above, and then be repeated at the beginning of the next segment, followed by the linker /-tu/ (not the same function as the independent segment-initial particle /tu/), as in (5.94), from the story “Uncle Snake”. (5.95) “. . . qå 1sg
the: s˙tsim hå-≥‘u‘˙-lå,” 3sg wife DIR-COP -INDTV:1sg
248
The clause and complex structures
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-INF: HS-PART j˙-k˙i-tu , | | ¿å-k˙ ¿ålå qhål INT -thus say-INF: HS-LNK INT momo(a.kind.of.bread) a-g‘u‘˙ u-lu-kui, . . . (T4:8-11) DIR-give.as.gift- INF:HS one-basketful ‘“I will become his wife”, she said. | | Having said that, she was given a basketful of momo, and . . .’ We also find markers of discourse deixis in the Texts, using the demonstrative pronouns, as in the following two segments: (5.96) t®i pe-tu ˚t˚˙-p le-≤i male/son become-LNK seven-year exist-ADV the-wu hat®i-p l˙©z å:-su-wå. book DIR: INDTV-study-DTV that-ABL eleven-year le-≤i qå ta:-mefiÂ-wå. (T6:241-243) 1sg DIR: INDTV-seek-DVT exist-ADV ‘If it is a son, send him to school when he is seven years old. After that, when he is eleven, have him come look for me.’ (5.97) t˙-≈så må-©Â˙-k˙i-®˙, ¿ålå t˚e-zei-k˙i-st~u. DIR-understand NEG -able-NAR-LNK there CON-cry-NAR-PART ¿å-tu, tsu-≥u˙≤i, pie-le: hå-l˙-j˙-kui-st~u. (T4:36-8) INT-RESULT here- TOP pig-DEF:CL DIR-come-REP -NAR-PART ‘(She) was not able to understand, and so continued to cry. Therefore, here (= at this point in the story) the pig came out.’ In ( 5 .96) the distal demonstrative pronoun is used without a classifier, the only time this can be done, and is followed by the ablative marker, marking a temporal relation between two parts of the story, where the demonstrative is referring to the previous action, parallel to English after that. In (5.97) the locative proximal deictic pronoun is used to mark a point in the story, much like the use of English here, as in Here I would like to mention ... Much more work needs to be done on discourse structure and other aspects of the grammar; these few comments are only a first step.
Texts
Text 1 The Creation of the World z˙p-le: ≤i-ke: pe-ji earth-DEF:CL WH-INDEF:CL become-CSM qefilot®u-Ùå, mutu-lå mujuq’u Âgu˙-zi we-i, in.the.past-LOC heaven-LOC sun nine-CL exist-HS
1
2
z˙p-le: ˙-t˚h˙qhå-Â-˙i. m˙ ≤å earth-DEF:CL DIR-burn-CAUS-HS older.brother COM
3
j˙-t®-≥u˙≤i, two-CL-TOP
4
¿o-mu-xt˚u-wei. DIR-NEG -burn-HS
5
≥u˙-≈uå-≤i, m˙ ≤å COP-because- ADV older.brother COM
6
i-dÂi-t˚i, ≤ut˚uku dzuåÙl e-x®e ¿ei-bi-≤i, DIR-discuss-3pl each stone.mill one-CL DIR-carry.on.back-ADV
7
Ùu-q-tå-wu mountain-head-LOC-ABL
8
e-t®etup-tu, DIR-bump.into-LNK
9
j˙-x®e two-CL
10
zuåm˙-πu cypress-tree
e-t®etup-wei, DIR-bump.into-HS
o-Âgu-tå one-CL-LOC
©lu younger.sister
i-pi-≈uå-≤i, DIR-hide-because-ADV
steke-tå mi pefiÂ˙-s later-LOC people raise(child)-NOM
¿o-©lu, DIR-roll
≤izzi 3dl
©lu younger.sister
l˙-zi DEF-CL
dzuåÙl j˙-x®e stone.mill two-CL
oqpi p˙-s, one:family do-NOM
¿o-©lu-s-tå, DIR-roll-NOM-LOC
qhuåt as.it.happens
¿å-ts˙i-≤ike, INT -this.manner-after oqpi one:family
dzuåÙl stone.mill
m˙ older.brother
11
©lu l˙-zi younger.sister DEF-CL
12
˙-j˙-p pe-≤i, ©lu-le: mi one-two-year become-ADV younger.sister-DEF:CL people
≤å COM
¿o-p˙-i. DIR-do-HS qes form
252
Texts
13
må-≥‘u‘˙ ke: i-˚i. NEG -COP INDEF:CL DIR-release
14
duåÙl-le:-wu s˙-xte-≤i t˚et˚i-lå da-Ù’u. scythe-DEF:CL-INST DIR-chop- LNK everywhere-LOC DIR-throw(away)
15
steke lå-s-Ùå, t˚et˚i-lå-wu muf’u t˙-lå-ji, later DEF:one-day-LOC everywhere-LOC-ABL smoke DIR-come-CSM
16
¿å-ts˙i-≤ike, INT -this.manner-after
mi people
m˙-le: t˙-khueq, older.brother-DEF:CL DIR-angry
lu-ji. come-CSM
Narrator: Huang Chenglong Born 1968 Recorded 1994
The Creation of the World Long, long ago, there were nine suns in the heaven which burned the earth. Because a brother and younger sister hid in a great cypress (that honored the gods), they were not burned to death. Later, in order to propagate descendants, the brother and sister talked it over and decided that each would carry a stone mill on his or her back and roll it down from the mountain peak. If the two stone mills joined together, the two could get married. As it happened, when the two stone mills rolled down (to the river bank) they joined together, and so the brother and sister married. After a few years, the younger sister gave birth to a monster not of human form. The older brother was so angry he used a curved knife/scythe to chop it into pieces and scattered them wildly everywhere. The next day when they got up, they saw the smoke of cooking fires everywhere. And henceforth there was humankind.
Text 2 The Legend of the Origin of All Things Mutsit®u ≤å Tugant®u mutsit®u ≤å tugant®u Mutsit®u COM Tugant®u
1
z˙p˙q-tå ¿o-lu-å:-ji. earth-LOC DIR-come-PRS-CSM
2
åp˙ mupithå-≥u˙≤i, th˙zzi-tå k˙-ji, ÆÆ÷izzi z˙p˙q-tå father(god) Mupitha-TOP 3dl-LOC thus-say 2dl earth-LOC
3
¿a-Ùa-i-ta DIR-go-2pl-if
4
themle 3pl
5
Ùopu mountain
6
tsh˙må we-t˚ thorn exist-GEN
7
Ùopu ti-wi-s-tå mountain DIR-high- NOM-LOC
8
e-khe-≈an de-t˚i-le, thizzi one-hundred-kind DIR-CON-give 3dl
9
å-stu-≈ån phux®u-≥u˙≤i themle-steke one-thousand-kind wild.creatures-TOP 3pl-behind
¿å-Ù˙-i.flfl DIR-go-2pl
lu-zu China.fir-seed
xs˙-quåt three-bushel
¿e-gi-s-tå DIR-low(short)-NOM -LOC
å-dzå-Â-≤i. DIR-follow- CAUS-ADV
11
thizzi-tå 3dl-LOC
åp˙-xs˙-≥u˙≤i father-god-TOP
de-l-wei, DIR-give-HS
¿å-Ù˙-≤i DIR-go-ADV
i-phi-k˙i, DIR-plant-NAR
nai other
12
mutu-lå heaven-LOC
i-phi-k˙i, DIR-plant-NAR
nai other
poqu® livestock
t˙-wåÙ, DIR-drive.ahead
qala-Ùa, separate/divide/leave-LOC
k˙-ji-wei, thus-say-HS
mutsit®u ≤å Mutsit®u COM
Ùza-Ùa, time-LOC
s˙π-zu xs˙-quåt de-t˚i-le-wei, tree-seed three-bushel DIR-CON-give-HS
10
13
thizzi k˙ 3dl go
ÆÆ÷ile gue:fi-tå-≥u˙≤i 2pl road-LOC-TOP
hå-l-≤i DIR-look- ADV
t˚e-tse-®u.flfl NEG.IMP-look-DTV tugant®u-≥u˙≤i Tugant®u-TOP
˚t˚i-k’u heart/mind-inside
254
Texts
14
t˙-nå-wei, DIR-good-HS
gue:fi-tå k˙ Ùza-Ùå z˙m ¿å-tshu˙-≤i, road-LOC go time-LOC song DIR-sing-ADV
15
z˙m song
16
thizzi-≥u˙≤i qe:fi-tå 3dl-TOP before-LOC
17
p˙-Â do-CAUS
18
t˙-l˙-≤i DIR-look- LNK
19
å-stu-≈ån phux®u one-thousand-kind wild.animals
20
t˚et˚i-lå everywhere-LOC
21
¿å-ts˙i-≤i, INT -this.manner-ADV
22
phux®u wild.animals
23
e-t®equå de-tshe-≤i DIR-remember DIR-wrong-ADV
24
ti-wi-s-tå de-se-ku, DIR- high-NOM-LOC DIR-sow- NAR
25
s˙π-zu-lå-hå-≥u˙≤i tree-seed-DEF:one-pl-TOP
26
de-se-ku, DIR-sow- NAR
27
¿e-gi-s-tå-≥u˙≤i DIR-short-NOM -LOC-TOP
tu-≈su-≤i DIR-jump/dance-LNK
lu-ji. come-CSM
åp˙ god
mupithå Mupitha
mo-Ùu-≈uå-≤i, NEG -willing-because-ADV tse-i, see-HS
thizzi 3dl
oqpi one:family
hå-l-≤i DIR-look- ADV
th˙påktå, as.a.result
mutu-lå heaven-LOC
≤ile-steke 3plREFL-behind
doqu-Â-˙k frighten-CAUS-INF
du-fu-wei, DIR-flee-HS pit˚ now
phu-Ùå forest-LOC
Âi-m exist-NOM
pe-wei. themle z˙p˙q-tå i-p˙-l-≤ike, become-HS 3pl earth-LOC DIR-arrive-come-after lu-zu-lå-hå Ùopu China.fir-seed-DEF:one-pl mountain tsh˙må we-t˚ thorn exist-GEN
Ùopu mountain
¿å-ts˙i INT -this.manner tsh˙må thorn
¿e-gi-s-tå DIR-short-NOM -LOC ≥u˙-≈uå-≤i, COP-because- ADV t˙-®-jy DIR-grow-ASP
≥u˙. COP
Text 2: The Legend of the Origin of All Things 28
thizzi 3dl
zå-Ù˙ earth-LOC
29
te-x-≤i104 DIR-cut-ADV
30
z˙ t˙-Âge, Âm˙ t˚he-t˚ Âgu˙ land DIR-open humankind want-GEN grain
t˚iÙuå house
b˙l-dÂ˙-wa-≈uå-≤i, do-able-very-because- ADV t˙-¬i, DIR-build
tsh˙må thorn
255
lu China.fir
¿a-xte-≤i DIR-cut.down- ADV i-πi-ji. DIR-plant-CSM
Narrator: Huang Chenglong Born 1968 Recorded 1994
The Legend of the Origin of All Things Mutsit®u and Tugant®u (The goddess) Mutsit®u and (the mortal man) Tugant®u wanted to come down to the earth. The god Mupitha said to them, ÆÆIf you want to go down to the earth, then go.flfl Just before Mutsit®u and Tugant®u left, Mupitha gave them three bushels of China fir seeds and instructed them to plant them on low mountains. He also gave them three bushels of seeds for thorned bushes, and instructed them to plant them on high mountains. He also gave them a hundred kinds of livestock, which they drove before them, and a thousand kinds of birds and beasts, which followed behind them. When they parted, Mupitha said to them, ÆÆWhen you are on the road, do not look back at heaven.flfl Mutsit®u and Tugant®u were extremely happy. The whole way they sang and danced as they walked. Because the god Mupitha had opposed them becoming one family before, they deliberately looked back at heaven, and the result was that they frightened the thousand kinds of birds and beasts following them, causing them to flee everywhere. In this way these animals became the wild animals now dwelling in the forests. After Mutsit®u and Tugant®u arrived on the earth, they misremembered (what Mupitha had told them to do) and sowed the China fir seeds on high mountains and the thorny bushes on low mountains. As a result, the low areas grew full of brambles and thorns. (However,) because they were very able, they cut down the China firs and built houses, and they hacked through the brambles and thorns, opening up wilderness land, and planted the grain needed by humankind.
Text 3 An Orphan kåp˙t® kou orphan INDEF:one:CL qe:fi-qe:fi-tu ¿ålå kåp˙t® kou ≥u˙-kei-t˚u, before-before-LNK INT orphan INDEF:one:CL COP-NAR -PART
1
2
3
4
5
6
ep l˙ me-Âi father also NEG -exist ≥u˙-k˙i-t˚u, COP-NAR -PART ¿å-tsu INT -here
kåp˙t® orphan
kåp˙t® lou orphan DEF:one:CL tou
ew l˙ me-Âi mother also NEG -exist
tu
¿ålå
RESULT
INT
7
qu-k˙p˙-k˙i-®, ¿e-afraid-HABIT-NAR -LNK
8
¿e-zei-≤i DIR-cry- ADV
9
dz˙ kånt˚hi-kui-t˚u, eat think/want-NAR -PART
DEF:one:CL
g˙s-tå night-LOC
DEF:one:CL
kånt˚i:-tu, ¿ålå, think/want-LNK INT
då-qå-tu
kåp˙t® orphan
¿å-xt®˙-på:-j˙-tu DIR-get.dark-become:PRS-REP-LNK t˚˙u-lå home-LOC
k˙ Ùza-Ùå, go when-LOC
k˙-k˙p˙-k˙i-t˚u, tu go-HABIT -NAR-PART RESULT gue:fi-tå road-LOC
DIR-go-LNK
INDEF:CL
®kup-le:-≥u˙≤i orangutan-DEF:CL-TOP
tou dz˙ eat
ke:
¿ålå INT
zei cry då-qå DIR-go
¿å-qå, DIR-go
10
≈a-le:-≤å e-t®epe-k˙i-t˚u. ≈a-le:-wu needle-DEF:CL-COM DIR-encounter- NAR-PART needle-DEF:CL-AGT
11
t˙-kefil-kui-t˚u, DIR-ask-NAR-PART
12
j˙-tu. say-LNK
13
ÆÆhi! EXCL
¿å INT
≤i:-pe-wå, 105 EXCL WH -become-Q
ÆÆha,
kåp˙t® tou orphan DEF:one:CL
®kup-te:-wu orangutan-DEF:CL-AGT
≤i:-pe-wå,flfl WH -become-Q
hå-s˙-k˙i-®˙, DIR-make.sound-NAR-LNK maha night
qå dz˙ lå:,flfl 1sg eat come:PRS
Text 3: An Orphan 14
j˙-®˙, say-LNK
ÆÆqå 1sg
t˚˙u-lå home-LOC
15
je live/stay
qu-å-wå,flfl afraid-1sg-EMPH
o-z’u-≤i DIR-sit- ADV
257
qå ou-stu 1sg one:CL-alone
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART
tu RESULT
16
≈a-le:-≥u˙≤i, ÆÆha qu me-t˚hi-wå, needle-DEF:CL-TOP EXCL afraid NEG -want-DTV
maha-≤i-≥u˙≤i night-ADV-TOP
17
qå 1sg
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART
÷~u-gul 2sg-companion tu
18
zu-lu-å:-wå,flfl DIR-come-1sg:PRS-EMPH
¿ålå ¿e-zei, DIR-cry
¿e-zei-≤i DIR-cry- ADV
RESULT INT 19
då-q˙-k˙i-tu, DIR-go-NAR-LNK
¿ålå
e-t®epe-k˙i-t˚u, DIR-encounter- NAR-PART
21
ÆÆa EXCL
22
÷~u 2sg
qusåp-te:-≤å scissors-DEF:CL-COM
INT
20
qusåp-te:-wu scissors-DEF:CL-AGT
≤i©i-pe-wå? what-become-Q
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART
¿å
≤i-≈uå-≤i k˙-zei-n-å?flfl WH -because-ADV thus-cry-2sg-Q ÆÆqå 1sg
INT
23
me-Âa-wå, ®kup-te: NEG -exist:1sg-EMPH orangutan-DEF:CL
24
j˙-k˙p˙-®˙, ÆÆmaha-≤i say-HABIT -LNK night-ADV
25
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART
26
må-≥‘u‘˙-ta NEG -COP-if
27
gul companion
28
t˚˙u-lå home-LOC qå 1sg
ou-t˚i one:CL-EXC
dzå:,flfl eat:PRS
¿o-lu-k˙p˙-wå,flfl DIR-come-HABIT -EMPH
ÆÆa:
ke:-j˙
EXCL
Â˙ matter
då-q˙-k˙i, DIR-go-NAR
INDEF:CL-EXC
me-w, NEG -exist
maha qå night 1sg
÷~u 2sg
zu-lu-å:-wå,flfl j˙-kui-t˚u, ÆÆ÷~u-gul DIR-come-1sg:PRS-EMPH say-NAR-PART 2sg-friend
zu-lu-å:-wå,flfl DIR-come-1sg:PRS-EMPH
j˙-kui-tu. say-NAR-LNK
258
Texts
¿å-the-wu ≈ai®˙ ¿e-zei INT -that-ABL †(still.is) DIR-cry
29
30
då-q˙-j˙ DIR-go-REP
31
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
32
e-t®epe-k˙-j˙-kei-t˚u, DIR-encounter-go- REP-NAR-PART
33
tou-≤å DEF:one:CL-COM
34
ÆÆa: EXCL
¿e-zei DIR-cry
¿e-zei-≤i DIR-cry- ADV
xs˙ new(again)
÷~u 2sg
¿e-zei-≤i DIR-cry- ADV
˚t˚i˚t˚iåq magpie
då-q˙-j˙-k˙i-tu, DIR-go-REP -NAR-LNK tou-≤å DEF:one:CL-COM ˚t˚i˚t˚åq magpie
e-t®epe-k˙i-tu, DIR-encounter- NAR-LNK ≤i-≈uå-≤i WH -because-ADV
k˙-zei-n-å?flfl thus-cry-2sg-Q
35
ÆÆqå-≥u˙≤i 1sg-TOP
t˚˙u-lå home-LOC
36
tåt˙ father
me-Âi, NEG -exist
37
ep-ew me-Âi father-mother NEG -exist
38
t˚˙u-lå ¿å-xt®˙p-≤ike, home-LOC DIR-get.dark-after
39
j˙-k˙p˙-®˙, say-HABIT-LNK
ÆÆqå 1sg
t˚˙u-lå home-LOC
40
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART
ÆÆhi!
qu me-t˚hi-wå, afraid NEG -want-EMPH
41
42
43
qå 1sg
l˙ also
me-Âa-wå, NEG -exist:1sg-EMPH
må mother
l˙ also
¿å-kou INT -INDEF:one:CL
EXCL
÷~u-gul 2sg-companion
ou-j˙ one:CL-EXC
me-Âi, NEG -exist
≥uå-®˙, COP:1sg-LNK
®kup-le:-wu qå dzå:,flfl orangutan-DEF:CL-AGT 1sg eat:PRS je qu-å-wå,flfl live/stay afraid-1sg-EMPH
zu-lu-å:-wå,flfl DIR-come-1sg:PRS-EMPH
xs˙ då-q˙ new(again) DIR-go
j˙-kui. say-NAR
då-q˙-j˙-k˙i, DIR-go-REP -NAR
då-q˙-j˙-k˙i-tu,
¿ålå
DIR-go-REP -NAR-LNK
INT
maha-≤i night-ADV j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART
då-qå DIR-go
noÙu-le:-≤å crow-DEF:CL-COM
Text 3: An Orphan 44
e-t®epe-k˙i-t˚u, DIR-encounter- NAR-PART
45
e-t®epe-k˙i-tu, DIR-encounter- NAR-LNK
46
k˙-zei-n-å?flfl thus-cry-2sg-Q
ep l˙ me-Âi father also NEG -exist
48
kåp˙t® orphan
49
noÙu-le:-≤å crow-DEF:CL-COM ÆÆha! EXCL
j˙-kui. say-NAR
47
÷~u 2sg
tu RESULT
≤i-≈uå-≤i WH -because-ADV
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
ÆÆqå 1sg
¿ålå INT
˙w l˙ me-Âi, mother also NEG -exist
kou-j˙ DEF:one:CL-EXC
¿ålå
259
må-≥uå-®˙, NEG -COP:1sg-LNK
tu RESULT
g˙s-tå-≥u˙≤i night-LOC-TOP
INT 50
je qu-å-wå, ®kup-le:-≥u˙≤i qå dzå:-wå,flfl live/stay afraid-1sg-EMPH orangutan-DEF:CL-TOP 1sg eat:PRS-EMPH
51
j˙-kui-t˚u. ÆÆha, say-NAR-PART EXCL maha night
ta if
52
qå-≥u˙≤i 1sg-TOP
53
i-j˙-lå-wå,flfl DIR-live-INDTV:1sg-EMPH
54
xs˙ new(again)
ke:
≥u˙-ta, Â˙ me-w, matter NEG -exist
INDEF:CL COP-if
zu-l’u-≤i, DIR-come-ADV
÷~u-gul 2sg-companion
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART då-qå DIR-go
då-q˙-j˙-k˙i, DIR-go-REP -NAR
INT
55
då-q˙-k˙i-tu, DIR-go-NAR-LNK
56
≈sutsqhå-le:-≤å e-t®epe-k˙i-tu, ≈sutsqhå-le:-wu stomach-DEF:CL -COM DIR-encounter- NAR-LNK stomach-DEF:CL -AGT
57
t˙-kefil-kui, DIR-ask-NAR
58
≈sutsqhå-le:-≤å stomach-DEF:CL -COM
¿å
ÆÆha! EXCL
÷~u 2sg
e-t®epe-k˙i, DIR-encounter- NAR
≤i-≈uå-≤i WH -because-ADV
j˙-kui, ÆÆ≤i-≈uå-≤i k˙-zei-n-å?flfl say-NAR WH-because-ADV thus-cry-2sg-Q
k˙-zei-n-å?flfl thus-cry-2sg-Q
j˙-kui-tu. say-NAR-LNK
260 59
Texts
kåp˙t® orphan
tou
he-Âgue-k˙i, ÆÆqå-≥u˙≤i DIR-answer-NAR 1sg-TOP
DEF:one:CL
60
ep l˙ me-Â˙-i father also NEG -exist-CSM
61
me-Â˙-i, NEG -exist-CSM
62
®kup-le: qå orangutan-DEF:CL 1sg
dz˙-lå:,flfl eat-come:PRS
63
qu-å-wå,flfl afraid-1sg-EMPH
j˙-kui. say-NAR
ÆÆha!
64
må-≥‘u‘˙-ta, NEG -COP-if
Â˙ matter
me-w-wå, NEG -exist-EMPH
65
qå-≥u˙≤i 1sg-TOP
66
maha-≥u˙≤i qå ÷~u-gul zu-lu-å:-wå,flfl j˙-kui. night-TOP 1sg 2sg-companion DIR-come-1sg:PRS-EMPH say-NAR
g˙s-≤i night-ADV
÷~u-gul 2sg-companion
l˙ also
¿å-xt®˙p-≤iåufu DIR-get.dark-LNK(as.soon.as) j˙-k˙p˙-®˙, say-HABIT-LNK
då-q˙-j˙-k˙i, DIR-go-REP -NAR
då-qå DIR-go
ke:-ji
hå-≥‘u‘˙-lå-wå, DIR-COP -INDTV:1sg-EMPH
då-qå-tu DIR-go-LNK
¿e-zei-≤i DIR-cry- ADV
¿ålå INT
69
th˙l-le:-≤å e-t®epe-k˙i-stu, stone.pestle-DEF:CL-COM DIR-encounter- NAR-PART
70
th˙l-le:-≤å stone.pestle-DEF:CL-COM
71
ÆÆha! EXCL
72
73
÷~u 2sg
t˙-kefil-kui. DIR-ask-NAR ˙w mother
l˙ also
e-t®epe-k˙i-tu, DIR-encounter- NAR-LNK
≤i-≈uå-≤i WH -because-ADV ÆÆ¿a, EXCL
ÆÆqå 1sg
EXCL INDEF:CL-EXC
¿å-tså-tåu ≥u˙-tu, ¿ålå ¿e-zei INT -this:one-time COP-LNK INT DIR-cry
67
68
˙w mother
k˙-zei-n-å?flfl thus-cry-2sg-Q
j˙-kui, say-NAR
qå-≥u˙≤i ep l˙ me-Â˙-i 1sg-TOP father also NEG -exist-CSM
me-Â˙-i, NEG -exist-CSM
¿å-xt®˙på: DIR-get.dark: PRS
Text 3: An Orphan 74
ququ, afraid
p˙s l˙ today also
75
maha night
qå 1sg
76
¿å-tu-≥u˙≤i, ÆÆke:-ji må-≥‘u‘˙-ta, Â˙ me-w, INT -RESULT-TOP INDEF:CL-EXC NEG -COP-if matter NEG -exist
77
qå-≥u˙≤i ÷~u-gul 1sg-TOP 2sg-companion
78
÷~u-gul 2sg-companion ¿å
79
INT
¿å-xt®˙p-ja, DIR-get.dark-REP
dz˙-lå:,flfl eat-come:PRS
®kup-le:-≥u˙≤i orangutan-DEF:CL-TOP
j˙-k˙p˙-wå, say-HABIT-EMPH
zu-lu-å:, DIR-come-1sg:PRS
zu-l’u-lå-wå,flfl DIR-come-INDTV:1sg-EMPH
tså-tåu-tu-≥u˙≤i, kåp˙t® this:one-time-LNK-TOP orphan
j˙-kui. say-NAR
maha-≤i night-ADV
qå 1sg
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART
tou-≥u˙≤i DEF:one:CL-TOP
80
¿å-tså-≈safiwu INT -this:one-few:all
81
gul companion
82
maha pe-k-kui, tså-≈ui-tu ¿å-xt®˙p-ji maha night become-go-NAR this:one-time-LNK DIR-get.dark-CSM night
83
i-p˙-l-kui, DIR-arrive-come-NAR
84
˚t˚˙˚t˚åq magpie
tou
l˙ also
i-p˙-l-kui, DIR-arrive-come-NAR
85
gul companion
261
¿e-se-kei-stu. DIR-make-NAR-PART
¿e-se-k˙i-tu, DIR-make(friends)- NAR-LNK
DEF:one:CL
qusåp l˙ i-p˙-l-kui, scissors also DIR-arrive-come-NAR l˙ i-p˙-l-kui, also DIR-arrive-come-NAR ¿å INT
noÙu crow
≈sutsqhå, stomach
86
th˙l, jånkhui ®˙®˙:fiwu i-p˙-l-kui-t˚u. stone.pestle stone.mortar exist:REDUP:all DIR-arrive-come-NAR-PART
87
tså-≈ui-tu, this:one-time-LNK
88
kåp˙t® orphan
Âm˙ meeting
tou-≥u˙≤i DEF:one:CL-TOP
å-lå one-CL
¿o-tsu-k˙i, DIR-hold- NAR
˚t˚i:-k’u k˙n heart-inside very
¿å-n˙-kui, DIR-good-NAR
262 89
Texts
ÆÆ¿a, EXCL
p˙maha-≥u˙≤i qå gul lå-hå tonight-TOP 1sg companion DEF:one-pl
90
i-p˙-l-jy, DIR-arrive-come-ASP
91
mo-qu-å-wå, NEG -afraid-1sg-EMPH
92
mo-qu-ja-wå NEG -afraid-CSM:1sg-EMPH
93
i-p˙-l-ku-tu, DIR-arrive-come-NAR-LNK
94
do-t˚u-qu-n-på, DIR-NEG.IMP-be.afraid-2sg-DTV
95
gul-på-®, ®kup-le: i-me-p˙-l-≤i companion-do-LNK orangutan-DEF:CL DIR-NEG -arrive-come-ADV
96
må-≥‘u‘˙-t˚i. NEG -COP-EXC
97
t˚ile p˙maha 2pl tonight
98
tu RESULT
99
100
101
p˙maha-≥u˙≤i tonight-TOP ¿å-k˙ INT -thus
tse: this:CL
Âi-k˙i.flfl exist-NAR
thå-≈så that:one-few
ÆÆmaha t˚o-qu-n-på, night NEG.IMP-be.afraid-2sg-DTV t˚ile 1pl
tså-≈s˙fiwu this:one-few:all
q˙ta:-wa,flfl beat.to.death:PRS-EMPH
skup-le: l˙ orangutan-DEF:CL also kåp˙t® orphan
mo-qu-ke: NEG -afraid-INDEF:CL RESULT
ike thus
i-p˙-l-tu, DIR-arrive-come-LNK
¿å-l˙-k˙i, DIR-come-NAR
tu
®kup-te: orangutan-DEF:CL
gånphai-tu-p’u-k˙i-stu, arrange-DIR -do-NAR-PART
103
je-s ≥u˙, live/stay-NOM COP
mo-qu-ke: NEG -afraid-INDEF:CL
tou-≥u˙≤i DEF:one:CL-TOP
¿å-ts˙i INT -this.manner
Âi-k˙i. exist-NAR
the-maha-≥u˙≤i that-night-TOP
102
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART
t˚iu †(then)
®˙®e:fiwu ≤iånt˚i exist:REDUP:all together
≈a-le:-≥u˙≤i needle-DEF:CL-TOP t˚å-l˙ where-LOC
t˚å-l˙ where-LOC t˚å-l˙ where-LOC
Text 3: An Orphan 104
105
n˙-s sleep-NOM ≤i©i what
≥u˙,
t˚å-l˙ where-LOC
COP
≥u˙-s COP-NOM
≥u˙,
t˚å-l˙ where-LOC
¿å-ts˙i INT -this:manner
COP
106
gånphai-tu-p’u-k˙i-t˚u. arrange-DIR -do-NAR-PART
≈a-le:-≥u˙≤i ¿ålå needle-DEF:CL-TOP INT
107
dy-le:-Ùå door-DEF:CL-LOC
˙-t®˙-≤i DIR-stab- ADV
108
dy-le:-Ùå door-DEF:CL-LOC
109
¿ålå thå there
¿å-n˙-k˙i, DIR-sleep-NAR
111
m˙-låw-Âå≈uå fire-DEF:one:pile-inside
112
noÙu-le:-≥u˙≤i ¿ålå crow-DEF:CL-TOP INT
113
¿å INT
®u˙t®huå water.jar
ts˙i-≥u˙≤i, this.manner-TOP
INT
Âå≈uå inside
¿å-n˙-kui, DIR-sleep-NAR
≈sutsqhå-le:-≥u˙≤i stomach-DEF:CL -TOP
115
jankhui-le:-≥u˙≤i stone.mortar-DEF:CL-TOP
116
¿å-n˙-kui-t˚u, DIR-sleep-NAR-PART
¿å
th˙l-le:-≥u˙≤i stone.pestle-DEF:CL-TOP
INT
¿å-xt®˙p
EXCL DIR-get.dark
¿å-n˙-kui-t˚u, DIR-sleep-NAR-PART
buzd-le:-ku-tå plank.stairs-DEF:CL-base-LOC
buzd-le:-q˙påt®å: plank.stairs-DEF:CL-head:LOC hi,
¿ålå
¿å-n˙-kui-t˚u, DIR-sleep-NAR-PART
buzd-te:-q˙påt®å: plank.stairs-DEF:CL-head:LOC
118
n˙®-te:-pienå bed-DEF:CL-beside
˚t˚i˚t˚aq-tou-≥u˙≤i magpie-DEF:one:CL-TOP
114
117
INT
qusåp-tou-≥u˙≤i scissors-DEF:one:CL-TOP
kåp˙t®-tou-pienå-lå orphan-DEF:one:CL-beside-LOC
INT 110
Âi-k˙i, exist-NAR
¿ålå
i-j˙-kui-t˚u. DIR-live/stay-NAR-PART
®kup-te: z˙-lå-j˙-kui, orangutan-DEF:CL DIR-come-REP -NAR
263
264
Texts
119
tsou t˚ymi-lou-tå this:one:CL child-DEF:one:CL-DAT
z˙-lå-kui-tu, DIR-come-NAR-LNK
120
dy-la:-Ùa door-DEF:CL-LOC
®på®på like/as
121
dy-le:-tå door-DEF:CL-LOC
122
dy-le: i-˚t˚i, ≈a-lå-hå door-DEF:CL DIR-push needle-DEF:one-pl
123
≈a-lå-hå jåp˙-le:-tå ˙-t®˙-≤iåufu needle-DEF:one-pl hand-DEF:CL-LOC DIR-stab-LNK(as.soon.as)
124
såq-phi-ke: ˙-®˙-kui-t˚u, blood-flow-INDEF:CL DIR-put- NAR-PART
qefi before dzeke (onomatopoeia)
RESULT
126
˙-qå-j˙-kui, DIR-go-REP -NAR
˙-qå-≤iåufu DIR-go-LNK (as.soon.as)
127
kåp˙t®-tou orphan-DEF:one:CL
n˙®-ta:-Ùa bed-DEF:CL-LOC
128
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
129
n˙®-ta:-Ùa-≥u˙≤i, kåp˙t®-tou bed-DEF:CL-LOC-TOP orphan-DEF:one:CL
130
qusåp-te:-wu jåp˙-le:-x®e scissors-DEF:CL-AGT hand-DEF:CL-CL tu, RESULT
Âi-kui-≤iåu, exist-NAR-PART
tu
t˚˙u-lå home-LOC
t˚å-l˙ where-LOC
˚t˚åq heart
thå there
125
131
˙-Ù˙ DIR-go
i-˚t˚i-k˙i-t˚u, DIR-push-NAR-PART
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
t˚o-lu-kui-®˙, CON-come-NAR -LNK
mo-thå-j˙-kui, grope.for-AUX-REP-NAR
n˙ mefiÂ-k˙i, kåp˙t® tou sleep seek-NAR orphan DEF:one:CL mefi seek
tu-tuå-kui, DIR-cut-NAR
≈t®åp-ke: ≥u˙-kui-≤iåu, black-INDEF:CL COP-NAR -PART
kånt˚hi think/want thå-≈ui that:one-time
qusåp-te:-wu scissors-DEF:CL-AGT
132
jåp˙-le: tu-tuå, så tuetue-ke:-t˚i då-qå-jånt˚i, hand-DEF:CL DIR-cut blood driping-INDEF:CL-ADV DIR-go-after
133
m˙-låw qh˙fiqh˙fi-k˙i, m˙-låw fire-DEF:one:pile open-NAR fire-DEF:one:pile
i-®ue-≤i DIR-set.fire-ADV
Text 3: An Orphan 134
≤i©i-lå-hå what-DEF:one-pl
135
m˙-låw da-qhefi kånt˚hi me-pe-≤iåufu, fire-DEF:one.pile DIR-open think/want NEG -correct-LNK(as.soon.as)
136
xs˙ new(again)
137
k˙-Âi, thus-exist
å-® one-time
265
˚t˚i˚t˚åq-lå-hå magpie-DEF:one-pl
da-®p-j˙-kui-stu,
t®h˙qt®håqt®h˙qt®håq-lå-hå (onomatopoeia)-DEF:one-pl
DIR-explode-REP -NAR-PART 138
då-®p-≤iåufu DIR-explode-LNK (as.soon.as)
139
då-q˙-kui,
¿å
DIR-go-NAR
INT
140
mi: eyes
141
s˙-l-≤iånt˚i, DIR-see-after
142
≈u˙lå wash
143
®u˙t®huå-la:-Ùa water.jar- DEF:CL-LOC
144
thå there
145
tshuåq peck
146
i-tshuete-kui-stu. DIR-peck-NAR-PART
147
l˙ me-le-jy, also NEG -exist-ASP
148
¿ålå INT
tse kånt˚hi-k˙i, see think/want-NAR
då-qå, DIR-go
mi: eyes
då-q˙-kui, DIR-go-NAR
tså-≈ui-tu, this:one-time-LNK
mi: eyes
då-q˙-tu, DIR-go-LNK
ts˙-lo-qu water-DEF:one-CL
kånt˚hi-k˙i-wå, think/want-NAR -EMPH
®u˙t®huå-la:-Ùa water.jar- DEF:CL-LOC ≥u˙-≤iant˚i, quaha-lo-qu COP-after face-DEF:one-CL
quaha ≈u˙lå face wash
su-t®hu, DIR-reach.out
Âi-j˙-kui-stu, exist-REP-NAR-PART tshuåq peck
mi: eyes
kånt˚hi think/want
noÙu-le-t˚i crow-DEF-CL noÙu-le-t˚i-wu crow-DEF-CL-AGT
då-s˙-Â, DIR-make.sound-CAUS ¿å-tså-≈ui-tu, INT -this:one-time-LNK
miåuÙdÂue-la:-Ùa eye-DEF:CL-LOC miåuÙdÂue eye
jap˙ e-x®e l˙ me-w’e-jy. hand one-CL also NEG -exist-ASP
såq tuetue-ke:-t˚i blood driping-INDEF:CL-ADV
du-πu-≤i DIR-run.away-ADV
266
Texts
149
hå-Ù kånt˚hi-k˙i, DIR-go think/want-NAR
du-πu-≤i DIR-run.away-ADV
150
hå-Ù DIR-go
151
≈sutsqhå-la:-Ùa stomach-DEF:CL-LOC
152
¿e-t®hue, då-¬å buzd-le:-tå diq ¿å-q˙-i-stu. DIR-step.on DIR-slip plank.stairs-DEF:CL-LOC floor DIR-go-HS-PART
153
diq ¿å-q˙-≤iåufu t®h˙-lå buzd-ku˙-tå floor DIR-go-LNK (as.soon.as) ground.floor-LOC plank.stair-foot-LOC
154
jånkhui-le:-Âå≈uå ¿å-qå, xs˙ stone.mortar-DEF:CL-inside DIR-go new(again)
155
q˙påt®å: head:LOC
156
¿e-t˚ite DIR-pound
157
®kup-te:-≥u˙≤i ≤i-q˙ti-≤i orangutan-DEF:CL-TOP DIR-beat.to.death-ADV
158
da-Ùu-kui-wå. DIR-throw-NAR-EMPH
kånt˚hi-kei-tu, think/want-NAR -LNK
®˙, exist
s˙-qå, s˙-qå-≤iåufu, DIR-go DIR-go-LNK (as.soon.as)
¿e-t®ßhue, DIR-step.on
¿å-lå, DIR-come
¿e-t˚ite, DIR-pound
buzd-q˙-tå plank.stairs-head-LOC
≈sutsqhå-la:-Ùa stomach-DEF:CL-LOC
th˙l-le: stone.pestle-DEF:CL
th˙l-le:-wu stone.pestle-DEF:CL-AGT
¿e-t˚ite-≤iåufu, ¿å-tsu DIR-pound-LNK (as.soon.as) INT -here
Narrator: Wang Lin Born 1966 Recorded 1996
An Orphan Long ago, there was an orphan; he was one who had no father and no mother. There was an orangutan who wanted to eat this orphan. The orphan was always afraid when it got dark at night, and on his way home, he was crying and crying as he walked. He walked a while and met with a needle. The needle asked him, ÆÆWhatfls the matter?flfl The
Text 3: An Orphan
267
orphan answered, ÆÆAye! The orangutan is going to come eat me at night. Iflm afraid to be at home by myself.flfl The needle said, ÆÆHah! Donflt be afraid. At night Iflll come be your companion.flfl Later, again he was crying, crying as he walked. He walked a while and met some scissors. The scissors asked him, ÆÆAh, whatfls the matter with you? Why are you crying like this?flfl The orphan said, ÆÆAt my home, therefls only me alone. The orangutan is going to come down to eat me. He comes at night.flfl The scissors said, ÆÆAh, if that is all it is, no problem, at night Iflll come be your companion.flfl After that, the orphan still was crying and crying as he walked. He walked a while and met a magpie. The magpie asked him, ÆÆWhy are you crying like this?flfl The orphan answered, ÆÆAt home, therefls only me alone. I have neither father nor mother. I am one without parents. When it gets dark, the orangutan is going to eat me. Iflm afraid to be at home alone.flfl The magpie said, ÆÆAye! You need not be afraid. At night Iflll come be your companion.flfl Again he went on, and after walking a while he met a crow, and the crow said, ÆÆHah! Why are you crying?flfl The orphan said, ÆÆI have neither father nor mother. Iflm only an orphan. At night I am afraid (to be at home alone); the orangutan is going to eat me.flfl The crow said, ÆÆHah! If thatfls the case, therefls no problem, at night Iflll come be your companion.flfl Again, the orphan went on crying as he walked. He walked a while and came across a stomach, and the stomach asked him, ÆÆHah! Why are you crying like this?flfl The orphan answered, ÆÆI have neither father nor mother. At night, as soon as it gets dark, the orangutan is going to come eat me. Iflm afraid.flfl The stomach said, ÆÆHah! If thatfls all it is, therefls no problem, let me come be your companion at night. Iflll come be your companion.flfl The orphan still was crying, crying as he walked. He walked a while and also came across a stone mortar, the stone mortar asked, ÆÆHah! Why are you crying like this?flfl The orphan said, ÆÆAh, I have neither father nor mother. Iflm afraid of when it will get dark. When it gets dark again today, the orangutan is going to come eat me.flfl The stone mortar said, ÆÆIf thatfls all it is, no problem, Iflll come be your companion. Let me come be your companion.flfl At this time the orphan had made friends with these (things) mentioned. When night came, they all came. The needle came, and the scissors came, and the magpie came, and the crow came, and the stomach, the stone mortar and a stone pestle all came. After they came, they held a meeting. The orphan was extremely happy. ÆÆTonight my companions have come. Tonight Iflm not afraid of the orangutan.flfl After these [things] had all come, they told him, ÆÆDonflt be afraid tonight. If the orangutan comes, we will beat him to death.flfl
268
Texts
The orangutan wasnflt afraid, and still came. The orphan was not afraid. That night everybody made a plan together, where the needle should stay, where (each of them) should sleep and what-not and it was all settled. The needle was above the door to stab (the orangutan) in the doorway, the scissors slept beside the orphan on the bed, the magpie slept in the fire pile, the crow slept in the water jar, the stomach slept at the head of the stairs, the stone mortar was at the foot of the stairs, and the stone pestle was at the head of the stairs. When it got dark, the orangutan came towards the orphan, the same as before. When he pushed the door with a creak, the needle was there, and as soon as the needle pricked his hand, his hand was all covered with blood, but he still wanted to go in the room. Once he was in the room and going to look for the orphan in the bed, the scissors cut off his hand. It was dark and the scissors had cut off his hand, and blood was dripping down. Then he went over to the fire pile, thinking to light it, to see what thing it was! As soon as the orangutan wanted to touch the fire pile, the magpie inside the fire pile burst out with a lot of noise and (the ashes) got into the orangutanfls eyes. The orangutan went to the water jar, wanting to get some water to wash his face. He looked around and saw the water jar and after a mouthful of water wanted to wash his face, but the crow was there and the crow came out and pecked his eyes. This time the orangutan had no eyes and no hand and was covered with blood. He wanted to escape covered with blood. As soon as he got to the head of the stairs he stepped on the stomach and slipped and rolled down the staircase and into the stone mortar at the foot of the stairs. Then the stone pestle pounded and pounded and pounded down on him, and in this way pounded the orangutan to death and then (they) threw him away.
Text 4 Uncle Snake upu b˙s uncle snake i-tse,
1
DIR-look 2
lie-tu, carry-LNK
p˙s-≥u˙≤i ÙoÙu låmp˙ lie-tu, lie, today-TOP ram's.horn flower carry-LNK bring
lie-≤i, carry-LNK
a:,
upu-b˙s-≥u˙≤i, uncle-snake-TOP
INT
3
ÆÆ÷~u tsi-lå-hån qå e: de-m˙-l-˙s-te:-wu, 2sg daugher-DEF:one-kind 1sg one:CL DIR-NEG -give-NOM-DEF:CL-LNK
4
qå-wu 1sg-AGT
5
ik˙ thus
6
tsi t˚i-≈t®å-le:-≥u˙≤i, ÆÆha, tåt˙ ke: daugher most-small-DEF:CL-TOP EXCL father INDEF:CL
7
≥u˙-k-ta, COP-INF -if
8
da-g-‘˙-q˙stå, DIR-break-CAUS -not.as.good.as
9
÷~u-jåp˙-le: 2sg-hand-DEF:CL j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART
qå 1sg
hå-≥‘u‘˙-lå,flfl ¿å-k˙ INT -thus
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
≤i: ≥u˙ what COP
DIR-COP -INDTV:1sg 10
da-g-Âå-wå,flfl DIR-broken- CAUS:1sg-EMPH j˙-kui-tu, say-NAR-LNK
l˙ ˚a:-≥‘u‘˙, ÷~u-jåp˙-le: also INDTV-COP 2sg-hand-DEF:CL qå 1sg
the:-s˙tsim 3sg-wife
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART j˙-k˙i-tu, say-NAR-LNK
¿ålå INT
qhål momo(steamed.bread)
11
a-g‘u‘˙ u-lu-kui, ÆÆ¿a, upu-b˙s-te:-steke one-basketful DIR-give.as.gift-NAR EXCL uncle-snake-DEF:CL-behind
12
då-Ù˙-n-bå,flfl DIR-go-2sg-DTV
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART
qhål momo(steamed.bread)
270
Texts
a-g‘u‘˙ one-basketful
DIR-carry.on.back-LNK
14
t˚iq˙:fi before
®ua:m-ke: very.long-INDEF:CL
15
sei-k-kui, walk-go-NAR
13
16
17
¿e-zei DIR-cry
¿ei-bi-≤i,
≤i:-≥u˙≤i 3sgREFL-TOP
¿e-zei DIR-cry
19
då-q˙-k˙i-st~u.
tu,
då-qå, DIR-go
u-t˚u må-l˙-jy-tu, DIR-see NEG -able-ASP-LNK
¿å-q˙-tu, DIR-go-LNK
¿å-thu INT -there
21
Ùuå≈å-lå courtyard-LOC
22
Âi-k˙i-st~u, exist-NAR-PART
steke behind
steke behind
tse:-steke this:CL-behind
då-qå, DIR-go
då-qå-tu, DIR-go-LNK
qhafiÙue-låw ≈an≈a: stone.pile-DEF:one:CL crevice
tsi-lou-≥u˙≤i girl-DEF:one:CL-TOP
¿e-zei DIR-cry
¿e-zei-≤i DIR-cry- ADV
¿ålå INT
t˚iquå-lå inside-LOC
¿å INT
thå there
qhafiÙue-låw-pienå-lå. stone.pile-DEF:one:CL-beside-LOC
¿å-thå-≈ui-tu, t˚iquå-lå INT -that:one-time-LNK inside- LOC
23
24
INT
upu-b˙s-te: ¿å qhafiÙue-låw-Ùå i-p˙-kuncle-snake-DEF:CL INT stone.pile-DEF:one:CL-LOC DIR-arrive-goLNK
20
¿å
¿e-zei-ke: DIR-cry- INDEF:CL
DIR-go-NAR-PART 18
upu-b˙s-te: uncle-snake-DEF:CL
Ùoi-k˙-m call-go-NOM
hå-l˙-≤i DIR-come-ADV he-˚i-kui-t˚u. DIR-send-NAR-PART
25
upu-b˙s-te: xs˙ ≥u˙-kui-≤i, mi uncle-snake-DEF:CL god COP-NAR -ADV person
26
t˚y-le:-≥u˙≤i Ùoi-k˙-m chicken-DEF:CL-TOP call-go-NOM
t˚iquå-lå-≥u˙≤i inside-LOC-TOP
he-˚i-kui-st~u. DIR-send-NAR-PART
Text 4: Uncle Snake 27
ÆÆent˚i qutaq. uncle's.wife (sound.of.chicken)
28
ent˚i uncle's.wife
29
xs˙ three
30
thou that:one:CL
t˙-≈så DIR-understand
31
¿å:
t˚e-zei-k˙i-st~u. CON-cry-NAR-PART
qutaq,flfl (sound.of.chicken)
så sound
INT
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART
tu,
32
ent˚i uncle's.wife
RESULT
j˙-tu, say-LNK
xs˙ three
så sound
khu˙-le: hå-l˙-j˙-kui-st~u. dog-DEF:CL DIR-come-REP -NAR-PART
34
hå-l˙-j˙-kui-tu, DIR-come-REP -LNK
35
ent˚i uncle's.wife
36
j˙-j˙-kui-st~u. say-REP-NAR-PART
37
¿ålå there
INT
qutaq, cluck
j˙-kui-tu, say-NAR-LNK
må-©Â˙-k˙i-®˙, NEG -able-NAR-LNK
33
xs˙ new(again)
khu˙-le: dog-DEF:CL
ÆÆ¿å≥’u ¿å≥’u woof woof
¿å≥’u ¿å≥’u woof woof t˙-≈så DIR-understand
ent˚i uncle's.wife
qutaq,flfl cluck
må-©Â˙-k˙i-®˙, NEG -able-NAR-LNK
t˚e-zei-k˙i-st~u. CON-cry-NAR-PART ¿å-tu,
38
qutaq. (sound.of.chicken)
t˚y-le: ˙-qå-j˙-kui, chicken-DEF:CL DIR-go-REP -NAR
¿ålå
271
INT-RESULT
tsu-≥u˙≤i, pie-le: hå-l˙-j˙-kui-st~u. here-TOP pig-DEF:CL DIR-come-REP -NAR-PART
39
pie-le: hå-l˙-≤i ÆÆ¿~˙fi¿~˙fi ent˚i qutaq, ¿~˙fi¿~˙fi pig-DEF:CL DIR-come-LNK oink.oink uncle's.wife cluck oink.oink
40
ent˚i qutaq, ¿~˙fi¿~˙fi ent˚i lånt˚i lu-å:-ji.flfl uncle's.wife cluck oink.oink unclefls wife flower come-PRS-CSM
41
tu
¿ålå t˙-m˙-≈så-k˙i-®˙, ˙-m˙-qå-k˙i-st~u. DIR-NEG -understand-NAR-LNK DIR-NEG -go-NAR-PART
RESULT INT
272 42
Texts
¿å-thå-≈ui-tu, ¿å, INT -that:one-time-LNK INT
t˚iquå-lå qodu-le: inside-LOC old.woman-DEF:CL
43
hå-l˙-kui-st~u. DIR-come-NAR-PART
må:-le: mama- DEF:CL
44
¿ålå, b˙s del-p˙-t˚-må:-le: hå-l˙-kui-st~u. INT snake feast106-do-GEN -mama-DEF:CL DIR-come-NAR-PART
45
må:-le: mama- DEF:CL
hå-l˙-tu, DIR-come-LNK
46
≤i:-le: zei-n-å? what-DEF:CL cry-2sg-Q
47
Ùoi-k˙-m call-go-NOM
48
¿å:,
zei cry
k˙n very(many)
˙-m˙-lå-n-®˙,
50
j˙-kui-st~u. say-NAR-PART
me-t˚he, NEG -want
qå 1sg
he-˚a-≤i, DIR-send:1sg-LNK
÷~u 2sg
qå 1sg
tu,
¿å
RESULT
INT
t˙-m˙-≈så-wå,flfl DIR-NEG -understand-EMPH
ÆÆqå-tsi 1sg-girl
INT
DIR-NEG -come-2sg-LNK 49
hå-l˙-kui-st~u. DIR-come-NAR-PART
hå-lå-wå,flfl DIR-come-EMPH
tsi-lou-≥u˙≤i, girl-DEF:one:CL-TOP j˙-kui-st~u. say-NAR-PART
ÆÆqå 1sg
¿å-tu, INT -RESULT
51
ÆÆt˙-m˙-≈så-n-Ùå, qå-phusuluq-te: ¿e-ge-n-bå, DIR-NEG -understand-2sg-if 1sg-clothing-DEF:CL DIR-hold-2sg-DTV
52
qå-phusuluq-te: 1sg-clothing-DEF:CL
53
qå-steke hå-Â˙-n-bå,flfl 1sg-behind DIR-follow-2sg-DTV
54
tså-tåu-≥u˙≤i ˙-Ù-Ùza:-Ùå-≥u˙≤i this:one-time-TOP DIR-go-time- LOC-TOP
55
de-le-kui-st~u. DIR-give-NAR-PART
t˙-ts˙qå-≤i DIR-grab- ADV
tu, RESULT
mi: eye
¿å-t®˙-n-bå, DIR-close-2sg- DTV
j˙-kui-st~u. ¿å say-NAR-PART INT ®kupu-å-tåu a.kind.of.thing-one-CL
Text 4: Uncle Snake 56
¿ålå INT
t˚iquå ˙-qå-k˙i-tu, inside DIR-go-NAR-LNK
57
≥u˙-kui-®˙, COP-NAR -LNK
58
˚i wine
59
tsi-lou-≥u˙≤i girl-DEF:one:CL-TOP
60
pe-kui-wå. become-NAR-EMPH
t˚iquå-lå inside-LOC
t®he107-k˙i-st~u. suck-NAR-PART
273
≈ai®˙ ts˙us˙-b˙l ≤i-ke: †(still.is) marry-do WH-INDEF:CL upu-b˙s-lå-hå-≥u˙≤i uncle-snake-DEF:one-pl-TOP
qåp˙-lå-hå ¿å-ts˙i-≥u˙≤i, old.man-DEF:one-pl INT-this.manner-TOP
upu-b˙s-le: zaÙue (sits˙m) uncle-snake-DEF:CL helpmate (wife)
Narrator: Wang Lin Born 1966 Recorded 1996
Uncle Snake Look, today the Snake (Uncle) is bringing ramfls horn flowers.108 He says (to the father), ÆÆIf you donflt give one of your daughters to me, I will chop off your hand.flfl After Snake (Uncle) said this, the youngest daughter said (to her father), ÆÆPapa, itfls better I do what I have to do and go become his (Snake's) wife, than for your hand to be cut off.flfl (The girlfls family) gave her a basketful of momo (a kind of bread) (and said to her), ÆÆYou go with Uncle Snake then.flfl Uncle Snake went in front of the girl. The girl carried the momo and was crying and crying as she followed behind Uncle Snake. They kept going until they came to a pile of rocks, and then Uncle Snake disappeared. He had gone into the pile through a crevice in the rocks. The girl continued to cry in the courtyard beside the pile of rocks. In fact, Uncle Snake was a god and he sent a chicken to call the girl. The chicken called, ÆÆAunt-in-lawflfl three times, but the girl didnflt understand and still cried there. Later, the chicken went in and a dog was sent out to call the girl to come inside. The dog also barked two times, but the girl still didnflt understand, and still cried there. In like manner a pig was sent to call her, and the girl still didnflt understand and so didnflt enter.
274
Texts
Finally, an old woman came out to call her (Snakefls mother came out to call her), and said to the girl, ÆÆChild, what are you crying about? Donflt cry. Iflve sent many to call you, but you havenflt come in, so I came out myself.flfl The girl said, ÆÆI didnflt understand.flfl The old motherin-law said, ÆÆIf you didnflt understand, close your eyes and hold on to my clothes, and come with me.flfl When they went in, she gave the girl something (skupu), and she went back inside. Inside it was as if a wedding was being held, and Uncle Snake and others were drinking wine. In this way, the girl became Uncle Snakefls wife.
Text 5 The Story of a Lazy Man lån-th˙-m ke: m˙fi® lazy-AUX-NOM INDEF:CL story qe:fi-qe:fi ≥u˙-tu, before-before COP-LNK
1
≥u˙-k˙i-wå, COP-NAR -EMPH
3
sawu-le:-t˚-te:-≥u˙≤i older.sister-DEF:CL-GEN -DEF:CL-TOP
4
sawu-le: older.sister-DEF:CL
5
(qe:fi before
6
ÆÆÂm˙t®iflfl emperor
7
sat®’u-te:-t˚-t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i younger.sister-DEF:CL-GEN -man-DEF:CL-TOP
8
Âi-kui, ¿å-tu k˙n lån-thå-le: ≥u˙-k˙i-wå, exist-NAR INT-RESULT very lazy-AUX-DEF:CL COP-NAR -EMPH
9
lån-th˙-le: lazy-AUX-DEF:CL
≥u˙-k˙i-tu, COP-NAR -LNK
10
må:-le:-wu Mama-DEF:CL-AGT
å-s-m˙qå-≥u˙≤i one-day-each-TOP
11
¿åthå
å-s one-day
INT
j˙-zi two-CL
j˙-zi two-CL
2
≥u˙-tu, COP-LNK
tsisat®’u sisters
tsisat®’u sisters
≥u˙-k˙i-tu, COP-NAR -LNK t˚iu®˙, †(that.is)
wut˚upu-≥u˙≤i husband-TOP ÆÆjuånÙuåiflfl emperor
Âm˙t®i. emperor
®p˙-k-t˚i-wå, pit˚i-≥u˙≤i call-INF -3pl-EMPH now-TOP
®p˙fi, qe:fi ≥u˙-tu, juånÙuåi.109) ¿å-tu call:1pl before COP-LNK emperor INT -RESULT
≤iu-≥u˙≤i sheep.wool-TOP
12
t˙-t®h˙-≤i DIR-weigh- ADV
13
påt® ball
¿å-ts˙i INT -this.manner
de-lde-≤i DIR-spin-ADV
¿ålå, INT
t®i son
ou one:CL
¿ålå INT
pånt˚in-wu half.catty-INST de-lde-≤i110 DIR-spin-ADV ≤iu sheep.wool
pånt˚in half.catty ≤iu sheep.wool
påt® ball
276
Texts
14
de-lde-≤i DIR-spin-ADV
15
¿ålå t®i-le: lån-th˙-le:-≥u˙≤i, ¿ålå INT son- DEF:CL lazy-AUX-DEF:CL-TOP INT
t®håq-tå market-LOC
16
s˙-Ù-≤i ˚i topu-wa-le: ≥u˙-k˙i, DIR-go-ADV wine like-very-DEF:CL COP-NAR
˚i wine
17
≥u˙-k˙i-tu, COP-NAR -LNK
18
s˙-t˚-≤i DIR-drink- ADV
19
20
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
≈ai®˙ ¿ål˙ †(still.is) INT
s˙-Ù-≤i DIR-go-ADV
nu-lu-k˙p˙-k˙i, DIR-come-HABIT -NAR
¿å-ts˙i ¿å-t˙ INT-RESULT
pånt˚in half.catty
topu-le: like-DEF:CL
˚i wine
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
må:-le:-t˚-≥u˙≤i ≈ai®˙ ˚i-≥u˙≤i mama- DEF:CL-BEN-TOP †(still.is) wine-TOP INT -this.manner
21
¿ålå-≥u˙≤i INT -TOP
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
lie-k˙p˙-kui-wå. carry-HABIT-NAR-EMPH
sawu-le: t˚iu a! older.sister-DEF:CL †(then) EXCL
¿ålå INT
22
sat®’u-le:-tå z˙-lå-k˙i, sat®’u-le:-tå younger.sister-DEF:CL-LOC DIR-come-NAR younger.sister-DEF:CL-LOC
23
z˙-lå-k˙i-tu, DIR-come-NAR-LNK
≈ai®˙, †(still.is)
a! EXCL
24
z˙-lå-k˙i-tu, DIR-come-NAR-LNK
25
¿å-tu å-s-Ùå ≥u˙-tu, sawu-le:-≥u˙≤i ¿å-thå INT -RESULT one-day-LOC COP-LNK older.sister-DEF:CL-TOP INT-there
26
pethåu-p˙-kui-wå, ¿å-tu sat®u-le: t˚iu chat-do-NAR-EMPH INT-RESULT younger.sister-DEF:CL †(then)
27
ÆÆqå-t˚-t®i-le: ¿å-k˙ lån-thå, 1sg-GEN-son-DEF:CL INT-thus lazy-AUX
28
≥u˙-®,flfl COP-LNK
j˙-≤i say-ADV
kå-hån INDEF:one-kind
sat®’u-le:-tå younger.sister-DEF:CL-LOC
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
≥u˙-tu. COP-LNK
lån-th˙-le: lazy-AUX-DEF:CL
pethiåu-pu-kui. ¿å-tu chat-do-NAR INT-RESULT
Text 5: The Story of a Lazy Man 29
å-s-Ùå-tu, one-day-LOC-LNK
30
¿ålå INT
tse: sat®’u this:CL younger.sister
t˚iu-lå, home-LOC
s˙-Ù˙ ®paqtå-≤i DIR-go pretend-ADV
32
he-Âi-kui-wå. DIR-exist-NAR-EMPH ≤å COM
¿å-ke INT -thus
dy-le: w˙stå door-DEF:CL behind
¿å-tu
sawu-le: older.sister-DEF:CL
INT-RESULT
sat®’u-le: ¿ålå younger.sister-DEF:CL INT
˙-dÂ˙-≤i DIR-face.to.face-ADV
34
pethiåu-p˙-k˙i, ¿ålå pethiåu-p˙-k˙i-tu, chat-do-NAR INT chat-do-NAR-LNK
35
mefix, pitiful
¿ålå
pethiåu-p˙-k˙i-tu, chat-do-NAR-LNK
INT
t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i son-DEF:CL-TOP
å-s-Ùå-tu, t®haq-tå one-day-LOC-LNK market-LOC
31
33
pethiåu-p˙-k˙i-tu ¿ålå chat-do-NAR-LNK INT t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i, son-DEF:CL-TOP
36
sat®’u-le: t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i ¿ålå dy-le: w˙stå younger.sister-DEF:CL son-DEF:CL-TOP INT door-DEF:CL behind
37
u-x®u˚t˚u-kui. DIR-listen-NAR
38
u-x®u˚t˚u-kui-tu, DIR-listen-NAR-LNK
de-k˙i, t®i-le: de-k˙i-tu, discuss-NAR son-DEF:CL say-NAR-LNK
39
t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i son-DEF:CL-TOP
40
≥u˙≤i
t®håq-tå market-LOC dy-le: door-DEF:CL
INT 41
t®i-le: son-DEF:CL
42
¿å-thå-hån INT -that:one-kind
43
lån-thåflfl laxy-AUX
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
277
¿ålå INT
t®i-le: son-DEF:CL
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
s˙-m˙-qå-t˚i DIR-NEG -go-NAR
w˙stå behind
x®u˚t˚u-kui. listen-NAR
ÆÆqå 1sg
j˙-≤i, ¿å-thå-≥u˙≤i say-ADV INT-there-TOP de-kui. say-NAR
t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i, ¿å-tu ÆÆp˙s-≥u˙≤i, a! son-DEF:CL-TOP INT-RESULT today-TOP EXCL
278
Texts
44
må:-≥u˙≤i mama- TOP
45
p˙s-≥u˙≤i p˙ns˙ å-≈˙n u-su-å-wå,flfl j˙-kui. today-TOP ability one-kind DIR-learn-1sg-EMPH say-NAR
46
ÆÆha! EXCL
47
ÆÆha! EXCL
48
ÆÆha! EXCL
qå 1sg
p˙s-≥u˙≤i today-TOP
i-p˙-l-jy, qå-≥u˙≤i DIR-arrive-come-ASP 1sg- TOP
p˙ns˙ å-≈˙n u-su-å-wå,flfl ability one-kind DIR-learn-1sg-EMPH qå-t˚-t®i ≤i©i 1sg-GEN-son what ÷ile 2pl
p˙s today
p˙ns˙ ability
j˙-kui. say-NAR
u-su-n-å?flfl j˙-kui. DIR-learn-2sg-Q say-NAR
t˚˙u-lå ≤i©i home-LOC what
de-j˙-wå?flfl j˙-kui, say-CSM-Q say-NAR
49
ÆÆqå ¿ålå t®h˙-Âek’u-tå kuånts˙ ¿å-ka:-Ùå, 1sg INT market-center-LOC restaurant INT-INDEF:one:CL-LOC
50
Âi-s-tå-≥u˙≤i qå ˙-må-®, ¿å-tu ÷ile-≥u˙≤i exist-NOM-LOC-TOP 1sg DIR-hear:1sg-LNK INT-RESULT 2pl-TOP
51
¿å-kå-hån de-ji, ¿å-k˙ INT -INDEF:one-kind say-CSM INT -thus
52
˙-må-®, DIR-hear:1sg-LNK
53
u-su-å-wå, DIR-learn-1sg-EMPH
54
¿e-de lå-hån-nefiwu DIR-say DEF: one-kind-all
55
¿å-kå-hån u-su-å-wå,flfl INT -INDEF:one-kind DIR-learn-1sg-EMPH
56
j˙-kui-tu, ¿å-tu ÆÆ≤i©i ≤i©i say-NAR-LNK INT-RESULT what what
57
sawu-le: ≤å older.siser-DEF:CL COM
58
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
de say
qå 1sg
qå 1sg
de-ji-tu, say-CSM-LNK
¿å-kå-hån-≥u˙≤i INT -one-kind-TOP
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
INT
qå 1sg
p˙ns˙ ¿å-kå-hån ability INT-one-kind
˙-m, ¿å-k˙ DIR-hear INT -thus
˙-m DIR-hear
¿åtå
÷ile-wu 2pl-AGT
©Â˙-t˚, able-NOM j˙-kui-t˚u. ¿å-k˙ say-NAR-PART INT-thus ¿e-de:fiflfl j˙-kui, DIR-say:1pl say-NAR
sat®’u-le:, ¿åtå ÆÆ¿å-k˙ de younger.sister-DEF:CL INT INT -thus say å-må-wå, DIR-hear:1sg-EMPH
t®haq-tå kuåntså market-LOC restaurant
Text 5: The Story of a Lazy Man 59
Âi-s-tå exist-NOM-LOC
60
ÆÆa!
å-må-wå,flfl DIR-hear:1sg-EMPH
Ùåt truly
EXCL
¿å-tu
61
INT-RESULT
≥u˙-k-≤i, COP-INF -ADV
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
279
j˙-kui-tu. say-NAR-LNK
qå-t˚-t®i,flfl 1sg-GEN-son
j˙-kui. say-NAR
sawu-le:-t˚, sawu-le: wut˚upu-≥u˙≤i oldr.sistr-DEF:CL-GEN oldr.sistr-DEF:CL husband-TOP
62
juanÙuai-≥u˙≤i ¿å-ke ≥u˙-k˙i. ¿å-tu pit˚-≥u˙≤i Âm˙t®i, emperor-TOP INT -thus COP-NAR INT-RESULT now- TOP emperor
63
qe:fi ≥u˙-tu, before COP-LNK
64
¿å-ke INT -thus
Âm˙t®i lå≈ ÆÆjuånÙuåiflfl ®p˙-x-®, emperor DEF:one:kind emperor call-INF-LNK
≥u˙, ¿å-tu COP
INT-RESULT
ÆÆa! EXCL
Ùåt˚hi truly
qå-t˚-t®i-le: 1sg-GEN-son-DEF:CL
65
p˙ns˙ å-≈˙n u-su-k-≤i, ke: ≥u˙-tu, ability one-kind DIR-learn-INF-ADV INDEF:CL COP-if
Â˙ thing
66
hå-så,flfl j˙-k˙i. ¿å-tu k˙-j˙-k˙i-tu, DIR-make.sound say-NAR INT-RESULT thus-say-NAR-LNK
¿ålå INT
67
¿å-tså-≈ui, sawu-le:, sawu-le: wut˚upu-≥u˙≤i INT -this:one-time older.sister-DEF:CL older.sister-DEF:CL husband-TOP
68
s˙nÂ˙ b˙l˙-s pe-kui-wå, s˙nÂ˙ b˙l˙-s kå-hån birthday do-NOM become-NAR-EMPH birthday do-NOM INDEF:one-kind
69
≥u˙-kui-tu, COP-NAR -LNK
Âb˙-≥u˙≤i xs˙-zi z˙-p-≤i yak-TOP three-CL DIR-buy-ADV
t˚aÙa-lå cowpen-LOC
70
¿å-dy-≤i DIR-tether- ADV
Âi-Â˙-kui-t˚u. exist-CAUS-NAR-PART
t˚aÙa-lå cowpen-LOC
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
71
¿å-dy-≤i Âi-Â˙-kui-tu, thå-hån, ¿ålå-≥u˙≤i DIR-tether- ADV exist- CAUS-NAR-LNK that:one-kind INT-TOP
72
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
73
sat®’u-le:-t®i-le:-wu younger-sister-DEF:CL-son-DEF:CL-AGT
u-su-å-®˙flfl j˙-m-le:-wu,111 DIR-learn-1sg-LNK say-NOM-DEF:CL -AGT
g˙s night
ÆÆp˙ns˙ ability då-qå-≤i DIR-go-ADV
280 74
75
Texts
t˙-≈quåt®-≤iånt˚i, m˙q-tå tu≥tu≥ Âo:puå-lå DIR-steal-after above-LOC cave cave-LOC då-≈lå-j˙-s-tå
¿å-dy-≤i DIR-tether- ADV
DIR-cross-CSM-NOM-LOC 76
i-˚i-kui-wå. DIR-put- NAR-EMPH
77
¿å-dy-≤i DIR-tether- LNK
78
¿e-me-seflfl DIR-NEG -allow
79
≥u˙-kui-tu, COP-NAR -LNK
80
¿ålå
81
82
Ùu mountain i-˚i-kui-tu. DIR-put- NAR-LNK
j˙-kui. say-NAR
84
85
¿ålå ÆÆs˙nÂ˙ b˙l˙-≥u˙≤i INT birthday do-TOP
¿e-me-se DIR-NEG -allow
pethiåu-¿o-p’u-k˙-kui, chat-DIR-do-go-NAR
ÆÆqå-sat®’u-te:-t®i-≥u˙≤i 1sg-younger.sister-DEF:CL-son-TOP u-Âmu-≤i ˙-m
kå-hån INDEF:one-kind
sawu-le:-≥u˙≤i older.sister-DEF:CL-TOP
DIR-dream-ADV 83
då-≈lå-j˙-s-tå DIR-cross-CSM-NOM-LOC
wut˚upu-le:-tå-≥u˙≤i husband-DEF:CL -LOC-TOP
INT
Ùu mountain
i-t®i-Â DIR-represent-CAUS
DIR-hear
dÂ˙, able
ik˙ thus
j˙-kui-st~u. say-NAR-PART ¿å-tu INT-RESULT
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
¿å-k˙, INT -thus
dÂ˙, u-x®u˚t˚u able DIR-listen
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
tse: juånÙuåi-le:-≥u˙≤i this:CL emperor-DEF:CL-TOP guefi soldier
he-the, DIR-able
©Â˙-wå,flfl able-EMPH
guefi soldier
86
Âi-Â˙-k˙i-®˙, exist-CAUS-NAR-LNK
87
¿å-ts˙i-≥u˙≤i DIR-this.manner- TOP
88
t˙-mefiÂ-≤i då-t˚-k˙-kui, då-t˚-k˙ kå-hån ≥u˙-tu, DIR-seek- ADV DIR-find-go- NAR DIR-find-go INDEF:one-kind COP-LNK
ÆÆmefiÂ˙-k seek-go
he-˚i-≤i DIR-send-ADV
t˚he,flfl want
j˙-tu. say-LNK
Text 5: The Story of a Lazy Man 89
≈ai®˙, då-t˚-k˙-ku-tu, ¿å-tse:-≥u˙≤i, ≈ai®˙ †(still.is) DIR-find-go- NAR-LNK INT-this:CL-TOP †(still.is)
90
≤i:-wu ¿ålå 3sgREFL-AGT INT
91
¿ålå INT
92
¿å-dy-≤i DIR-tether- ADV
¿å-dy-≤i DIR-tether- ADV
≥u˙-ku-tu. COP-NAR -LNK
281
t˙-≈quat®-≤i DIR-steal-ADV
tu≥tu≥ cliff.cave
Âo:puå cave
≈ai®˙ thå-≈ui ≥u˙-tu, †(still.is) that:one-time COP-LNK
93
dÂuk’u-le:-k˙-®, knowledge-exist-INF-LNK
94
Âi-k˙i-wå, exist-NAR-EMPH
tåntå-ke: †bold/daring-INDEF:CL
95
Âi-k˙i-tu. exist-NAR-LNK
¿å-thu-≥u˙≤i DIR-there-TOP
96
då-Ù˙-ja, ¿å-thu-≥u˙≤i DIR-go-REP :1sg INT -there-TOP
i-˚i DIR-put
≤i: l˙ 3sgREFL also
tåntå-ke: bold/daring-INDEF:CL
ÆÆqhuå: river.valley
˚i-la: ataÂ-®å, little-DEF:one:CL fast-HORT
a. INT
97
qe:fi å-s j˙-s-≥u˙≤i. kå-z˙ då-t˚ ¿e-si-≥uå before one-day two-day-TOP INDEF:one- CL DIR-find DIR-allow-Q
98
¿e-me-si?flfl DIR-NEG -allow
99
≥u˙-kui-wå. COP-NAR -EMPH
j˙-≤i say-ADV ¿å-tu, INT -RESULT
100
t˚y-k˙i-tu, carry-NAR-LNK
101
hå-s˙-m DIR-make.sound-NOM
102
≥u˙-k˙i-wå, COP-NAR -EMPH
103
he-Âgue-m DIR-answer-NOM
¿å-k˙ INT -thus ®puthu® bamboo.tube
®puthu® bamboo.tube l˙ also
kefil-˙m ask-NOM l˙ also
lou DEF:one:CL
lou-Ùå DEF:one:CL-LOC ≤i: 3sgREFL
l˙ ≤i: also 3sgREFL
≤i: 3sgREFL
≥u˙-k˙i, COP-NAR
≥u˙-k˙i, COP-NAR ¿å-tu INT-RESULT
282
Texts
104
≤i: 3sgREFL
105
he-Âgue DIR-answer
106
hå-s˙-≤i DIR-make.sound-ADV ¿å-ke: INT -INDEF:CL
å-s-Ùå one-day-LOC
≥u˙-tu, COP-LNK
≤i: 3sgREFL
Âi-k˙p˙-k˙i. exist-HABIT-NAR
¿å-tu,
¿å-tu, INT-RESULT
phåwu-le: older.sister-DEF:CL
INT-RESULT
107
wut˚upu-le:-≥u˙≤i, qe:fi ≥u˙-tu, ÆÆjuånÙuåiflfl, pit˚-≥u˙-tu husband-DEF:CL -TOP before COP-LNK emperor now-COP-LNK
108
ÆÆÂm˙t®iflfl emperor
109
ata t˚he, ¿å-tu a:-khuåi-thå-® we-tu,flfl j˙-≤iånt˚i, fast want INT-RESULT INDTV-fast- AUX-LNK exist-LNK say-after
110
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
®pe:fi-®. ¿å-tu, ÆÆa, call:1pl-LNK INT-RESULT, EXCL
j˙-ku-tu, ÆÆots’uquå-≥u˙≤i say-NAR-LNK morning-TOP
dÂ˙-m˙:fiwu able-NOM:all
mefiÂ-k˙ seek-go
då-Ù DIR-go
111
u¬u fast
112
j˙-kui-wå. ¿å-t˙, z˙t å-s say-NAR-EMPH INT-RESULT date one-day
113
˙-®-k˙i-≤i DIR-put- NAR-ADV
114
ph˙ hå-π˙-s-tå-jånt˚i, message DIR-blow-NOM -LOC-after
115
dÂ˙-m x®u˚t˚u able-NOM hear
116
zu-l’u, DIR-come
t˚ile-≥u˙≤i 1pl-TOP
117
zu-l’u DIR-come
t˚he-wå,flfl want-EMPH
118
t˚he,flfl want
≈ai®˙, ¿ålå †(still.is) INT
dÂ˙-m able-NOM
˚i-la: little-DEF:one:CL
dÂ˙-m, able-NOM
¿å-k˙ INT -thus ˙-®-k˙i, DIR-put- NAR
z˙t date
t˚et˚i-le: everywhere-DEF:CL ¿å-t˙-≥u˙≤i INT-RESULT-TOP
wu all
ÆÆdå-Ù˙ DIR-go
¿å-lå-hån-nefiwu INT -DEF:one-kind-all
Âmu meeting
tså here
tsu-å:, hold-PRS
j˙-kui-wå. say-NAR-EMPH
mi-tse:-≥u˙≤i ¿å-thå t®hets˙-qu-tå person-this:CL-TOP INT-there cart-top-LOC
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
tse: this:CL
s˙-l-≤i DIR-look- ADV
Text 5: The Story of a Lazy Man 119
120
®puthu® bamboo.tube ¿å-tu
tou-Ùå-≥u˙≤i DEF:one:CL-LOC-TOP t˙-kefil-≤i,
kefil-jy, ask-ASP
t˙-kefil-jant˚i,
t˙-kefil-jånt˚i, DIR-ask-after
¿ålå
INT-RESULT DIR-ask-ADV DIR-ask-after
INT
121
®puthu® tou-Ùå-≥u˙≤i mi ¿ålå Âm˙t®i-le: bamboo.tube DEF:one:CL-LOC-TOP person INT emperor-DEF:CL
122
Âmu-tsu lå-s-Ùå-≥u˙≤i ¿å-thå t®hets˙-qu-tå meeeting-hold DEF:one-day-LOC-TOP INT-there cart-top-LOC
123
s˙-l-≤i DIR-look- ADV
¿å-ke INT -thus
283
kefil-k˙-kui. ask-go-NAR
¿å-tu, INT-RESULT
124
ÆÆpoqu®-≥u˙≤i do-©Âu-n-tu, livestock-TOP DIR-lose-2sg-LNK
125
¿ål˙ there
126
tu≥tu≥ cliff.cave
127
≈¬å-ji-wå,flfl cross-CSM-EMPH
128
®p˙thu®-ta:-Ùa-≥u˙≤i ≤i≤i hå-s˙ ¿å-k˙ bamboo.tube-DEF:one:CL-LOC-TOP 3sgREFL DIR-make.sound INT-thus
129
kefil-k˙-ku, ask-go-NAR
130
ÆÆå-® tse-n-nå-®, one-time look-2sg-IMP-LNK
Âi-wå, exist-EMPH Âo:på cave
t˚å-lå where-LOC
®ku-wu thief-AGT
t˙-≈quåt®-≤i DIR-steal-ADV
¿å-dy-≤i DIR-tether- ADV j˙-≤i say-ADV
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
kefil ask
Âi? exist
Âi-Â. exist-CAUS
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
de-ku. say-NAR
¿ål˙ Âi there exist ¿ålå there Ùu mountain ¿å-k˙ INT -thus
kå-hån ≥u˙-ku-tu, INDEF:one-kind COP-NAR -LNK ¿å-the-wu, INT -that-ABL
a, INT
®ku-wu thief-AGT
131
t˙-≈quåt®-k˙, ¿å-thå då-≈¬å: j˙sai-wå, ¿ålå-≥u˙≤i thå DIR-steal-go INT-there DIR-cross:PRS fast-EMPH INT -TOP there
132
Âi-wå,flfl j˙-ku. ¿å-tu tsoqpi phåwu-le: exist-EMPH say-NAR INT-RESULT this:family older.sister-DEF:CL
133
t˚ymi-le:, child-DEF:CL
thoqpi-≥u˙≤i that:family-TOP
hå-q˙-≤i DIR-go-ADV
≤i:-t˚ 3sgREFL-GEN
284
Texts
134
¿ålå guefi-≤å thå-hån he-˚i-≤i INT army-COM that:one-kind DIR-put- ADV
135
Ùåt˚hi truly
136
tse:-≥u˙≤i, this: CL-TOP
thå there
Âi-ku, exist-NAR a,
t˙-mefiÂ-s-tå, DIR-seek- NOM-LOC
¿å-tså-≈ui, INT -this:one-time
sat®’u-le: younger.sister-DEF:CL
INT
t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i son-DEF:CL-TOP
137
minjy-t˚i˙u-kåulå. ¿å-tu phåwu-le: wut˚upu-≤å †(reputation-then-higher) INT-RESULT older.sister-DEF:CL husband-COM
138
≤i©i what
139
˙-®-jy DIR-put- ASP
140
¿å-tså-≈ui-tu, tse:-t˚-Ùå112 DIR-this:one-time- LNK this: CL-GEN -LOC
dz˙-≤i eat-ADV
≤i©i what
≥u˙-≤i COP-ADV
t˚h˙-t˚ drink-GEN
¿å-ts˙i INT -this.manner
¿å-ts˙i p˙fiÂ˙-kui-wå. INT -this.manner provide.for- NAR-EMPH t˚iu †(then
t˚ait˚yelå. solved)
-¿å-tu
141
steke-lå-≈ui-Ùå-tu, later-DEF:one-time-LOC-LNK
INT-RESULT 142
Âm˙t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i emperor-DEF:CL-TOP
143
nai-e-f˙n-Ùå-t˚-Âm˙t®i-ke: other-one-place-LOC-GEN -emperor-INDEF:CL
144
do-©Âu-k˙i-hå, DIR-lose- NAR-PART
145
Âm˙t®i emperor
146
kå-hån INDEF:one-kind
147
¿å-thå INT-there
Âm˙t®i emperor
dzin-le: monk's.robe113-DEF:CL j˙n-le:, monk's.robe-DEF:CL
j˙n-le: monk's.robe-DEF:CL ≥u˙-kui-tu, COP-NAR -LNK
¿å-lå-hån INT -DEF:one-kind
t˚iu®˙ †(that.is)
≥u˙-kuå-ji, COP-NAR -HS
do-©Âu DIR-lose
¿å-tse:-wu INT -this:CL-AGT å-l˙-wu one-CL-AGT
¿å-thå, INT-there å-l˙ 114 one-CL
Text 5: The Story of a Lazy Man 148
pethiåu-¿o-pu-≤i chat-DIR-do-ADV
149
≥u˙-kuå-ji, COP-NAR -HS
dÂuk’u knowledge dÂuk’u knowledge
le exist
285
kå-hån INDEF:one-kind
le-ku-tu, exist-NAR-LNK
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
150
dÂuk’u de-l kå-hån ≥u˙-ku. knowledge DIR-exist INDEF:one-kind COP-NAR
151
ÆÆmefiÂ-k˙ seek-go
152
ÆÆt˙-mefiÂ-≤i DIR-seek- ADV
153
s˙-t®i ¿e-di-≤i ˙-m dÂ˙-m ¿å-kå-hån DIR-represent DIR-say-ADV DIR-hear able-NOM INT-INDEF:one-kind
154
≥u˙-®˙, COP-LNK
155
j˙-tu. say-LNK
156
ph˙ message
157
¿å-tså-≈ui-tu, tsoqpi Âm˙t®i INT -this:one-time-LNK this:family emperor
158
do-©Âu-m DIR-lose- NOM
159
t®åutåulå †(found)
160
då-t˚-k˙. DIR-find-go
161
t˚he, want
mefiÂ-k˙ seek-go
¿å-tse:-≥u˙≤i INT -this:CL-TOP
¿å-tse:-≥u˙≤i INT -this:CL-TOP
˙-Âmu DIR-dream
ph˙ message
he-kue-≤i ¿å-kå-hån DIR-take-ADV INT -INDEF:one-kind
tsoqpi-≥u˙≤i, this:family-TOP
˙-p˙fiÂ-kui-wå, ˙-tin-thå-jant˚i DIR-set- AUX-after
¿ålå INT
≤i: 3sgREFL
he-kue-≤i, DIR-take-ADV t˙-b˙l˙-ku-wå. DIR-do-NAR-EMPH
j˙n-le: monk's.robe-DEF:CL
tse:-≥u˙≤i, this:CL-TOP
då-t˚-ku-kui, DIR-find-go- NAR då-t˚-k˙ DIR-find-go
j˙-ku. ¿å-tu say-NAR INT-RESULT
¿å-k˙ he-the-le: Âi-wå,flfl INT -thus DIR-able-DEF: CL exist- EMPH
¿å-tsoqpi-wu INT -this:family-AGT
DIR-provide.for-NAR-EMPH 162
t˚he,flfl want
¿å-tse:-≥u˙≤i INT -this:CL-TOP
¿å-tse:-≥u˙≤i INT -this:CL-TOP ¿å-ts˙-tse: INT -here-this:CL
kå-hån ≥u˙-tu, INDEF:one-kind COP-LNK ®˙t˚iån †time ˚t˚˙-s seven-day
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
˙-tin-thå-k˙i, DIR-set- AUX-NAR ˙-®-k˙i, DIR-put- NAR
286
Texts
163
ÆÆ˚t˚˙-s-Ùå-≥u˙≤i seven-day-LOC-TOP
tse: this:CL
Âm˙t®i emperor
164
å-z˙ ≈qu ¿åt˙ one-little difficult INT
u-Âmu-≤i DIR-dream-ADV
165
≥u˙-®, COP-LNK
jin-ne: monk's.robe-DEF:CL
i-t®i-s-le: DIR-sign-NOM -DEF:CL
¿åta,
ke:
INT
INDEF:CL CON-seek-NOM-EXC
t˚i-mefiÂ-˙s-ji
må-≥‘u‘˙-ta, NEG -COP-if
166
u-Âmu-≤i i-t®i-s Âm˙t®i jin-le: ≥u˙-®˙ DIR-dream-ADV DIR-sign-NOM emperor monk's.robe-DEF:CL COP-LNK
167
å-z˙ one-little
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
168
169
≈qu-®˙,flfl difficult-LNK
j˙-≤i, say-ADV
®˙t˚ian ˙-®˙-k˙i-tu, time DIR-put- NAR-LNK
˚t˚˙-j˙ ≥u˙-≤i, seven-night COP-ADV
¿åtå, INT
170
s˙-dzi-ku-wå, DIR-eat-NAR-EMPH
171
Âm˙t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i, ÆÆa, emperor-DEF:CL-TOP EXCL
172
e:-wu one:CL-AGT
173
¿å-tu
174
¿å-tu, INT-RESULT
175
¿å-tu, INT-RESULT
176
177
stuåhå rice/food
COM
å-s-Ùå one-day-LOC
do-quq DIR-move
j˙-ku, ¿å-tu, say-NAR INT-RESULT ≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
ba big
hå-q˙-k˙i-tu. måutsh˙-le: DIR-go-NAR-LNK toilet- DEF:CL
då-t˚ DIR-find
må-l˙-k˙i,
då-t˚ DIR-find
måutsh˙-le: toilet-DEF:CL
≤å
qå-jin-le:-≥u˙≤i 1sg-monk's.robe-DEF:CL-TOP
å-s-Ùå-tu, måutshå one-day-LOC-LNK toilet
NEG -able-NAR
˚t˚˙-s seven-day
s˙-dze-tu, DIR-eat-LNK
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
de-j˙-kui. say-REP-NAR
¿å-ts˙ Âm˙t®i-le:-tå-≥u˙≤i INT -this emperor-DEF:CL-DAT -TOP
nai-å-®p˙q-tå other-one-place-LOC
INT-RESULT
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
Ùu-®,flfl willing-LNK å-s-Ùå-tu, one-day-LOC-LNK
k˙ t˚h˙-k˙p˙-k, thus eat-HABIT-INF sei-j˙-k˙ relieve.oneself-REP-go
må-l˙-k˙i-tu, NEG -able-NAR-LNK
Text 5: The Story of a Lazy Man 178
179
180
181
¿ålå måutshå sei-k˙i-wå, INT toilet relieve.oneself-NAR-EMPH pu≤u-låpå: cat-flower
lou-wu, DEF:one:CL-AGT
Ùå-≥u˙≤i roof.tile-TOP s˙-dy DIR-put
182
t®ek˙Â˙nla †(this.person)
183
pefuts˙ white.beard
184
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
185
186
måutsh˙-le:-qu-tå Ùå toilet-DEF:CL-top-LOC roof.tile ¿å-thå INT-there
guo 1sg
u-zu-≤i DIR-wait-ADV
Âi-kui-wå. exist-NAR-EMPH
Ōu good
INT-RESULT
s˙,flfl j˙-i-stu. thing) say-HS-PART
¿å-thå INT-there
Âm˙t®i emperor
¿å-ÙdÂe-jant˚i DIR-bite-after
Âi-kui-hå, exist-NAR-PART
¿å-tu
ÆÆhai! pefuts˙, t®ek˙ INT †white.beard(cat) †(this
zuo do
pu≤u-le:-wu cat-DEF:CL -AGT
jin-le:-tå monk's.robe-DEF:CL-LOC
pu≤i-le:-wu, cat-DEF:CL -AGT
INT
mi-tse-ze-≥u˙≤i, person-this-CL-TOP m˙fi ke cat give
RESULT
¿åtå,
¿å-thå INT-there
la:-Ùå DEF: one:CL-LOC
tu
287
¿ålå there
¿ål˙ there
u-zu-≤i DIR-wait-ADV
187
Âi-kui-tu, ÆÆa, Âå hå-så,115 tse: pu≤u-le:-wu exist-NAR-LNK INT thing DIR-make.sound this:CL cat-DEF:CL -AGT
188
qå-t˚ 1sg-GEN
189
t˙-b˙l-˙n-®˙,flfl DIR-do-2sg-LNK
190
191
¿ålå there ¿ålå INT
192
Âå hå-så, hi thing DIR-make.sound EXCL j˙-≤i, say-ADV
pu≤u-le:-tå cat-DEF:CL -DAT Ùå-≥u˙≤i roof.tile-TOP
Ùå-≥u˙≤i roof.tile-TOP
¿åtå
≈åus˙ †good.thing
≥u˙-jant˚i, COP-after
INT
z˙-Â-≤iånt˚i DIR-bring-after
˚t˚i-πi seven-CL
t˙-t®håt® DIR-vertically
qå-t˚ 1sg-GEN
≥u˙≤i TOP
t˙-®e. DIR-count
¿å-the-wu, INT -that-ABL
˚t˚˙-≈t®, nai e-πi seven-row other one-CL
288
Texts
193
e-πi one-CL
≥u˙-tu COP-LNK
194
jin-le: monk's.robe-DEF:CL
195
¿å-tu,
˚t˚˙-πi seven-CL
¿ål˙-jånt˚i there-after
¿å-thu INT -there
t˙-®u˙-k˙i-hå. DIR-hide-NAR-PART
t˙-®u˙
kå-hån ≥u˙-k˙i-tu, INDEF:one-kind COP-NAR -LNK
INT-RESULT DIR-hide 196
¿å-tså-≈ui-tu, INT -this:one-time-LNK
197
å-z˙-≥u˙≤i one-little-TOP
198
do-quq DIR-move
199
¿åtå INT
200
Âm˙t®i emperor
Âm˙t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i, emperor-DEF:CL-TOP
®qu-®-un, difficult-too-2sg Ùu-≤i, willing-ADV
qå 1sg
ÆÆa, INT
nai-å-®påq-tå other-one-place-LOC
≤i: what
≥u˙-≥u˙i?flfl COP-Q
t˙-kefil-k˙-kui. DIR-ask-go-NAR
¿å-thå t˙-kefil-k˙-kui-tu, INT -there DIR-ask-go-NAR-LNK
EXCL
soqho-≤i-≥u˙≤i,flfl tomorrow-ADV-TOP
201
(ÆÆt˙p-≤iflfl j˙ tomorrow-ADV say
202
ÆÆsoqho-≤iflfl j˙ l˙ khuoji), ÆÆt˚ile-tå, å-s å-s tomorrow-ADV say also †(be.possible) 1pl-LOC one-day one-day
203
lå-hån-Ùå,flfl ¿å-k˙ DEF:one-kind-LOC that.manner tse:-≥u˙≤i, this:CL-TOP
l˙ also
ÆÆa,
khuoji, †(be.possible)
j˙-kui-tu. say-NAR-LNK
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
ÆÆa, EXCL
204
¿e-se.flfl DIR-allow
205
t˙-suå, ¿å-tu ˚i-lå: i-t®i-s-tå-tu, DIR-divine(v.) INT-RESULT little-DEF:one:CL DIR-sign-NOM -LOC-LNK
206
p˙maha i-t®i-lå-wå. tonight DIR-sign-INDTV:1sg-EMPH
207
thunt®˙ notify
tu-pu-n-på, DIR-do-2sg-DTV
ÆÆqå 1sg
¿e-se, DIR-allow
p˙maha tonight
ots’uquå-≥u˙≤i morning-TOP
≤i:-le: what-DEF:CL
Text 5: The Story of a Lazy Man 208
då-Ù DIR-go
dÂ˙-m, able-NOM
˙-m dÂ˙-m, sei DIR-hear able-NOM walk
209
lu t˚he, ¿å-tså-hå-≥u˙≤i i-p˙-l come want INT-this:one-pl-TOP DIR-arrive-come
210
j˙-kui. say-NAR
Âmu meeting
211
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
j˙-kui-wå. say-NAR-EMPH
t®u-s-≥u˙≤i hold-NOM-TOP ¿åtå, INT
ÆÆå, EXCL
mi ¿ålå då-Ù˙ person INT DIR-go
213
lu-j˙-kui.flfl ¿åtå mefi®-tå-s-Ùå come-REP-NAR INT next-DEF:one-day-LOC tu
¿å-tsu
215
¿å-tsou-Ùå INT -this:one:CL-LOC
216
hå-s˙-m DIR-make.sound-NOM
217
Âi-k˙i-wå, exist-NAR-EMPH
218
måutsh˙-le:-≥u˙≤i toilet-DEF:CL-TOP ≤a-≈t®, WH :one-row
t˚he-wå,flfl want-EMPH
thunt®˙-tu-p’u-≤i notify-DIR-do-ADV
de-sei dÂ˙-m-le:fiwu DIR-walk able-NOM-all Âmu meeting
¿o-tsu. DIR-hold
®puthu® tou-Ùå, bamboo.tube DEF:one:CL-LOC
RESULT INT -here
219
dÂ˙-mefiwu able-NOM:all
Âm˙t®i-le:-tå-≥u˙≤i emperor-DEF:CL-DAT -TOP
212
214
dÂ˙-m, able-NOM
289
kefil-˙m ask-NOM l˙ also
l˙ also
≤i:-≥u˙≤i 3sgREFL-TOP
¿åtå t˚å-lå INT where-LOC ¿ålå
¿å-thu INT -there
¿å-ke INT -thus
®˙, t˚å-l˙ exist where-LOC Ùå-≥u˙≤i roof.tile-TOP
INT
¿å-thå INT -there
≤i: 3sgREFL
≤e-πi WH :one-CL ®˙-wå, exist-EMPH
≥u˙ COP
220
t˙-®e-≤iånt˚i, DIR-count-after
221
¿å-tse:-≥u˙≤i INT -this:CL-TOP
222
≤im hå-qå, ¿å-tså-≈ui, då-t˚-k˙-stun, notice(n.) DIR-go INT-this:one-time DIR-find-go -PART
≤im notice(n.)
j˙-kui. say-NAR
hå-q˙-stun, DIR-go-PART tså-≈ui this:one-time
290 223
224
Texts
≤im t˙-s,116 notice(n.) DIR-make.sound
≥u˙-tu, ¿å-tu tse:-wu COP-LNK INT-RESULT this: CL-AGT ¿å-tu INT-RESULT
Âm˙t®i emperor
tse:-≥u˙≤i this:CL-TOP
225
k˙-j˙-ku, thus-say-NAR
ÆÆqå 1sg
226
qå 1sg
227
¿å-ts˙i-≥u˙≤i, this.manner-TOP
228
j˙-kui-®˙, say-NAR-LNK
229
k˙n®˙ t˙-p˙fiÂ-≤i †even.more DIR-provide.for-ADV
o-z’u-≤i DIR-sit- ADV
≤i©i what
o-z’u, DIR-sit
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
INT
dz˙-≤i eat-ADV qå 1sg
¿å-thå, INT-there mi person
mi
≤i©i what
dz˙, eat
tu-j’u-≤i DIR-stand- ADV
¿å-ke INT -thus
tu-j’u. DIR-stand
hå-≥uefi-wå.flfl DIR- COP :1pl-EMPH
≈ais˙ ¿å-ts˙i ¿å-tse:-≥u˙≤i †(still) INT-this.manner INT-this:CL-TOP ¿å-ke ≥u˙-Â-kui-hå. INT -thus COP-CAUS -NAR-PART
-¿å-tu
230
INT-RESULT
nai ≥u˙-tu, Âm˙t®i nai-e: ≥u˙-tu, other COP-LNK emperor other-one:CL COP-LNK
231
g˙nkuo parrot
w˙tshi-≥u˙≤i bird-TOP
g˙n very
phulu expensive
232
påufu-le: ≥u˙-s kå-hån ≥u˙-kuå-ji, ¿å-ke retaliation-DEF:CL COP-NOM INDEF:one-kind COP-NAR -HS INT-thus
233
do-©Âu-k˙i-wå, genkuo DIR-lose- NAR-EMPH parrot
234
Âi-ku-®˙, ¿å-kå-hån Âi-kui-tu, exist-NAR-LNK INT-INDEF:one-kind exist-NAR-LNK
235
do-©Âu-k˙i. tu, DIR-lose- NAR RESULT
236
jin do-©Âu-m-le:-wu ¿å-thå monk's.robe DIR-lose- NOM-DEF:CL-AGT INT-that
i®˙ w˙tshi †(is) bird
¿å-tsu INT -here
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
kå-hån INDEF:one-kind
tse-x®epi this-side
Âm˙t®i emperor the-x®epi-Ùå that-side-LOC
Text 5: The Story of a Lazy Man 237
khu˙-≥u˙≤i dog-TOP
238
do-©Âu-n-tu, DIR-lose-2sg-LNK
239
j˙-kui. ¿å-tu say-NAR INT-RESULT
240
mi-le: thå i-p˙-l-≤i, ¿å-tu person-DEF:CL there DIR-arrive-come-ADV INT-RESULT
241
®˙t˚iån †time
242
˙-p˙fiÂ-k˙-kui, DIR-provide.for-go-NAR
243
244
thå there
då-l-Â˙-kui, DIR-look- CAUS-NAR qå-tå 1sg-DAT
EXCL
˙-tin-thå-≤i DIR-agree.on-AUX-ADV
qå 1sg
tse: this:CL
¿å-ts˙i INT -this.manner
¿å-tu, INT-RESULT
≈uopåu-le: ≥u˙. live.treasure-DEF:CL COP
246
¿e-®ue-≤i DIR-be.hungry- ADV ¿å-th˙-≥u˙≤i DIR-that-TOP
®˙t˚iån-≥u˙≤i †time-TOP åz-≥u˙≤i one:CL-TOP
249
u-Âmu DIR-dream
≤å
251
qå-t˚-≥u˙≤i 1sg-GEN-TOP
≈ai®˙, †(still.is)
INT-RESULT
å-®på-lå one-place-LOC
ts˙-s this-COMP
˙-m˙-s DIR-hear-NOM
¿å-tu,
≈uopåu live.treasure
248
250
˙-p˙fiÂ-≤i DIR-provide.for-ADV
ts˙påu-le: må-≥‘u‘˙-®˙ inanimate.treasure-DEF:CL NEG -COP-LNK
245
247
Âi-wå,flfl exist-EMPH
å-tåu t˙-mefiÂ-≤i one-time DIR-seek- ADV
kå-hån ≥u˙-tu, å, INDEF:one-kind COP-LNK EXCL ÆÆa,
ÆÆ¿å-thå-hån INT -that:one-kind
¿å-ke: INT -INDEF:CL
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
291
≥u˙-®˙ COP-LNK die-®e-k˙ DIR-die-INF
˚t˚˙-s-≥u˙≤i, seven-day-TOP
Ùu.flfl may ÆÆa EXCL
˚i-lå: small-DEF:CL
ataÂ-≤i fast-ADV
u-t˚u-s-le: DIR-see- NOM-DEF:CL
COM
xu-tu, exist-LNK ˚i-lå: small-DEF:CL
ataÂ˙-s-lå: fast-NOM-DEF:CL
˚å:-≥uå, INDTV-COP :1sg
292 252
Texts
¿å-tu,
a,
INT-RESULT
EXCL
t®ent®en †really
qå 1sg
tse: this:CL
genkuo-le: parrot-DEF:CL
253
då-t˚˙-s kå-hån ≥u˙-tu, ¿å-thå genkuo-le: DIR-find- NOM INDEF:one-kind COP-LNK INT-there parrot-DEF:CL
254
då-t˚i-n-tu, qå-≤ike DIR-find-2sg-LNK 1sg- COM:thus
phin-t˚hi-phin-tsuo, ≈ai®˙ †(equal-stand-equal-sit) †(still.is)
255
qå 1sg
¿åtå
256
≤i©i dz˙-≤i what eat-ADV
dz˙, eat
tu-j’u, qå o-zu-≤i DIR-stand 1sg DIR-sit- ADV
qå 1sg
INT
o-zu, DIR-sit
¿åtå INT
tu-j’u-≤i DIR-stand- ADV
qå ≤i©i 1sg what
dz˙-≤i eat-ADV
257
≤i©i dz˙ what eat
≈ai®˙ ¿å-ts˙i hå-≥uefi-wå,flfl †(still.is) INT-this.manner DIR-COP :1pl-EMPH
258
j˙-≤i ≥u˙-kui-tu. mi ≈ai®˙ ¿å-tu ®˙t˚iån-≥u˙≤i say-ADV COP-NAR -LNK person †(still.is) INT-RESULT †time-TOP
259
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
¿å-tu
t˙-mefiÂ-lå-s-Ùå-tu, DIR-seek- DEF:one-day-LOC-LNK
INT-RESULT
260
sei-k˙ relieve.oneself-go
261
hå-q˙-kei-tu, ¿å-tu å-s-Ùå-tu, thå-hån DIR-go-NAR-LNK INT-RESULT one-day-LOC-LNK that:one-kind
262
sei-k˙ relieve.oneself-go
hå-q˙-kei-tu. DIR-go-NAR-LNK
Ù˙fi-tå-≥u˙≤i Han.person-DAT-TOP
kaijuån-Ùå †street.edge-LOC
263
264
hå-q˙-k˙i-wå. DIR-go-NAR-EMPH
me-we-m NEG -exist-NOM
265
¿åtå, INT
266
kaijuån-Ùå †street.edge-LOC
sei-k˙ relieve.oneself-go
¿ålå, INT
®p˙ bamboo
me-Âi, NEG -exist ®p˙ bamboo
we-wu-®˙,117 exist-VIS-LNK
å-≈t® å-≈t® tå-hån we-wu-tu, one-row one-row DEF:one-kind exist-VIS-LNK
®p˙ bamboo
Text 5: The Story of a Lazy Man 267
i-phi-≤i DIR-grow-ADV
268
we-ku-tu, exist-NAR-LNK
269
©z˙ifå wing
270
271
wet stick
lou DEF:one:CL
we-kui-wå, exist-NAR-EMPH ≈qa-lå among-LOC
273
¿ålå, INT
x®ul rope
¿ålå
RESULT
INT
tå-hån DEF:one-kind
genkuo-le:-≥u˙≤i parrot-DEF:CL-TOP lou
t˙-≈®˙-≤i DIR-tie-ADV
DEF:one:CL
¿å-ke INT -thus
tu
t˙-t®he-le: DIR-support-DEF:CL x®ul-le:-≥u˙≤i ®p˙ rope-DEF:CL-TOP bamboo
hå-j˙-kui. DIR-stick/be.caught- NAR
måutsh˙ toilet
¿ålå there
å-≈t® one-row
¿å-thå INT-there
q˙-tå-≥u˙≤i top-LOC-TOP
272
274
å-≈t® one-row
293
då-t˚ DIR-find
hå-j˙-kui-tu, DIR-stick-NAR-LNK må-l˙-k˙i-tu. NEG -able-NAR-LNK
sei-k˙i-wå, relieve.oneself-NAR-EMPH
tu
¿ålå,
RESULT
INT
275
sei-k˙i-tu, genkuo-le: Âå≈uå-lå ˚t˚efip˚t˚efip-le: relieve.oneself-NAR-LNK parrot-DEF:CL inside-LOC (birdcall)-DEF:CL
276
thå så-kui-hå, ÆÆtså-≈ui tse: there make.sound-NAR-PART this:one-time this:CL
277
qå-t˚ Âå hå-s˙-®˙,flfl j˙-≤i ¿ålå ¿å-ke 1sg-GEN matter/affair DIR-make.sound-LNK say-ADV INT INT-thus
278
Â˙-k˙i. ¿å-tu, ¿ålå, the: t˙-ts˙qå-jant˚i, exist-NAR INT-RESULT INT 3sg DIR-grab-after
279
genkuo-le: parrot-DEF:CL
t˙-ts˙qå-jant˚i, DIR-grab-after
å-≈t® one.row
INT
®p˙-≥u˙≤i bamboo-TOP
t˙-®˙-jant˚i, DIR-count-after
¿å-the-wu, INT -that-ABL
280
å-≈t® one-row
281
¿å-ts˙i ≥u˙-jant˚i, INT -this.manner COP-after
¿åtå,
genkuo-le: parrot-DEF:CL
¿å-thu INT -there
i-˚i DIR-put
294
Texts
282
¿å-tså-≈ui-tu, a, ¿å-tu, Âm˙t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i INT -this:one-time-LNK EXCL INT-RESULT emperor-DEF:CL-TOP
283
tu, RESULT
284
285
ÆÆå,
qå-≈uopåu-le:-≥u˙≤i 1sg-live.treasure-DEF:CL-TOP
EXCL
®kupå-mo-Ùu, disaster-NEG-willing
≈uopåu-le: ≥u˙-®˙ å-®på-lå die-®e-k˙ Ùu, live.treasure-DEF:CL COP-LNK one-place-LOC DIR-die-go may ¿e-®ue-≤i,flfl
j˙-≤i, say-ADV
DIR-be.hungry- ADV
ÆÆå INT
ataÂ˙-s-lå: fast-NOM-DEF:CL
286
dz˙-≤i eat-ADV
kå-hån ≥u˙-®å, qå, ÷~u ≈ai®˙ qå ≤i©i INDEF:one-kind COP-HORT 1sg 2sg †(still.is) 1sg what
287
dz˙-≤i eat-ADV
≤i©i what
288
®˙t˚iån †time
¿å-ts˙-≥u˙≤i INT -this-TOP
289
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
˙-®˙-k˙i-hå.flfl DIR-put- NAR-PART
290
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
dz˙-t˚, eat-NOM
t®ek˙Â˙nla †(this.person)
291
he-t˚y-≤i, DIR-carry-LNK
292
stuåhå food
293
lez fate/destiny
294
¿å-tu,
¿å-ts˙i-≥u˙≤i INT -this.manner-TOP tu-wu-≤i DIR-discuss-ADV
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
¿å-tu-≥u˙≤i, INT-RESULT-TOP
t˚h˙-s eat-NOM
≤i©i what
®puthu® bamboo.tube
lou DEF:one:CL
¿a-ka:-Ùå INT -INDEF:one:CL-LOC
¿å-kå-hån INT -INDEF:one-kind
t˙-Ù˙-s-le: DIR-go-NOM -DEF:CL ¿å-ts˙
INT-RESULT INT -this
≈uån-t˚hiånmefi Huang Qianmen
we-kuai. exist-NAR ¿å-tse:-≥u˙≤i, INT -this:CL-TOP
295
≈ai®˙ genkuo-le:, genkuo-le: †(still.is) parrot-DEF:CL parrot-DEF:CL
då-t˚-k˙-kuai-stun, DIR-find-go- NAR-PART
296
¿å-tsu-≥u˙≤i INT -here-TOP
sån-jån, three-kind)
≤i †(2sg
ke give
guo 1sg
¿å-thu INT -there
Text 5: The Story of a Lazy Man 297
xs˙-hån three-kinds
thunt®˙ notify
298
Âm˙t®i-le: ≤i©i emperor-DEF:CL what
299
¿å-tu
dz˙-≤i eat-ADV
≤i©i what
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
dz˙, eat
¿å-kå-hån ≥u˙. INT -INDEF:one-kind COP
INT-RESULT 300
tu-p-Â˙-ku-®˙, DIR-do-CAUS -NAR-LNK
295
≈uån-t˚hiånmefi-le: thå-hån ¿å-ke Huang-Qianmen-DEF:CL that:one-kind INT-thus
≥u˙-ku˙-wå. COP-NAR -EMPH
-¿å-tu
301
INT-RESULT
Âm˙t®i-≥u˙≤i, emperor-TOP
302
då-t˚˙-m-≥u˙≤i DIR-find- NOM-TOP
303
qå-luq-te:-≥u˙≤i 1sg-seat-DEF:CL-TOP
304
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
j˙-ji say-CSM
ÆÆ¿å-tse: INT -this:CL
¿å-thå-≥u˙≤i, INT-there-TOP ÷~u 2sg
qå-tsi-le:-≥u˙≤i, 1sg-daughter-DEF:CL-TOP o-zu-n,flfl DIR-sit-2sg
≥u˙-wå. COP-EMPH
¿å-tsu qå-wu DIR-here 1sg- AGT
306
t˚iq inside
de-s-tå-≥u˙≤i say-NOM-LOC-TOP
Âm˙-lå-så name-DEF:one-CL
¿ålå
≈uån-t˚hiånmefi Huang-Qianmen
Âm˙-w-wå. call-VIS-EMPH
INT
de-t˚ say-NOM
(¿å-tsu INT -here
305
307
genkuo-le: parrot-DEF:CL
kopu-le:-≥u˙≤i, root-DEF:CL-TOP
kå-hån ≥u˙-w-tu.) INDEF:one-kind COP-VIS -LNK
≈uån-t˚hiånmefi, Huang-Qianmen qå 1sg då-m-å, DIR-forget-1sg ≈uån-t˚hiånmefi Huang-Qianmen
308
Âm˙-w call-VIS
309
t˚i-steke-lå most-back-LOC
310
¿å-kå-hån ≥u˙-w-tu, ¿å-tu Âm˙t®i-le:-t˚ INT-INDEF:one-kind COP-VIS -LNK INT-RESULT emperor-DEF:CL-GEN
≥u˙-tu, ¿åtå COP-LNK INT
Âm˙t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i emperor-DEF:CL-TOP
genkuo-le: parrot-DEF:CL
då-t˚-≤i DIR-find- ADV
296
Texts
311
tsi-le:-≥u˙≤i ≈uån-t˚hiånmefi-tå daughter-DEF:CL -TOP Huang-Qianmen-DAT
312
≈uån-t˚hiånmefi-≥u˙≤i Huang-Qianmen-TOP
Âm˙t®i emperor
313
tsi-le:-≥u˙≤i daughter-DEF:CL -TOP
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
314
¿å-thå INT -there
de-l-˙s, DIR-give-NOM
©Â˙-s, marry-NOM
dzu-s, sit-NOM
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
Âm˙t®i-le: emperor-DEF:CL
≥u˙-ku-tu. COP-NAR -LNK
Narrator: Yu Zelong Born 1960 Recorded 1996
The Story of a Lazy Man A long time ago there were two sisters. The husband of the older sister was the emperor (previously called /juånÙuåi/, now called /Âm˙t®i/). The younger sister had a son who was very lazy. Every day the mother would weigh out half a catty of wool and spin yarn. The son liked to drink liquor and often went to a restaurant in town to drink. When he returned, he often brought back half a catty of liquor for his mother. One day the older sister went to her younger sisterfls home and chatted with her. The younger sister told the older one, ÆÆMy son is very lazy.flfl One day the younger sisterfls son pretended to go to town but hid behind the door. The older and younger sister chatted inside and the son of the younger sister listened from behind the door. The two sisters spoke of the younger sisterfls son. This son had not gone to town, but was behind the door secretly listening. They said things like ÆÆMy son is very lazy.flfl The younger sisterfls son then said to his mother, ÆÆIflm back. Today I learned an ability.flfl The younger sister asked, ÆÆSon, what ability did you learn?flfl The son said, ÆÆWhat were you saying today at home? When I was in the restaurant in the center of town, I heard what you said (what you said, I learned to be able to hear it all).flfl The two sisters said, ÆÆWhat did we say?flfl The son of the younger sister said, ÆÆWhen I was in the restaurant in town, I heard you say this and that.flfl The younger sister said, ÆÆThatfls really how it was, son.flfl
Text 5: The Story of a Lazy Man
297
The older sisterfls husband was emperor. The younger sister then said, ÆÆIf my son has learned this kind of ability, it really is a good thing.flfl One day, the older sisterfls husband was preparing for his birthday. He bought three yak and tethered them inside a cowpen. The son of the younger sister, the one who said ÆÆI have learned an abilityflfl, at night stole the yaks and crossed the mountain and tethered them in a mountain cave. The emperor could not proceed with his birthday (celebration). The older sister said to her husband (the emperor), ÆÆMy younger sisterfls son has an ability. He can see in his dreams where something is. When he listens, he can hear.flfl This emperor had soldiers, and sent his soldiers to look for the lost yaks. After this person had stolen the yaks, he tied them in a cave on the mountain. He himself knew, and he was relaxed and carefree. Almost at the river embankment, the person searching said, a little faster. See if itfls possible to find [the yaks] a day or two ahead of time. [The one with an ability] brought a bamboo tube, and he himself asked on the bamboo tube and he himself answered (he asked himself and answered himself). One day, the older sisterfls husband (formerly called /juånÙuåi/ [emperor], now called /Âm˙t®i/ [emperor]) said, ÆÆIf one is able to go faster, then go a little faster. Those who can go tomorrow and can go fast must all go search.flfl In this manner he selected a propitious day, and after the propitious day was selected, notified people everywhere. ÆÆThose who can go, and who can hear all come here. We will hold a meeting, and all must come here.flfl On a cart this person [with an ability] used the bamboo tube to ask [the whereabouts of the yaks] on the day the meeting was held. On the cart he used the bamboo tube to ask where the emperorfls livestock had been lost. There he said, ÆÆAfter a thief took the livestock, he drove them up on the mountain and tethered them in a mountain cave. Quickly now go over that mountain.flfl Through the bamboo tube he himself answered and he himself asked. After asking, he said, ÆÆYou see, that thief stole them. Quickly cross over that mountain. They are there!flfl This child of the older sisterfls family, this familyfls soldiers and the other people went to look, and when they went to look, the livestock really was there. At this time, as for this person, well! The younger sisterfls sonfls reputation went up greatly. Whatever the older sisterfls husband ate, he ate; whatever the emperor drank, he drank. It was discussed and agreed in advance to provide for him this way. Thus, this personfls problems were solved. --Later, that time, the emperor of another place lost a ÆÆdzinflfl (also called a ÆÆjin.flfl A monkfls robe or ÆÆHuang Ma Guaflfl). After the emperor had lost the dzin, he was chatting with another person and learned about
298
Texts
(it). The emperor said, ÆÆ(I) must have this person go search. This person can dream or hear otherfls words. This person has much ability.flfl A person of this family took a message to him, and after taking him the message, he will find the emperorfls dzin. After this person finds the dzin, the emperor will provide for him. He set a time, he set a time of seven days. ÆÆWithin seven days he must find the emperorfls dzin in his dreams. The difficulty is great.flfl For seven days and seven nights this person ate and drank at the emperor's. After eating, one day, the emperor said to him, ÆÆAi! My dzin has been moved somewhere by someone.flfl One day, the son ate too much and went to the toilet to relieve himself. There was a cat which had moved some roof tiles on top of the toilet and hidden the emperorfls dzin among the tiles. When he went to look, he discovered the emperorfls dzin. He said, ÆÆThis brindled cat has done me a good deed,flfl and took the dzin from the cat. He counted seven tiles, and stood up seven rows vertically; he hid the emperorfls dzin there. At this time, the emperor said, ÆÆit will be a little difficult for you to find the dzin. I am willing to move to another place. How about that?flfl That person then said, ÆÆYou come tomorrowflfl (we say ÆÆsoqhu≤iflfl [tomorrow], and it can also be said ÆÆt˙p≤iflfl [tomorrow]). ÆÆTonight Iflll try to divine [its whereabouts], all right? Tomorrow Iflll notify you and notify those who can walk and who can hear to come. These people must all come.flfl To organize a meeting, this is how he spoke to the emperor. The next day, a meeting was held. He used the bamboo tube and asked himself and answered himself, where is the dzin. This person had them go look, counting out which roof tile in which row of tiles on which toilet. The emperorfls dzin was in fact there. After finding it, they notified the emperor, and the emperor said to him, ÆÆWhatever I eat, you eat; when I sit, you sit; when I stand, you stand.flfl In the end, he was even better provided for. -There was another emperor who lost (had stolen) a very expensive kind of parrot, perhaps for revenge. After losing it, this emperor who had lost the dzin told this person who had lost the parrot, ÆÆA dog barks in that direction. You have lost this kind of bird, and I have there (in my place) one of this kind of bird.flfl A person came here to search. When he went to search, those people set a time to feed this parrot. ÆÆThis parrot of mine isnflt a dead treasure, itfls a living treasure. It might starve to death someplace. If you can dream of it a little faster, see or hear it, do it a little faster for me. If you can find the parrot, you may rise and sit with me (as my equal) and like me eat what I eat, stand when I stand, sit when I sit.flfl The day he went to look for the parrot, he went to a place
Text 5: The Story of a Lazy Man
299
where Han people live and went to relieve himself. Where the Han people live, each family grew bamboo. By the roadside there was row after row of bamboo trees. There was a rope tied around a small stick attached to the parrotfls wing. The rope was wedged in the bamboo forest. This person couldnflt find a toilet, so he went to relieve himself beside the bamboo forest. While relieving himself, he heard the parrot calling in the bamboo forest. He said, ÆÆThis parrot has done a good thing for me,flfl and he caught the parrot. After catching it, he counted the rows of bamboo and put the parrot there. The emperor said, ÆÆMy living treasure might starve to death (it would be a disaster). Itfls a living treasure which may die someplace. If it could eat a little something as soon as possible, then like me, what I eat, you will eat.flfl After this, they set a time (came to an agreement on it), and this person brought up the bamboo tube. He used the tube to eat (earn his living). Perhaps he had this kind of luck. This person was called Huang Qianmen. Huang Qianmen brought the parrot back and said to the emperor, ÆÆYou must give me three things. These three things you must proclaim to the people.flfl In the end, Huang Qianmen lived just like the emperor. -This emperor said, ÆÆThe person who finds the parrot will marry my daughter and sit on my throne. (The Huang Qianmen I spoke of is the person I called ÆÆthis personflfl before. When I was talking before, I forgot his name. This personfls name is Huang Qianmen.) The emperor said, ÆÆTo the person who finds the parrot I will marry my daughter,flfl so Huang Qianmen married his daughter and became emperor.
Text 6 The Old Man of the Chen Family tsh˙nt˚å qåp˙ Chen.family old.man qefi long.ago
1
2
e: one:CL
3
¿å-tu
≥u˙-tu,
≥u˙-tu, COP-LNK
INT-RESULT
å-s˙-Ùå-≤i one-day-LOC-ADV
khu˙ ˚e-k˙i-tu, dog release-NAR -LNK
5
phåntsh˙-Ùå khu˙ traveling.expenses-LOC dog
6
¿å-tu,
7
INT-RESULT
Âo:pu-le: cave-DEF:CL
9
u-t˚u-k˙i-wå. DIR-see- NAR-EMPH
10
de-me-zde. DIR-NEG -hit
≤å COM
˚e-k, release-go
®q˙l-lå-≥u˙≤i below-LOC-TOP ÆÆhå, EXCL
¿å-ke INT -thus
khu˙ t˙-˚i-≤i dog DIR-release-ADV
t˙-˚i-≤i stuåhå DIR-release- ADV food
¿å-tu,
8
khu˙ dog
å-s˙-måqå one-day-each
å-s-Ùå-tu one-day-LOC-LNK
de-me-zde-k˙i, DIR-NEG -hit-NAR
qåp˙ old.man
˚e-k˙i-tu,118 release-NAR -LNK
khu˙ dog
4
INT-RESULT
tsh˙nt˚å Chen.family
COP-LNK
hå-q˙-k˙i-tu, DIR-go-NAR-LNK
t˚h˙-m, eat-NOM i©i anything
de-me-zde-kui-tu, DIR-NEG -hit-NAR-LNK b˙s-le: snake-DEF:CL p˙s-≥u˙≤i today-TOP
i©i l˙ anything also
k˙-Ùza-≤i, go-ought:1sg-ADV
¿å-k˙ INT-thus
11
x®u˚t˚u-le: k˙-q˙stå, empty.handed-DEF:CL go-not.as.good.as
12
å-phåu one-shot
13
å-phåu u-qhu-k˙i-tu, ¿å-tu jåutsan-le: one-shot DIR-shoot-NAR-LNK INT-RESULT man.eating.demon-DEF:CL
qhu-®å.flfl shoot-HORT
u-t˚u-jå-≤i DIR-see- CSM:1sg-ADV
j˙-k˙i. say-NAR
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family 14
≥u˙-k˙i, jåutsan-le: COP-NAR man.eating.demon-DEF:CL
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
15
å-phåu one-shot
16
g˙z n˙-q˙ti-kui. g˙z n˙-q˙ti-kui-tu. the:-≥u˙≤i strangle(n.) DIR-kill-NAR strangle(n.) DIR-kill-NAR-LNK 3sg-TOP
17
juånÙuåi, (pit˚-≥u˙≤i emperor now-TOP
18
ÆÆjuånÙuåiflfl emperor
19
®pu-ku-wå), ¿å-tu, call-NAR -EMPH INT-RESULT
20
t˙-pian-thå-ji ≥u˙-kui-wå. ...... ...... Âm˙t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i DIR-change-AUX-CSM COP-NAR -EMPH emperor-DEF:CL-TOP
21
ÆÆmefi seek
22
≥u˙-≤i COP-ADV
23
t˙-di-n?flfl j˙-≤i, ÆÆdi ¿o-t®hup-≤i di DIR-sick-2sg say-ADV sick DIR-cure-ADV sick
24
må-l˙,
qhu-k˙i-tu, shoot-NAR-LNK
≥u˙-k˙i-tu. COP-NAR -LNK
301
k˙ go
Âm˙, call
t˚he,flfl want
25
≥u˙-tu, COP-LNK
ÆÆÂm˙t®iflfl emperor Âm˙t®i emperor
¿å-tu,
®pi-® call-LNK
q˙:fi-≥u˙≤i before-TOP
lå≈-Ùå ÆÆjuånÙuåiflfl DEF:one:kind-LOC emperor
jåutsan-le:-≥u˙≤i man.eating.demon-DEF:CL-TOP
j˙-≤i say-ADV
(håtu) t˙-di?flfl INT DIR-sick
NEG -able INT-RESULT
jåutsan-le:-≥u˙≤i man.eating.demon-DEF:CL-TOP
he-˚i-kui. ...... ...... DIR-send-NAR ®påqtå pretend
¿o-p’u-k˙i, DIR-do-NAR
ÆÆ≤i≈uå why ÆÆ≤i©i what
u-x®u DIR-recover
di u-x®u må-l˙ kå-hån sick DIR-recover NEG -able INDEF:one-kind
÷~u ≤i©i ≥u˙-s ≥u˙-≥uå?flfl 2sg what COP-NOM COP-Q
¿å-tu, INT-RESULT
26
t˙-kefil-k˙-kui, Âm˙t®i-le:-wu, DIR-ask-go-NAR emperor-DEF:CL-AGT
Âm˙t®i-le:-wu emperor-DEF:CL-AGT
27
t˙-kefil kå-hån ≥u˙-kui-tu, ÆÆ¿a, qå DIR-ask INDEF:one-kind COP-NAR -LNK EXCL 1sg
tsh˙nt˚å Chen.family
302
Texts
28
qåp˙-t˚ old.man-GEN
29
dÂ˙-wå,flfl able-EMPH
®p˙l ≤å kidney COM j˙-kui. say-NAR
¿å-tu, INT-RESULT
30
guefi army
he-˚i-≤i DIR-send-ADV
31
mefi seek
he-˚i-kui-st~u. DIR-send-NAR-PART he-˚i-kui DIR-send
32
33
tsh˙nt˚å Chen.family
34
qåp˙-t˚ old.man
35
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
36
37
©Â˙-jy, able-ASP ¿å-k˙ INT -thus
38
a, EXCL
˚t˚i:mi heart
s˙-dza-tu, DIR-eat:1sg-LNK
Âm˙t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i emperor-DEF:CL-TOP
tsh˙nt˚å Chen.family
jå-tu, INT -LNK
qåp˙ old.man
¿å-tu,
tse:-≥u˙≤i this:CL-TOP
INT-RESULT
qåp˙ old.man
t˚˙u-thå-t˚, save-AUX-GEN (goal)
t®i-≥u˙≤i male/son-TOP
tsh˙ntit˚h˙n, Chen.Diqing
tsh˙nt˚å Chen.family ¿ålå INT
qåp˙-≥u˙≤i old.man-TOP
t˙-suå-≤i DIR-divine-ADV
tsh˙nt˚å Chen.family
su˙suå divine(the.future) dÂuk’u knowledge
su˙suå ©Â˙-≤i ÆÆqå ¿å-k˙ mefiÂ, divine able-ADV 1sg INT-thus seek qå-t®i, 1sg-son
÷~u-≥u˙≤i 2sg-TOP
då-©z˙-n, DIR-set.out-2sg
39
fånt®˙n®˙ Âm˙t®i †(anyway.is) emperor
tsoqpi this:family
40
do-≈lu DIR-escape
41
b˙s-le: jopu-le: ®q˙-lå snake-DEF:CL cliff-DEF:CL below-LOC
42
u-t˚yå-påqtå ¿åtå DIR-see:1sg- LNK(after) INT
må-l˙-jya, NEG -able-ASP:1sg
de-le, DIR-exist
¿åt˙-≥u˙≤i, INT -TOP qå-≥u˙≤i 1sg-TOP
j˙på-q-tå-≥u˙≤i hand-top-LOC-TOP
¿å-thå-s-Ùå INT -that:one-day-LOC
tse:-≥u˙≤i, this:CL-TOP
¿å-tsoqpi-wu INT -this:family-AGT
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family 43
44
45
qå 1sg
mefiÂ-l˙ seek-come
t˚he, want
s˙-m˙-dz˙-s-te:-wu, DIR-NEG -eat-NOM-DEF:CL -if ¿å-tså-≈ui-≥u˙≤i, INT -this:one-time-TOP
46
dÂ˙-t˚efiwu able-AMP119:all
47
j˙på-q hand-top
48
ik˙ thus
j˙-≤i say-ADV
50
nai-e-tshin-Ùå other-one-village-LOC
51
¿ålå ≥u˙-tu, COP-LNK
¿åtå
tsh˙ntit˚hin Chen.Diqing
¿ålå INT
÷~u 2sg
COM
˚t˚i:mi heart
du-πu DIR-run.away
qå-≥u˙≤i tsoqpi 1sg-TOP this:family må-l-jyå.flfl NEG -able-ASP:1sg
du-πu, DIR-run.away
nai-e-tshin-Ùå other-one-village-LOC
då-qå DIR-go
≤å
thå-hån ≥u˙-®, that:one-kind COP-LNK
INT
¿å-m˙-Ù˙-®˙ DIR-NEG -go-LNK
du-πu-≤i run.away- ADV
INT
®p˙l kidney
du-πu-n-på, DIR-run.away-2sg- DTV
49
52
qå 1sg
303
t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i son-DEF:CL-TOP
i-p˙-k˙i-wå, DIR-arrive-NAR-EMPH
i-p˙-k˙i-tu, DIR-arrive-NAR-LNK då-qå DIR-go
då-qå-tu DIR-go-LNK
då-qå-tu, DIR-go-LNK ¿ålå INT
die-®e-m-le: DIR-die-NOM-DEF:CL
53
Âi-kui, wut˚upu-le:-≥u˙≤i die-®e-kui, exist-NAR husband-DEF:CL -TOP DIR-die-NAR
54
die-®e-kui-tu, DIR-die-NAR-LNK
¿å-tu, INT-RESULT
¿ål˙ there
wut˚upu-le:-≥u˙≤i husband-DEF:CL -TOP
lokun lokun sworn.brother sworn.brother
55
ph˙nj˙u ¿e-se ≥u˙. t˚å-lå tshå-lå-Ùå-≥u˙≤i friend DIR-make(friends) COP where-LOC village-LOC-LOC-TOP
56
ÆÆ¿å-ts˙i INT -this.manner
lokun sworn.brother
¿e-sefi-®, DIR-make(friends):1pl-LNK
304
Texts
57
¿å-ts˙i INT -this.manner
58
¿e-se-kui-wå. ÆÆha, DIR-make(friends)- NAR-EMPH EXCL
59
fånt®˙n®˙ thå-hån shenÂ˙ b˙l˙-s †(anyway.is) that:one-kind birthday make-NOM
60
j˙-≤i, say-ADV
61
≤å COM
¿e-sefi.flfl DIR-make(friends):1pl
¿å-ke: INT -INDEF:CL
¿å-ts˙i-≥u˙≤i INT -this.manner-TOP tse: this:CL
t˙-b˙l-kui. DIR-make-NAR
≥u˙,flfl ik˙ COP thus
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
≈u goods
thå-hån kuån-thå-m ˙zzi Âi-kui. ¿å-tu that:one-kind manage- AUX-NOM a.few exist-NAR INT-RESULT
62
thå-hån af˙fiali må-t®h˙-t˚ that:one-kind †(least.amount) NEG -lack-GEN
63
¿å-tu-≥u˙≤i, ÆÆku≤åts˙ ≤å stump˙t®e120-≥u˙≤i, tså INT-RESULT-TOP close.relatives COM relatives-TOP here
64
å-lå DIR-come
t˚he, want
÷~u-≥u˙≤i 2sg-TOP
å-®på one-place
k˙ go
l˙ also
¿e-me-se,flfl DIR-NEG -allow
66
¿ål˙ there
˙-lå-k˙i-wå. DIR-come-NAR-EMPH
67
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
¿ålå-≥u˙≤i ˙-lå-k˙i-tu, t®i-≥u˙≤i tsh˙npe-khunpe. there-TOP DIR-come-LNK son-TOP smart-capable
¿ålå-≥u˙≤i there-TOP
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
≈u. goods
65
68
j˙-kui. say-NAR
lå≈uilai †(take.back)
j˙-kui-tu, say-NAR-LNK
˙-lå-k˙i-tu, DIR-come-NAR-LNK
≈ai®˙ tåul˙ t˚i kuo jue ®˙≈˙u †(still.is arrive few CL month time/when)
69
i-j˙-˚ one-two-month
pe-tu, become-LNK
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
70
louqpi-wu mefiÂ˙-kui-wå. DEF:one:family-AGT seek-NAR-EMPH
¿å-tså INT -this
Âm˙t®i emperor
Âm˙t®i emperor
tsoqpi-wu this:family-AGT
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family 71
72
mefiÂ˙-kui-tu, seek-NAR-LNK
ÆÆa! EXCL
¿e-me-se,
qå-≥u˙≤i 1sg-TOP
kå:,flfl go:PRS
DIR-NEG -allow
305
må-k NEG -go
¿ålå INT
73
s˙tsim-le:-tå-≥u˙≤i, ÆÆa! wife-DEF:CL-LOC-TOP EXCL
74
≥u˙-®, qå-≥u˙≤i må-k ¿e-me-se-®, ¿å-tu-≥u˙≤i COP-LNK 1sg- TOP NEG -go DIR-NEG -allow-LNK INT-RESULT-TOP
75
t®i son
76
l˙©z å:-su-k-wå. book DIR: INDTV-study-go-DTV
77
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
78
nai other
79
hani-p le-≤i ¿å-tu qå tå:-mefiÂ-l˙-wå,flfl twelve-year exist-LNK INT-RESULT 1sg INDTV-seek-come-DTV
80
j˙-jy. say-ASP
≥u˙≤i
¿å-tu
ÆÆÂm˙-≥u˙≤i thånkhemu name-TOP Thånkhemu
81
pe-tu become-LNK
i©i anything t®i son
≥u˙-tu, COP-LNK
qå 1sg
thå-hån that:one-kind
˚t˚˙-p seven-years tsi daughter
82
ÆÆthånkhemu-≥u˙≤i Thånkhemu-TOP
83
l˙©z book
84
i-p˙-l-≤i DIR-return-come-ADV
85
xs˙ new(again)
le-≤i exist-ADV
pe-tu, become-LNK
mefiÂ˙-l˙ seek-come
pe-tu become-LNK
me-t˚hi, NEG -want
®˙÷˙fisui †(twelve.years.old)
s˙tsim-le:-tå-≥u˙≤i wife-DEF:CL-LOC-TOP
TOP
INT-RESULT
qå 1sg
˙-≈te-jy, DIR-exhort-ASP
˙-®p˙-n-på,flfl j˙-jy, DIR-call-2sg-DTV say-ASP
¿å-ts˙i ˙-®p˙-n-på, ¿å-tu INT -this.manner DIR-call-2sg-DTV INT-RESULT
u-su-≤i DIR-study-ADV
˚t˚˙-p le-≤i, seven-year exist-ADV qå 1sg
k˙-≥u˙-tu thus-COP-LNK
ta:-mefiÂ-wå.flfl ¿å-tu, DIR: INDTV-seek-DTV INT-RESULT
nai-e-f˙n-Ùå ≈ai®˙ other-one-CL-LOC †(still.is)
mefiÂ˙-l˙-m-≥u˙≤i seek-come-NOM-TOP
306 86
Texts
steke-lå behind-LOC
˙-dzå-lu-kui. DIR-chase-come-NAR
˙-dzå-lu-kui-tu, DIR-chase-come-NAR-LNK
87
88
k˙-j˙-k˙i-tu, go-REP-NAR-LNK
89
≥u˙≤i TOP
90
nai-å-®påq-tå, other-one-place-LOC
wut˚upu husband
die-®e-m-le:-tå
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
91
pe-≤i, become-ADV
qe:fi before
92
tu-tsu-j˙-k˙i. DIR-meet- REP-NAR
93
¿å-≥u˙≤i INT -TOP
94
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
95
¿å-th˙ INT -there
96
i-p˙-l-j˙-kui ÆÆt®i DIR-arrive-come-REP -NAR son
97
t˚he-wå, want-DTV me-t˚he-wå, le-≤i exist-ADV
¿å-ke: INT -INDEF:CL
tu-tsu-j˙-k˙i-tu, DIR-meet- REP-NAR-LNK ¿å-lå-hån-≥u˙≤i, INT -DEF:one-kind-TOP
˙-m˙-lå-Â DIR-NEG -come-CAUS
˙-lå-k˙i-tu, DIR-come-NAR-LNK
NEG -want-DTV 99
¿å-ke: INT -INDEF:CL
tsi daughter t®i son l˙©z book
wut˚upu husband
¿å-ke: INT -INDEF:CL
®pa®pa same.way
≈u-pån-thå-luo, goods-manage-AUX-perhaps thu there
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
die-®e-m-le:-tå, DIR-die-NOM-DEF:CL -LOC
DIR-die-NOM-DEF:CL -LOC
98
≈ai®˙ du-πu-≤i †(still.is) DIR-run.away-ADV
mo-Ùu-j˙-kui. NEG -willing-REP-NAR
xs˙ mefiÂ˙-l˙-m new(again) seek-come-NOM pe-tu, qå become-LNK 1sg
pe-tu, become-LNK pe-tu, become-LNK
mefiÂ-l˙ seek-come mefiÂ-l˙ seek-come
¿ålå INT
å:-su-ku, DIR: INDTV-study-go:EMPH
˚t˚˙-p seven.years hody-p ten-year
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family 100
le-≤i exist-ADV
qå ta:-mefiÂ-l˙-wå,flfl 1sg DIR: INDTV-seek-come-DTV
101
j˙-kui-tu. say-NAR-LNK ¿å-tu
102
thånkhemu ≤å Thånkhemu COM
INT-RESULT 103
pe-kui, ¿å-tu, become-NAR INT-RESULT
104
≈ai®˙, †(still.is)
105
j˙-≈uå, ÆÆep-te: mefi say-because father-DEF:CL seek
106
j˙-≈uå say-because
¿å-thå ÆÆep-te: INT-there father-DEF:CL
då-©z-≤i DIR-set.out-ADV
mefi kå:,flfl seek go:PRS:1sg kå:,flfl go:PRS:1sg
då-qå DIR-go
TOP
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
likhemu j˙-ze wu t®i Likhemu two-CL all son
å-s-Ùå-≥u˙≤i one-day-LOC-TOP
≥u˙≤i
307
då-qå-k˙i-tu, DIR-go-NAR-LNK
107
bå-la:-Ùå e-t®epe-k˙i. ¿å-tu flat.area.on.side.of.hill-DEF:CL-LOC DIR-encounter- NAR INT-RESULT
108
tsh˙ntit˚hin-≥u˙≤i Chen.Diqing-TOP
109
då-q˙-k˙i-tu, DIR-go-NAR-LNK
110
thånkhemu-≥u˙≤i Thånkhemu-TOP
111
t˙-kefil-k˙i-tu, DIR-ask-NAR-LNK
112
t˚å where
113
mefi seek
ep father ¿ålå INT
gue:fi-tå-≥u˙≤i road-LOC-TOP
ep-le: mefiÂ˙-k father-DEF:CL seek-go e-t®epe-k˙i. DIR-encounter- NAR
t˙-kefil-k˙i. DIR-ask-NAR ÆÆ÷~u 2sg
kå:-n-å?flfl go:PRS--2sg-Q kå:flfl go:PRS:1sg
≥u˙-w, COP-VIS
thånkhemu Thånkhemu
t˚å kå:-n-å?flfl where go:PRS-2sg-Q j˙-kui-tu. say-NAR-LNK
j˙-kui. say-NAR
ÆÆ÷~u 2sg
j˙-kui, say-NAR
ÆÆha, EXCL
qå 1sg
ÆÆ÷~u 2sg ep father
ep ≤i©i Âm˙-wå?flfl father what call-Q
308
Texts
114
j˙-tu, say-LNK
115
thånkhemu Thånkhemu
¿å-ts˙ INT -this
116
÷~u 2sg
117
må-sun-®˙flfl NEG -consider-LNK
118
119
120
tsh˙ntit˚hin ≥u˙-≥uå,flfl121 Chen.Diqing COP-VIS :1sg
ÆÆqå-ep 1sg-father
ÆÆep l˙ father also
qå må-sun-®˙,flfl 1sg NEG -consider-LNK
ik˙ thus
j˙-kui-tu, say-NAR-LNK
ne-quåq-kei-tu, DIR-fight-NAR-LNK
˙-z˙ ˙-d-®å,flfl one-CL DIR-rest- HORT
≤å COM
tsh˙ntit˚hin Chen.Diqing j˙-kui, say-NAR
≥u˙, COP
ÆÆqå 1sg
n˙-quåq-t˚˙-i. DIR-fight-3pl-HS
thånkhemu-≥u˙≤i Thånkhemu-TOP
qu˙quå ma-qafi, ÷~u fight NEG -ought:1pl 2sg
j˙-ji. say-CSM
qå 1sg
ÆÆa, EXCL
÷~u 2sg
qu˙quå fight
j˙-kui. å-z˙ say-NAR one-CL
hai EXCL
≤å
qå 1sg
COM
ma-qafi, NEG -ought:1pl
˙-d-tu, DIR-rest- LNK
¿ålå INT
121
å-z˙ ˙-d-≤iant˚i, thånkhemu-j˙ ba-k˙i-®˙, ¿ålå one-CL DIR-rest-after Thånkhemu-†(TOP) big-NAR-LNK INT
122
t˙-kefil-kui, DIR-ask-NAR
likhemu Likhemu
123
likhemu-≥u˙≤i Likhemu-TOP
124
thånkhemu-≥u˙≤i, ÆÆ÷~u ≤å qå Thånkhemu-TOP 2sg COM 1sg
125
thå-hån ep that:one-kind father
126
≥u˙-k-å:fi-t˚i? COP-INF -PRS:1pl-Q
127
j˙-kui. say-NAR
ÆÆ≤i:ts˙i WH .kind
t˙-kefil-kui-tu, DIR-ask-NAR-LNK ≥u˙-Âå:?flfl COP-CAUS :PRS:1pl
mefiÂe:fi, seek:1pl ta, INT
¿å-thu-≥u˙≤i, INT -there-TOP
¿ålå INT
j˙-kui-®˙. say-NAR-LNK
j˙-ze wu ts˙i-≥u˙≤i two-CL all this.manner-TOP ep-te: father-DEF:CL
i˚t˚i-≥u˙≤i together-TOP
k˙nti jointly k˙-®å,flfl go-HORT
qu˙quå fight
e: one:CL
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family 128
a-≈˙-≤i DIR-stop-LNK
130
då-q˙-k˙i-hå. DIR-go-NAR-PART
då-qå DIR-go
129
309
då-qå DIR-go
då-q˙-tu, DIR-go-LNK
¿ålå INT
xs˙-t˚i-la:-Ùå ˙-w˙i-j˙-k˙i god-house(temple)-DEF:CL-LOC DIR-stay/live-REP-NAR
ha, INT
131
˙-w˙i-j˙-k˙i-tu, ¿å-tu ÆÆthe: maha-≥u˙≤i tsh˙nt˚å DIR-stay/live-REP-NAR-LNK INT-RESULT 3sg night- TOP Chen.family
132
qåpå old.man
133
¿ålå INT
≤å
tsh˙ntit˚hin-t˚˙ Chen.Diqing-GEN
COM
xs˙-t˚i god-house
pienå beside
kuåntåus˙je, ¿ålå-≥u˙≤i sword.and.bow INT-TOP
t˙-®u˙-j˙, DIR-hide-REP
134
s˙π’u-le:-pienå t˙-®u˙-j˙ ke: tree-DEF:CL-beside DIR-hide-REP INDEF:CL
135
j˙-ji. say-HS
136
137
ÆÆha,
≤i:-ke: WH -INDEF:CL ¿å-k˙ INT -thus
÷~u, 2sg
EXCL
u-Âmu-å-wå,flfl DIR-dream-1sg-EMPH
qå-tut® 1sg-younger.brother
u-Âmu-n-å?flfl j˙-i-tu, DIR-dream-2sg-Q say-HS-LNK
u-Âmu-å. DIR-dream-1sg
¿å-k˙ that.manner
a,
ta,
EXCL
INT
kuåntåus˙je sword.and.bow
ÆÆa, EXCL
÷~u ≤å 2sg COM
qå l˙ 1sg also qå a-q˙s 1sg one-form
138
we-k-å:fi-t˚i? exist-INF-PRS:1pl-Q
139
u-Âmu-å-®˙, tsh˙n-≥u˙≤i ¿å-thå xs˙-t˚i-le:-pienå-≥u˙≤i DIR-dream-1sg-LNK Chen-TOP INT-there god-house-DEF:CL-beside-TOP
140
ÂoÙu-pienå-lå w˙tsh˙i-le:-tå ¿å-l-≤i courtyard-beside-LOC wild.prickly.ash-DEF:CL-LOC DIR-look- ADV
141
¿å-ke-ze INT -INDEF-CL
Âi-j˙ exist-REP
k˙ thus
¿å-ts˙i-ke: INT -this.manner-INDEF:CL
u-Âmu-å-wå,flfl DIR-dream-1sg-EMPH
310 142
143
144
Texts
j˙-ji. say-CSM
¿å-tu
då-q˙-k˙i-tu, DIR-go-NAR-LNK
INT-RESULT
Ùåt˚hi really
¿ålå INT
gue:fi-le:-pienå-≥u˙≤i road-DEF:CL-beside-TOP
s˙π-l˙-jin-t®å tree-DEF-few-CL
we-s-tå-≥u˙≤i exist-NOM-LOC-TOP
145
ts˙-le: water(river)-DEF:CL
146
a-i one-time
då-q˙-k˙i-tu, DIR-go-NAR-LNK
¿ålå
≈qåts˙imi-le: spring.water-DEF:CL
147
INT
¿ålå INT
lu-ji, come(flow)-HS ¿å INT
ts˙ water
¿e-˚pi-kei, DIR-thirsty-NAR
ts˙ ¿e-˚pi-k˙i-tu, water DIR-thirsty-NAR-LNK ¿å-l˙-kui. DIR-come-NAR
148
¿å-tu-≥u˙≤i, INT-RESULT-TOP
thånkhemu-≥u˙≤i Thånkhemu-TOP
149
t˙-mefiÂ-k˙i-tu, DIR-seek- NAR-LNK
150
ts˙ water
151
˙-≈˙-n, DIR-stop-2sg
152
s˙-t˚-lå, ¿å-tu s˙-t˚h-≤i DIR-drink- INDTV:1sg INT-RESULT DIR-drink- ADV
153
die-me-®a-tu, DIR-NEG -die:1sg-LNK
¿ål˙-≥u˙≤i, ÷~u INT -TOP 2sg
154
˙-t˚h˙-n-på. DIR-drink-2sg-DTV
nai other
155
÷~u 2sg
¿ålå there
då-t˚-k˙i-tu, DIR-find- NAR-LNK qå 1sg
ts˙ water ts˙ water
då-t˚-k˙i, DIR-find- NAR
ÆÆlikhemu, Likhemu
÷~u-≥u˙≤i 2sg-TOP
tuwå-le:-≥u˙≤i older.brother-DEF:CL-TOP
t˚å-t˚hi-n-på,flfl NEG.IMP-drink-2sg-DVT
qå 1sg
t˚h˙ drink
qe:fi before qå 1sg
l˙ also die-®a-tu, DIR-die:1sg-LNK
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family 156
j˙-kui-tu, thå-≈ui-tu, say-NAR-LNK that:one-time-LNK
157
s˙-t˚-k˙i-tu DIR-drink- NAR-LNK
¿ålå
158
¿a-que-ji-le: DIR-cover-CSM-DEF:CL
tu-tsu-k˙i, DIR-encouter- NAR
159
¿å-tu
e:!
INT-RESULT EXCL 160
161
thånkhemu Thånkhemu
s˙-t˚-k˙i, DIR-drink- NAR
Âåwå-®˙pan-le: stone-†stone.slab-DEF:CL
INT
tsh˙nt˚å qåpå Chen.family old.man
≤å
tsh˙ntit˚hin Chen.Diqing
COM
kuåntåus˙je sword.and.bow
¿ålå INT
¿e-le-≤i DIR-pack-ADV
®˙-Â˙-kui exist-CAUS-NAR
ha,
pånå thing
qu˙qua-s fight-NOM
pånå, thing
INT 162
kånt˚hi, club
163
thå-hån, ¿å-lå-≈ui-tu, thånkhemu-≥u˙≤i that:one-kind INT-DEF:one-time-LNK Thånkhemu-TOP
164
o-qu s˙-t˚-k˙i, ¿ålå ®˙pån-le: ˚a-la: one-mouthful DIR-drink- NAR INT stone.slab-DEF:CL small-DEF:CL
165
t˙-qe-k˙i-tu. ˚a-la:-ji DIR-lift-NAR-LNK small-DEF:CL -EXC
166
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
¿å-thå INT -there
311
j˙-kui-®˙, say-NAR-LNK
168
j˙-ze two-CL
170
t˙-tsi DIR-lift
ts˙ water
må-l˙-k˙i, NEG -able-NAR
ÆÆlikhemu l˙ ˙-t˚h˙-n qå-tut®u ˙-t˚h˙-n,flfl Likhemu also DIR-drink-2sg 1sg-little.brother DIR-drink-2sg
167
169
®˙-Â˙-kui-tu, exist-CAUS-NAR-LNK
wu all
s˙-t˚-tu, DIR-drink- LNK u-≈su, DIR-jump
t˙-tsi-k˙i-tu,
¿ålå
DIR-lift-NAR-LNK
INT
¿å-lå-≈ui-tu, INT -DEF:one-time-LNK u-≈su-≤i DIR-jump-ADV
å-thån one-trip
˚a-la:-ji small-DEF:CL -EXC
t˙-me-qe-k˙i, ha, a-th˙n s˙-t˚i-t˚-®å, DIR-NEG -lift-NAR EXCL one-time DIR-CON- drink-LNK
å-th˙n one-time
312 171
172
Texts
s˙-t˚i-t˚-k˙i, DIR-CON- drink-NAR
¿å-lå-≈ui-tu, INT -DEF:one-time-LNK
t˙-qe-≤iåufu,
¿å-thå
tsh˙nt˚å qåp˙ ≤å Chen.family old.man COM
DIR-turn.over-LNK(as.soon.as) INT-there 173
tsh˙ntit˚hin-wu Chen.Diqing-AGT
pån˙ thing
t˙-®u˙-j˙, DIR-hide-CSM
174
¿å-lå-hån ¿ålå i-le-≤i INT-DEF: one-kind there DIR-pack-ADV
175
t˙-xt®e-k˙i, DIR-take.out- NAR
176
då-q˙-k˙i. DIR-go-NAR
a-i one-time
gue:fi-gu≈u-lå road-upper.part- LOC
178
sin-le:-tå lion-DEF:CL-LOC
179
¿ål˙ there ≤å COM
®˙-kui, ¿å-tu exist-NAR INT-RESULT he-t˚y-≤i DIR-carry-ADV ¿ålå INT
xs˙-t˚i-le:-Ùå god-house-DEF:CL-LOC ¿å-l-≤i DIR-look- ADV
tsh˙nt˚å Chen.family
kuåntåus˙je sword.and.bow
INT
då-q˙-k˙i-tu, DIR-go-NAR-LNK
Âi-kui-tu, exist-NAR-LNK
Âi-kui-wå, exist-NAR-EMPH
ÆÆha
qå 1sg
INT
qåp˙-t˚ old.man-GEN
181
qap head
¿a-Ùu-n, 122 DIR-throw-2sg
182
qap head
¿a-t˚i-Ùu-n, DIR-NEG.IMP-throw-2sg
183
˙-z˙-n, DIR-eat-2sg
nai other
184
¿ålå there
¿å-Ùu-n,flfl DIR-throw-2sg
qap head
¿å
t˙-xt®e-≤i DIR-take.out- ADV
177
180
s˙-t˚, ®˙pån DIR-drink stone.slab
sin lion
t˚ile-t˚ 1pl-GEN
¿å INT
tsh˙ntit˚hin Chen.Diqing
sin lion
≥u˙-n-®å COP-2sg-LNK
må-≥u˙-n-®å, tu NEG -COP-2sg-LNK RESULT t˚ile 1pl sin lion j˙-kui. say-NAR
dzå:-n-®å, eat:PRS-2sg-LNK ≥u˙-n-tu, COP-2sg-LNK ¿ålå there
≥u˙-≤i, COP-ADV
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family 185
186
qap head
¿a-Ùu-kui, DIR-throw-NAR
≥u˙-tu,
187
då-q˙-k˙i-wå. DIR-go-NAR-EMPH
188
då-q˙-k˙i-tu, DIR-go-NAR-LNK
190
pe-m become-NOM
the-wu that-ABL
192
tsh˙nt˚å Chen.family
193
demi Demi
sin lion
sin lion INT-RESULT
¿å-tu ¿åtå
jautsan man.eating.demon
thånkhemu Thånkhemu
INT
tsh˙nt˚å Chen.family qåp˙-≥u˙≤i old.man-TOP
ha-xt®e-≤i DIR-take.out- ADV
195
¿ålå t˙-pian-thå-k˙i, INT DIR-change-AUX-NAR
196
gånts˙ saddle
≈uå-m sell-NOM
197
gånts˙ saddle
≈uå-m sell-NOM ≤å COM
≤å COM
qåp˙, old.man
likhemu, Likhemu
tsh˙ntit˚hin-≥u˙≤i, Chen.Diqing-TOP
qe:fi jit˚in jautsan before †(already) man.eating.demon
pe-m-le:-wu become-NOM-DEF:CL-AGT
thånkhemu Thånkhemu
t˙-q˙t®i-≤i DIR-ride-ADV
Âm˙t®i-le:-t˚˙, emperor-DEF:CL-GEN
INT-RESULT
194
¿ål˙ there
t˙-q˙t®i-≤i DIR-ride-ADV
¿å-tu
¿å-tse:-≥u˙≤i, INT -this:CL-TOP
191
198
¿a-Ùu-kui-tu, DIR-throw-NAR-LNK
kuåntåus˙je sword.and.bow
COP-LNK
189
qap head
313
®p˙l kidney
jit˚in the-x®epi-Ùå †(already) that-side-LOC thå there
¿ålå there
≤å COM
˚t˚i:mi heart
˙-Ùå-s-tå DIR-go-NOM -LOC
t˙-piån-thå-≤iånt˚i, DIR-change-AUX-after
Âi-k˙i. exist-NAR
thå there likhemu-≥u˙≤i Likhemu-TOP
Âi-k˙i-tu, exist-NAR-LNK ¿å-thå INT -there
¿ålå INT
mefiÂ-k˙ seek-go
314
Texts
199
hå-qå. DIR-go
200
t˚h˙ntit˚hin Chen.Diqing
mefi seek
hå-qå-tu, DIR-go-LNK
201
qåp˙-≥u˙≤i old.man-TOP
¿ålå there
t˙-piån-thå, DIR-change-AUX
202
¿ålå INT
tsh˙ntit˚hin Chen.Diqing
gånts˙-≥u˙≤i ¿ålå saddle-TOP INT
203
¿o-®u DIR-wash.clean
204
gånts˙ saddle
hå-q˙-k˙-wå. DIR-go-INF-EMPH ¿ålå
t˙-piån-thå-tu, DIR-change-AUX-LNK
¿å-th˙ INT-there ˙-t˚-k˙i, DIR-stop-NAR
¿å-®˙-t˚, DIR-put- GEN t˙-b˙l-≤iånt˚i DIR-make-after
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
205
thånkhemu ≤å Thånkhemu COM
206
¿o-tsu-ji-la:-Ùå ¿ålå, ÆÆ÷ile t˚å: ka:-i-wå?flfl DIR-stand.up- CSM-DEF:CL-LOC there 2pl where: LOC go:PRS-2pl-Q
207
j˙-tu, say-LNK
208
j˙-kui. say-NAR
209
ÆÆt˚ile 1pl
gants˙ saddle
EXCL
ÆÆa,
t˚ile 1pl
210
¿å-®-®å. DIR-put- HORT
211
j˙-ji. say-HS
¿å-tu
i-p˙-k-tu, DIR-arrive-go-LNK
tsh˙ntit˚hin Chen.Diqing
ÆÆa,
EXCL
212
likhemu Likhemu
tsh˙nt˚å Chen.family
INT
sin le-tue-tå lion DEF-pair-LOC
k˙ thus
≈uå-m ¿ål˙ sell-NOM there
mefiÂ-k˙ seek-go
mefi seek
¿ålå Ùo-men INT city-gate
lefi-wå,flfl come:1pl-EMPH
på:-ji-≥uå?flfl buy:PRS-2pl-Q
sin-la:-Ùå lion-DEF:CL-LOC nai other ¿å-®-k˙i,
mo-≈o®u-tu NEG -fit-LNK
≈o®u-®˙ fit-LNK må-p˙fi-wå,flfl NEG -buy:1pl-EMPH
¿å-®-k˙i-tu,
INT-RESULT DIR-put- NAR DIR-put- NAR-LNK
t˙-®-≤ike DIR-grow-after
tu
j˙-kui-tu. say-NAR-LNK
qhuåt as.it.happens
te-qe me-t˚hi, ¿å-ts˙i RESULT DIR-reveal NEG -want INT -this.manner
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family
315
213
t˙-®-≤ike ¿å-k˙ pe-kui, ¿å-tu thånkhemu ≤å DIR-grow-after INT -thus become-NAR INT-RESULT Thånkhemu COM
214
likhemu-≥u˙≤i Likhemu-TOP
215
he-t˚y-≤i DIR-carry-ADV
218
t˙-qt®i-≤i DIR-ride-ADV
kuåntåus˙je sword.and.bow
˙-qå-k˙i. DIR-go-NAR
˙-qå-tu, DIR-go-LNK
216
217
sin lion
¿å-tu
jåutsan man.eating.demon
INT-RESULT
wut˚upu-≥u˙≤i husband-TOP
¿ålå
titåu †tunnel
INT
¿å-ts˙i INT -this.manner
t˙-xkue-≤i DIR-dig- ADV
˙-®-jy-kui-wå, DIR-put- ASP-NAR-EMPH
219
tsh˙ntit˚hin-t˚˙ Chen.Diqing-GEN
220
t®i thånkhemu male/son Thånkhemu
guefi-≤å army-COM
221
tsh˙ntit˚hin Chen.Diqing
222
n˙-quå-k˙i-wå, DIR-fight-NAR-EMPH
≤å COM
≥u˙-tu, COP-LNK
INT-RESULT
steke behind
224
guefi-≥u˙≤i army-TOP
225
n˙-q˙ti då-s-tu, DIR-beat.to.death DIR- finish-LNK
226
demi Demi
guefi-≤å army-COM n˙-quå-≤i DIR-fight-ADV
≤i:-ep˙-te:-t˚ 3sgREFL-father-DEF:CL-GEN
n˙-q˙ti DIR-beat.to.death
¿å-tsoqpi-t˚ INT -this:family-GEN
INT-RESULT
likhemu Likhemu
¿å-tu
¿ålå there
¿å-tu
n˙-quå-kui-®, DIR-fight-NAR-LNK
≤i:-ep˙-t˚ 3sgREFL-father-GEN
223
demi Demi
¿ålå there Âm˙t®i emperor
då-s. DIR- finish jåutsan man.eating.demon ¿å-tse:-wu INT -this:CL-AGT
316 227
228
229
Texts
tåitåulå, †(catch)
t˙-ts‘˙qå-ku, DIR-catch- NAR
n˙-≈®-ku. DIR-tie.up-NAR ≤å
¿å-tu
n˙-≈®-≤i DIR-tie.up-ADV
likhemu-≥u˙≤i Likhemu-TOP
COM 230
≤isues nearly.dead
231
sipe medicine
tsh˙ntit˚hin Chen.Diqing
INT-RESULT
¿å-the-wu, INT -that-ABL
titåu-Ùå tunnel-LOC
me-le:-t˚-≥u˙≤i NEG -exist-GEN-TOP då-˚t˚-j˙-ku-tu, DIR-feed-CSM-NAR-LNK
l˙ also
thånkhemu Thånkhemu
a-Ù’u-≤i DIR-throw-ADV
sipe då-˚t˚-j˙, medicine DIR-feed-CSM ¿å-tu INT-RESULT
232
n˙-≈®-≤i ≈ai®˙ DIR-tie.up-ADV †(still.is)
233
å≥‘u‘˙ n˙-≈®-≤i i-˚i-ku. ¿å-tu ep-te:-≥u˙≤i together DIR-tie.up-ADV DIR-put- NAR INT-RESULT father-DEF:CL -TOP
234
¿ålå there
235
®ku-Â ¿o-pu-≤i, orangutan-talk DIR-do-ADV
236
kefil-jy, ask-ASP
lå-hån DEF:one-kind
237
®ku-Â orangutan-talk
˙-≈te-ku, ¿å-tu DIR-exhort-NAR INT-RESULT ≈ai®˙≈uij˙l˙jitian, †(also.recalled.a.little)
239
z˙-lå-≤i, DIR-come-ADV ¿e-di-kui, DIR-say-NAR
ÆÆhüa, EXCL
pu-jy,123 do-ASP qå 1sg
¿å-ts˙i INT -this.manner
¿ål˙ there
˙-≈te DIR-exhort
t®i pe-kå:-ji,flfl ik˙-j˙-≤i ¿å-k˙ male/son become-INF:PRS-CSM thus-say-ADV INT-thus
238
240
≤i:-ep-te:-≤å ¿ålå 3sgREFL-father-DEF:CL-COM INT
a, EXCL
thånkhemu Thånkhemu
≤å COM
likhemu-≥u˙≤i Likhemu-TOP
¿å-ts˙i-≤i INT -this.manner-ADV
˚t˚’u thought(n.)
ep-te:-wu ¿å-ts˙i father-DEF:CL -AGT INT-this.manner
®ku-Â orangutan-talk
¿e-di-≤i DIR-say-ADV
ÆÆt®i male/son
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family
317
241
pe-kå:-ji, t®i pe-tu ˚t˚˙-p le-≤i become-INF:PRS-CSM male/son become-LNK seven-year exist-ADV
242
l˙©z book
243
le-≤i exist-ADV
244
steke-le:-≥u˙≤i behind-DEF:CL-TOP
245
hot˚u-p ten-year
le-≤i exist-ADV
qå 1sg
246
t®i male/son
pe-tu,flfl become-LNK
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
247
¿å-tu
å:-su-wå, DIR: INDTV-study-DTV qå 1sg
INT-RESULT
likhemu Likhemu
248
ep-te:-≥u˙≤i ¿å-k˙ father-DEF:CL -TOP INT-thus
249
ÆÆ÷~u 2sg
250
251
COM
hå-l˙fi, DIR-come:1pl ¿å-k˙ INT -thus
hat®i-p eleven-year
ta:-mefiÂ-wå, DIR: INDTV-seek-DVT
®ku-Â orangutan-talk
≤å
the-wu that-ABL
nai other
˙-®p-≤i, DIR-call- ADV
likhemu-≥u˙≤i Likhemu-TOP
ta:-mefiÂ-l˙-wå, DIR: INDTV-seek-come-DTV j˙-kui-wå, say-NAR-EMPH
p˙-k˙i. do-NAR
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
j˙-kui-t˚u. say-NAR-PART qå 1sg
qå-tut®,flfl 1sg-younger.brother
j˙-kui-tu. ÆÆa say-NAR-LNK EXCL
÷~u 2sg
≤i©i what
b˙l-l˙ do-come
j˙-kui, say-NAR
¿å-tu
≤å COM
qå 1sg
253
likhemu-≥u˙≤i k˙-j˙-kui. ¿å-lå-≈ui-tu, ep-te:-tu, Likhemu-TOP thus-say-NAR INT-DEF:one-time-LNK father-DEF:CL-LNK
254
e!
255
≥u˙-k-å,flfl COP-INF -1sg
ik˙ thus
ÆÆta,
j˙-kui. say-NAR
INT
mefi seek
ep father
mefi seek
¿å-®˙≤i-k˙-t˚i-j˙, DIR-discuss-go-3pl-HS
ÆÆep father
INT-RESULT
252
EXCL
l˙fi-≤i,flfl j˙-kui, come:1p-ADV say-NAR
thånkhemu-≥u˙≤i, Thånkhemu-TOP
qå 1sg
l˙fi,flfl come:1pl
÷ile 2pl
ep father
318
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
256
257
Texts
¿å-®˙≤i DIR-discuss
258
259
j˙-kui-tu, say-NAR-LNK
kå-hån ≥u˙-tu, mefi®-tå-s-Ùå-≥u˙≤i INDEF:one-kind COP-LNK next- DEF:one-day-LOC-TOP
q˙ti-s, beat.to.death- NOM ≤å
¿åtå likhemu Likhemu
260
¿ålå there
261
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
262
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
263
jautsan man.eating.demon
264
≈ai®˙ låupe˚i †(still.is) †ordinary.citizens
265
guefi army
266
tsh˙ntit˚hin Chen.Diqing
INT
thånkhemu, Thånkhemu
COM
¿å-®˙≤i, DIR-discuss
jåutsan man.eating.demon
demi Demi
Âm˙t®i-le: emperor-DEF:CL
ts˙zzi-≥u˙≤i these.people-TOP wut˚upu-le:-≥u˙≤i, husband-DEF:CL -TOP
≥u˙-k˙i-≤i, COP-NAR -ADV
q˙ti-s beat.to.death- NOM demi Demi
≤å
t˙-qå-Â-kui-wå. DIR-go-CAUS -NAR-EMPH t˙-qå-Â-≤i DIR-go-CAUS -ADV
268
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
tse:-wu this:CL-AGT
l˙ also
qusu very.many
thå-hån, tshen®˙ that:one-kind dispute
COM
267
˙-®-jy, DIR-release- ASP
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
˙-t®˙n-thå, DIR-kill-AUX qusu very.many
qusu very.many
¿å-kå-hån ≥u˙-kui-tu. INT -INDEF:one-kind COP-NAR -LNK
tsh˙ntit˚hin-≥u˙≤i Chen.Diqing-TOP
269
ÆÆsoqho-≥u˙≤i tomorrow-TOP
t˚ile 1pl
270
÷~u-s˙tsim-le:-≥u˙≤i 2sg-wife-DEF:CL-TOP
®e die
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
Ùze-jy, must-ASP
tijikuojaut˚hiu, †(first.demand) ¿ålå-≥u˙≤i, that-TOP
t˚ile ≈ai®˙ t˚å: mi-le: 1pl †(still.is) where:LOC person-DEF:CL
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family 271
≥u˙, COP
272
å-®˙ one-time
u-t˚u DIR-see
u-mu-t˚u-le, DIR-NEG -see-because
t˚ile 1pl
t˚he, want q˙ti kill
273
Âm˙t®i-le:-tå-≥u˙≤i ¿å-k˙ emperor-DEF:CL-DAT -TOP INT-thus
274
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
j˙-kui-tu, say-NAR-LNK
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
276
ÆÆmi person
277
ÆÆkhuoji t˙p-≤i †(is.possible) tomorrow-ADV
278
å-® one-time
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
jåut˚hiu-tu-pu-k-kui-stu. demand-DIR-do-go-NAR-PART
j˙-kui-®˙. say-NAR-LNK
¿å-k˙ INT -thus j˙-kui-tu, say-NAR-LNK
u-t˚u DIR-see
u-t˚u DIR-see
¿e-se-wå,flfl DIR-allow-EMPH
l˙ also
COP
INT-RESULT
¿å-thå mefi®-tå-s-Ùå Âmu INT-there next- DEF:one-day-LOC meeting
281
s˙tsim-le: wife-DEF:CL
282
¿å-thå-≥u˙≤i, INT-there-TOP t˚ile-t˚ 1pl-GEN
284
the-wu, that-ABL
285
t˚he-wå, want-DTV
khuoji,flfl †(is.possible)
Âm˙t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i s˙tsim-le: emperor-DEF:CL-TOP wife-DEF:CL
280
283
tsu-s-tå-≥u˙≤i hold-NOM-LOC-TOP
t®hets˙-qu˙-tå-≥u˙≤i cart-top-LOC-TOP tsh˙ntit˚hin-≥u˙≤i, Chen.Diqing-TOP
jåut˚hiu demand
t˚iu®˙, †(that.is)
kånthån †charcoal t˚ile 1pl
j˙-kui, say-NAR
®e-Ùze-j˙-u-≤i die-must-CSM-VIS-ADV ≥u˙
¿å-tu
l˙ also
¿e-me-se.flfl DIR-NEG -allow
wut®hu-pu-m-le-©l˙-tå, help-do-NOM-DEF-pl-LOC
275
279
quåha-≈upi face-appearance
319
he-t˚hi-k˙i, DIR-bring- NAR
ÆÆa! EXCL
≤iu≈uån-≥u˙≤i bezoar-TOP
mudu-≥u˙≤i charcoal-TOP
tu-j’u-≤i DIR-stand- ADV
ots’uquå-≤i-≥u˙≤i morning-ADV-TOP å-t˚, one-catty
å-w ph˙ one-pile blow(burn)
Âa:, exist:PRS
÷ile-wu 2pl-AGT
t˚ile 1pl
320
Texts
286
t˚hånpi-på:-j-j˙-® †shoot-do:PRS-2pl-say- LNK
q˙tia:-i kill:PRS-2pl
287
t˚ile 1pl
kånthån charcoal
288
t˚he-wå,flfl j˙-kui-t˚u. ¿å-tu ≈ai®˙ ÆÆkhuoji want-DTV say-NAR-PART INT-RESULT †(still.is) †(is.possible)
289
¿e-se,flfl j˙-kui-®˙, Âm˙t®i-le:-≥u˙≤i k˙-j˙-kui. DIR-allow say-NAR-LNK emperor-DEF:CL-TOP thus-say-NAR
putu-lå-≥u˙≤i front-LOC-TOP
¿å-tu
290
INT-RESULT
ji, ¿å-thu-≥u˙≤i, say INT-there-TOP å-w one-pile
ph˙ blow(burn)
≤iu≈uån i-se-kui, ¿å-tu Âmu tsu bezoar DIR-burn-NAR INT-RESULT meeting hold
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
≥u˙≤i
292
l˙ also
hå-l-k˙i, DIR-come-NAR
293
Âmu-tsu meeting-hold
thont®˙-tu-p’u-≤i †notify-DIR-do-ADV
¿åtå
hå-l˙-kui, DIR-come-NAR
hå-l˙-kui-tu DIR-come-NAR-LNK
¿ålå
291
294
295
296
TOP
mi person
jautsan man.eating.demon Âm˙t®i emperor
thå-s-Ùå-tu, ¿å-thizzi-≥u˙≤i that:one-day-LOC-LNK INT-3dl-TOP q˙ti q˙di-j˙-kui. kill prepare-CSM-NAR
¿å-tu INT-RESULT
l˙ also
demi-le: Demi-DEF:CL
hå-l-k˙i, DIR-come-NAR INT
INT
t˚hanpi-pu-t˚, †shoot-do-GEN
¿ålå INT
q˙ti q˙di-j˙-kui-tu, kill prepare-CSM-NAR-LNK
297
≈ai®˙ thå-hån ≥u˙-ku-wå, ¿å-tu-≥u˙≤i, ¿å-thå †(still.is) that:one-kind COP-NAR -EMPH INT-RESULT-TOP INT-there
298
t®hets˙-m˙q cart-top
299
Âm˙t®i emperor
i˚t˚i together s˙tsim wife
s˙-l-≤i DIR-look- ADV
jautsan man.eating.demon
Âm˙t®i-le: emperor-DEF:CL demi, Demi
¿å-thå INT -there
≤å COM
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family 300
s˙-l-≤i DIR-look- LNK
Âi-tu. exist-LNK
301
≤iu≈uån-le-ste, bezoar-DEF-CL
302
®˙-ku-tu, put/place-NAR-LNK
¿ålå
304
jautsan-le:-≥u˙≤i man.eating.demon-DEF:CL-TOP
305
ÆÆha,
307
≤iu≈uån-le-ste bezoar-DEF-CL
¿å-tsu INT -here
INT
s˙tsim-le: wife-DEF:CL
jautsan man.eating.demon
t˚iut˚in †(actually
®˙
¿å-l˙-k˙i-stun. DIR-come-NAR-PART
Âm˙t®i emperor
s˙tsim-le: wife-DEF:CL
mi-le: person-DEF:CL
COP)
jåutsan man.eating.demon
Âmit®i emperor
≥u˙-ku-®. COP-NAR -LNK
dz˙ big.teeth
p˙s-≥u˙≤i today-TOP
EXCL
tsh˙ntit˚hin-wu Chen.Diqing-AGT
INT
kånthån-m˙q-tå charcoal-top-LOC
303
306
¿ålå
≥u˙, COP
321
÷ile 2pl
å-® one-time
≥u˙-≥uå? COP-Q i-tse-i-wå, DIR-look-2pl-DTV
308
¿å-tse:-wu låupe˚in ≤å guefi ≤å thå-hån INT -this:CL-AGT †ordinary.citizens COM soldier COM that:one-kind
309
qusu sun®˙ t˙-qå-Â˙-®, very.many loss DIR-go-CAUS-LNK
¿å-tse:-≥u˙≤i INT -this:CL-TOP
310
i-tse-i-wå,flfl DIR-look-2pl-DTV
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
311
ÆÆa! EXCL
312
313
314
Ùåt truly
j˙-kui-stu. say-NAR-PART
≥u˙flfl COP
j˙-≤i, say-ADV
¿å-the-wu, INT -that-ABL
ÆÆÂm˙t®i emperor
t˙-ts‘˙qå, DIR-capture
¿ål˙ ¿e-me-se, INT DIR-NEG -allow
¿å-k˙ INT -thus
thåuluån †discuss
ÆÆÙåt truly
j˙-kui-tu, say-NAR-LNK ≥u˙flfl COP
n˙-q‘˙ti, ¿å Âm˙t®i DIR-kill INT emperor Ùåt˚hi truly
¿å-q˙-≤i,flfl DIR-go-ADV
÷ileile 2plREFL
≥u˙, COP
j˙-j. say-CSM taipu, †capture k˙ thus
j˙-kui-stun. say-NAR-PART
322 315
Texts
¿ål˙
ke-≥u˙-kui-tu, thus-COP-NAR -LNK
INT 316
t˚iu †(then)
tsh˙ntit˚hin ≤å Chen.Diqing COM
317
tsoqpi this:family
≤å
¿å-lå-≈ui-tu INT-DEF:one-time-LNK
thånkhemu, Thånkhemu
phinfanlå, †(redressed)
COM
318
¿å-q˙-Â˙-k-wå, DIR-go-CAUS -INF-EMPH
319
¿å-ke INT -thus
¿å
320
t˚iu akha, t˚iu-lå †(then) slow home-LOC
321
lu-k˙:-tu, come-INF-LNK
322
thånkhemu Thånkhemu
¿å-q˙-Â-≤i DIR-go-CAUS -ADV
≈ai®˙ †(still.is) lu-k. come-INF
s˙tsim wife
likhemu-t˚ Likhemu-GEN
må: mama
COM
INT
≤å COM
lå-hån DEF: one-kind
324
k˙-tu, go-LNK
325
xs˙-s då-˚t˚-k-wå, t˙-mefiÂ-≤i, dÂu three-day DIR-host/feed-INF-EMPH DIR-seek- ADV guest
326
då-˚t˚˙-k˙:-tu, DIR-host/feed- go-LNK
327
xs˙-s three-day
328
i-me-t˚i-p˙-l, DIR-NEG -CON-arrive-come
¿åt˙
då-t˚-k˙-tu, DIR-find-go- LNK
¿ålå there
≈ai®˙, †(still.is)
k˙-t˚i, go-3pl
lå-hån, DEF: one-kind
323
329
mefi seek
¿ålå
t˚˙u-lå home-LOC
≈ai®˙ mefi≈, †(still.is) pitiful ≤å
Â˙ affair
INT
Â˙ affair
≥u˙-tu, COP-LNK
likhemu ¿åt˙ t˚iu Likhemu INT †(then)
¿ålå there
t˙-mefiÂ-≤i DIR-seek- ADV
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
då-˚t˚-≤i DIR-host/feed-ADV INT
mefi seek dÂu-≥u˙≤i guest-TOP xs˙-s three-day
då-˚t˚-k˙-≤i, DIR-host/feed-go-LNK xs˙-s-Ùå three-day-LOC
t˚iu †(then)
©Â˙-s-tå-s-Ùå four-day-DEF:one-day-LOC tsi woman
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family 330
su-©du:-lå DIR-left.over- LOC
331
¿å-tu
Â˙-m exist-NOM
¿å-ke
pe-kui-tu, become-NAR-LNK
INT-RESULT INT -thus 332
333
334
¿å,-k˙zzi INT -INDEF:two:CL
s˙-x®˙-s-tå DIR-be.last-NOM -LOC ts˙zzi-≥u˙≤i this:two:CL-TOP
≤å
tsoqpi, this:family
336
jåp˙q-tå hand-LOC
337
ep-te: father-DEF:CL
a!
¿ålå
EXCL
INT
¿ålå INT
likhemu-t˚ Likhemu-GEN
COM
l˙zzi-≥u˙≤i do-qu-k˙i, DEF:two: CL-TOP DIR-afraid- NAR
335
pe-kui, become-NAR
Â˙-m exist-NOM thånkhemu Thånkhemu
ÆÆha!,
323
må: mama
t˚ile 1pl
EXCL
t˚ile-åp˙ l˙ tse-ze 1pl-grandfather also this-CL die-®e-jy, ¿a! DIR-die-ASP:EVID EXCL l˙ also
tsoqpi this:family
÷ile 1pl ≤å
qu˙quå-s-tå-≥u˙≤i fight-NOM-LOC-TOP
COM
338
die-®e-j˙-ka:-ji, DIR-die-REP-INF: PRS-CSM
339
thå-hån ho-jy-≤i, t˚ål k˙ må-n-jy-å, that:one-kind DIR-set.out-ADV where:LOC go NEG -know-ASP-1sg
340
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
341
t˚åu-Âb˙-k˙-≤i, think.to.oneself-INF-ADV
342
˚t˚i:miq-tå-≥u˙≤i, ˚t˚i:miq-tå heart-LOC-TOP heart-LOC
343
kå-hån INDEF:one-kind
t˚ile 1pl
me-Âi-jy, NEG -exist-ASP:EVID
tsoqpi this:family
j˙på-q hand-top ¿å-ke INT -thus ¿å-ke INT -thus
≥u˙-k˙i-tu, ¿ålå COP-NAR -LNK INT
®e die
qå-t®i-≤å 1sg-son-COM
Ùza:flfl must
Âbot˚u-k˙i, think-NAR Âbot˚u think ©Â˙-s-tå-s-Ùå four-day-DEF:one-day-LOC
324 344
Texts
z˙-lå-tu, DIR-come-LNK
345
å-® one-time
346
j˙-tu, say-LNK
347
Ùu mountain
348
ÆÆs˙-x®˙-s-tå DIR-be.last-NOM -LOC u-lu DIR-come
hai! EXCL
thånkhemu Thånkhemu
350
®å®˙u †assassin
he-˚i-≤i, DIR-send-ADV
351
he-˚i-≤i DIR-send-ADV
352
u-lu
353
354
l˙zzi-≥u˙≤i DEF: two:CL-TOP t˚he-wå,flfl want-DTV
≤å
likhemu-t˚ Likhemu-GEN
COM
wut®hu-pu-m-le-©le helper-do-NOM-DEF-pl ¿ålå
tså here
j˙-kui-wå, say-NAR-EMPH
Â˙-m exist-NOM
å-® one-while ¿å-tu
356
fusån-tu-pu-≤i help.up124-DIR-do-ADV
få clothing
357
få clothing
358
≥u˙-≤i COP-ADV
INT
t˙-l‘˙lå-≤iåu DIR-change-LNK ¿å-ts˙izzi-≥u˙≤i INT -this:two:CL-TOP
i-le DIR-bring
i-t˚hi-k˙i, DIR-bring- NAR
INT-RESULT
¿ålå
ÆÆtså here
INT
s˙-x®˙-s-tå DIR-last-NOM-LOC
i-t˚hi-k˙i-tu, DIR-bring- NAR-LNK
355
¿å-thå INT -there
≥u˙-tu, COP-LNK t˚he, want
DIR-come
¿å-kå-hån INT -INDEF:one-kind me-t˚hi NEG -want
wut®hu-¿o-pu, help-DIR-do
349
n˙-quå-k˙i-wå, DIR-overturn-NAR-EMPH
n˙-qhuå-≤i DIR-overturn-ADV
≥u˙-j˙-tu,
≥u˙-tu, tså COP-LNK here
INT
t˚he-wå,flfl want-EMPH
Ùu mountain
COP-HS -LNK
¿ålå
k˙ntåu immediately
¿ålå INT
t˙-l‘˙lå-k˙i-wå, DIR-change-NAR-EMPH k˙ntåu immediately ¿ålå INT
må: mama
≤å COM
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family 359
360
¿å-lå-hån, INT -DEF:one-kind
thånkhemu Thånkhemu
lå-hån-≥u˙≤i
få clothing
DEF:one-kind-TOP 361
k˙ntåu immediately
≈ai®˙ †(still.is)
≤å COM
likhemu Likhemu
325
må: mama
t˙-l‘˙lå-≤iåufu DIR-change-LNK(as.soon.as) ¿å-k˙ INT -thus
t˙-b˙l-kui-wå. DIR-do-NAR-EMPH
Narrator: Yu Zelong Born 1960 Recorded 1996
The Old Man of the Chen Family Long ago there was an old man named Chen and another person. Every day they went hunting. They made a living hunting. One day they went up the mountain to hunt but didnflt get a single animal. In a mountain cave they saw a snake and said, ÆÆToday we didnflt get anything. It looks like weflll have to return empty-handed. Itfls better to kill [this snake] weflve just seen with one shot.flfl After they shot it once, [it turned out that] this wasnflt a snake at all, but was an evil demon that ate people. He strangled it to death. She was the wife of the emperor (today we say /Âm˙t®i/, before we said /juånÙuai/ for Æemperorfl), and had changed into an evil demon who ate people. ... The emperor said ÆÆGo find herflfl, and sent people to find her. (After they found her) this evil demon who ate people pretended to be sick. The emperor asked, ÆÆWhat illness do you have? The doctor canflt cure it. What will you do?flfl The evil demon who ate people answered, ÆÆIf I eat the kidney and heart of Old Man Chen, I can be cured.flfl The emperor sent soldiers to find Old Man Chen. Old Man Chenfls son was called Chen Diqing. Old Man Chen could foretell peoplefls future. He divined his own future and said to his son Chen Diqing, ÆÆThey are looking for me, son. Hurry and leave. I cannot escape. Because that day in the mountain cave I saw a snake, this snake (evil demon who eats people) will come looking for me. Only by eating my kidney and heart can its illness be cured. Chen Diqing, you hurry and escape. I cannot run away.flfl The old manfls son, Chen Diqing, ran away and arrived at another village. It happened that when he arrived at the other village, there was a woman whose husband had just died. He made friends there. The widowfls family and friends made him stay
326
Texts
there. ÆÆYou cannot go anyplace.flfl So he stayed there. He was both smart and capable. A couple of months passed and the emperorfls family was again looking for him. He said to his wife, ÆÆI must go. I will go. (When our child is born) if he is a boy, make him go study when he is seven. If it is a girl, donflt look for me. If it is a boy, have him come look for me when he is twelve. Give him the name ÆÆThånkhemuflfl. At seven have him go study and after he returns, have him come look for me.flfl Later the people of another village came to look for Chen Diqing and Chen Diqing fled. He arrived at another place and met another widow whose husband had just died, and again stayed at the widow's. Again some people came looking for him and he said to the widow. ÆÆIf our child is a boy, have him come look for me. If it is a girl, you/she neednflt look for me. If you give birth to a boy, have him go study at seven, and at ten come look for me. (His name should be Likhemu).flfl Thånkhemu and Likhemu were both boys. One day each said ÆÆI will go find my fatherflfl, and they set out to go find their father. After walking a while, the two met each other in a river valley. Thånkhemu asked Likhemu, ÆÆWhere are you going?flfl Likhemu said, ÆÆIflm going to find my father.flfl Thånkhemu further asked, ÆÆWhat is your fatherfls name?flfl Likhemu said, ÆÆHefls called Chen Diqing.flfl Thånkhemu said, ÆÆMy father is also called Chen Diqing. You arenflt to be considered me.flfl In this manner, the two started to fight. After fighting a while, Thånkhemu said, ÆÆLetfls not fight. Letfls rest a minute.flfl After resting a while, Thånkhemu, who was older than Likhemu, asked Likhemu, ÆÆNow what shall we do? Both of us are looking for our father (Chen Diqing), and our father is perhaps one person. Letfls go together.flfl So the two of them stopped fighting and went together. After walking a while, they put up at a temple. ÆÆLast night I dreamed I saw Old Man Chen and Chen Diqingfls sword and bow hidden under a tree by the temple.flfl Thånkhemu said. Likhemu said, ÆÆI dreamed the same.flfl Thånkhemu said, ÆÆWe both saw the sword and bow in our dreams. Could it be the same? We dreamed the sword and bow were on a wild prickly ash tree beside the temple courtyard.flfl They went on again for a while, and in fact there were some trees beside the road. The two of them were very thirsty. Thånkhemu went to look for some water. After finding water, Thånkhemu said to Likhemu, ÆÆLikhemu, donflt drink. Let me, your older brother, drink first. If I donflt die after drinking, then you drink. If I die, then donflt drink.flfl Thånkhemu then drank. When he drank the water he encountered a stone slab cover. Eh! Old Man Chen and Chen Diqingfls sword and bow were put there, a thing for fighting, a club, was there. Thånkhemu drank a mouthful of water and lifted the stone slab. He could only lift it a little bit.
Text 6: The Old Man of the Chen Family
327
ÆÆLikhemu, you drink too.flfl Likhemu drank also, and the two of them together again lifted the stone slab. They still could only lift it a little way. The two drank a mouthful of water again and they turned over the stone slab, and then they saw Old Man Chen and Chen Diqingfls sword and bow hidden inside and took them out. They went on again for a while, carrying the sword and bow, and then there was a lion looking down at them from within a temple above the road. The two of them said, ÆÆIf you are (my) Chen Diqing and Old Man Chenfls lion, then nod your head. If not, donflt nod your head. If you are going to eat us, then eat us. If you are our lion, then nod your head.flfl The head was nodded. Thånkhemu and Likhemu rode on the lion and went on. After Old Man Chenfls heart and kidney had been taken out by the evil demon who ate people, he became a person who sold horse saddles (by the gate to the city). When Thånkhemu and Likhemu went out to find their father, they saw the old man there selling horse saddles. When Thånkhemu and Likhemu arrived at the city gate, Old Man Chen asked them, ÆÆWhere are you going?flfl The two of them answered, ÆÆWe're going to find Chen Diqing.flfl The old man also asked, ÆÆWill you buy a saddle?flfl They said, ÆÆIf it fits our lion, we will buy it. If not, we won't.flfl They tried it and it fit just right, so they bought it. Riding a lion and carrying the sword and bow, Thånkhemu and Likhemu entered (the city). The husband of the evil demon who ate people had already prepared a pit as a trap there. They fought with Chen Diqingfls army, and Thankemu and Likhemu fought with their own fatherfls army. Later Chen Diqingfls soldiers were beaten to death. After that the man-eating demon and the emperor captured Chen Diqing and tied him up. After Thånkhemu and Likhemu were captured, they were thrown into the pit. They were almost beaten to death. After feeding them some medicines, they were tied up together with their father. Their father asked the two of them (using pantomime) ÆÆThe matter I instructed my wives about, did they really have sons?flfl Thånkhemu and Likhemu recalled the past a bit. Their father used pantomime and said, ÆÆCan it really be that [my wives] gave birth to sons? If it was a son, at seven have him go study, and at eleven come look for me. Afterwards that [second] child, call him Likhemu, and at ten have him come look for me.flfl Thånkhemu then said, ÆÆLittle brother, what have the two of us come to do?flfl Likhemu answered, ÆÆWe came to find our father.flfl Thus their father said, ÆÆI am your father.flfl They then had a discussion. The husband [the emperor] of the evil demon who ate people [demi], had already determined to beat Chen Diqing, Thånkhemu and Likhemu to death the next day. The evil demon who ate people [demi] had already killed many ordinary people and soldiers. Their dispute had continuously escalated. Chen Diqing made a demand. ÆÆTomorrow we must die. Because we still have not
328
Texts
seen your wife (havenflt had one look at her face). It wonflt do to execute us like this.flfl The emperor said, ÆÆTomorrow they must die. They may have a look (at my wife).flfl The next day when they had a meeting, the emperor brought his wife out on a cart. Chen Diqing said further to the emperor, ÆÆTomorrow our demand is to bring half a catty of bezoar and some charcoal and set a fire. We will be standing and you will shoot us. In front of us, use charcoal and set a fire.flfl The emperor agreed to this as well. The demon who ate people [demi] and her husband [the emperor] notified everybody that they planned to shoot and execute Chen Diqing and his two sons. That day, the emperor and his wife, the demon who ate people, stood on the cart and watched. Chen Diqing put/burned a piece of the bezoar on top of the charcoal. The emperorfls wife, the demon who ate people, grew long canine teeth. Chen Diqing said, ÆÆHa!, today see if your emperorfls wife is human or not. Shefls a man-eating demon. You all look! This thing caused the loss of many soldiers and ordinary citizens. Look for yourselves!flfl He said, ÆÆIt is true! It is true! Kill the emperor, capture the emperor. This canflt be allowed, it is true, you should go discuss this.flfl Thus they did this (the emperor was arrested and beaten to death). Thus Chen Diqing, Thånkhemu, and Likhemu were acquitted [their case was reversed/obtained justice]. The three of them, father and sons, slowly returned home. After returning home, Thånkhemu and Likhemu went to find their mothers. In order to find them, they invited guests for three days. After three days of inviting guests, their mothers still had not returned. On the fourth day, they found them. At this time their mothers had already become the last two people. Thånkhemu and Likhemufls mothers were afraid. ÆÆThis family of ours, our grandfather died at the hands of this person, and is no longer with us. Your father also fought with this person and perhaps is dead. Our sons also went to find their father and we donflt know where theyflve gone. Can it be that we will all die at this personfls hands?flfl That is what they thought in their hearts. On the fourth day they returned and the two of them said, ÆÆThe last few come in.flfl (The result is that) the mountain peak has toppled. Thånkhemu and Likhemu sent out an assassin. ÆÆYou must come here. Those last two people, bring them in.flfl The assassin brought in the two. They were brought in and immediately had their clothes changed, and these two were Thånkhemu and Likhemufls mothers.
English-Qiang glossary arranged by semantic field
Natural phenomena
NATURAL PHENOMENA sky mutup ± mutu (mu < PTB *muw). day breaks (vi.) mutu su (mutu = Æskyfl). n i g h t f a l l s ( v i . ) ¿å-xt®˙p ± xt®åp (DIR + Ædarkfl). sun m˙si / m˙saq / mujuq. rise (of the sun) m˙si ˙ts‘u (Æsunfl + Æshinefl). s e t ( o f t h e s u n ) m˙s˙ ˙-≈¬ ± m˙si ˙-≈¬ (Æsunfl + DIR + ≈¬˙ Ædisappear, descendfl). be c ome d usk ¿o-ful (< phul Æunclear, duskyfl). s u n ( v t . , v i . ) m˙si ®kue (Æsun (n.)fl + Æbakefl). shine (vi.) ˙-tsu. solar eclipse khu˙-wu mujuq s˙-dzi (Ædogfl + AGT + Æsunfl + DIR + Æeatfl). m o o n ˚i-®ue (Æmoon/monthfl + Æbrightfl; ˚i possibly < PTB *s-la). lunar eclipse khu˙-wu ˚i®ue s˙dzi (Ædogfl + AGT + Æmoonfl + DIR + Æeatfl). moonlight ®uaq (= Ælightfl). star ÙdÂ˙. meteor / falling star ÙdÂ˙ dotshu (Æstarfl + DIR + Æfallfl). light ®uaq. bright ®ue / ®uex. s h i n y , s h i n i n g t˙-®ue (DIR + Æbrightfl). dark xt®åp / mo:t˚u. o b s c u r e , d a r k mo:t˚u (mo: possibly < PTB *muk ± *mu≥). shadow ®uaq (= Ælightfl). wind moÙu. blow (of the wind) moÙu we (= Æthere is windfl) / moÙu Ùu (Æwindfl + Æblowfl(?)—cognate
331
verb, from last syllable of Æwindfl). stop blowing (of the wind) moÙu m˙-w‘e-ji (= Æwindfl + NEG + Æexistfl + CSM). storm (vi.) moÙu we (= Æthere is windfl). whirl (vi., of the wind) Ùlå®. whirlwind moÙu Ùlå® (Æwindfl + Æwhirlfl). d r y u p b y t h e w i n d tu-j‘uku- (D I R + Ædryfl + causative suffix). rain (n.) me:fi. r a i n ( v i . ) me:fi ˚e (Ærainfl + Ærelease, fallfl). get wet (from the rain) in≤i (< i-≤ie DIR + Æwetfl). stop (of the rain) me:fi m˙-˚‘e-ji (Ærainfl + NEG + Ærelease, fallfl + CSM). drizzle bu me:fi (Ædirt/soilfl + Ærainfl). raindrop ˚t˚y. drip (vi.) tshu. drop ( CL) t®˙. r a i n b o w t®˙qt®˙ Ùu˙ (Ærainbowfl + Æto be bentfl) / t®˙qt®˙ we (Ærainbowfl + Æexistfl). cloud zdåm. disperse (of clounds) zdåm ¿aqat®he (Æcloudfl + D I R + Ædispersefl). rosy clouds, rosy sunset stu t˙˚i (Æoilfl + DIR + Æreleasefl; used for colored clouds morning or night). f o g , m i s t zd˙-qhu ± zdo-qhu (Æcloudfl + Ædescendfl). spread (of fog) zd˙qhu ˚e (Æfogfl + Ærelease/descendfl) / zd˙qhu do-qhu (Æfogfl + D I R + Ædescend (of fog)fl). dew dÂ˙q.
332
Glossary
dewdrop dÂ˙q ˚t˚y (Ædewfl + Æraindropfl). fall (of dew) dÂ˙q de-we (Ædewfl + DIR + Æexistfl). sleet (vi.) qhåts. frost mefi-x (Ærainfl + Æform (of frost)fl). snow pe. s n o w ( v i . ) pe ˚e (Æsnowfl + Ærelease, fallfl). melt (of snow) (pe) ¿å-l (Æsnowfl + DIR + Æmeltfl). hail zu. hail (vi.) zu ˚e (Æhailfl + Ærelease, fallfl). lightning (n.) ®u(˙)-quå (Ætoothfl + Ælightningfl). lightning (vi.) ®u˙-quå (Ætoothfl + Ælighteningfl). t h u n d e r ( n . ) mefi-g‘u (Ærainfl + Æthunderfl). thunder (vi.) mefigu / så (så = Æto make loud noisefl). be struck by lighting mefig‘u ¿åqå (Ælightningfl + Ægo down (DIR + Ægofl)fl). f i n e d a y , n i c e d a y m˙ ≈qå (Æsky/heavenfl + Æclearfl). c l o u d y d a y , r a i n y d a y m˙ Ù˙i (Æsky/heavenfl + Æbadfl). drought m˙ t˙-≈qå (Æskyfl + DIR + Æclearfl). seven sister stars tsi-såt®‘u ˚t˚˙t® (Æolder sisterfl + flyounger sisterfl + Æsevenfl + CL). s o u t h w i n d moÙu su-Ùu (= Æwind blows down-riverfl (relative to Ronghong village)). n o r t h w i n d moÙu nu-Ùu (= Æwind blows up-riverfl (relative to Ronghong village)).
east wind moÙu to-Ùu (= Æwind blows upfl (relative to Ronghong village)). west wind moÙu ¿o-Ùu (= Æwind blows downfl (relative to Ronghong village)). air m˙s (= Æbreathfl). e a r t h ( t h e e a r t h ) z˙p (z˙ = Æfield, land, groundfl). s u r f a c e o f t h e e a r t h l˙≈ (not natural ground, but altered in some way, such as bottom floor of house, etc.). land , ground z˙. earthquake z˙ tefim (Æearth/ landfl + Æshakefl). crack, split (vi.) då-t®å. soil, dirt bu‘u. mud måt®å. mire maha. s t o n e Âåwå / ≈¬u (≈¬u < PTB *r-lu≥). rock Âgu˙t. pebble ≈qå≤i. s a n d ts˙-®å (Æwaterfl + Æsandfl) / ®åts (< Ch. sh—a, sh—azifl). hill, mound m o u n t a i n Ùopu.± Ùu climb a hill d˙de. peak Ùu-q (Æmountainfl + Æheadfl). h a l f w a y u p a m o u n t a i n Ùu edzue (Æmountianfl + Æonefl + Æhalffl). f o o t o f a h i l l je-ku˙ (Æclifffl + Æbasefl). slope of a hill xepi. l o e s s x¬iex-bu (Æloessfl + Æsoil/ dirtfl). ravine, valley ≈ot ± ≈ot®. l a n d s l i d e Ùu do-tshu (Æmountainfl + Æfall downfl (DIR + Æfallfl)). hill without vegetation safi.
Natural phenomena
cliff jåq. cave, hole , crack Âo:pu. water ts˙ (< PTB *ts˙). freeze (vi.) ts˙på zu-p‘u (Æicefl + DIR + Æform(v.)fl). ice ts˙på (cf. ts˙ Æwaterfl). f l o w ( v i . , o f w a t e r ) (ts˙) lu (Æwaterfl + Æcomefl). wash down (vi., of water) s˙-lå (D I R + Æcomefl; = Æcome downfl). soak, flood (vi.) in≤i (< i-≤ie DIR + Æwetfl). flood (n.) ®u˙m (cf. ®u˙ Æseafl). flood (vi.) ®u˙m s˙-lå (Æflood (cf. ®u˙ Æseafl)fl + Æcome down (DIR + Æcomefl)fl). float (vi.) t˙-q-tå. sink (vi.) ¿å-q-tå. clear (of water) (ts˙) q˙fiq (Æwaterfl + Æclearfl). muddy må-q˙fiq (NEG + Æclearfl). d i r t i n w a t e r ts˙-≈® (Æwaterfl + Æshitfl). waterfall ts˙ ¿o-≈‘u (Æwaterfl + Æfall downfl). sea, lake ®u˙. flow like a wave (vi.) ≈¬åte. r i s e ( o f t h e t i d e ) ts˙ t˙-wa (Æwaterfl + Æbecome big (DIR + Æbigfl)fl). e b b ( o f t h e t i d e ) ts˙ ¿å-≈t®å (Æwaterfl + Æbecome small (DIR + Æsmallfl)fl). river , s t r e a m ts˙ / xs˙ts (large river) (ts˙ = Æwaterfl; xs˙-ts = Ægodfl + Æwaterfl). river valley qhuå:. river-bed ts˙-≈‘ u ‘ ˙ (ts˙ = Æwaterfl). embankment ts˙ qhåts. d r e d g e a r i v e r ts˙ ˚e (Æwater/ riverfl + Ærelease/dofl). pond tsh˙thå≥ (< Ch. ch|ît|ang).
333
puddle tån(tån) (< Ch. t—an). spring Ù≤is. d i t c h , g u l l y , g o r g e ts˙-≈‘u (Æwaterfl + Æmountain valleyfl ( [˚pie]). See the discussion of clusters later in this section, and also footnote 12. In general, prefixes are preserved in the second syllable of two-syllable combinations (unless the entire complex initial is reduced), except in the case of the numerals (see §3.1.5) (and a few very old compounds such as [mag‘u] ‘flimsy’, from /ma/ NEG + /Âgue/ ‘strong’). This would be evidence that the numeral combinations were formed at a time when the prefixes were still productive, or at least were still not seen as integral to the root, and that other combinations (where the prefixes were preserved) developed after the prefixes had become fixed as part of an initial consonant cluster.
Notes
423
19. Even if the form does not become monosyllabic, there will still be a reduction in the number of syllables, e.g. in (2.5b), below, where three syllables reduce to two. 20. The lateral which occurs from the weakening of /dÂ-/ is somewhat retroflexed. 21. This contrasts with languages such as Dulong/Rawang and Jinghpaw, which generally have an iambic stress pattern, and so reduction is of the first syllable rather than the second syllable (basically a southern pattern within TibetoBurman, possibly due to Mon-Khmer influence). See Dai 1995, Dai & Xu 1995 on Jingpo initial syllable reduction. 22. There are several forms for ‘one’ and ‘ten’; see §3.1.5. 23. The words for ‘eight’ and ‘hundred’ can both be pronounced [khe] or [khefi], though in context there doesn’t seem to be a problem of ambiguity. It seems the r-coloring is in the process of being lost, at least in the speech of the younger people. This homophony might seem odd, but it also occurs in the Cantonese dialect of Chinese, when final /-k/ and final /-t/ both become glottal stop in rapid speech (i.e. baat££ ‘eight’ and baak££ ‘hundred’ both > baa÷££). 24. If more than two need to be expressed, an adverbial marker would need to be added, e.g. [t®hets˙ xs˙ na-≤i khuaithå] (car new good-ADV fast] ‘good fast new car’. 25. In Chinese it is also the case that many nouns which are themselves measures do not take classifiers or measures, particularly those of units of time, such as ni|an ‘year’ and ti—an ‘day’. 26. A stative verb (adjective) can also be followed by the definite marker, though the resulting form functions as a noun, not a verb. 27. One example of a non-natural referent that seems to have this structure is /soqhu qhu/ ‘to fire a gun’, but I am not clear on the origin of the term /soqhu/ ‘gun’. James A. Matisoff (p.c.) has suggested that the first syllable of /soqhu/ might be related to /somu/ ‘iron’. 28. The semantics of this noun are exactly that of Chinese yu\eli\ang ‘moon’ (< ‘moon’ + ‘bright’), but as it is an item of basic vocabulary and follows a general pattern of Qiang, and the pattern is also found in a number of other TibetoBurman languages (Xu 1997), it does not seem to be a calque on the Chinese. 29. In the case of ‘flower’, the form is sometimes pronounced [låpå], sometimes [låmpå]; in general, [låmpå] is used when referring to the actual flowers, and [låpå] is used when it is an adjective, ‘flowery’, modifying a noun. The form [låm] is not used alone for ‘flower’ , so the gloss here is speculative. 30. This is an animal that is a cross between a common cow and a yak. 31. In some northern Qiang sub-varieties, such as the Qugu variety, the form /qupu/ is used more generally. 32. In one elicited example, given in (3.201b), the form [the:-x®-tå] ‘on that side’, with a long vowel, was said to mean a position farther away than that meant by [the-x®-tå], with a short vowel, but this does not seem to be a regular pattern. 33. Where the form of the verb has been altered by the addition of person or aspect marking, the original form of the verb is given at the margin.
424
Notes
34. Here the verb is glossed as having first person singular marking (/-å/), though because the form of the prospective aspect marking (/-å:/) incorporates that of the first person singular marking, there is no obvious difference between first person singular prospective aspect and third person singular (zero marking) prospective aspect forms of verbs. See §4.3.2 on person marking. 35. Given this situation, and the fact that an (in)definite marker plus classifier can form a complete noun phrase (see T3:63 for an example), plus the fact that crosslinguistically definite markers often derive from demonstrative pronouns, as in English, it seems likely that the definite markers (and locative markers) of Qiang also derive historically from demonstrative pronouns. The form /te/ is not very problematic in this regard, as it could easily be related to the contemporary distal demonstrative pronoun /the/ (both possibly < Proto-Tibeto-Burman *day; see Benedict 1972:19), but the origin of /le/ is more puzzling, as the only evidence for a /le/ or /lå/ demonstrative pronoun other than that used for the definite marker is the form [¿ålå], which often appears as an interjection in the Texts and seems to mean ‘there’. (See also footnote 53). 36. Here the copula could have been used instead of the existential verb, but the sense would be of a state that was permanent or at least lasted a rather long time. 37. In fact one expression meaning ‘story’ is /®kup-mele/, literally ‘orangutan words’. (As far as I know, there are no orangutans in Sichuan, China, but the Chinese word for the type of animal involved in these stories, which matches the imagined form of the animal, translates as ‘orangutan’.) 38. Both ‘eight’ and ‘hundred’ can be pronounced either [khe] or [khefi]. Only the context can distinguish the two. See footnote 23. 39. As mentioned in §2.2.3, this expression appears as [wu], [le-wu], [©le-wu], [lefiwu], [-efiwu], or [-fiwu]. In the case of the latter form, the final vowel of the previous word becomes r-colored. 40. Although this form seems very similar to the form [o-u] given just above, this form is made up of the word 'one' plus the initial consonant of the word for 'pile' and so there is no vowel harmony, while [o-u] involves two vowels, and so there is vowel harmony. 41. It might be argued that there is only one topic in this example, as the expression /s˙kue di/ ‘stomach hurts’ is predicated about the main topic, but within this predication the stomach is also a topic about which a predication is made, and an adverb such as [k˙n ± g˙n] ‘very’ can appear between the second noun phrase and the verb, so it can also be said there are two topics. The second topic is a secondary topic, though, and can only take topic marking in a quoted clause, e.g. [the:-≥u˙≤i s˙kue-≥u˙≤i di j˙] (3sg- TOP stomach-TOP pain say) ‘(He) says his stomach hurts’. See LaPolla 1995a, LaPolla & Poa 2003, for discussion of this type of construction in Chinese. 42. [≈umt®i] and [khumtsi] are common Qiang names. They are derived from the name of the animal associated with the year of birth of the individual, plus a nominalizer /-m/, plus a suffix indicating whether the person is male (/t®i/ = ‘male child’) or female (/tsi/ = ‘female child’). In this case /≈u/ means ‘tiger’,
Notes
43. 44. 45. 46. 47.
48. 49. 50. 51.
425
and /khu/ means ‘dog’ (< /khu˙/), so [≈umt®i] is a male child born in the year of the tiger, and [khumtsi] is a female child born in the year of the dog ([≈u-lu-m] ‘the one who came in the year of the tiger’, etc. is also possible). There are several other common ways of forming Qiang names: using the name (= number) of the month the person was born in, e.g. the name [khefit®i] is derived from [khefi-˚] ‘August’ (< /khefi/ ‘eight’ + /˚˙/ ‘moon, month’) plus the male child suffix, so [khefit®i] is a male child born in August (the eighth month); using the age of one of the parents at the time of the child’s birth, e.g. [Ùuåsuet®i] ‘son of a fifty-year-old’; using the name of the place where the mother gave birth, e.g. [joÙotsi] ‘girl born on the threshing ground’; using the weight of the child at birth, e.g. [wut˚in] (< Chinese w«uj—în) ‘five catty’; using one of the five elements, e.g. [t˚insen] (< Chinese j—însh—eng) ‘golden birth’; using a reference to the god who was prayed to in requesting the child be born, e.g. [xs˙-lu-t®i] ‘god-comingson’. See Huang, Yu, & Huang 1992. There is also use of non-actor person marking to show affectedness; see §4.3.2. Here the vowel change is due to harmonizing with /ji/, and then the prefix harmonizes with the changed vowel. Notice in (3.121) and (3.122) that 2nd person plus 1st person results in 1pl person marking, while 2nd person and 3rd person result in 3pl person marking. Qiang only has native words for two seasons, one (/tsaq/) representing both Spring and Summer, the other (/su˙q/) representing both Autumn and Winter. The third person pronoun is translated as ‘s/he’ because there is no gender distinction, and except for those examples that are taken from the stories, there was no disambiguating context (Chinese, the working language, also has no gender distinction). See LaPolla 1995d on the common development of ablative markers into instrumental and agentive markers in Tibeto-Burman languages. Notice here how the verb is first reduced from /t˚h˙/ to [-t˚] and then an epenthetic vowel is inserted before the /-m/ suffix. The Chinese measures zh\ang in (3.177) and l«î in (3.178) are equivalent to 3 1/3 meters, or 10.8 feet, and half a kilometer, or 1/3 of a mile, respectively. In a kinship relation such as this, we would normally have causative marking on the verb (see §3.2.14), but in the exclusion construction, the verb is intransitive, and there is only one direct argument (here, ‘my sister’). Another example would be (i):
(i) the: o-u-stu-t˚i me-Âi. 3sg one-CL-alone-EXC NEG-have/exist ‘There is only him alone.’ 52. There does not seem to be any regularity as to when [t˚i] is used as opposed to [ji ± j˙], other than emphasis. That is, when the particle is emphasized, it is more likely to be pronounced [t˚i], but if it is not emphasized, it is often pronounced [ji] or [j˙].
426
Notes
53. There is an interesting correlation between the two definite markers, /le/ and /te/, the demonstrative pronoun /the/ ‘this’ (also /thå/ ‘there’), and these locative particles /lå/ and /tå/ (see also footnote 35). 54. This is a loan from Chinese, so the individual morphemes have not been given glosses. This is also the case with ‘1958’ below. 55. The two phrases [jåut˚hiu] ‘demand’ and [t˚iu-®˙] ‘just-is’ are Chinese. This is possibly a case of code-mixing in the telling of the story rather than loans. 56. Middle voice marking is found in a number of Tibeto-Burman languages (see LaPolla 1995b, 1996, 2003a), but passive marking is rare. 57. This pattern is similar to that found in Dulong and Rawang (see LaPolla 2000, 2003b), but unlike in Dulong and Rawang, the noun phrase representing the causer cannot take topic marking in this example. In ex. (4.8), where the inanimate causer is marked with the agentive marker, it would be possible to have the noun phrase representing the causee in sentence-initial position and marked by the topic marker. 58. While this structure is acceptable, most often if the causer is 3rd person and the causee is 1st or 2nd person, the direct causative is not used. Instead a quotative structure is used, as in (i):
59.
60.
61. 62.
63.
64.
65.
(i) the: qå-tå stuåhå t˙-b˙l-i k˙-ji. 3sg 1sg-LOC food DIR-make-NAR thus-say ‘He told me to make the food.’ In this example it would also be possible to use a directional prefix on the copula (i.e., [hå-≥‘u‘˙-Â˙]), if the person had already assumed the office. As it stands, with no directional prefix and prospective aspect marking on the verb, the sentence assumes the person has been chosen, but has not yet assumed office. That is, the prospective aspect is relative only to the becoming, not to the choosing. This is a sufficient, but not a necessary condition for adjective status: except for /topu/ ‘like’, any verb that can take /-wa/ will be an intransitive state predicate verb, but a verb that cannot take /-wa/ may also be an intransitive state predicate verb (see §4.4.1). It could be that the sense of plurality is involved in both types, as the reciprocal must involve more than one person. Because of the semantic nature of adjectives as stative verbs, prospective aspect can only be used with an adjective if the continuative aspect marking is used together with it, marking the sense that a state will continue to exist or develop. In the case of ‘potatoes’ in this example and ‘fish’ in (4.33a-b) below, number marking is not used (though it would be possible to add [å-hå] ‘some, a few’) when the exact number of items is not relevant. There is another verb /k˙/ that means ‘walk, leave’, but does not undergo the changes that the form /k˙/ ‘go’ undergoes when prefixed, e.g. /˙-k˙/ ‘leave!’, /t˚å-k˙/ ‘don’t leave!’. The change of state marker /-ji/ is not used with the negative of this construction.
Notes
427
66. This distinction of actor vs. non-actor parallels the use of agentive and nonagentive (ergative and anti-ergative) marking on noun phrases (see LaPolla 1992a, 1995c), and makes the Qiang system quite different from many of the other Tibeto-Burman person marking systems, which mark person primarily, and not semantic role (they are hierarchical systems). For example, in Tangut or Dulong/Rawang, marking of a first person participant appears in a clause regardless of the semantic role of that participant (see LaPolla 1992b, 1994, 2003a for discussion of person marking). 67. In the Mawo dialect (Sun 1981:192), the form /sa/ is used for all persons and numbers in the non-actor paradigm: 1sg /sa/, 2sg /sa≤i/, 3sg /saji/, 1pl /safi/, 2pl /sat˚i≤i/, 3pl /sat˚iji/. From the Mawo evidence it seems the actor marking, number marking, and non-actor marking were originally three different systems. 68. These are the maximum forms possible. As the non-actor marking is always optional, and the actor marking is sometimes optional, these are not necessarily the forms that appear in the examples throughout this grammar. 69. The non-actor person marking is optional in most cases. 70. The verb /le/ never appears alone without the directional prefix /d˙/ for the meaning ‘give’, therefore no unprefixed forms are given here. There are corresponding verbs [s˙le] ‘pack in’, [z˙l(e)] ‘take, bring over here’, and [ile] ‘bring in, put in’, which leads one to assume there was originally a verb /le/ that meant some kind of change of possession or movement, with the four directional prefixes (movement away from the center vs. movement downstream (here used for down-in), movement toward the center vs. movement in) determining the meaning as ‘give’, ‘pack in’, ‘take’, or ‘bring’. This verb may in fact be the existential verb /le/, which can have a transitive use in reduplicated form (see §4.2.4), but which would possibly lose the reduplicated token when a prefix is added. The word /-®˙/ 'put' may also be the existential verb /®˙/ (which can also have the sense of transitive 'put' in reduplicated form) when it takes a prefix. 71. The two systems do not correspond one-to-one, as the Taoping dialect uses the cognate of the Ronghong ‘movement in’ prefix for marking movement up-river, and it seems the cognates of the prefixes for marking movement toward or away from the center are used for movement towards the mountain and towards the river respectively. See Nishi 1990 and Huang Bufan 1991, 1994 for broader comparative treatments. 72. The assignment of a verb to a certain class is not arbitrary; it is done on the basis of tests for each type. See Van Valin & LaPolla 1997, Chapter 3 for discussion. 73. One of the few exceptions to this found so far is the form [tiwi] ‘tall, high’. This form is made up of the root /-wi/ and the directional prefix [ti-], but the root cannot be used without the prefix. The combined form has the simple meaning rather than the change or state meaning. 74. There is a contrast between a nominalized adjective used with the verb /pe/ ‘become’, and the form of the adjective (intransitive stative verb) with the directional prefix, which gives it the sense of ‘become ADJECTIVE’: /t˙-≤iq/
428
75.
76. 77. 78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83. 84.
Notes [DIR-black] ‘become black’ vs. /≤iq-ke: pe/ [black-INDEF:CL become] ‘become a black thing’. Not all verbs can do this, even if the semantics might allow it; in some cases if the verb can take all of the directional prefixes, then the concrete directional sense will override the more abstract sense, e.g. [¿o©lu] ‘roll down’ has no connotation of agentiveness, because it can take all of the directional prefixes, and so the use of /¿˙-/ here will be based on the actual direction of rolling. For discussion of Aktionsart differences expressed using the directional prefixes, see Section 4.3.3. See also the discussion in §4.3.3 on the use of reduplication with different directional prefixes on each token for marking a type of repeated action. While logically it would seem the two could be used together, they aren’t. For example, if one wanted to express the meaning ‘don’t do it again/anymore’, the form would not be */t˚˙-t˚˙-b˙l/, but would be [t˚å-b˙l-jy] (NEG.IMP-do-ASP); for ‘don’t let him come again/anymore’ it would not be */˚å:-t˚˙-t˚˙-lå/, but would be [t˚o-lu-Â-jy] (NEG.IMP-come-CAUS-ASP). Huang Bufan (2000) has suggested this suffix derives from /k˙/ ‘thus’ + /p˙/ ‘do’, but except for ‘come’ and ‘go’, generally two verbs are not used together in that way (/p˙/ can immediately follow the main verb), and it is possible to have another word for ‘do’ in between /k˙/ and /p˙/, as in (i), so it would seem /p˙/ does not mean ‘do’. (i) the: khu˙ ˚e-k-k˙-b˙l-p˙. 3sg dog release-go-thus-do-habitual ‘He goes hunting.’ It is important to emphasize that these are the formal means of marking the associated speech-act types, not necessarily the only way of performing these speech acts. Almost any formal type can be used to perform any type of speechact. In some cases, such as the verbs for ‘eat’ and ‘drink’, the prefix usually used for the imperative is different from the prefix usually used for the other uses of the directional prefixes: [s˙-z] ‘(S/he) ate.’ vs. [˙-z] ‘Eat!’ (both < prefix + dz˙); [s˙-t˚ ]‘(S/he) drank.’ vs. [˙-t˚] ‘Drink!’. The resulting form can appear to be the same as a question form, which also has [-nå] at the end of the clause (see §4.3.5.3), but it does not have the same origin, i.e. the imperative particle /nå/ does not involve person marking, as the question form /-n-å/ does, and so can be added after 2sg/2pl marking, as in /˙-z˙-n-nå/ (directional prefix + ‘eat’ + 2sg + polite imperative marker) ‘(Please) eat!’. It also can be used with the plural, whereas the question particle /nå/ cannot, and the imperative /nå/ has a falling rather than rising intonation. The form /lå/ is glossed as ‘ INDTV:1sg’, even though there is no non-first person form, because there is this first person plural form. The form of the verb as [tu-pu] (i.e. with the [-u] vowel) is due to the fact that the unprefixed form of ‘to look after someone’ is [t®åuku pu] (< /t®åuku p˙/, where
Notes
85. 86.
87. 88.
429
the vowel of the verb /p˙/ becomes [-u] due to harmony with the final vowel of /t®åuku/. It is unclear whether the vowel of the prefix is due to harmony with the already harmonized vowel of the verb, or due to harmony with the final vowel of /t®åuku/. The form /÷~˙h~˙/ sounds like the English backchannel positive response, but its meaning is the opposite of that in English! The form which results from /≥u˙/ + /≤i/ is the same as the topic marker /≥u˙≤i/, and this may be the origin of the topic marker, but they are not felt to be the same thing in this context. Compare Chinese y\ao ( ) which has the same two uses. This form of nominalized verb plus the copula is sometimes used for simple statements, and even in questions, with the meaning ‘it is the case that’, e.g. (i) dza:khui l˙©z su-s afternoon book learn-NOM ‘Is there class this afternoon?’
≥u˙-≥uå? COP-Q
(ii) dza:khui l˙©z su-s må-≥u˙. afternoon book learn-NOM NEG-COP ‘There is no class this afternoon’ There are also examples of this form with only the nominalized clause without the copula:
89.
90.
91.
92.
(iii) ≤i©i-lai k˙-s? what-time go-NOM ‘What time (do we) go?’ /dÂ˙/ is an adjective, and seems to be the same word as /dÂ˙/ Ælongfl; it is reduced to a somewhat retroflexed /-l/ after a prefix, such as the negative and continuative prefixes. Cf. the systems in Hare and Sunwari discussed by DeLancey (1997), where perfective contexts yield an evidential interpretation, and imperfective contexts yield a mirative interpretation. See also Zeisler 2000 for discussion on the relationship of tense/aspect and interpretation as mirative or not. The combination of inferential and hearsay marking is sometimes pronounced [kui] in stories, as in (4), but there is no difference in meaning between [k˙i] and [kui] in that context. This form contrasts with a direct quote, which would involve a 1st person pronoun and a full verb of speaking (i), and an indirect quote, which would involve third person forms (ii): (i) “q å ˚t˚imi da” j˙. 1sg heart sick+1sg say ‘He said “I’m unhappy”.’
(ii) the: ˚t˚imi di j˙. 3sg heart sick say ‘He said he’s unhappy.’
430
Notes
93. As the prohibitive prefix and the continuative prefix have the same form in some contexts, ‘still want to go out’ would have almost the same structure as ‘don’t go out’, but due to differences in stress and aspect, the pronunciation of the former would be a bit different: /hå-t˚i-Ùå:/. 94. In this clause, [mi lewu wu q˙s] functions as one argument with [q˙s] as the head, and so the existential verb used is one for inanimate objects rather than animate beings. 95. Although the prospective aspect marking in these cases seems more like an irrealis marker, it is not used in all hypothetical, conditional, or unrealized situations; /-tu/ and /-ta/ are more common as conditional markers, and generally do not appear with the prospective aspect marking. 96. Cross-linguistic comparison points to the original Sino-Tibetan relative clause structure being of this type, that is, a clause directly modifying a noun without nominalization or relative marking, although most Sino-Tibetan languages have grammaticalized some sort of nominalizer or complementizer for relativization (see for example, DeLancey 1986, Genetti 1992). 97. It is an open question whether the /-s/ form here is a native innovation or an old loan from Tibetan. The lexical form in Qiang corresponding to Tibetan /sa/ is /z˙/ ‘ground, earth’; the voiced initial makes it an unlikely source for the suffix. On the other hand, the uses of Tibetan /-sa/ and Qiang /-s/ are not completely the same: both can be used for locations, but Tibetan does not use this form for instrumentals. See Mazaudon 1978, DeLancey 1986 on the Tibetan relative formations. 98. Yoshio Nishi (personal communication) suggests the possibility that /-tå/ might be derived from a noun, and here might still be functioning as a noun head in a relative clause structure of the type discussed below. 99. Usually the comitative marker is not used to link verbs unless they are nominalized, but here the first verb is missing the marker of nominalization. 100. In this example, the vowel of the last verb could be pronounced [˙] or [å]. While these two vowels are usually distinguished, especially in such cases where they can represent person marking, there are a number of cases where they are not carefully distinguished. Another example is [the: tåwå ¿å-tå] (3sg hat DIR -wear) ‘S/he put on a hat’, the final vowel of which, although phonemically /-å/, could also be pronounced [-˙]. 101. Notice in (5.59) that the person marking is plural, unlike in English, where the verb agreement in a disjunction of two singular noun phrases like this would be singular. 102. In this example and the following one, the verb takes the non-actor person marking to show the affectedness of the referent involved. If the referent involved were 2nd person, the form would be the same except for the person marking, which would then be /-sån/ or /-såi/ for singular or plural respectively. There is no person marking in a subordinate clause marked by [-wu] or [-≤i]. 103. The particle /tu/ is also often used in narratives without the sense of a conditional, but more as a general linker of clauses (/ta/ is only used for
Notes
104. 105. 106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112. 113.
114. 115. 116. 117. 118.
431
conditionals). See the Texts for examples. (Cf. the development of the use of the clause particle /na/ in Tibetan from a general marker of clause connectedness to a marker of conditionals, and the common use of de-hu\a ‘if’ in Chinese as a topic marker.) There is something of a contrast between /-tu/ and the clause-final marker /-®˙/ discussed in §4.4, in that both are used for a broad range of meanings centered around the conditional, but /-®˙/ is used only with a verb marked with prospective aspect marking, while /-tu/ appears with verbs without prospective aspect marking. Here the verb [-x-] is a reduced form of /khefi/. The form [xte] at the end of this line is a reduced form of /xtexte/. Here [-wå] is a form of the question marker /-≥uå/. This Æfeastfl refers to the feast held two days after the new year, usually for the newly married man to visit his in-laws. /de/ is the word for Æfestivalfl, particularly the new year festival. The Qiang drink their home-made barley wine from large casks with straws, so the verb for 'suck' is used here instead of that for 'drink'. This verb is also used for 'smoke (cigarettes)'. Ramfls horn flower: among the Qiang this symbolizes true love. Whenever the ramfls horn flower is in bloom, young men use the flower to express their feelings of love to their beloved. The expression [Âm˙t®i] is from /Âm˙/ Æpeoplefl and /t®i/ Æmale, sonfl, and here means the local leader, but when translating this term into Chinese, the term for Æemperorfl (hu|angd\î) was used, so I have followed that usage. Before 1949, the Chinese official system title yu|anw\ai (pronunced [juånÙuåi] by the Qiang) was used for local officials. Here [delde] derives from /de-lede/. Although we would not normally expect a directional prefix on a habitual action, it seems the fact that this appears in an adverbial phrase ending with /-≤i/ makes the prefix necessary. In this clause, [ÆÆp˙ns˙ u-su-å-®˙flfl j˙-m-le:-wu] Æthe one who said "I have learned an ability"fl is in apposition to [sat®’u-le:-t®i-le:-wu] Æthe younger sister's sonfl, clarifying which person is mentioned. Here we would have expected a noun, such as /Â˙/ Æaffairs, thingsfl, but it was left out by the speaker. This object is either a monkfls robe (g—as—a) or a Hu|ang M«a Gu—a (a golden topcoat given by the emperor of China to people who had performed meritorious deeds for the emperor). Both [dzin] and [j˙n ± jin] refer to the same object. The expression [å-l-wu å-l] means Æone to the otherfl and gives the sentence a reciprocal sense. The expression [Âå hå-så] is used to mean Ædo something good for someonefl, and can be used as something like Æthank youfl. [≤im t˙s] = Ænotifyfl. The visual evidential marker is used here to emphasize that this is common knowledge. Here Ærelease dogfl is an expression to mean Ægo huntingfl.
432
Notes
119. This syllable adds the meaning Æas much as possible; completelyfl. 120. The expression [ku˙-≤å-ts˙] is literally Æolder brotherfl + COM + Æsisterfl, but here means close relatives. The expression [stump˙t®e] includes the word [stum ± stu˙m] Æsame-surname relativesfl, and refers to a wider set of relatives. A third category of relatives is the [tsuøÙlumi], the females from a family who have married into other families. 121. Here the form [-≥uå] is derived from /-u-å/ (VIS + 1sg), which normally produces [-wå], but the initial is influenced by the initial of the copula. 122. [qap Ùu] Æhead throwfl is an expression for Ænod the headfl. 123. The expression Ædo orangutan talkfl means to use gestures instead of speech. As the vowel of Ædofl harmonizes with the /u/ of /®ku/, I have linked the parts with hyphens. 124. This word [fusan-pu] is a loan of Chinese f|u Æto support under the arm to help a person get up or walkfl plus possibly sh\ang Æupfl or ch—an Æsupport under the armfl.
References Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. 2003 Evidentiality in typological perspective. Studies in Evidentiality, ed. by Alexandra Y. Aikhenvald and R. M. W. Dixon. Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins. Benedict, Paul K. 1972 Sino-Tibetan: A Conspectus. James A. Matisoff, Contributing Editor. (Princeton-Cambridge Series in Chinese Linguistics, #2.) New York: Cambridge University Press. Benedict, Paul K. 1983 Qiang monosyllabization: a third phase in the cycle. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 7.2:113-14. Chang Kun 1967 A comparative study of the southern Ch’iang dialects.1 Monumenta Serica 422-44. Comrie, Bernard & Norval Smith 1977 Lingua descriptive studies: questionnaire. Lingua 42:1-72. Comrie, Bernard & Sandra A. Thompson 1985 Lexical Nominalization. Language Typology and Syntactic Description, ed. by Timothy Shopen, Vol. III, 349-398. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Dai Qingxia 1995 The variation of free morphemes in compound words in Jinghpo. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 18.1:29-42. Dai Qingxia & Xu Xijian 1995 Jingpoyu Cihuixue (Jingpo Lexicology). Beijing: Central University of Nationalities Publishing Co. DeLancey, Scott 1986 Relativization as nominalization in Tibetan and Newari. Paper presented at the 19th Annual Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, Ohio State University. Dickinson, Connie 2000 Mirativity in Tsafiki. Studies in Language 24.379-421. Dixon, R. M. W. 1982 Where Have All the Adjectives Gone? and Other Essays in Semantics and Syntax. Berlin: Mouton.
1.
The Chinese word pronounced [t˚hiang∞∞] is written as throughout most of this book, following the official Chinese Pinyin orthography, but in some sources, such as this one, it is transliterated as .
434
References
Dixon, R. M. W. 1991 A New Approach to English Grammar, on Semantic Principles. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Dixon, R. M. W. 1994 Ergativity. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Dixon, R. M. W. 1995 Complementation clauses and complementation strategies. Grammar and Meaning: Essays in Honour of Sir John Lyons, ed. by F.R. Palmer, 175-200. Cambridge: University Press. Dixon, R. M. W. 2003 Evidentiality in Jarawara. Studies in Evidentiality, ed. by Alexandra Y. Aikhenvald and R. M. W. Dixon. Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins. Evans, Jonathan P. 2001a Introduction to Qiang Lexicon and Phonology: Synchrony and Diachrony. Tokyo: ILCAA, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies. Evans, Jonathan P. 2001b Contact-Induced Tonogenesis in Southern Qiang. Language and Linguistics 2.2:63 - 110. Evans, Jonathan P. 2000 Southern Qiang verbal morphology and directional prefixes: Their syntactic, semantic, and lexical functions. Paper presented at the Tibeto-Burman Linguistics Workshop, March 30-31, 2000. Institute of Linguistics, Academia Sinica, Taipei. Genetti, Carol E. 1986 The Development of subordinators from postpositions in Bodic languages. Proceedings of the 12th Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, 387-400. Genetti, Carol E. 1991 From postposition to subordinator in Newari. Approaches to Grammaticalization, ed. by E. C. Traugott & B. Heine, Vol. I, 22755. Amsterdam & Philadelphia: Benjamins. Genetti, Carol E. 1992 Semantic and grammatical categories of relative clause morphology in the languages of Nepal. Studies in Language 16.2:405-427. Graham, David Crockett 1958 The Customs and Religion of the Ch'iang (Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collection Vol. 135, No. 1). Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution. Huang Bufan 1987 Qiangyu yuyin yanbian zhong paichi biyin de qushi (The tendency to lose nasals in the development of Qiang phonology). Minzu Yuwen 1987.5:19-26. Huang Bufan 1991 Qiangyuzhi (The Qiang branch). HanZangyu Gailun (A General Introduction to the Sino-Tibetan Languages), ed. by Ma Xueliang, Vol. I, 208-369. Beijing: Beijing University Press.
References Huang Bufan 1994
Huang Bufan 2000
435
Zang-Mianyu dongci de quxiang fanchou (The category of directionality in Tibeto-Burman verbs). Zang-Mianyu Xin Lun (Recent Contributions to Tibeto-Burman Studies), ed. by Ma Xueliang, Hu Tan, Dai Qingxia, Huang Bufan, and Fu Ailan, 133151. Beijing: Central Institute of Nationalities Press.
Qiangyu de ti fancho (The category of aspect in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 2000.2:8-16. Huang Bufan, Yu Xiaoping, & Huang Chenglong 1992 Qiangzu (The Qiang). Zhongguo Ren de Xingming (The Names of the Chinese People), 492-508. Beijing: Chinese Academy of Social Sciences Press. Huang Chenglong 1992 Qiangyu fufuyin de yanbian (The evolution of the consonant clusters in the Qiang language). Qiangzu Yanjiu 1992.2:152-157. Huang Chenglong 1993 Zhongguo Shaoshu Minzu Yuyan Dang'an: Qiangyu Ronghonghua (Phonetic Files on China's Minority Languages: The Ronghong Variety of the Qiang Language). Beijing: Nationalities Institute, Chinese Academy of Social Sciences. Huang Chenglong 1994 Qiangyu xingrongci yanjiu (Study on the adjectives of the Qiang language). Yuyan Yanjiu 1994.2:181-189. Huang Chenglong 1997 Qiangyu dongci de qianzhui (Verbal prefixes in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1997.2:68-77. Huang Chenglong 1998 Qiangyu yinjie ruohua xianxiang (Syllable weakening in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1998.3:59-67. Huang Chenglong 2000a Qiangyu de cunzai dongci (Existential verbs in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 2000.4:13-22. Huang Chenglong 2000b The Qiang language. UNESCO World Languages Report, China. Institute of Nationalities Studies, CASS. (in Chinese and English). Huang Chenglong 2003 Qiangyu mingci duanyu de cixu (Word orders of nominal phrases in Qiang). Minzu Yuwen 2003.2:26-34. Institute of Nationalities, Chinese Academy of Sciences 1962 Qiangyu gaikuang (A brief description of the Qiang language). Zhongguo Yuwen 1962 (121):561-71. LaPolla, Randy J. 1992a Anti-ergative marking in Tibeto-Burman. Linguistics of the TibetoBurman Area 15.1:1-9.
436
References
LaPolla, Randy J. 1992b On the dating and nature of verb agreement in Tibeto Burman. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 55.2:298- 315. LaPolla, Randy J. 1993 Arguments against ‘subject’ and ‘direct object’ as viable concepts in Chinese. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 63.4:759813. LaPolla, Randy J. 1994 Parallel grammaticalizations in Tibeto-Burman: Evidence of Sapir’s ‘drift’. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 17.1:61-80. LaPolla, Randy J. 1995a Pragmatic relations and word order in Chinese. Word Order in Discourse, ed. by Pamela Downing & Michael Noonan, 299-331. Amsterdam & Philadelphia: Benjamins Pub. Co. LaPolla, Randy J. 1995b Reflexive and middle marking in Dulong/Rawang. ICSTLL 28, Charlottesville, VA, October 6-9. To appear in Himalayan Linguistics, ed. by George van Driem. Berlin: Mouton de Gryuter. (Also published in Chinese in Zhongguo Minzu Yuyan Luncong (1) (Collected Essays on Chinese Minority Languages, 1), ed. by Dai Qingxia et al., 13-34. Central University of Nationalities Press, 1996.) LaPolla, Randy J. 1995c Ergative marking in Tibeto-Burman. New Horizons in TibetoBurman Morpho-syntax (Senri Ethnological Studies 41), ed. by Yoshio Nishi, James A. Matisoff, & Yasuhiko Nagano, 189-228. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology. LaPolla, Randy J. 1995d On the utility of the concepts of markedness and prototypes in understanding the development of morphological systems. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 66.4:1149-1185. LaPolla, Randy J. 1996 Middle voice marking in Tibeto-Burman languages. Pan-Asian Linguistics: Proceedings of the Fourth International Symposium on Languages and Linguistics, Vol. V, 1940-1954. Mahidol University, Thailand. LaPolla, Randy J. 2000a Valency-changing derivations in Dulong-Rawang. Changing Valency: Case Studies in Transitivity, ed. by R. M. W. Dixon & Alexandra Y. Aikhenvald, 282-311. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. LaPolla, Randy J. 2000b Subgrouping in Tibeto-Burman: Can an individual-identifying standard be developed? How do we factor in the history of migrations and language contact? Paper presented at the 33rd International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, Bangkok and Trang, October 2-6, 2000.
References
437
LaPolla, Randy J. 2003a Overview of Sino-Tibetan morphosyntax. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 22-42. London & New York: Routledge. LaPolla, Randy J. 2003b Dulong. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 674-682. London & New York: Routledge. LaPolla, Randy J. 2003c Qiang. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 573-587. London & New York: Routledge. LaPolla, Randy J. 2003d Evidentiality in Qiang. Studies in Evidentiality, ed. by Alexandra Y. Aikhenvald & R. M. W. Dixon. Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins. LaPolla, Randy J. 2003e English-Qiang glossary by semantic field. Basic Materials on Minority Languages in East and Southeast Asia (Endangered Languages of the Pacific Rim series A03-004), ed. by Ikeda Takumi, 153-181. Suita: Faculty of Informatics, Osaka Gakuin University. LaPolla, Randy J. & Chenglong Huang 2002a Adjectives in Qiang. Paper presented at the International Workshop on Adjective Classes, Research Centre for Linguistic Typology, La Trobe University, August 12-17, 2002. To appear in Adjective classes: a cross-linguistic typology (Explorations in Linguistic Typology 1), ed. by R. M. W. Dixon and Alexandra Y. Aikhenvald. Oxford: Oxford University Press. LaPolla, Randy J. & Chenglong Huang 2002b The copula and existential verbs in Qiang. Paper presented at the Workshop on Copula Clauses and Verbless Clauses, Research Centre for Linguistic Typology, Institute for Advanced Study, LaTrobe University, September 4, 2002. LaPolla, Randy J. & Dory Poa 2003 Jiaodian jiegou de leixing ji qi dui Hanyu cixu de yingxiang (The typology of focus structures and their effect on word order in Chinese). A Study on the Structure and Semantics of Focus, ed. by Xu Liejiong and Haihua Pan, 57-78. Beijing: Beijing Foreign Studies University Press. LaPolla, Randy J. & Dory Poa in press Texts in the Qugu variety of Northern Qiang. Descriptive and Theoretical Studies in Minority Languages of East and Southeast Asia, ed. by Kitano Hiroaki, 77-94. Endangered Languages of the Pacific Rim Project series. Suita: Faculty of Informatics, Osaka Gakuin University. Li Ming, Lin Zhongliang & Wang Kang 1994 Qiangzu Wenxue Shi (The History of Qiang Literature). Chengdu: Sichuan Minzu Chubanshe.
438
References
Lin Xiangrong 1990
Liu Guangkun 1981 Liu Guangkun 1984 Liu Guangkun 1986 Liu Guangkun 1987 Liu Guangkun 1997 Liu Guangkun 1998a Liu Guangkun 1998b Liu Guangkun 1999
Sichuan Sheng Aba Zangzu Zizhizhou shuangyu diaocha baogao (Report on the investigation of bilingualism in Aba Tibetan Autonomous Prefecture of Sichuan Province). Zhongguo Shaoshu Minzu Shuangyu Jiaoxue Yanjiu Lunji (Collected Studies on Bilingualism among China's Ethnic Minorities), ed. by the Association for the Study of Bilingualism among China's Ethnic Minorities. Beijing: Minzu Chubanshe. Qiangyu zhong de Zangyu jieci (Tibetan Loan-words in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1981.3:19-28. Qiangyu fuyin yunwei yanjiu (A study on the consonant finals of the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1984.4:39-47, 63. Qiangyu zhong de chang fuyin (The long consonants in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1986.4:35-36. Lun Qiangyu daici de 'ge' (On the 'cases' of Qiang pronouns). Minzu Yuwen 1987.4:50-58. Qiangyu fufuyin yanjiu (A study on the consonant clusters of the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1997.4:25-32. Lun Qiangyu shengdiao de chansheng he fazhan (On the origin and development of tones in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1988.2:1-8. Mawo Qiangyu Yanjiu (Studies on the Mawo dialect of the Qiang language). Chengdu: Sichuan Minzu Chubanshe.
Lun Qiangyu dongci de rencheng fanchou (On the person category of Qiang verbs). Minzu Yuwen 1999.1:30-36. Luo Shize & Shi Fengchun, eds. 1983 Mujiezhu yu Douanzhu ((The story of) Mutsit®u and Tugant®u). Chengdu: Sichuan Minzu Chubanshe. Ma Changshou 1984 Di yu Qiang (The Di and the Qiang). Shanghai: Shanghai Renmin Chubanshe. Matisoff, James A. 1969 Verb concatenation in Lahu: The syntax and semantics of 'simple' juxtaposition. Acta Linguistica Hafniensia 12.1. Matisoff, James A. 1972 Lahu nominalization, relativization, and genitivization. Syntax and Semantics, Vol. I, ed. by J. Kimball, 235-57. New York: Academic Press.
References
439
Matisoff, James A. 1974 Verb concatenation in Kachin. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 1:186-206. Matisoff, James A. 1975 Rhinoglottophilia: The mysterious connection between nasality and glottality. Nasalfest: Papers from a Symposium on Nasals and Nasalization, ed. by Charles Ferguson, Larry M. Hyman, and John Ohala, 265-87. Stanford, California: Stanford University Language Universals Project. Matisoff, James A. 1973 The Grammar of Lahu. (University of California Publications in Linguistics, 75.) Berkeley & Los Angeles: University of California Press. Matisoff, James A. 1997 Sino-Tibetan numerals and the play of prefixes. (Pacific Linguistics B-114.) Canberra: Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University. Mazaudon, Martine 1978 La formation des propositions relative en tibétain. Bulletin de la Societe Linguistique de Paris 73:401-14. Meng Yan, Gui Xiuwen & Lin Zhongliang 1994 Qiangzu Minjian Gushi Xuan (A Selection of Folk Tales of the Qiang). Shanghai: Shanghai Wenyi Chubanshe. Nishi, Yoshio 1990 Zhongguo jingnei Zang-mianyu zhishi fangxiang de dongci fujia chengfen (Verbal affixes for marking direction in Tibeto- Burman languages in China). Minzu Yuwen Yanjiu Qingbao Ziliaoji 1990:104-116, 103. Noonan, Michael 1985 Complementation. Language Typology and Syntactic Description, ed. by Timothy Shopen, 42-140. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Noonan, Michael 1997 Versatile nominalizations. Essays on Language Function and Language Type in Honor of T. Givón, ed. by Joan Bybee, John Haiman & Sandra A. Thompson, 373-394. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins. Overview of Aba Tibetan Autonomous Prefecture Editorial Board 1985 Aba Zangzu Zizhi Zhou Gaikuang (Overview of Aba Tibetan Autonomous Prefecture). Chengdu, Sichuan: Sichuan Nationalities Press. Ran Guangrong, Li Shaoming, & Zhou Xiyin 1984 Qiangzu Shi (The History of the Qiang People). Chengdu: Sichuan Minzu Chubanshe. Ren Naiqiang 1984 Qiangzu Yuanliu Tansuo (Investigation into the Origins of the Qiang People). Chongqing: Chongqing Chubanshe.
440
References
Sun Hongkai 1981a Sun Hongkai 1981b Sun Hongkai 1982
Sun, Hongkai 1989 Sun Hongkai 1983
Sun Hongkai 1985
Sun Hongkai 1988
Qiangyu Jianzhi (A Brief Description of the Qiang language). Beijing: Nationalities Press. Qiangyu dongci de quxiang fanchou (The category of directionality in the Qiang verb). Minzu Yuwen 1981.1:34-42. Qiangyu zhishu wenti chutan (A first look at the genetic position of the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen Yanjiu Wenji, ed. by Minzu Yuwen Editorial Board, 189-224. Xining: Qinghai Minzu Chubanshe. A preliminary investigation into the relationship between Qiong Long and the languages of the Qiang branch of Tibeto-Burman. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 12.1: 92-109. Chuanxi 'minzu zoulang' diqu de yuyan (The languages of the 'ethnic corridor' region of western Sichuan). Research on the Peoples of the Southwest, No. 1:429-454. Liujiang liuyu de minzu yuyan ji qi xishu fenlei (The ethnic languages of the six rivers area and their genetic affiliations). Minzu Xuebao 3:99-274.
Lun Qiangzu shuangyuzhi—jian tan Hanyu dui Qiangyu de yingxiang (A discussion of bilingualism among the Qiang people— with comments on the influence of the Chinese language on the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1998.4:55-65. Van Valin, Robert D., Jr. & Randy J. LaPolla 1997 Syntax: Structure, Meaning and Function. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Vendler, Zeno 1967 Philosophy in Linguistics. Ithaca: Cornell University Press. Wang Ming-ke 1992 The Ch'iang of Ancient China through the Han dynasty: Ecological frontiers and ethnic boundaries. PhD dissertation, Harvard University. Wang Ming-ke 1997a Huaxia Bianyuan—Lishi Jiyi yu Zuqun Rentong (On Chinese Boundary: Historical Memory and Ethnic Identity). Taipei: Yuncheng Press. Wang Ming-ke 1997b Hanzu bianyuan de Qiangzu jiyi yu Qiangzu benzhi (The social memory and ethnicity of the Qiang on the Han's boundary) Cong Zhoubian Kan Hanren de Shehui yu Wenhua—Wang Songxing Xiansheng Jinian Lunwenji (A View of Chinese Society and Culture from the Periphery: Essays in Memory of Sung-hsing Wang), ed. by
References
441
Huang Yinggui & Ye Chunrong, 129-165. Taipei: Institute of Ethnology, Academia Sinica. Wang Ming-ke 1998 Wang Ming-ke 1999a
Wang Ming-ke 1999b
Wang Ming-ke 1999c
Wang Ming-ke 2000 Wang Ming-ke 2001a Wang Ming-ke 2001b Wen Yu 1940 Wen Yu 1941 Wen Yu 1943a Wen Yu 1943b Wen Yu 1943c Wen Yu 1945
Women's dress of the Qiang: A case of fashioning ethnic identity. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, 69.4: 841-85 (in Chinese). From the Qiang barbarians to Qiang nationality: The making of a new Chinese boundary. Imaging China: Regional Division and Nationa Unity. Taipei: The Institute of Ethnology, Academia Sinica. Primordial History: Brothers Stories of the Qiang. Time, Memory and History. Taipei: The Institute of Ethnology, Academia Sinica (in Chinese). Nüren, bujie yu cunzhai rentong: Minjiang shangyou de duyaomao gushi (Women, pollution and village identity: Stories of poison cats in the upper Min River Valley). Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 70.3: 699-738. The Qiang and their history under China's policy of nationalities. Zhongguo Dalu Yanjiu 43.7: 1-19. Historical facts, narratives, and mentalities. Lishi Yanjiu 5 (2001). Barbarians, the Han and the Rma. Taipei: Sanmin Press. Lun Heishui Qiangyu zhong zhi final plosives (On the final plosives in the Hei-shui dialect of the Ch’iang language). Studia Serica 1:113-17. Chuanxi Qiangyu zhi chubu fenxi (A tentative classification of the Ch’iang languages in North-Western Szechuan). Studia Serica 2:3871. Wenchuan Wasizu Qiangyu yinxi (Phonology of the Ch’iang language, Group I, Wa-gsod dialect). Bulletin of Chinese Studies 3:293-308. Verbal directive prefixes in the Jyarong language and their Ch’iang equivalents. Studia Serica 3.1:11-20. Wenchuan Luopuzhai Qiangyu yinxi (Phonology of the Ch’iang language, Group II, Lopu Chai dialect). Studia Serica 3.2:12-25. Lifan Houerku Qiangyu yinxi (Phonology of the Ch’iang language, Group IV: Hou-erh-k’u dialect). Studia Serica 4, suppl.
442
References
Wen Yu 1947 Wen Yu 1950 Wen Yu 1951
Xu Ping 1993
Xu, Xijian 1997
Yan Gaozeng 1956
On the origin of certain emphatic consonants in Ch’iang dialects. Studia Serica 6:209-15. An abridged Ch’iang vocabulary (Chiu Tzu Ying dialect). Studia Serica 9.2:17-54. Wenzhou Qiangyu cihui jianbian (Luopuzhai fangyan) [Concise Wenzhou Qiang lexicon (Luopu Zhai dialect)]. Zhongguo Wenhua Yanjiu Huikan 10. Qiang Cun Shehui—Yi ge Gulao Minzu de Wenhua he Bianqian (Qiang Village Society—The Culture and Migrations of an Ancient Ethnic Group). Beijing: Zhongguo Shehui Kexue Chubanshe. YiMianyu mingci shuangyinjiehua yanjiu (A study on the disyllabification of nouns in Yi-Burmese languages). Studies on YiBurmese languages, ed. by the Editorial Committee of the International Yi-Burmese Conference, 245-262. Chengdu: Sichuan Nationalities Publishing House.
Xixia shi bu shi Qiangzu? (Were the Xixia Qiang?). Lishi Jiaoxue 1956:53. Zhou Xiyin & Liu Zhirong 1993 Qiang Zu (The Qiang). Beijing: Minzu Chubanshe. Zhuang Xueben 1937 Qiang Rong kaocha ji (Record of an investigation into the Qiang and Rong). Shanghai: Shanghai Liangyou Tushu Yinshua Gongsi.
Index to the grammar 3rd person indirect directive prefix 120 ablative 114 ablative postposition 93, 106, 109, 110, 113 actor of a transitive or ditransitive verb 76 actor person marking 88, 124 added final consonant 45 addition 103 adjectives 44, 47 adverbial 114, 119 adverbial marker 110, 112 adverbial noun phrase 41 adverbial time phrases 110 agentive 114 agentive marker /-wu/ 74, 76, 78, 79, 80, 84, 86, 125, 226 agentive noun 44 agentivity 125 alienable possession 97 allative 114 allative postposition 106 ambitransitive 121 animacy 125, 133 animate referents 83 antecedent of a reflexive/emphatic pronoun 58 apposition structure 40 attributive 90 attributive copula clauses 81 auxiliary verb 137, 138 auxiliary verbs 136 bathrooms 7 Beds 6 benefactive 91, 92, 114 benefactive/recipient 114 bilingualism 7 calques 47 cardinal numeral system 62 case marking 51
causative suffix 19, 20, 97, 119, 121, 124-125, 127, 158, 208 causativized copula 127 causativized ditransitive 126 causativized intransitive 126 causativized transitive 126 ceramics 16 change of state aspect marking 119 Chen Yonglin 18 Chinese (the Southwestern Mandarin dialect) 46 citation form 122 classifiers 65 clausal complement 72 cognition verbs 96 comitative 114 comitative structure 105 comitative/conjunction marker /-≤å/ 89, 90, 95, 123, 237 comparative 114 comparative construction 88 comparative marker 88 compound nouns 43 compound verbs 136 compounds 23, 31, 33, 34, 35, 36 conjunction 114 consonant clusters 24 contrastive topics 73 coordinated nouns 43, 70 copula 138 dative 107 dative/allative marker 74, 83, 85 definite marker 20, 37, 42, 44, 52, 59, 81, 90, 94, 100 demonstrative plus classifier 39 demonstrative pronoun 20, 41, 51-52, 59, 65, 69, 113 denominal verbs 122 deverbal nouns 43 diminutive 49 diphthongs 26, 29
444
Index
direct argument of an intransitive verb 74, 81 directional auxiliary verbs 136 directional prefix 23, 31, 32, 47, 119, 120, 121-122, 128, 132, 154-156, 158-159, 160-161, 164, 165-166, 173, 175, 179, 213-214, 229 “double topic” construction 73 dual pronouns 51 elative 108, 114 emphatic genitives 58 emphatic pronouns 56 epenthetic vowel 36 equational clauses 81, 96, 139 equative comparative construction 89 exception 114 exception construction 110 exception marker 104, 105 exclusion 104 existential clause 97 existential/locative verbs 97, 133, 135, 136 extent of an action 103 fertilizer 6 final consonant 45 final consonant clusters 30 finals 23 fireplace 6 flow of action 79 focus position 82, 85, 94 free variation 37 gender marking 48 genitive 114 genitive construction 91 genitive marker 86, 91, 99, 100, 107, 112 genitive phrase 20, 39, 41, 87, 99, 107 goal 85, 114 goal marker 85 house 6 hunt 9 iconicity 46 identificational copula clauses 81, 90 ideophonic adverbials 21 illative 108, 114 imperative 135 inalienable possession 97, 100 inclusion 103 indefinite marker 59, 90
indefinite pronoun 55 indirect directive 120, 136 indirect quotes 50 inessive 108, 114 initial consonant weakening 31 instrumental 114 instrumental noun phrase 43 instrumental postposition /-wu/ 94, 102 instrumental referent 94 interrogative morpheme 53 interrogative pronouns 53, 55 intonation 33 intransitive verbs 121 irregular verbs 136 iteration 123 Japanese 104 kinship prefix 49 kinship relations 100 kinship terminology 49 learned ability 137 loan words 23, 27, 28, 36, 46, 123 locational nouns 58, 106-107, 113 locative 114 locative adverbial phrase 71 locative postposition 60, 93-94, 97, 106, 108, 110 locative referent 106 logophoric pronoun 50 long vowels 25 manner adverbial 127 marked word order 78 Matisoff 26 Mawo dialect 32, 128, 142, 155, 223 measure words 65 middle voice 124 modification of a noun 40 multiple topics 71 nasalization 26 natural (physical) ability 137 negation 136 nominalizations 44 nominalized adjective 40 nominalized clause 56, 71, 101 nominalized verbs 134 nominalizing suffix 19, 43-44, 223, 225-226, 234- 235 non-actor person marking 88, 125 non-specific reference 51
Index Northern Qiang 2 noun 42 noun plus a classifier 44 noun plus verb combination 44-45 number marking 52 numerals 62 obligation 137 order of the adjectives 39 ordinal numerals 64 passive 79, 124 perlative 110, 114 permissive 124 person marking 119, 123 personal pronouns 50 plural marking 28, 51, 52, 60, 69, 70 plural pronouns 51 possessed referent 97, 98 possession 97, 98 possession of a quality 99 possessive structure 96 possessive verb 99 possessive/genitive pronouns 51 possessor 97-98 postpositions 70 potential 137 predicate noun 60 predicate noun phrase 90 price/value 102 pronominal possessive prefixes 51 pronoun-noun apposition constructions 51 prospective aspect marking 119, 125 Proto-Tibeto-Burman 23 Qiang Dialect Map Project, 17 Qugu 18 r-coloring 28, 35 recipient 85, 87 recipient marker 86, 91 reciprocal 19, 52, 123, 124, 127 reciprocal pronouns 52 reduplication of verbs 19, 123 reflexive pronouns 56, 124 reflexives 124 relational morphology 70 relative clause 20, 39, 40, 41, 99 rhinoglottophilia 26 rounding of vowels 34 sortal classifiers 65 sound symbolism 21
445
source 92 Southern Qiang 2 standard of comparison 88 storage 6 stress 33 structure of the noun phrase 39 syllable canon 30 temporal adverbials 53, 112 temporal referent 110 Tibetan 46 Tibetan loans 46 Tibetans 6 Tibeto-Burman suffix *-pa 45 topic 71, 114 topic marker 71, 73-74, 79, 82, 89, 91, 112 transitive verbs 121 translative constructions 127 triphthong 26 TV 7 undergoer 107 undergoer of a ditransitive verb 84 undergoer of a transitive verb 81 utensils 16 VCD 7 verb 121 verb complex 119, 120 verbal action classifiers 68, 119 verbs of possession/existence 98 voiced-voiceless (aspirated) contrast in simplex-causative or intrasitive-transitive pairs 128 volitionality 80 vowel harmony 35 vowel loss 34, 35 watchtowers 6 white stone 6 whole-part relationships 101 willingness to perform an action 137 word 31 writing system 3
